Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
1982-0706_NEWPORT HARBOR CONSTRUCTION CO._Construction Manual
-4 0 PROJECT MANUAL VOL 1 OF 2 r SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY ,SAN J11AN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA ORANGE COUNTY BOARD OF SUPERVISORS BRUCE NESTANDE - 3RD DISTRICT, CHAIRMAN ROGER STANTON-1ST DISTRICT HARRIET M. WIEDER-2ND DISTRICT BRUCE B. CLARK -4TH DISTRICT THOMAS F. RILEY- 5TH DISTRICT E. M. SMITH -ORANGE COUNTY LIBRARIAN SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY COUNCIL LAWRENCE F. BUCHHEIM -MAYOR ANTHONY L. BLAND -MAYOR PRO TEM KENNETH E. FREISS GARY L.HAUSDORFER PHILLIP R. SCHWARTZE STEPHEN B. JULIAN -SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY MANAGER .STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. ROBERT LAWSON 312 OCEAN AVE. LAGUNA BEACH, CA. 92651 714.4940776 MICHAEL GRAVES ARCHITECT P.A. 34 WITHERSPOON ST., PRINCETON, N.J. 08540 509924.6409 MECHANICAL LANDSCAPE ENGINEER ARCHITECT THOMAS A. POLISE WOODWARD DIKE, INC. 20 WATERSIDE PLAZA SW BROADWAY, SUITE 216 NEW YORK, NY. 10010 LAGUNA BEACH, CA, 92651 212683.5530714,494.7095 MAY 6, 1982 CIVIL ENGINEER SOUTH COAST ENG. 420 N. EL CAMINO REAL SAN CLEMENTE, CA. 92672 714 492 3241 r • TABLE OF CONTENTS PART I BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Invitation to Bid Instructions to Bidders - AIA Document A 701 Bid Bond Form - AIA Document A 310 Proposal Form Non -Collusion Affidavit Performance Bond - AIA Document A 311 Labor and Material Payment Bond - AIA Document A 311 Agreement Form - AIA Document A 101 General Conditions - AIA Document A 201 Supplementary General Conditions PART II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Division 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 1A Summary of Work Section 1B Coordination Section 1C Cutting and Patching Section 1D Field Engineering Section IE Regulatory Requirements Section IF Alternate Bids SOction 1G Submittals Section 1H Construction Facilities and Section 11 Material and Equipment Temporary Controls Section 1J Substitutions and Product Options Section 1K Contract Closeout Section 1L Subsoil Data Section 1M Inspection & Testing Division 2 SITEWORK Section 2A Site Clearing Section 2B Earthwork Section 2C Bituminous Paving Section 2D Storm Drainage Section 2E Landscape Planting Section 2F Plant Establishment and Maintenance Section 2G Landscape Irrigation Section 2H Site Concrete Section 21 Fountains Division 3 CONCRETE ._ Section 3A Concrete Formwork Section 3B Concrete Reinforcement Section 3C Cast -In -Place Concrete Section 3D Concrete Curbing TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 4 MASONRY Section 4A Concrete Unit Masonry Section 4B Glass Block Division 5 METALS Section 5A Structural Steel Section 5B Miscellaneous Metals and Fabrications Division 6 WOOD & PLASTIC Section 6A Rough Carpentry Section 6B Millwork Section 6C Glue -Laminated Prefabricated Structural Section 8C Units Section 6D Wood Decking Division 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 7A Built -Up Roofing Work Section 78 Calking Section 7C Building Thermal Insulation Section 7D Tile Roofing Section 7E Waterproofing Section 7F Roof Hatch Division 8 DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS Section 8A Wood Doors Section 8B Glass & Glazing Section 8C Finished Hardware Division 9 FINISHES Section 9A Stucco Section. 9B Metal Framing and Gypsum Wallboard Section 9C Ceramic Tile Section 9D Quarry Tile Section 9E Painting Section 9F Carpeting Division 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10A Metal Toilet Partitions Section 1013 Toilet Room Accessories Section lOC Portable Extinguishers Section 10D Signage Section 10E Metal Lockers Section 10F Display Cases Section 10G Announcement Boards _ Division 10 SPECIALS Section 10H Book Depository Section 101 Metal Fireplace Section IOJ Flagpole Section 10K Fabric -Covered Tackboard Division 11 EQUIPMENT Section 11A Appliances Section 11B Projection Screen - Alternate #14 Division 12 NOT USED Division 13 NOT USED Division 14 NOT USED Division 15 MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Mechanical Trade Requirements Section 15B Plumbing and Drainage Section 15C Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Division 16 ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Electrical Trade Requirements Section 16B Electrical Work TABLE OF CONTENTS City of San Juan Capistrano City Hall - 32400 Paseo Adelanto San Juan Capistrano, California 93675 Phone: 714-493-2171 INVITATION TO BID SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO LIBRARY COMPLEX May 6, 1982 Public invitation is hereby given to bid on a general contract for con- struction of a single story, wood frame construction, library/auditorium complex including site development, mechanical, electrical, and landscape work. Bids will be on a lump sum basis - with segregated prices on some select items and alternates. For alternates, see Division 1 -Section 1F The project is to be completed within 270 calendar days from the date of award of contract. The City Clerk of the City of San Juan Capistrano will receive bids up to 2:00 p.m. on the 8th day of June, 1982. Upon closing of the period to receive bids a public opening will take place under the supervision of the City Clerk. Project Manual, Drawings, and the soil investigation report are on file at the office of the City Clerk of San Juan Capistrano in City Hall. Copies of the Project Manual and Drawings for use in preparing bids may also be obtained in the office of the City Clerk. Two sets of documents will be available for each General Contractor, who proposes to bid, at a cost of $90.00 per set. Any "bona -fide" • bidder, upon returning the documents in complete and satisfactory condi- tion within seven days following the opening of bids, shall be provided a refund of $60.00 per set for the first two sets. Any additional complete and satisfactory sets returned by "bona -fide" bidders or any complete and satisfactory sets returned by non -bidders will be provided a refund of $30.00 per set. A pre-bid conference is scheduled at 10;00 a.m. on the 19th day of May, 1982 at the City offices. The Contractor shall have the opportunity for clarifi- cation or interpretation of any point or points of question within the Project Manual and Drawings. It is the Contractor's responsibility to be in attendance at the conference to receive any information disclosed during the proceedings, because the City shall not disseminate any records of the conference. Exclusive of written addenda and this pre-bid conference, the City shall not be responsible for any instructions, explanations, or interpretations of the Project Manual and Drawings presented to the bidders in any manner. Any such inquiries after the May 19 pre-bid conference shall be directed to Ron Sterry of Robert Lawson Structural Engineers, tel. 714 494-0776, acting as the Architect's local representative. Each bidder shall have a valid Contractors License in accordance with the provisions of the laws of the State of California relating to the licensing of Contractors. No bid will be accepted from an unlicensed contractor No bid will be received unless it is made on the bid form and accompanied by the Non Collusion Affidavit, both provided within the Project Manual. Each bid must be accompanied by a certified check, cash, cashier's check or bidder's bond payable to the City of San Juan Capistrano in the sum of not less than 10 percent of the amount of the bid. The certified check, cash, cashier's check or bidder's bond of the successful bidder will be forfeited to said City in the event such successful bidder fails to enter into the required contract within 15 days after the written notice that said contract has been awarded to him for the work. The successful bidder, simultaneously with the execution of the contract, will be required to furnish a Faithful Performance and Payment Bond equal in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price. The City Council reserves the right to reject any and all bids received and to compare the relative merits of the respective bids and to choose that which in the opinion of the City Council will best serve the interests or needs of the City of San Juan Capistrano. BIDDERS ARE HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT, pursuant to the Labor Code of the State of California, copies of the prevailing rate of per diem wages, as determined by the Director of the State Department of Industrial Relations, are on file in the office of the City Clerk and shall be made available to any interested party on request. This Notice is hereby given and published by the order of the City Council of the City of San Juan Capistrano, and is dated this Sixth day of May, 1982. City Clerk City of San Juan Capistrano Orange County, California THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A701 Instructions to Bidders 1978 EDITION Use only with the 1976 Edition of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction 5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 9. SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS Copyright 1970, 1974, © 1978 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without permission of the AIA violates the copy- right laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • THIRD EDITION • MAY 1978 • AIA® . p1978 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006 A701-1978 1 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. DEFINITIONS 6. POST -BID INFORMATION 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES AND CONTRACTOR 5. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 9. SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS Copyright 1970, 1974, © 1978 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without permission of the AIA violates the copy- right laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • THIRD EDITION • MAY 1978 • AIA® . p1978 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006 A701-1978 1 0 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Advertisement or In- vitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, other sample bidding and contract forms and the proposed Contract Documents including any Addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. The Contract Documents proposed for the Work consist of the Owner -Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to and all Modifications issued after gxecution of the Contract. 1.2 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bid- ding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. .1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work or designated- portion thereof for the sums Stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bid- ding Documents. 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which work may be added or from which work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as de- scribed in the Bidding Documents or in the proposed Contract Documents. 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. 1.9 A Sub -bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 Each Bidder by making his Bid represents that 2. Ll He has read and understands the Bidding Docu- ments and his Bid is made in accordance therewith. 2.1.2 He has visited the site, has familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated his observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.3 His Bid is based upon the materials, systems and equipment required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3,1 COPIES 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Ad- vertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and re- turn the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of any missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and his deposit will be refunded. 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub -bidders or others unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Docu- ments in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor the Archi- tect assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpreta- tions resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. - 3.1.4 The Owner or the Architect in making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 Bidders and Sub -bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Doc- uments or of the site and local conditions. 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub -bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 3.2.3 Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Inter- pretations, corrections or changes of the Bidding Docu- ments made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, correc- tions and changes. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been re - AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • THIRD EDITION • MAY 1978 • AIA® • ©1970 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006 A701-1978 2 CJ • ceived by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other information necessary for an evalua- tion. A statement setting forth any changes in other mate- rials, equipment or other Work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or dis- approval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 3.3.3 If the Architect approves any proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Con- tract award unless specifically provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for in- spection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3, 4.3 No Addenda will be issued later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting his bid that he has received all Addenda issued, and he shall acknowledge their receipt in his Bid. ' ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURE 4,1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the form included with the Bidding Documents, in the quan- tity required by Article 9. 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink. 4.1.3 Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern. 4.1.4 Any interlineation, alteration or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, with- out forfeiture of his bid security, state his refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids he so stipu- lates. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify his Bid in any other manner. 4,1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of the Bidder and a statement that the Bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's author- ity to bind the Bidder. 4,2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 If so stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required by Article 9 pledging that the Bidder will enter into aContract with the Owner on the terms stated in his Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds as described hereunder in Article 7 covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder re- fuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be for- feited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Subparagraph 6.2.1. 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required it shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of his power of attorney. 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, If required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids have been rejected. 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the desig- nated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the. face thereof. 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made by Addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4,4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting his Bid. AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • THIRD EDITION • .MAY 1978 • AIA® . ©1978 3 A701-1978 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, any Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn _ by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place desig- nated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing ` over the signature of the Bidder or by telegram; if by .telegram, written confirmation 'over the signature of the Bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 4.4.4 Bid security, if any is required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. 11 • ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5,1 OPENING OF BIDS 5.1.1- Unless stated otherwise in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Base Bids and Alternate Bids, if any, will be made available to Bidders. When it has been stated that Bids will be opened privately, an abstract of the same information may, at the discretion of the Owner, be made available to the Bidders within a reasonable time. 5-2 REJECTION OF BIDS 5.2.1 The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids and to reject a Bid not accompanied by any required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or to reject a Bid which is in any way incom- plete or irregular. 5,3 ACCEPTANCE Of BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid or Bids received and to accept the Bid or Bids which, in his judgment, is in his own best Interests. 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alter- nates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided In Article 9, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST BID INFORMATION 6,1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 6.1.1 Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. 62 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY 6.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Contract obligations. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Owner -Contractor Agreement. 6.3 SUBMITTALS 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, within seven days of notification of selection for the award of a Contract for the Work, submit the following information to the Architect: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed by the Bidder with his own forces; .2 the proprietary names and the suppliers of princi- pal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; .3 a list of names of the Subcontractors or other per- sons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special de- sign) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the sat- isfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. 6.3.3 Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing.if either the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objec- tion to any such proposed person or entity, If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to any such pro- posed person or entity, the Bidder may, at his option, (1) withdraw his Bid, or (2) submit an acceptable substi- tute person or entity with an adjustment in his bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substi- tution. The Owner may, at his discretion, accept the ad- justed bid price or he may disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification under this Subparagraph, bid security will not be forfeited, notwith- standing the provisions of Paragraph 4.4.1. 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and the Architect have made no reason- able objection under the provisions of Subparagraph 6.3.3 must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and the Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7,1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 7.1.1 Prior to execution of the Contract, if required in Article 9 hereinafter, the Bidder shall furnish bonds cover- ing the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder in such form and amount as the Owner may prescribe. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. If the furnish - AIA DOCUMENT A781 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • THIRD EDITION • MAY 1978 • AIA® • ©1978 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 2DO06 A701-1978 4 . • ing of such bonds is stipulated hereinafter in Article 9, the cost shall be included in the Bid. 7.1.2 If the Owner has reserved the right to require that bonds be furnished subsequent to the execution of the Contract, the cost shall be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the Bidder's usual source, any change in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. 7,2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than the date of execution of the Con- tract, or if the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished. 7.2.2 Unless otherwise required in Article 9, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A311, Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond. 7.2.3 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 8,1 FORM TO BE USED 8.1.1 Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Docu- ments, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Be- tween Owner and Contractor, where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum. ARTICLE 9 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS 9.1 Modify 3.1.1 Deposit Return to read: "Partial deposits shall be returned as noted on the Invitation to Bid." 9.2 To 4.1.1 add the following: "Proposal Forms, properly filled out, shall be submitted in duplicate." 9.3 Bonds are required as listed in Article 7. 9.4 Additional Obligee Under Bonds. The Bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and a labor and material payment bond as described in Paragraph 7.1.1 hereof. Each of said bonds shall name the Owner as obligee and shall further name as an additional obligee a trustee bank to be designated by written notification given to Bidder prior to the execution of the Contract. It is intended that said trustee bank will act as trustee with respect to the certificates of participation delivered to finance the Work described in the Bidding Documents. 9.5 Bid Security shall be as stipulated in the Invitaion to Bid AIA DOCUMENT A701 • INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • THIRD EDITION • MAY 1978 • AIAO . 01978 5 A701-1978 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006 f THIS IS YOUR POCKET IDENTIFICATION CARD KEEP IT ,WITH. YOU 11 QETACH Aj QERFORATION i NDFQ�6D li „ Y ij I 1(' �4 1 ! P (i I; r ,f !I I !( 4 i I 7 99 �� ti r ri'. -ii n �t- f i, II If ! c i! STATE'OCALIPORNIA ?E , {I i �i j'If ^"'�I eC Ic i q - ` ;I DEPARTMENT OF, AFFAIR IE i P �. R 0(VT,%V� S T T �( �( RECEIF 1N9 is +� I� EXPfRES ON E ' t� y� s �1 ,rE3 SUPPLEMENTAL CI:ASSINUATIONS I �� lb,:ir,i IIv` ...t;lL rtI t. f � i 34—ti if 4t �.. If If a q 13l 22 (REV 5701 SIGNATURE(' ,� 41l 'F QLO +) ARL c .,�i;11..La...lF,.��i,$t°'6�+�`'9i$i�L.�•I I'!«»,,`.:ps-. t, ...k :�`_.�7 . .. i,�. n U DESIGNATION OF SUB -CONTRACTORS Submit within seven (7) days of proposal. In compliance with the Provisions of Section 4100-4107 of the Government Code of the State of California as amended, the under- signed certifies that he has used the sub -bids of the following listed sub -contractors in making up his bid, and that the subcon- tractors listed wil be used for the work for which they bid, subject to the approvai of the Architect, and in accordance with the applica- ble provisions of the Specifications. It is understood and agreed that all those portions of the work called for in the contract docu- ments for which a sub -contractor is not listed will be performed by the undersigned through his forces. If no sub -contractors are listed, all bonds and insurance will be writted in the name of the general contractor only. 0 ITEM OF WORK SUB -CONTRACTOR ADDRESS PHONE NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.- 9.- 10. .9.10. 12. 0 13. ITEM OF WORK 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. SUB -CONTRACTOR ADDRESS PHONE NO. BIDDER'S NAME AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS s 110 AIA Document A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction TH15 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICATION 1976 EDITION TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8. TIME 2. ARCHITECT 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 3. OWNER 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 4. CONTRACTOR 11. INSURANCE 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. CHANGES IN THE WORK 6. WORK BY OWNER OR BY 13. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION SEPARATE CONTRACTORS OF WORK 7. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, © 1976 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D. C. 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its pro- visions without permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1956 AIA® . © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 1 INDEX Acceptance of Defective or Non -Conforming Work ..6.2.2, 13.3 Acceptance of Work ............5.4.2, 9.5.5, .9.8.1, 9.9.1, 9.9.3 Access to Work ................................2.2.5, 6.2.1 Accident Prevention .............. ................ 2.2.4,10 Acts and Omissions ........2.2.4, 4.18.3, 7.4, 7.6.2, 8.3.1, 10.2.5 Additional Costs, Claims for............................12.3 Administration of the Contract .................... 2.2, 4.3.3 All Risk Insurance ..................................11.3.1 Allowances ........................................... 4.8 Applications for Payment ..................2.2.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.3, 9.6.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.9.3,14.2.2 Approvals ...............2.2.14, 3.4, 4.3.3, 4.5, 4.12.4 through 4.12.6, 4.12.8, 4.18.3, 7.7, 9.3.2 Arbitration ................2.2.7 through 2.2.13, 2.2.19, 6.2.5, 7.9, 8.3.1,11.3.7,11.3.8 ARCHITECT............................................2 Architect, Definition of ................................. 2.1 Architect, Extent of Authority ....2.2, 3.4, 4.12.8, 5.2, 6.31 7.7.21 8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.3.1,9.4,9.5.3,9.6,9.8,9.9.1,9.9.3,12.1.1, 12.1.4,12.3.1,12.4.1,13.1,13.2.1,13.2.5,14.2 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility .. ..2.2.2 through 2.2.4, 2.2.10 through 2.2.14, 2.2.17, 2.2.18, 4.3.3,4.12.6,5.2.1,9.4.219.5.4,9.5.5,12.4 Architect's Additional Services ..3.4, 7.7.2, 13.2.1, 13.2.5, 14.2.2 Architect's Approvals ......2.2.14, 3,4, 4.5, 4.12.6, 4.12.8, 4.18.3 Architect's Authority to Reject Work ....2.2.13, 4.5, 13.1.2, 13.2 Architect's Copyright ................................... 1.3 Architect's Decisions ..........2.2.7 through 2.2.13, 6.3, 7.7.2, 7.9.1, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.6.1, 9.8.1, 12.1.4, 12.3.1 Architect's Inspections ..............2.2.13, 2.2.16, 9.8.1, 9.9.1 Architects Instructions ..........2.2.13, 2.2.15, 7.7.2, 12.4, 13.1 Architect's Interpretations .........2.2.7 through 2.2.10, 12.3.2 Architect's On -Site Observations......2.2.3, 2.2.5, 2.2.6, 2.2.17, .7.1, 7.7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Architect's Project Representative ..............2.2.17, 2.2.18 Architect's Relationship with Contractor ..1.1.2, 2.2.4, 2.2.5, 2.2.10, 2.2.13, 4.3.3, 4.5, 4.7.3, 4.12.6, 4.18, 11.3.6 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors ..................1.1.2, 2.2,13, 9.5.3, 9.5.4 Architect's Representations .................9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Artistic Effect ...................... .1.2.3, 2.2.11, 2.2.12, 7.9.1 Attorneys' Fees ...........................4.18.1, 6.2.5, 9.9.2 Award of Separate Contracts ..........................6.1.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work .............................. 5.2 Bonds, Lien .........................................9.9.2 Bonds, Performance, Labor and Material Payment ....7.5, 9.9.3 Building Permit ....................................... 4.7 Certificate of Substantial Completion ...................9.8.1 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval ...........7.7.3 Certificates of Insurance ........................9.3.2, 11.1.4 Certificates for Payment ..2.2.6, 2.2.16, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.5, 9.6.1, 9.7.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.9.3, 12.1.4, 14.2.2 Change Orders ..........1.1.1, 2.2.15, 3.4, 4.8.2.3, 5.2.3, 7.7.2, 8.3.1, 9.7, 9.9.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 12.1, 13.1.2, 13.2.5, 13.3.1 Change Orders, Definition of ........................12.1.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK .................. 2.2.15, 4.1.1, 12 Claims for Additional Cost or Time ..8.3.2, 8.3.3, 12.2.1, 12.3 Claims for Damages ..............6.1.1, 6.2.5, 7.4, 8.3, 9.6.1.1 Cleaning Up .....................................4.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to. .3.2.1, 4.2, 4.7.1, 4.10, 5.2.1, 6.2.2, 7.5, 9.2, 11.1.4, 11.3.4 Commencement of the Work, Definition of .............8.1.2 Communications .....................2.2.2, 3.2.6, 4.9.1, 4.16 Completion, Conditions Relating to ...2.2.16, 4.11, 4.15, 9.4.2, 9.9, 13.2.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND ..........................9 Completion, Substantial ....2.2.16, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.2, 9.8, 13.2.2 Compliance with Laws ................ 1.3, 2.1.1, 4.6, 4.7, 4.13, 7.1, 7.7, 10.2.2, 14 Concealed Conditions .................................12.2 Consent, Written ...2.2.18, 4.14.2, 7.2, 7.6.2, 9.8.1, 9.9.2, 9.9.3, 11.3.9 Contract, Definition of ................................1.1.2 Contract Administration .......................... 2.2, 4.3.3 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to .........4.7.1, 4.10, 5.2, 7.5, 9.2, 11.1.4, 11.3.4 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS...............................1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of ............... 1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of .....................1.1.1 Contract Sum, Definition of ...........................9.1.1 Contract Termination ................................... 14 Contract Time, Definition of ..........................8.1.1 CONTRACTOR.........................................4 Contractor, Definition of .......................... 4.1, 6.1.2 Contractor's Employees ......4.3.2, 4.4.2, 4.8.1, 4.9, 4.18, 10.2.1 through 10.2.4, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.1.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance ........................11.1 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces .........3.2.7, 6 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors .........1.2.4, 5.2, 5.3, 9.5.2, 11.3.3, 11.3.6 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect ........1.1.2, 2.2.4, 2.2.5,2.2.10,2.2.13,4.3.3,4.5,4.7.3,4.12.6,4.18,11.3.6 Contractor's Representations ............1.2.2, 4.5, 4.12.5, 9.3.3 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work ...............4.3.2, 4.18, 10 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents ....1.2.2, 4.2, 4.7.3 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work ..................... 9.7 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract ............ 14.1 Contractor's Submittals ...............2.2.14, 4.10, 4.12, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.8.1, 9.9.2, 9.9.3 Contractor's Superintendent ...................... 4.9, 10.2.6 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures ..........1.2.4, 2.2.4, 4.3, 4.4, 10 Contractual Liability Insurance ........................11.1.3 Coordination and Correlation ..1.2.2, 1.2.4, 4.3.1, 4.10.1, 4.12.5, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications ..1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Correction of Work ..................... 3.3, 3.4, 10.2.5, 13.2 Cost, Definition of ..................................12.1.4 Costs .. ...3.4, 4.8.2, 4.15.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 6.2.5, 6.3, 7.7.1, 7.7.2, 9.7,11.3.1, 11.3.5, 12.1.3, 12.1.4, 12.3, 13.1.2, 13.2, 14 Cutting and Patching of Work ......................4.14, 6.2 Damage to the Work ................6.2.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1.5, 9.8.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.3, 11.3, 13.2.6 Damages, Claims for ............6.1.1, 6.2.5, 7.4, 8.3.4, 9.6.1.2 Damages for Delay ..........................6.1.1, 8.3.4, 9.7 Day, Definition of ....................................8.1.4 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 2 A201-1976 AIA® . © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 i- 0 Decisions of the Architect ......2.2.9 through 2.2.12, 6.3, 7.7.2, 7.9.1, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.6.1, 9.8.1, 12.1.4, 12.3.1, 14.2.1 Defective or Non -Conforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of ....2.2.3, 2.2.13, 3.3, 3.4, 4.5, 6.2.2, 6.2.3, 9.6.1.1, 9.9.4.2, 13 Definitions ........1.1, 2.1, 3.1, 4.1, 4.12.1 through 4.12.3, 5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1, 9.1.1, 12.1.1, 12.1.4 Delays and Extensions of Time .......................... 8.3 Disputes .................2.2.9, 2.2.12, 2.2.19, 6.2.5, 6.3, 7.9.1 Documents and Samples at the Site .....................4.11 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of ......................1.1.1, 1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Emergencies .........................................10.3 Employees, Contractor's .....4.3.2, 4.4.2, 4.8.1, 4.9, 4.18, 10.2.1 through 10.2.4, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.1.1 Equipment, Labor, Materials and ..1.1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, 4.15.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 11.3, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Execution and Progress of the Work ....1.1.3, 1.2.3, 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.2.8, 4.2, 4.4.1, 4.5, 6.2.2, 7.9.3, 8.2, 8.3, 9.6.1, 10.2.3, 10.2.4, 14.2 Execution, Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents ......................... 1.2, 4.7.1 Extensions of Time ................................ 8.3, 12.1 Failure of Payment by Owner ......................9.7,14.1 Failure of Payment of Subcontractors ..9.5.2, 9.6.1.3, 9.9.2, 14.2.1 Final Completion and Final Payment ..2.2.12, 2.2.16, 9.9, 13.3.1 Financial Arrangements, Owner's ......................3.2.1 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance ................11.3.1 Governing Law ....................................... 7.1 Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties) ........2.2.16, 4.5, 9.3.3, 9.8.1, 9.9.4,13.2.2 Indemnification .......................4.17, 4.18, 6.2.5, 9.9.2 Identification of Contract Documents ..................1.2.1 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers ...........5.2.1 Information and Services Required of the Owner ........3.2, 6, 9, 11.2, 11.3 Inspections ...............2.2.13, 2.2.16, 4.3.3, 7.7, 9.8.1, 9.9.1 Instructions to Bidders ............................1.1.1, 7.5 Instructions to the Contractor ..........2.2.2, 3.2.6, 4.8.1, 7.7.2, 12.1.2, 12.1.4 INSURANCE ......................................9.8.1, 11 Insurance, Contractor's Liability ........................11.1 Insurance, Loss of Use ................................11.4 Insurance, Owner's Liability ...........................11.2 Insurance, Property ...................................11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials .....................9.3.2, 11.3.1 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy ....11.3.9 Insurance Companies, Settlement With ................11.3.8 Intent of the Contract Documents ...1.2.3, 2.2.10, 2.2.13, 2.2.14, 12.4 Interest.............................................. 7.8 Interpretations, Written .........1.1.1, 2.2.7, 2.2.8, 2.2.10, 12.4 Labor and Materials, Equipment ..1.1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, 4.15.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 11.3, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Labor and Material Payment Bond ...................... 7.5 Labor Disputes ......................................8.3.1 Laws and Regulations .............. 1.3, 2.1., 4.6, 4.7, 4.13, 7.1, 7.7, 10.2.2, 14 Liens ...................................9.3.3, 9.9.2, 9.9.4.1 Limitations of Authority .....2.2.2, 2.2.17, 2.2.18, 11.3.8, 12.4.1 Limitations of Liability ......2.2.10, 2.2.13, 2.2.14, 3.3, 4.2, 4.7.3, 4.12.6, 4.17, 4.18.3, 6.2.2, 7.6.2, 9.4.2, 9.9.4, 9.9.5, 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.3.6 Limitations of Time, General ..2.2.8, 2.2.14, 3.2.4, 4.2, 4.7.3, 4.12.4, 4.15, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.4, 7.7, 8.2, 9.5.2, 9.6, 9.8, 9.9, 11.3.4, 12.1.4, 12.4, 13.2.1, 13.2.2, 13.2.5 Limitations of Time, Specific ...........2.2.8, 2.2.12, 3.2.1, 3.4, 4.10, 5.3, 6.2.2, 7.9.2, 8.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 11.1.4, 11.3.1, 113.8, 11.3.9, 12.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 13.2.7, 14.1, 14.2.1 Limitations, Statutes of ...................7.9.2, 13.2.2, 13.2.7 Loss of Use Insurance .................................11.4 Materials, Labor, Equipment and ..1.1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, 4.15.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 11.3.1, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Materials Suppliers .......................4.12.1, 5.2.1, 9.3.3 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction .............2.2.4, 4.3.1, 9.4.2 Minor Changes in the Work ................1.1.1, 2.2.15, 12.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ...........................7 Modifications, Definition of ...........................1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract ........1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.2.2, 2.2.18, 4.7.3, 7.9.3, 12 Mutual Responsibility .................................. 6.2 Non -Conforming Work, Acceptance of Defective or .. ..13.3.1 Notice, Written ..........2.2.8, 2.2.12, 3.4, 42, 4.7.3, 4.7.4, 4.9, 4.12.6, 4.12.7, 4.17, 5.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 7.7, 7.9.2, 8.1.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.9.1, 9.9.5, 10.2.6, 11.1.4, 11.3.1, 11.3.4, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 11.3.8, 12.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14 Notices, Permits, Fees and ........................4.7,10.2.2 Notice of Testing and Inspections ....................... 7.7 Notice to Proceed ...................................8.1.2 Observations, Architect's On -Site ........2.2.3, 7.7.1, 7.7.4, 9.4.2 Observations, Contractor's .................. 1.2.2,4.2.1,4.7.3 Occupancy ..............................8.1.3, 9.5.5, 11.3.9 On -Site Inspections by the Architect ........2.2.3, 2.2.16, 9.4.2, 9.8.1, 9.9.1 On -Site Observations by the Architect .......2.2.3, 2.2.6, 2.2.17, 7.7.1,7.7.4,9.4.2,9.6.1,9.9.1 Orders, Written ...................3.3, 4.9, 12.1.4, 12.4.1, 13.1 OWNER...............................................3 Owner, Definition of .................................. 3.1 Owner, Information and Services Required of the ....3.2, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9,11.2,11.3 Owner's Authority .............2.2.16, 4.8.1, 7.7.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.8.1, 11.3.8, 12.1.2, 12.1.4 Owner's Financial Capability ...........................3.2.1 Owner's Liability Insurance ............................11.2 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors ..........1.1.2, 9.5.4 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work .............. 3.4, 13.2.4 Owner's Right to Clean Up .......................4.15.2, 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Work and to Award Separate Contracts ................................. 6.1 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ................14.2 Owner's Right to Stop the Work .:........... ............ 3.3 Ownership and Use of Documents ........ 1.1.1,1.3, 3.2.5, 5.2.3 Patching of Work, Cutting and ....................4.14,6.2.2 Patents, Royalties and ...............................4.17.1 Payment Bond, Labor and Material ....................... 7.5 Payment, Applications for ............2.2.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.3, 9.6.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.1, 9.9.3, 14.2.2 Payment, Certificates for ...............2.2.6, 2.2.16, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.5,9.6.1,9.7.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.9.3,12.1.4,14.22 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIA® . O 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 3 Payment, Failure of ................9.5.2, 9.6.1.3, 9.7, 9.9.2, 14 Payment, Final ......................2.2.12, 2.2.16, 9.9, 13.3.1 Payments, Progress ..........7.8, 7.9.3, 9.5.5, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 12.1.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ...........................9 Payments to Subcontractors .................9.5.2, 9.5.3, 9.5.4, 9.6.1.3, 11.3.3, 14.2.1 Payments Withheld .................................... 9.6 Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond ..7.5 Permits, Fees and Notices .....................3.2.3, 4.7, 4.13 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF .............. 10 Product Data, Definition of ...........................4.12.2 Substitution of the Architect ..........................2.2.19 Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples and ...2.2.14, 4.2.1, 4.12 Progress and Completion ....................2.2.3, 7.9.3, 8.2 Progress Payments ...........7.8, 7.9.3, 9.5.5, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 12.1.4 Progress Schedule ....................................4.10 Project, Definition of .................................1.1.4 7.2 Project Representative ...............................2.2.17 .1.2.4, 2.2.4, 4.3, 4.4, 10 Property Insurance ...................................11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY .............. 10 Regulations and Laws .....1.3, 2.1.1, 4.6, 4.7, 4.13, 7.1, 10.2.2,14 Rejection of Work ........................2.2.13, 4.5.1, 13.2 Releases of Waivers and Liens ....................9.9.2, 9.9.4 Representations .............1.2.2, 4.5, 4.12.5, 9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Representatives ............................ 2.1, 2.2.2, 2.2.17, 2.2.18, 3.1, 4.1, 4.9, 5.1, 9.3.3 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work ..2.2.4,4.3.2, 4.3.3, 7.7, 9.4.2 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.8.1 Retainage ..................... . .9.3.1, 9.5.2, 9,8.2, 9.9.2, 9.9.3 Review of Contract Documents Time, Delays and Extensions of ...........8.3, by the Contractor ........................1.2.2, 4.2, 4.7.3 Reviews of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect .....2.2.14, 4.10, 4.12, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2 Rights and Remedies ..1.1.2, 2.2.12, 2.2.13, 3.3, 3.4, 5.3, 6.1, 6.3, 7.6, 7.9, 8.3.1, 9.6.1, 9.7,10.3,12.1.2, 12.2, 13.2.2,14 Royalties and Patents .................................4.17 9.3.3 Safety of Persons and Property .........................10.2 Safety Precautions and Programs ........... ....... 2.2.4,10.1 Samples, Definition of ...............................4.12.3 8.3,12.2 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and .....2.2.14, 4.2, 4.12 Samples at the Site, Documents and ....................4.11 Schedule of Values .................................... 9.2 Schedule, Progress ...................................4.10 Values, Schedule of .................................... Separate Contracts and Contractors .....4.14.2, 6, 11.3.6, 13.1.2 Shop Drawings, Definition of .........................4.12.1 8.3.2, 9.9.5, 11.3.6 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples ... 2.2.14, 4.2, 4.12 Site, Use of ...................... ............... 4.13,6.2.1 Site Visits, Architect's ................2.2.3, 2.2.5, 2.2.6, 2.2.17, 9.3.3, 9.8.1, 9.9.4, 13.2.2 7.7.1, 7.7.4, 9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Site Inspections .............1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.16, 7.7, 9.8.1, 9.9.1 Special Inspection and Testing ....................2.2.13, 7.7 Specifications ..... .............. ............ 1.1.1,1.2.4, 1.3 Statutes of Limitations ....................7.9.2, 13.2.2, 13.2.7 Stopping the Work ...................... 3.3, 9.7.1, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials ............6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 11.3.1, 13.2.5 SUBCONTRACTORS.....................................5 Subcontractors, Definition of ............................ 5.1 Subcontractors, Work by ............... 1.2.4,2.2.4,4.3.1,4.3.2 Subcontractual Relations ............................... 5.3 Submittals .................... 1.3, 4.10, 4.12, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.8.1, 9.9.2, 9.9.3 Subrogation, Waiver of ..............................11.3.6 Substantial Completion ......2.2.16, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.2, 9.8,13.2.2 Substantial Completion, Definition of ...................8.1.3 Substitution of Subcontractors ....................5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of the Architect ..........................2.2.19 Substitutions of Materials ......................... 4.5, 12.1.4 Sub -subcontractors, Definition of .......................5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions ...............................12.2.1 Successors and Assigns ................................ 7.2 Supervision and Construction Procedures .1.2.4, 2.2.4, 4.3, 4.4, 10 Superintendent, Contractor's ......................4.9,10.2.6 Surety, Consent of .............................. 9.9.2,9.9.3 Surveys ....................................... 3.2.2,4.18.3 Taxes................................................ 4.6 Termination by the Contractor .........................14.1 Termination by the Owner ............................14.2 Termination of the Architect .........................2.2.19 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT ...................... 14 Tests .................................2.2.13, 4.3.3, 7.7, 9.4.2 Time..................................................8 Time, Definition of .................................... 8.1 Time, Delays and Extensions of ...........8.3, 12.1, 12.3, 13.2.7 Time Limits, Specific ..................2.2.8, 2.2.12, 3.2.1, 3.4, 4.10, 5.3, 6.2.2, 7.9.2, 8.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 11.1.4, 11.3.1, 11.3.8, 11.3.9, 12.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 13.2.7, 14.1, 14.2.1 Title to Work ...................................9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK ............. 13 Uncovering of Work ..................................13.1 Unforseen Conditions ......... .................... 8.3,12.2 Unit Prices ...................................12.1.3, 12.1.5 Use of Documents .......................1.1.1, 1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Use of Site .....................................4.13, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of .................................... 9.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor ....7.6.2, 8.3.2, 9.9.5, 11.3.6 Waiver of Claims by the Owner ......7.6.2, 9.9.4,11.3.6,11.4.1 Waiver of Liens ......................................9.9.2 Warranty and Warranties ....2.2.16, 4.5, 9.3.3, 9.8.1, 9.9.4, 13.2.2 Weather Delays ....................:.................8.3.1 Work, Definition of ..................................1.1.3 Work by Owner or by Separate Contractors ................6 Written Consent .. ...2.2.18, 4.14.2, 7.2, 7.6.2, 9.8.1, 9.9.3, 9.9.4 Written Interpretations ............... 1.1.1,1.2.4,2.2.8,12.3.2 Written Notice .....2.2.8, 2.2.12, 3.4, 4.2, 4.7.3, 4.7.4, 4.9, 4.12.6, 4.12.7, 4.17, 5.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 7.7, 7.9.2, 8.1.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.9.1, 9.9.5, 10.2.6, 11.1.4, 11.3.1, 11.3.4, 11.3.5,11.3.7,11.3.8,12.2,12.3,13.2.2,13.2.5,14 Written Orders ................... 3.3, 4.9, 12.1.4, 12.4.1,13.1 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 4 A201-1976 AIA& • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 0 lJ GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ARTICLE 1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1 . DEFINITIONS 1,1,1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of the Owner -Contrac- tor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications, and all Addenda issued prior to and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a written interpretation issued by the Architect pursuant to Sub- paragraph 2.2.8, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect pursuant to Paragraph 12.4. The Contract Documents do not include Bidding Documents such as the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Con- tractor's Bid or portions of Addenda relating to any of these, or any other documents, unless specifically enu- merated In the Owner -Contractor Agreement. 1,1,2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construc- tion. This Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification as defined in Subparagraph 1.1.1. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create any contractual relationship of any kind between the Ar- chitect and the Contractor, but the Architect shall be entitled to performance of obligations intended for his benefit, and to enforcement thereof. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Owner or the Architect and any Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor. 1.1.3 THE WORK The Work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor neces- sary to produce such construction, and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction. 1,1,4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. 1,2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed in not less than triplicate by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or the Contractor or both do not sign the Condi- tions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, or any of the other Contract Documents, the Architect shall iden- tify such Documents. 1.2.2 By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be per- formed, and correlated his observations with the require- ments of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and comple- tion of the Work. The Contract Documents are comple- mentary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Con- tract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent therewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results. Words and ab- breviations which have well-known. technical or trade meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord- ance with such recognized meanings. 1.2.4 The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and the arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1,3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Architect are and shall remain his prop- erty. They are to be used only with respect to this Project and are not to be used on any other project. With the exception of one contract set for each party to the Con- tract, such documents are to be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect on request at the comple- tion of the Work. Submission or distribution to meet offi- cial regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's common law copyright or other reserved rights. ARTICLE 2 ARCHITECT 2.1 DEFINITION 2.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Owner -Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term Architect means the Architect or his authorized representative. 2,2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 2.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as hereinafter described. 2.2.2 The Architect will be the Owner's representative during construction and until final payment is due. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Owner's Instructions to the Contractor shall be forwarded AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIA'9 . n 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 5 through the Architect. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with Subparagraph 2.2.18. 2.2.3 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appro- priate to the stage of construction to familiarize himself generally with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in ac- cordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or con- tinuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quan- tity of the Work. On the basis of his on-site observations as an architect, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. 2.2.4 The Architect will not be responsible for and will not have control or charge of construction means, meth- ods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not be responsible for or have control or charge over the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their agents or em- ployees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 2.2.5 The Architect shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Architect may perform his functions under the Contract Documents. 2.2.6 Based on the Architect's observations and an evalu- ation of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will determine the amounts owing to the Con- tractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts, as provided in Paragraph 9.4. 2.2.7 The Architect will be the interpreter of the require- ments of the Contract Documents and the judge of the performance thereunder by both the Owner and Con- tractor. 2.2.8 The Architect will render interpretations necessary for the proper execution or progress of the Work, with reasonable promptness and in accordance with any time limit agreed upon. Either party to the Contract may make written request to the Architect for such interpretations. 2.2.9 Claims, disputes and other matters in question be- tween the Contractor and the Owner relating to the exe- cution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision which he will render in writing within a reasonable time. 2.2.10 All interpretations and decisions of the Architect shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably in- ferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writ- ing or in the form of drawings. In his capacity as inter- preter and judge, he will endeavor to secure faithful per- formance by both the Owner and the Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for the result of any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 2.2.11 The Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. 2.2.12 Any claim, dispute or other matter in question between the Contractor and the Owner referred to the Architect, except those relating to artistic effect as pro- vided in Subparagraph 2.2.11 and except those which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final pay- ment as provided in Subparagraphs 9.9.4 and 9.9.5, shall be subject to arbitration upon the written demand of ei- ther party. However, no demand for arbitration of any such claim, dispute or other matter may be made until the earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered a written decision, or (2) the tenth day after the parties have presented their evidence to the Architect or have been given a reasonable opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered his written decision by that date. When such a written decision of the Architect states (1) that the decision is final but subject to appeal, and (2) that any demand for arbitration of a claim, dispute or other matter covered by such decision must be made within thirty days after the date on which the party mak- ing the demand receives the written decision, failure to demand arbitration within said thirty days' period will re- sult in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and the Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but will not supersede any arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. 2.2.13 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever, in his opinion, he considers it necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, he will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraph 7.7.2 whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither the Architect's authority to act under this Subparagraph 2.2.13, nor any decision made by him in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any of their agents or employees, or any other person performing any of the Work. 2.2.14 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the information given in the Contract Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Architect's ap- proval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 2.2.15 The Architect will prepare Change Orders in ac- cordance with Article 12, and will have authority to order minor changes in the Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.4.1. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 6 A201-1976 AIA® . © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 E • 2.2.16 The Architect will conduct inspections to deter- mine the dates of Substantial Completion and final com- pletion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contrac- tor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 9.9. 2.2.17 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project Representatives to assist the Architect in carrying out his responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such Project Representative shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. 2.2.18 The duties, responsibilities and limitations of au- thority of the Architect as the Owner's representative dur- ing construction as set forth in the Contract Documents will not be modified or extended without written con- sent of the Owner, the Contractor and the Architect. 2.2.19 In case of the termination of the employment of the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objec- tion whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect. Any dispute in connection with such appointment shall be subject to arbitration. ARTICLE 3 OWNER 3.1 DEFINITION 3.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Owner -Contractor Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in num- ber and masculine in gender. The term Owner means the Owner or his authorized representative. 3.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 3.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, at the time of execution of the Owner -Contractor Agree- ment, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that he has made financial arrangements to fulfill his obliga- tions under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evi- dence is furnished, the Contractor is not required to execute the Owner -Contractor Agreement or to com- mence the Work. 3.2.2 The Owner shall furnish all surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility loca- tions for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. 3.2.3 Except as provided in Subparagraph 4.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, ease- ments, assessments and charges required for the construc- tion, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for per- manent changes in existing facilities. 3.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable prompt- ness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. 3.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, all copies of Drawings and Specifications reasonably nec- essary for the execution of the Work. 3.2.6 The Owner shall forward all instructions to the Contractor through the Architect. 3.2.7 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Work by Owner or by Separate Contractors, Payments and Completion, and In- surance in Articles 6, 9 and 11 respectively. 3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 3.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work as required by Paragraph 13.2 or persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments, the Owner, by a written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. 3.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 3.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, after seven days following receipt by the Contractor of an additional written notice and without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies. In Such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Archi- tect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and the amount charged to the Contractor are both subject to the prior approval of the Architect. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACTOR 4.1 DEFINITION 4.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Owner -Contractor Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term Contractor means the Contractor or his authorized representative. 4,2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and shall at once report to the Architect any error, inconsistency or omission he may dis- cover. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIA® . © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 7 the Architect for any damage resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Docu- ments. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. 4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 4.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely re- sponsible for all construction means, methods, tech- niques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, 4.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontrac- tors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. 4.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved from his obli- gations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of the Architect in his administration of the Contract, or by inspections, tests or approvals required or performed un- der Paragraph 7.7 by persons other than the Contractor. 4.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or per- manent and whether or not incorporated or to be incor- porated in the Work. 4.4.2 The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict dis- cipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him. 4.5 WARRANTY 4.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the Architect that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be new unless otherwise speci- fied, and that alt Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these require- ments, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evi- dence as to the kind and quality of materials and equip- ment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of Paragraph 13.2, 4.6 TAXES 4.6.1 The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted at the time bids are received, whether or not yet effective. 4,7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the build- ing permit and for all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work which are custom- arily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required at the time the bids are received. 4.7.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful or- ders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. 4.7.3 It is not the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain that the Contract Documents are in accord- ance with applicable laws, statutes, building codes and regulations. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any re- spect, he shall promptly notify the Architect in writing, and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by ap- propriate Modification. 4.7.4 If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regula- tions, and without such notice to the Architect, he Shall assume full responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs attributable thereto. 4,8 ALLOWANCES 4.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor will not be required to employ persons against whom he makes a reasonable objection. 4.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments: .1 these allowances shall cover the cost to the Con- tractor, less any applicable trade discount, of the materials and equipment required by the allowance delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes; .2 the Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, prof- it and other expenses contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the Contract Sum and not in the allowance; .3 whenever the cost is more than or less than the allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted ac- cordingly by Change Order, the amount of which will recognize changes, if any, in handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses. 4,9 SUPERINTENDENT 4.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superin- tendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attend- ance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important commu- nications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communi- cations shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. 4.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4.10.1 The Contractor, immediately after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information an estimated progress sched- AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 8 A201-1976 AIA® • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20DD6 0 • ule for the Work. The progress schedule shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. 4.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 4.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to him for the Owner upon completion of the Work. 4.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 4.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of the Work. 4.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 4.12.4 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents. 4.12.5 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, the Contractor represents that he has determined and verified all materials, field meas- urements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Docu- ments. 4.12.6 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsi- bility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples under Subparagraph 2.2.14 unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of sub- mission and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Architect's approval thereof. 4.12.7 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. 4.12.8 No portion of the Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be com- menced until the submittal has been approved by the Architect as provided in Subparagraph 2.2.14. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with ap- proved submittals. 4,13 USE OF SITE 4.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encum- ber the site with any materials or equipment. 4.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 4.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properly. 4.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any work, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any separate contractor except with the written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any separate contractor his consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 4.15 CLEANING UP 4.15.1 The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his operations. At the completion of the Work he shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all his tools, construc- tion equipment, machinery and surplus materials. 4.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up at the comple- tion of the Work, the Owner may do so as provided in Paragraph 3.4 and the cost thereof shall be charged to the. Contractor. 4.16 COMMUNICATIONS 4.16.1 The Contractor shall forward all communications to the Owner through the Architect. 4,17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the Contractor has rea- son to believe that the design, process or product speci- fied is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the Architect. 4,18 INDEMNIFICATION 4.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Con- tractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Architect and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or result- ing from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIA • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 200M A201-1976 9 and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to ne- gate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obli- gation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph 4.18. 4.18.2 In any and all claims against the Owner or the Architect or any of their agents or employees by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnifi- cation obligation under this Paragraph 4.18 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 4.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Para- graph 4.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Archi- tect, his agents or employees, arising out of (1) the prepa- ration or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instruc- tions by the Architect, his agents or employees provided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITION 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a di- rect contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in num- ber and masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor or his authorized representative. The term Subcontractor does not include any separate contractor or his subcon- tractors. 5.1.2 A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to per- form any of the Work at the site. The term Sub -subcon- tractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender and means a Sub -subcontractor or an authorized representa- tive thereof. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Docu- ments or the Bidding Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after the award of the Contract, shall fur- nish to the Owner and the Architect in writing the names of the persons or entities (including those who are to fur- nish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with any such proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or the Architect has made reasonable objection under the provi- sions of Subparagraph 5.2.1. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom he has a rea- sonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objec- tion to any such proposed person or entity, the Contrac- tor shall submit a substitute to whom the Owner or the Architect has no reasonable objection, and the Contract Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued; however, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for any such substitu- tion unless the Contractor has acted promptly and re- sponsively in submitting names as required by Subpara- graph 5.2.1. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall make no substitution for any Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By an appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be per- formed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Con- tractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to as- sume toward the Contractor all the obligations and re- sponsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and the Architect. Said agree- ment shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect under the Contract Documents with re- spect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifi. cally provided otherwise in the Contractor -Subcontractor agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by these Docu- ments, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with his Sub -subcontractors. The Con- tractor shall make available to each proposed Subcon- tractor, prior to the execution of the Subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound by this Paragraph 5.3, and identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed Subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make cop- ies of such Documents available to his Sub -subcontractors. ARTICLE 6 WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform work re- lated to the Project with his own forces, and to award 10 A201-1976 AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 r - separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other work on the site under these or similar Conditions of the Contract. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, he shall make such claim as pro- vided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other work on the site, the term Contractor in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner - Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner will provide for the coordination of the work of his own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate therewith as provided in Paragraph 6.2. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate his Work with theirs as required by the Contract Docu- ments. 6.2.2 If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with the Work, promptly report to the Archi- tect any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acceptance of the Owner's or separate con- tractors' work as fit and proper to receive his Work, ex- cept as to defects which may subsequently become appar- rent in such work by others. 6.2.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 6.2.4 Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of the Owner, or to other work on the site, the Contractor shall promptly remedy such dam- age as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor, the Con- tractor shall upon due notice promptly attempt to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise to resolve the dispute, If such separate contractor sues or initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Owner's ex- pense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorneys' fees and court or arbitration costs which the Owner has incurred. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises between the Contractor and Sepa- rate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required by Paragraph 4.15, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the contractors responsible therefor as the Architect shall determine to be just. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7,1 GOVERNING LAW 7.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 7.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 7.2.1 The Owner and the Contractor each binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in re- spect to all covenants, agreements and obligations con- tained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to him hereunder, without the previous written consent of the Owner. 7.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 7.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by regis- tered or certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 7A CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES 7.4.1 Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any act or omis- sion of the other party or of any of his employees, agents or others for whose acts he is legally liable, claim shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observance of such injury or damage. 7.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Con- tractor to furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder if and as required in the Bidding Documents or in the Contract Documents. 7.6 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 7.6.1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available there- under shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise im- posed or available by law. 7.6.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIA® . © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 11 7.7 TESTS 7.7.1 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having juris- diction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of its readiness so the Architect may observe such inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests or approvals con- ducted by public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall bear all costs of other inspections, tests or approvals. 7.7.2 If the Architect determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing, or approval which Subpara- graph 7.7.1 does not include, he will, upon written au- thorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as provided in Subparagraph 7.7.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Con- tract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs there- of, including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such failure; otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 7.7.3 Required certificates of inspection, testing or ap- proval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered by him to the Architect. 7.7.4 If the Architect is to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply. 7,8 INTEREST 7.8.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing at the place of the Project. 7,9 ARBITRATION 7.9.1 All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Owner arising out of, or relating to, the Contract Documents or the breach there- of, except as provided in Subparagraph 2.2.11 with re- spect to the Architect's decisions on matters relating to artistic effect, and except for claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by Subparagraphs 9.9.4 and 9.9.5, shall be de- cided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining unless the parties mutually agree otherwise. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolida- tion, joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, his employees or consultants except by written consent con- taining a specific reference to the Owner -Contractor Agreement and signed by the Architect, the Owner, the Contractor and any other person sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner, the Contractor and any other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law, whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in the arbi- tration. No person other than the Owner or Contractor shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsi- bility is insubstantial. Any consent to arbitration involving an additional person or persons shall not constitute con- sent to arbitration of any dispute not described therein or with any person not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and any other agreement to arbitrate with an additional person or persons duly consented to by the parties to the Owner -Contractor Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under the prevailing arbitration law. The award rendered by the arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 7.9.2 Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Owner -Contractor Agreement and with the American Arbitration Associa- tion, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. The demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraph 2.2.12 where applicable, and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the claim, dispute or other matter in question has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institu- tion of legal or equitable proceedings based on such claim, dispute or other matter in question would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. 7.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain its progress during any arbitration proceedings, and the Owner shall con- tinue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work as defined in Sub- paragraph 8.1.3, including authorized adjustments thereto. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in a notice to proceed. If there is no notice to proceed, it shall be the date of the Owner -Contractor Agreement or such other date as may be established therein. 8.1.3 The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Architect when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended. 8.1,4 The term day as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically designated. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 12 A201-1976 AIA" • n 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 0- lil 8.2.2 The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.2. He shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the prog- ress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or by any employee of either, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather condi- tions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties, or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by de- lay authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by any other cause which the Architect determines may justify the delay, then the Contract Time shall be ex- tended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Architect not more than twenty days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. In the case of a continuing delay only one claim is necessary. The Contractor shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the progress of the Work. 8.3.3 If no agreement is made stating the dates upon which interpretations as provided in Subparagraph 2.2.8 shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall be al- lowed on account of failure to furnish such interpreta- tions until fifteen days after written request is made for them, and not then unless such claim is reasonable. 8.3.4 This Paragraph 8.3 does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provi- sions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9,1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Owner -Contractor Agreement and, including authorized adjustments thereto, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contrac- tor for the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9,2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Con- tractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, un- less objected to by the Architect, shall be used only as a basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date for each progress payment established in the Owner -Contractor Agreement, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment, notarized if required, supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to pay- ment as the Owner or the Architect may require, and re- flecting retainage, if any, as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- ments, payments will be made on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site and, if approved in ad- vance by the Owner, payments may similarly be made for materials or equipment suitably stored at some other location agreed upon in writing. Payments for materials or equipment stored on or off the site shall be con- ditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials or equip- ment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, including applicable insurance and transportation to the site for those materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner either by incorporation in the construction or upon the receipt of payment by the Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances, herein- after referred to in this Article 9 as "liens"; and that no Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or by any other person performing Work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Project, sub- ject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or other- wise imposed by the Contractor or such other person. 9,4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after the re- ceipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue a Certificate for Payment to the Owner, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor in writing his reasons for withholding a Certificate as pro- vided in Subparagraph 9.6.1. 9.4,2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will con- stitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on his observations at the Site as provided in Sub- paragraph 2.2.3 and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subse- quent tests required by or performed under the Contract Documents, to minor deviations from the Contract Docu- ments correctable prior to completion, and to any specific qualifications stated in his Certificate); and that the Con- tractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, by issuing a Certificate for Payment, the Archi- tect shall not thereby be deemed to represent that he has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work or that he has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIA® . © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 13 sequences or procedures, or that he has made any exam- ination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac- tor has used the moneys previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9,5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.5.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Pay- ment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcon- tractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work, the amount to which said Subcon- tractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually re- tained, if any, from payments to the Contractor on ac- count of such Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, re- quire each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. 9.5.3 The Architect may, on request and at his discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts applied for by the Contractor and the action taken there- on by the Architect on account of Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.5.4 Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys to any Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.5.5 No Certificate for a progress payment, nor any progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occu- pancy of the Project by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Con- tract Documents. 9,6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD 9.6.1 The Architect may decline to certify payment and may withhold his Certificate in whole or in part, to the extent necessary reasonably to protect the Owner, if in his opinion he is unable to make representations to the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.2. If the Architect is unable to make representations to the Owner as pro- vided in Subparagraph 9.4.2 and to certify payment in the amount of the Application, he will notify the Contractor as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and the Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which he is able to make such rep- resentations to the Owner. The Architect may also decline to certify payment or, because of subsequently discov- ered evidence or subsequent observations, he may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in his opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: .1 defective work not remedied, .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indi- cating probable filing of such claims, .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment, .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor, .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com- pleted within the Contract Time, or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accord- ance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.2 When the above grounds in Subparagraph 9.6.1 are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 9,7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Pay- ment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents any amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Sum shall be in- creased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut -down, delay and start-up, which shall be ef- fected by appropriate Change Order in accordance with Paragraph 12.3. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a designated portion thereof which is acceptable to the Owner, is substantially complete as defined in Subpara- graph 8.1.3, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Architect a list of items to be completed or cor- rected. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect on the basis of an inspection deter- mines that the Work or designated portion thereof is sub- stantially complete, he will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion, shall state the responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall com- plete the items listed therein, Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the Date of Sub- stantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and the Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsi- bilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.2 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or desig- nated portion thereof and upon application by the Con- tractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof, as provided in the Con- tract Documents. 9.9 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.9.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for finaf inspection and acceptance and upon re- ceipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 14 A201-1976 AIA • D 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 200% 0 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible mem- ber of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contrac- tor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and the Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 EMERGENCIES 10.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at his discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Con- tractor on account of emergency work shall be deter- mined as provided in Article 12 for Changes in the Work. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone di- rectly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by any- one for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee bene- fit acts; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, oc- cupational sickness or disease, or death of his employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sick- ness or disease, or death of any person other than his employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal in- jury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or in- directly related to the employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than any limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents, or required by law, which- ever is greater. 11.1.3 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4.18. 11.1.4 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be can- celled until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining his own liability insurance and, at his option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall pur- chase and maintain property insurance upon the entire Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors in the Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and ex- tended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. If the Owner does not intend to purchase such insurance for the full insurable value of the entire Work, he shall in- form the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of himself, his Subcontrac- tors and the Sub -subcontractors in the Work, and by ap- propriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by failure of the Owner to purchase or maintain such insurance and to so notify the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. If not cov- ered under the all risk insurance or otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall effect and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the Work stored off the site or in transit when such por- tions of the Work are to be included in an Application for Payment under Subparagraph 93.2. 11.3.2 The Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Con- tract Documents or by law. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontrac- tors and Sub -subcontractors in the Work. 11.3.3 Any loss insured under Subparagraph 11.3.1 is to be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.8. The Con- tractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received by the Contractor, and by ap- propriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each Subcontractor to make pay- ments to his Sub -subcontractors in similar manner. 11.3.4 the Owner shall file a copy of all policies with the Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. 11 .3.5 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described in Subparagraphs 11.3.1 and 11.3.2 or other special hazards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if pos- sible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 16 A201-1976 AIA® . © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 promptly make such inspection and, when he finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, he will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of his observations and inspections, the Work has been com- pleted in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, and noted in said final Certificate, is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that the conditions precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment as set forth in Subparagraph 9.9.2 have been fulfilled. 9.9.2 Neither the final payment nor the remaining re- tained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or his property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (3), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obliga- tions, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens aris- ing out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If any Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any such lien. If any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all mon- eys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. 9.9.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by the issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or cor- rected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished as provided in Paragraph 7.5, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 9.9.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1 unsettled liens, .2 faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial Completion, .3 failure of the Work to comply with the require- ments of the Contract Documents, or .4 terms of any special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 9.9.5 The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previ- ously made in writing and identified by the Contractor as unsettled at the time of the final Application for Pay- ment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take all reasonable precau- tions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 all employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 all the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub -subcontractors; and. .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, in- cluding trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as re- quired by existing conditions and progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, in- cluding posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. 10.2.4 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss (other than damage or loss insured under Para- graph 11.3) to any property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub -subcontractor, or anyone di- rectly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by any- one for whose acts any of them may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to the acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contrac- tor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to his obligations under Paragraph 4.18. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIA® . © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 15 • • 11.3.6 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and the Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors, agents and employees each of the other, and (2) the Architect and separate contractors, if any, and their sub- contractors, sub -subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.3 or any other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they may have to the pro- ceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee. The foregoing waiver afforded the Architect, his agents and employees shall not extend to the liability imposed by Subparagraph 4.18.3. The Owner or the Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, separate con- tractors, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors by ap- propriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of all other parties enumerated in this Subparagraph 11.3.6. 11.3.7 If required in writing by any party in interest, the Owner as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for the proper performance of his duties. He shall deposit in a separate account any money so re- ceived, and he shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in ac- cordance with an award by arbitration in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 7.9. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replace- ment of damaged work shall be covered by an appropri- ate Change Order. 11.3.8 The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after the occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power, and if such objection be made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 7.9. The Owner as trustee shall, in that case, make settlement with the insurers in accordance with the directions of such arbitrators. If dis- tribution of the insurance proceeds by arbitration is re- quired, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.3.9 If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Com- pletion thereof, such occupancy or use shall not com- mence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Owner and Contractor and to which the insurance company or companies providing the property insurance have con- sented by endorsement to the policy or policies. This in- surance shall not be cancelled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy or use. Consent of the Contractor and of the insurance company or companies to such occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. 11.4 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE 11.4.1 The Owner, at his option, may purchase and main- tain such insurance as will insure him against loss of use of his property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of his property, including con- sequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused, to the extent covered by insurance under this Paragraph 11.4. ARTICLE 12 CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.1 CHANGE ORDERS 12.1.1 A Change Order is a written order to the Contrac- tor signed by the Owner and the Architect, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Con- tract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement there- with, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 12.1.2 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Docu- ments. 12.1.3 The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined in one or more of the following ways: .1 by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 by cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 by the method provided in Subparagraph 12.1.4. 12.1.4 If none of the methods set forth in Clauses 12.1.3.1, 12.1.3.2 or 12.1.3.3 is agreed upon, the Contrac- tor, provided he receives a written order signed by the Owner, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such Work shall then be determined by the Architect on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in the case of an increase in the Con- tract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clauses 12.1.3.3 and 12.1.3.4 above, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized account- ing together with appropriate supporting data for inclu- sion in a Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, cost shall be limited to the fol- lowing: cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery; cost of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits re- quired by agreement or custom; workers' or workmen's compensation insurance; bond premiums; rental value of equipment and machinery; and the additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on account shall be made on the Archi- tect's Certificate for Pavment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for any deletion AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIAO • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 70006 A201-1976 17 or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum will be the amount of the actual net cost as con- firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 12.1,5 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities orig- inally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial in- equity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 12.2 CONCEALED CONDITIONS 12.2.1 Should concealed conditions encountered in the performance of the Work below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Contract Documents, or should unknown physical conditions below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordi- narily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in this Contract, be encountered, the Contract Sum shall be equitably ad- justed by Change Order upon claim by either party made within twenty days after the first observance of the conditions. 12.3 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST 12.3.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, he shall give the Architect written notice thereof within twenty days after the occur- rence of the event giving rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall pro- ceed in accordance with Paragraph 10.3. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. If the Owner and the Con- tractor cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, it shall be determined by the Architect. Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order. 12,3.2 If the Contractor claims that additional cost is in- volved because of, but not limited to, (1) any written interpretation pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.8, (2) any order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Para- graph 3.3 where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pur- suant to Paragraph 12.4, or (4) failure of payment by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9.7, the Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Subparagraph 12.3.1. 12.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 12.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Docu- ments. Such changes shall be effected by written order, and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. ARTICLE 13 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 13.1.1 If any portion of the Work should be covered con- trary to the request of the Architect or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for his observation and shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. 13.1.2 If any other portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to ob- serve prior to being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Con- tractor. If such Work be found in accordance with the Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replace- ment shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work be found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless it be found that this condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor as provided in Article 6, in which event the Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs. 13.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 13.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the Architect as defective or as failing to con- form to the Contract Documents whether observed be- fore or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary thereby. 13.2.2 If, within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or within one year after acceptance by the Owner of desig- nated equipment or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any appli- cable special warranty required by the Contract Docu- ments, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condi- tion. This obligation shall survive termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition, 13.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site all por- tions of the Work which are defective or non -conforming and which have not been corrected under Subparagraphs 4.5.1, 13.2.1 and 13.2.2, unless removal is waived by the Owner. 13.2,4 If the Contractor fails to correct defective or non- conforming Work as provided in Subparagraphs 4.5.1, 13.2.1 and 13.2.2, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 3.4. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 18 A201-1976 AIAN • © 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 r L C, J 13.2.5 If the Contractor does not proceed with the cor- rection of such defective or non -conforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Archi- tect, the Owner may remove it and may store the mate- rials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written notice sell such Work at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should have been borne by the Contractor, including compensa- tion for the Architect's additional services made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 13.2.6 The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of the Owner or separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such correction or removal. 13.2.7 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 13.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4.5 hereof. The establishment of the time period of one year after the Date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Docu- ments relates only to the specific obligation of the Con- tractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be com- menced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to his obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 13.3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON -CONFORMING WORK 13.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non- conforming Work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Contract Sum where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 If the Work is stopped for a period of thirty days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, such as a declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employ- ees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor, or if the Work should be stopped for a period of thirty days by the Contractor because the Architect has not issued a Certifi- cate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.7 or because the Owner has not made payment thereon as provided in Paragraph 9.7, then the Contractor may, upon seven addi- tional days' written notice to the Owner and the Archi- tect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construc- tion equipment and machinery, including reasonable profit and damages. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER 14.2.1 If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his credi- tors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his in- solvency, or if he persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is pro- vided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract Documents, then the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the site and of all mate- rials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be en- titled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.2 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or to the Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, in the manner provided in Paragraph 9.4, and this obliga- tion for payment shall survive the termination of the Contract. AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION • THIRTEENTH EDITION • AUGUST 1976 AIA® . 0 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 19 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 1-01. FUNCTION I. Where any articles of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, Thirteenth Edition, August 1976, Article I through 14 inclusive, are supplemented hereby, the provisions of such articles in the General Conditions shall remain in effect. All supplementary provisions shall be considered as added thereto. Where any such article is amended, voided, or superceded, hereby, provisions of such article not specifically amended, voided, or superceded shall remain in effect. 1-02. DEFINITIONS I. Paragraph 1.1 Definitions, add the following; 1.1.5 Owner: City of San Juan Capistrano 1.1.6 Architect; Michael Graves 34 Witherspoon Street i Princeton, New Jersey 08540 1.1.7 Provide: To f-urnish and install. 1-03. DRAWINGS FURNISHED 1. Paragraph 3.2 Information and Services Required to the Owner, subparagraph 3.2.5 modify to suit the following: All work for the Project is included in the one set of Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor will be provided with 15 copies without charge. Additional copies will be furnished at reproduction costs. 1-04. ERRORS AND OMISSIONS I. Paragraph 4.2 Review of Contract Documents, delete and substitute: If any errors or omissions appear in the Contract Documents, they shall be resolved before construction commences. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 1-05. SALES TAX EXEMPTION I. Paragraph 4.6 Taxes, add the following; 4.6.2 Materials, equipment, etc., required for the Project is exempt from California Sales and Use Tax. The Owner is an exempt organiza- tion. The Contractor shall not include any such taxes in their Proposal. 1-06. BUILDING PERMITS Paragraph 4.7 Permits, Fees and Notices, add the following: 4.7.5 Building permits are required, but the fees will be waived by the Owner. A license is required of the Contractor and all sub- contractors, and no license fees shall be waived. 1-07. ARBITTRATION Paragraph 7.9 Arbitration, add the following: 7.9.4. The Arbitrators shall be three in number, one of whom shall be chosed by the Owner, one by the Contractor, and these two Arbitrators shall chosen a third member. 1-08. DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Paragraph 8.1 Definitions, subparagraph 8.1.3 modify to suit the following: The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work shall be the Date of the Certificate of Occupancy. 1-09. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Paragraph 8.2 Progress and Completion, add the following: Notwithstanding anything herein or in the General Conditions to the contrary, it is understood and agreed that if all the work called for under the Contract in.all parts and requirements is not finished or completed within 270 calendar days from and after the date of award of the Contract, damage will be sustained by the Owner and that it is and will be impracticable and extremely difficult to ascertain and determine the actual damage which the Owner will sustain in the event of and by reason of such delay, and Contractor shall pay to the SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Owner the sum of five hundred Dollars ($500.) per day for the first forty-five (45) days and 1500.00 per day thereafter for each and every calendar day's delay in finishing the work in excess of the 270 calendar days hereinbefore provided, and Owner may deduct the amount thereof from any monies due or that may become due to Con- tractor under the Contract or pursue any other available remedy for recovery thereof. This provision is subject to the terms of Article 8 and in particular paragraph 8.3.1 of the General Conditions, and Contractor shall not be relieved of liability for liquidated damages or engineering and architectural construction review, administration of the Contract and other overhead expenses for any period of delay in completion of the work in excess of that expressly provided for herein and in said Article 8. This provision does not exclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions set forth in the Contract Documents." 1-10. LABOR DISPUTES 1. Paragraph 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time, subparagraph 8.3.1, modify to suit the following: The Contractor shall be responsible for insuring continuity of the work pursuant to the work schedule. As a condition of submitting this bid the Contractor agrees that his responsibility extends to taking reasonable and adequate steps to avoid labor stoppages for any reason. Such reasonable steps include analyzing the area labor market conditions in order to anticipate whether any employment decision they may make will be likely to cause a labor dispute and therefore a work stoppage. By submitting this bid the Contractor agrees that if failure to take such steps result in delays he may be held by the Owner to be in breach of contract and in any event he shall be held liable for any and all costs and damages arising out of such delay. RETAINAGE Paragraph 9.3 Applications for Payment, add the following: 9.3.4 Applications for Payments shall reflect a 10 percent retainage on labor and materials incorporated in the work and a 50 percent retainage on materials suitably stored as provided in subparagraph 9.3.2. Upon Substantial Completion of the entire Work, a Sum sufficient to increase the total payments to 95 percent of the Contract Sum. 1-12. FORM OF APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 1. Paragraph 9.3 Application for Payment, add the following: . 9.3.5 Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of his application for payment to the Architect on AIA Document 6702, Application and Certificates for payment on a monthly basis. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 1-13. DISTRIBUTION OF FUNDS STATEMENT Paragraph 9.3 Applications for Payment, add the following: 9.3.6 Starting with the second monthly application for payment they shall be accompanied by a statement showing the distribution of funds from the previous payment. 1-14. MINIMUM INSURANCE LIMITS Paragraph 11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance, add the following: 11.1.5 Insurance specified to be provided by the Contractor under paragraph 11.1 shall be on an Occurrence Basis as follows: Public Liability Insurance wih individual limit of $1,000,000 and a total limit of $3,000,000 for each occurrence. 2 Contractor's contingent public liability insurance and Subcontractor's public liability insurance, in the same amounts as above. 3 Property damage in the amount of $500,000 each occurrence. .4 Vehicle liability insurance with a limit of $1,000,000 for each person, and a total limit of $3,000,000 for each occurrence, and a limit of $500,000 property damage for each occurrence. This insurance must include non -owned, hired, or rented vehicles, as well as owned. .5 Contractual Liability insurance as applicable to the Contractor's obligations under paragraph 4.18 of the AIA General Conditions. .6 Workmen's Compensation Insurance of not less than statutory limits. .7 Completed Operations Insurance written to the limits specified for liability insurance specified under subparagraph .I above. Coverage shall be required from the date of the start of Beneficial Occupancy until one year after the issuance date of final Certificate for Payment. SUPPLEMENTARY.GENERAL CONDITIONS 1-15. PROPERTY INSURANCE Paragraph 11.3 Property Insurance, add the following: 11.3.10 The term "extended coverage" in subparagraph 11.3.1 shall be deemed to include coverage against water and flood damage, lightning, wind, hail, riots, civil commotion, vehicles damage, aircraft damage and smoke., 11.3.11 The fact that the Owner is furnishing Property Insurance shall not be interpreted to relieve the Contractor of his obliga- tion to complete the work without additional cost to the Owner beyond the Contract Amount. Any loss or cost of repair not covered or.not fully covered by insurance shall be borne by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. 11.3.12 The Contractor may carry whatever additional insurance he deems necessary to protect himself against hazards not covered by the Owner's property insurance and against loss of owned, or rented capital equipment and tools owned by mechanics, or any tools, equipment, scaffolding, stagings, towers and forms owned or rented by the Contractor, the capital value of which is not included in the cost of the work. 1-16. MISCELLANEOUS CONDITIONS Owner as Agent of Lessor Contractor hereby understands and agrees that the Owner is acting as agent on behalf of a lessor ("Lessor") from whom the Project will be leased by Owner upon substantial completion thereof, which Lessor shall be designated by written notification given to Contractor prior to the execution of the Contract. Contractor further understands and agrees that the Owner is acting as agent of Lessor for all purposes under the Contract Documents. 2. Payments To Be Made From Construction Fund Contractor under- stands and agrees that Owner and Lessor have caused to be delivered certain certificates of participation for the purpose of providing moneys to finance the construction of the Project, and that pay- ments to the Contractor are to be made solely from the proceeds of such certificates deposited in the Construction Fund established pursuant to the Trust Agreement by and among the Owner, Lessor and the trustee bank therein designated ('Trustee'), relating to the execution and delivery of said certificates of participation. The Owner will deposit with the Trustee an amount which, together with the interest to be earned thereon, will be sufficient to pay the Contractor pursuant to the Contract. All progress payments and the final payment will be made exclusively from the funds on deposit with the Trustee and the Contractor understands and agrees that the Owner has no liablility for payment except from such moneys. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 3 Imdemnification. Contractor agrees that the imdemnification made by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 4.18 shall apply with equal force and effect to the Lessor and the Trustee, and that said Paragraph is hereby amended in its entirety by striking the word 'Owner' whereveer said word appears and inserting in its place the phrase 'Owner, Lessor and Trustee'. 4. Insurance. The Comprehensive General Liability Insurance and Comprehensive Automobile Insurance Policies maintained under Article 11 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construc- tion shall include as additional named insured the Owner, the Lessor, the Trustee, the Architect and their respective officers, agents and employees.. 5. Working Hours. Construction is limited to the hours 7 a.m. to 6 p.m., Monday thru Friday, 8:30 a.m, to 4:30 p.m. Saturdays unless otherwise expressly approved by the Owner. 6. Redesign. Add to Article 4 - Contractor, the following: 4.19 REDESIGN 4.19.1 If the Contractor makes, or causes to be made, due to approval of substitute equipment or otherwise, any change in the form, type, system and details of construction from those shown on the Drawings, he shall pay for all costs arising from such changes. The Contractor shall pay all of the Architectural and Engineering costs incurred by the owner which are necessary to accomodate such changes. END OF PART 1 SUMMARY OF WORK Section IA - Page I SECTION IA - SUMMARY OF WORK 1-01. INCLUSION OF GENERAL CONDITIONS AND DIVISION ONE I. The General Conditions and Supplement are a part of each and every Section of these Specifications and apply to each and every Section as fully as if repeated in each case therein. 1-02. SUMMARY OF THE WORK I. The work under this Contract shall include the.furnishing of all labor, materials, sales tax, insurance, tools, equipment, transporta- tion, superintendence, and miscellaneous services required for the construction of a Library/Auditorium Complex for the City of San Juan Capistrano, Orange County, California as described in the Contract Document and Supplement. 1-03. WORK INCLUDED IN CONTRACT 1. Improvements to be completed under this Contract shall include, but not be limited to clearing, grading, excavation, sitework, underground utilities to points designated, and the complete, finished building, all in accordance with the Contract Documents. f-04. WORK NOT INCLUDED IN CONTRACT I. Items indicated on the Drawings as "by others" or N.I.C. (Not In Contract) include but are not limited to the following: a. Installation and hook up of Owner provided equipment. b. Furniture, stacks and furnishings not specified herein. 1-05.. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1. Drawings which form a part of the Contract Documents and which accompany these Specifications are as listed on Project Drawings. 2. Specifications which form a part of the Contract Documents consist of Divisions and Sections as listed in Table of Contents of these Specifications. SUMMARY OF WORK Section IA - Page 2 3. Divisions of the Specifications: For convenience, these Specifications are arranged in several Divisions and Sections, but such separation does not establish limits of Work required by any Subcontract or trade. Terms and conditions of such limitations are wholly between Contractor and Subcontractors, subject to approval of the Owner, to the end that Work is done by those best qualified. 4. Addenda to Specifications: Instructions issued by Architect covering changes in, or special interpretations of, Drawings or Specifications are incorporated in Contract Documents by means of Addenda before executing the Contract. Verify that changes and interpretations covered by such instructions have been correctly listed and described in related Addenda. 1-06. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISE The area to be set aside for the use of the Contractor is indicated on Drawings. Except for subsurface utility work, temporary roads, and any other work specifically shown or noted, Contractor shall confine his operations within the limits of work so indicated. 2. Work shall not proceed for the site or building until all temporary work such as fences, barricades, job office, and sanitary facilities are furnished and installed as specified in "Temporary Facilities." 3. Parking of automobiles bythe construction personnel shall be limited to areas adjacent to the work, in locations as designated by the Architect or Owner. END OF SECTION IA • COORDINATION SECTION 16 - COORDINATION 1-01. GENERAL Section IB - Page I Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching of his work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by work of all trades as shown, or reasonably implied by, the Drawings and Specifications for the completed structure 2. Any cost caused by defective or ill timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 1-02. OTHER CONTRACTS 1. Construction operations for work other than the work under this Contract may be conducted on the job site and premises. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and other Contractors. in all matters relating to work and use of facilities at the site. 2. The Contractor shall assume the risk of possible delays to his work due to other work, not included in this Contract, at the site and no additional compensation shall be made therefor. 3. If due to other work at the site the Contractor sustains a delay which could not have been avoided by the judicious handling of forces, equipment and material, and provided the Contractor notifies the Architect, in writing, of the delay (with substantiating evidence) within 15 calendar days of the beginning of the delay, considerations of a time extension will be made. If a time extension is granted, the Contractor shall be relieved of any claim by the Owner for liquidated damages or penalty during such time extension. 1-03. MATERIAL INSPECTION Contractor shall make a close inspection of all materials as delivered and all work in progress and shall promptly reject and return all defective materials and re -do any substandard work without waiting for their rejection by the Architect. 1-04. FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND TEMPLATES 1. Contractor shall secure all field measurements required for proper and adequate fabrication and installation of the work included in this Contract. Exact measurements are the Contractor's responsibility. Contractor shall also furnish all templates, patterns, and setting instructions required for the installation of all work. All dim- ensions shall be verified by the Contractor in the field. COORDINATION Section IB - Page 2 _ 1-05. PROTECTION OF WORK AND FACILITIES Protection of Adjacent Property; The Contractor shall protect all adjacent property, roads, streets, curbs, shrubbery, lawns, erosion control materials, and planting during construction operations. All damaged materials shall be replaced and/or repaired at the expense of the Contractor. 2. Protection of Work in Place; Upon completion, the entire Work shall be delivered to the Owner in proper, whole, and unblemished con- dition. a. Parts of Work in place that are subject to damage because of operations being carried on adjacent thereto shall be covered, boarded up, or substantially enclosed with adequate protection. b. Permanent openings used as access for the introduction of Work and materials to the structure shall have heads, jambs, and sills well blocked and boarded. Forms of protection shall be such as will be deemed safe and sufficient by the Architect. 1-06. OVERLOADING If the Contractor shall cause, permit, or allow any part of the premises or the building to be overloaded by setting thereon any material or equipment, or by performing thereon any of his work, he shall do so at his sole risk, and he shall be solely responsible for any and all loss, damage and/or injury arising or resulting therefrom. 1-07. WORKMANSHIP All work shall be performed in accordance with the prevailing standards of the industry. All items shown or indicated to be plumb, level, flat, or straight, shall be plumb, level, flat and straight throughout their entire extent, within the limits of tolerances specified. In cases where tolerances are not specified, all items shall be installed in accordance with established standards for work in each trade. 2. Contractor shall, prior to installing any item or material, assure himself that surfaces to receive such item or material are plumb, level, true to line and straight to the degree necessary to achieve tolerances specified or required. All shimming, blocking, stripping, grinding, or patching required to make such surface plumb, level, true to line and straight shall be performed without extra cost. �L • COORDINATION Section 16 - Page 3 3. All joints in finish materials shall be tight, straight, even and smooth. 4. All operable items shall operate smoothly, without sticking or binding, and without excessive "play" or looseness. 5. Finished appearance of all items, and of joints or transitions between items shall meet the established standards for each trade. 1-08. RUBBER TIRED EQUIPMENT All carts, trucks, wheelbarrows and similar wheeled conveyances used in or on any portion of the structure shall be equipped with pneumatic tires unless otherwise expressly authorized by the Owner. 1-10. CONCEALED WORK All work and required inspections thereof concealed behind finished construction, such as but not limited to gypsum wallboard, plaster and masonry surfaces, shall be accomplished prior to being covered by the finished construction. Any work covered before inspections have been made shall be uncovered and replaces as necessary at the Contractor's expense. 1-11. SLEEVES AND HANGERS The trades of each Section of Work are required to furnish and install conduits, outlets, piping sleeves, boxes, inserts or other materials and equipment necessary to be built into the Work by the Contractor. Promptly furnish same and set such sleeves or other materials as construction program requires. The trades shall cooperate fully in connection with performance of above Work; cutting in new Work will not be permitted. In event delays occur in delivery of sleeves or other materials, the affected trade may arrange to have boxes or other forms set at locations where piping or other material is to pass through or into slabs or other Work. Upon subsequent installation of sleeves or other material, Contractor shall fill around them with materials as required by the Contract. Necessary expenditures incurred for boxing out or filling shall be borne, without extra cost to the Owner, by the applicable trade, COORDINATION Section IS - Page 4 I-12. SUPERINTENDENT IDENTIFICATION Prior to the signinq of the Construction Contract the Contractor will submit to the Owner/Architect a listing of persons that will serve as job superintendent and Project Manager for the period of construction. Such persons shall devote such time as necessary to supervision for the proper execution and completion of the work. If the Contractor employs a job superintendent or a Project Manager for the work other than those listed without the Owner's prior written approval,.he shall be considered in material breach of the Contract. The Owner will not unreasonably withhold its approval of any change in the Contractor's Project Manager or job super- intendent. 1-13. AS BUILT DRAWINGS The General Contractor shall maintain "as. built" drawings of all work and subcontracts, continuously as the job progresses. A separate set of prinfs, for this purpose only, shall be kept at the job site at all times. It shall be required that these drawings be up to date at the time each progress bill is submitted. The Architect will furnish the Contractor a complete set of reproducible transparencies for the purpose of "as built" drawings. Contractor shall pay the cost of the reproduction of all such transparencies. All deviations from the drawings, exact locations of all utilities and mechanical and electrical lines, detai6s, etc., shall be finally incorporated on this reproducible set in black ink. 2. During the course of construction, actual locations to scale shall be identified in ink on the drawings for all runs of mechanical and electrical work, including all site utilities, etc., installed undergrounds, In walls, floors, and furred spaces, or otherwise concealed. Deviations from the drawings shall be shown in detail. All main runs, whether piping, conduit, duct work, drain lines, etc., shall be located by dimension and elevation. 3. Where the Architect's drawings are not of sufficient size and detail, Contractor shall furnish his own drawings for incorporation of details and dimensions. 4. This final set of "as built" drawings shall be signed and dated confirming completeness by the Contractor and delivered to the Architect prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy for this project. COORDINATION Section IB - Page 5 1-14. PUBLIC UTILITIES I. The Contractor shall send proper notices, make all necessary arrange- ments and perform all other services required in care and maintenance of all public utilities. Assume all responsibility concerning same for which the Owner may be liable. 2. In case it should be necessary to move the property of any public utility or fracnchise, the cost of which because of the terms of any franchise or for any other reason must be borne by the utility, such utility will, upon proper application by the Contractor, be notified by the Architect to move such property within a reasonable specified time. The Contractor shall not interfere with said property until after the expiration of the time specified. 3. In case it should be necessary to move or temporarily maintain the property of any public utility or any other property, the cost of which is not required to be borne by the Owner thereof, the Contractor shall bear all expenses incidental to the removal of temporary maintenance of such property in a manner satisfactory to the Owner thereof, whether such removal or temporary maintenance be done by the Owner thereof, it being understood that in such case, said Owner has the option of doing such work with his own forces or permitting the work to be done by the Contractor. 4. The right is reserved to the controlling governmental agencies and to Owners of public utilities and franchises to enter at any time upon any street, alley, right of way, or easement for the purpose of maintaining and making repairs to their property. END OF SECTION IB CUTTING AND PATCHING Section IC - Page 1 SECTION IC - CUTTING AND PATCHING 1-01. DESCRIPTION 1. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: a. Summary of Work - Section IA. b. Coordination - Section IB. c. Excavating and Backfilling - Section 2B. d. General Provisions, Mechanical - Division 15. e. General Provisions, Electrical - Division 16. 2. Execute cutting (including excavating), fitting or patching of work, required to: a. Make several parts fit properly. b. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. c. Remove and replace defective Work. d. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. e. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. f. Install specified Work in existing construction. 3. When the Architect is in reasonable doubt of the quality of covered and concealed work, the Contractor shall, upon written instructions of the Architect: a. Uncover Work to provide for Architect's observation of covered work. b. Remove samples of installed materials for testing. C. In the event that the uncovered work is not defective, the cost of cutting and patching shall be born by the Owner. CUTTING AND PATCHING Section IC - Page 2 4. Do not endanger any Work by cutting or altering Work or any part of it. 5. Do not cut or alter Work of another Contractor without written consent of Architect. 1-02. SUBMITTALS I. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety of Project, or Work of another Contractor, submit written notice to Architect, requesting consent to proceed withccutting, including: a. Identification of Project. b. Description of Affected Work. c. Necessity for cutting. d. Affect on other Work, on structural integrity of Project. e. Description of proposed Work. Designate: (1) Scope of cutting and patching. (2) Contractor and trades to execute Work. (3) Products proposed to be used. (4) Extent of refinishing. f. Alternatives to cutting and patching. g. Designation of party responsible for cost of cutting and patching. 2. Prior to cutting and patching done on instruction of Architect, submit cost estimate. 3. Should condition of. Work, or.schedule, ihdicate change of materials or methods, submit written recommendation to Architect including: a. Conditions indicating change. b. Recommendations for alternative materials or methods. C. Submittals as required for Substitutions. CUTTING AND PATCHING Section IC - Page 3 4. Submit written notice to Architect, designating time Work will be uncovered, to provide for observation. 1-03. PAYMENT FOR COSTS 1. Costs caused by ill-timed or defective Work, or work not conforming to Contract Documents, shall be paid by the party responsible for ill-timed, rejected or nonconforming Work. 1-04. MATERIALS I. For replacement of Work removed: Comply with Specifications 1-05. INSPECTION I. Inspect existing conditions of Work, including elements subject to movements or damage during: a. Cutting and patching. b. Excavating and backfilling. 2. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products.. 1-06. PREPARA71ON PRIOR TO CUTTING I. Provide shoring, bracing and support as required to maintain structural integrity of Project. 2. Provide protection for other portions of Project. 3. Provide protection from elements. 1-07. PERFORMANCE I. Execute filling and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified tolerances, finishes. 2. Execute cutting by methods which will prevent damage to other Work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of new Work. \J CUTTING AND PATCHING Section IC - Page 4 3. Execute excavating, backfilling, and compaction by methods which will prevent damage to other Work, and will prevent settlement. 4. Restore Work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish. a. Continous Surfaces: To nearest intersections. b. Assembly: Entire refinishing. END OF SECTION IC FIELD ENGINEERING Section ID -Page I SECTION 1D - FIELD ENGINEERING 1-01. SITE CONDITIONS AND SURVEYS Before beginning work, the Contractor shall compare actual site conditions with the requirements of the Drawings, and shall verify all existing conditions and dimensions. Should any discrepancy be found, report same immediately to the Architect before proceeding with the Work, Data and information shown and indicated are as accurate as could be obtained but are not guaranteed. 2. Prior to starting excavation, Contractor, Owner and Architect shall jointly survey the building immediately adjacent to the Project, making permanent note and record of such existing damage as cracks, sags, loose blocks or bricks, or other similar damage. This record shall serve as a basis for determination of subsequent damage to these structures due to settlement or movement or damage resulting from Contractor's operations. Such damage shall be suitably marked on the structure if possible and the official record of existing damaging signed by all parties making the survey. Damage of any nature to existing adjacent buildings, not noted in the original survey but subsequently noted, shall be reported immediately to • Architect. The Contractor may record existing conditions on B x 10 glossy photographs, and if so, shall submit such photo- graphs to the Owner before construction begins. 3. The Drawings establish limits of the site of construction, restric- tions and permanent bench marks. All other bench marks, stakes, grades, levels and lines shall be established and maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall pay for the services of a licensed surveyor to lay out the work and verify the finish grading. The surveyor shall be approved by the Architect, but he shall not have any interest in the Contract. Any bench marks, stakes, grades, levels or lines disturbed during progress of the work under the Contract shall be reestablished by the surveyor. 4. As soon as practicable, the surveyor shall verify the the layout of all structures and paving. All work that is not correctly located in accordance with the intent of the Contract Drawings must be relocated in accordance with such intention as the Architect may direct and as approved by Owner. 5. The Contractor shall verify all grades, levels, lines and dimensions indicated on the Drawings, and he shall report all inconsistencies to the Architect before commencing work. FIELD ENGINEERING Section ID - Page 2 — 6. Prior to starting excavation, Contractor shall establish bench marks as required. 7. Elevations of bench marks shall be taken every 2 weeks until floor slabs are poured, or more often if a change in condition is noted or suspected during excavation and construction. The datum used to establish the elevations shall be sufficiently distant from the site so as not to be affected by any settlement resulting from construction operations. 8. The results of initial elevations and subsequent checks shall be noted in permanent form and submitted to Architect immediately after each set of elevations has been taken. Any settlement noted shall be reported immediately to Architect by telephone. 9. The Contractor shall provide and maintain batterboards at corners of all constructions. Contactor shall establish, provide and safely maintain bench marks in at least two widely separated places. As work progresses, the Contractor shall establish, provide and safely maintain bench marks at each level, and he shall establish and mark exact locations of portions of rough floors as a guide to all involved trades. - 10. All levels and locations shall be accurately maintained and per- iodically checked to avoid error. The building shall be checked at each stage of construction for plumb and square. END OF SECTION 1D REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Section IE - Page I SECTION IE - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1-01. CODES AND STANDARDS I. Any material specified by reference to the number, symbol, or title of a specific standard such as a Commercial Standard, American Standard, A Federal Specification, Industry or Government Code, a trade association code or standard, or other similar standard, shall comply with the requirements and any amendments or supple- ments thereto in effect on the date of these Specifications, except as limited to type, class or grade, or modified in such reference. 2. The standard referred to, except as modified in the Specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these Speci- fications. These standards are not furnished to Bidders since manufacturers and trades involved are assumed to be familiar with their requirements. 1-02. COMMON REFERENCE STANDARDS • I. Reference in the Specifications to known standards such as codes, standard specifications, etc., promulgated by professional or technical Associations, Institutes, Societies are intended to mean the latest edition of each such standard adopted and published as of the date of the Contract for the-Vork of this Project, except where otherwise specifically indicated. Each such standard referred to shall be considered a part of the Specifications to the same extent as if reproduced therein in full. The following is a representative list of such organizations together with the abbreviation by which each is identified: UBC 1979 Uniform Building Code UPC 1979 Uniform Plumbing Code UMC 1979 Mechanical Code NEC 1978 PIational Electric Code AASHO American Association of State Highway Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers AISC American Institute of Steel Construction API American Petroleum Institute ASA American Standards Association ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWSC American Welding Society Code AWWA American Water Works Association • WIC Woodworking Institute of California OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Section IE - Page 2 CSI Construction Specifications Institute FIA Factory Insurance Association NEC National Electrical Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. USASI United State of American Standards Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ANSI American National Standard Institute APA American Plywood Association FS Federal Specification MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction END OF SECTION IE ALTERNATE BIDS Section IF - Page I SECTION IF - ALTERNATE BIDS 1-01. GENERAL Alternate Bid work is for the substitution, omission, or addition of the following materials, items or construction from that shown and specified for Base Bid work. Accepted Alternate Bid prices shall be deemed to reflect the increase or decrease, including all overhead and profit applicable thereto, in cost of all work of every name and nature which may be affected thereby and no subsequent claims for extras will be considered. 2. Materials and workmanship of the Alternate Bid Work shall conform to the requirements specified under the various Sections of the Specifications for similar items of work. Where methods of construction, materials, finishes or details of installation required by an Alternate Bid differs from the requirements shown on the Drawings or specified for corresponding Base Bid items, the Alternate Construction materials, etc., will be subject to approval by the Architect, and subject to the requirements of the Contract Conditions and General Requirements. • 3. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, certifications, guarantees and samples for work under accepted Alternate Bids for review and approval in conformance with the Contract Conditions specified in Section 1G. 4. Prior to installation of the alternate items, verify that all surfaces have been modified as necessary to accept the installation and that the item or items may be installed in complete accordance with their manufacturer's current recommendations; in the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect and proceed as he directs. 5. Acceptance of the alternate makes all requirements of scope, perfor- mance, quality assurance submissions, service and guarantee binding as if that material name appeared in the Specifications for the Base Bid. All necessary changes in building design or construction to accommodate the alternate material shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor without extra cost to the Owner. • ALTERNATE BIDS 1-02. DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATE BIDS Section IF - Page 2 _ Alternate Bid No. 1: Omit Wood Lattice Pavilions. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid for omitting the 3 pavilions and related work as shown and specified. Under the Alternate the space taken up by the pavilions shall be seeded and irrigated as lawn area, and openings in the courtyard wall shall be fitted with door Type #2. See Sht. Al 2. Alternate Bid No. 2: Omit Trash Enclosure. State the amount to be deducted .from the Base Bid for omitting the trash enclosure and related work as shown and specified. Under the Alternate trash collection shall be part of Janitor Room #165 with the single exterior door changed to double doors shown on Sht. A23. Also adjust mow strip and shrub row along parking stalls in area vacated by the trash enclosure and walkway. See Sht. Al . 3. Alternate Bid No. 3: Omit Fountain, Semi -Circular Pool, and connecting Flume. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid for omitting the fountain, semi -circular pool and connecting flume, and related work as shown and specified. Under the Alternate provide planting and irrigation per clarification drawing in area vacated by the fountain, semi -circular pool, and connecting flume, and stub out plumbing and electrical between fountain and/or pool location and pump vault for future service connection. See Sht. Al 4. Alternate Bid No. 4: Omit the Reflecting Pool. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid for omitting the reflecting pool as shown and specified including related work. Under the Alternate, replace the pool with planting and irrigation as per clarificaton drawing and stub out plumbing and electrical between fountain and/or pool location and pump vault for future service connection. See Sht. Al 5. Alternate Bid No. 5: Omit trees and shrubs. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid for omitting all trees and shrubs (planting) shown and specified including the related work. Under the Alternate all areas vacated by trees and shrubs shall be planted with groundcover as shown on the drawings. See Sht. 6. Alternate Bid No. 6: Omit all Planting, Lawn and Irrigation System. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid for omitting all planting, seeding, irrigation system, topsoil and all related planting work and materials shown and specified. Under the Alternate the Contractor shall complete fine grading as shown and specified. See Sht. ALTERNATE BIDS Section IF - Page 3 7. Alternate Bid No. 7: Marble or Quartz Roof Chips in lieu of Slag Ballast. State the amount to be added to or deducted from the Base Bid for installing the specified white marble or quartz chips as roofing ballast in lieu of the standard slag or gravel. See Sht. 8. Alternate Bid No. 8: Kitchenette Unit. State the amount to be added to or deducted from the Base Bid for installing "Dwyer" or equivalent kitchenette units in the two kitchen areas in lieu of the kitchens shown. ,Units shall be Model No. E63EC to include 3 electric surface cooking units and oven, refrigerator, sink, counter- top with end and back splashes, wall end and back splash panels, undersink storage cabinet, wall cabinets with shelves, light and hood, matching fill pieces and trim for recessed installation, porcelain finish in color to be selected and cutlery drawer and cutting board. See Sht. 9. Alternate Bid No 9: Standard Lighting Fixtures. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid for providing standard lighting fixtures as specified on the Drawings in lieu of the custom lighting fixtures shown and specified in the Base Bid. See Sht. • 10. Alternate Bid No. 10: Single Glazing in Lieu of Double Glazing. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid for installing single glazing (double strength glass for lights up to 12 square feet , 3/16 crystal plate up to 27 square feet, and 1/4 float plate for over 27 square feet) in all exterior glass areas, doors and windows, which are insulating or double glazed under the Base Bid. See Sht. 11. Alternate Bid No. 11: Omit the Auditorium Entry Portal. State the amount to be deducted from the base bid for omitting the Auditorium Entry Portal and related work as shown. The space taken up by the portal shall be a continuous surface to match surrounding paving. See Sht. 12. Alternate Bid No. 12: Omit the Bicycle Parking Spaces. State the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid for omitting the bicycle parking spaces and surrounding retaining walls to either side of the library entrance on Acjachema Street. Relocate the two bicycle racks to alternate locations shown and replace paved surfaces with lawn and irrigation to fit surrounding grades. Omit guardrails at the top of the retaining walls. See Sht. 13. Alternate Bid No. 13: Adult Study Carrels. State the amount to be added to the Base Bid for built-in study carrels. See Sht. 14. Alternate Bid No 14: Motorized Projection Screen. State the amount to be added to or deducted from the Base Bid for providing a motorized projection screen in lieu of the 9' by 91 raised panel ALTERNATE BIDS Section IF - Page 4 and related furred construction shown on the west wall of the Auditorium. Under the Alternate the screen shall be a 9' by 9' Executive Senior Electrol as manufactured by Da -Lite Screen Company, Inc. Warsaw, Indiana 46580 or approved equivalent. See Sht. 15. Alternate Bid No. 15: Table Lamps. State the amount to be added to the Base Bid for providing (18) custom table lamps. Under the Alternate the Contractor shall mount the lamps to the table and desk tops, as required and connect through table and desk tops to floor outlets provided. See Sht. END OF SECTION 1F SUBMITTALS Section IG - Page I SECTION IG - SUBMITTALS 1-01. GENERAL I. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: a. Coordination - Section IB. 2. Submittals: a. Construction Schedule. J. Progress Reports. c. Shop drawings, samples and product data. d. Inspection and test reports. e. Schedule of values. 3. Coordination; a. Review construction schedule with prime Subcontractors. Revise bi-monthly to reflect changes. b. Progress reports shall reflect input from all sources: Prime subcontractors, weather etc. c. Other submittals shall be coordinated with the submittee so progress of project is not delayed. 1-02. FORMS I. Schedule is to be on a 17 by II inch sheet in bar -graph form. All sections of the Specifications shall be represented including temporary work, separate cost items and alternates, if any. 2. Shop Drawings: a. One (I) reproducible and three (3) blue liner copies. Section IG - Page 2 SUBMITTALS b. Review and approval by the Contractor, prior to submittal to the Architect, as regards compliance with Contract Documents and Specifications is required. c. The shop drawing stamp shall read as follows: This drawing has been reviewed only for conformance to the design concept of the project and the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for confirm- ing all dimensions and conditions of the building; for means, methods, and sequence of construction; and for coordination of the work of all trades. ❑ Approved ❑ Approved as corrected ❑ Not approved - revise marked items only and re- submit. ❑ Not approved - does not conform to the Contract Documents. By Date MICHAEL GRAVES, ARCHITECT, P.A. 3. Product Data: a. Provide 6 copies clearly marked to indicate the item or items proposed for use. b. Review and approval by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect is required. 4. Samples: a. Label and tag each sample or set of samples identifying the man- ufacturer's name, address, brand name, catalog number, the intended use in the Project, and the Project title. b. Unless noted otherwise all samples shall be submitted in triplicate. • r SUBMITTALS 5. Inspection and Test Reports: a. Submit four (4) sets to the Architect. Section IG - Page 3 b. These shall be submitted immediately to the Architect for review and distribution. 6. Schedule of Values: a. Submittal of 81 by 11 inch white paper. b. The basis for format shall be as follows: (1) Performance and Payment Bonds. (2) Field Supervision and Layout. (3) Temporary Facilities. (4) At least a separate line item cost for work required by each trade section of the Specification. 1-03. CONTENT 1. Schedule: • a. Provide complete sequence of construction by activity. (1) Shop drawings, product data samples, and dates final approved copies will be required by the Contractor in order not to delay the Work. Submittal dates shall be established by the Architect. (2) Decision dates for products specified by allowance, if any, and selection of finishes; product procurement and delivery dates, and dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. b. Identify work of separate phases, or other logically grouped activities. c. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of work as to the last day of the month. d. Provide separate subschedule, showing submittals, review times, procurement schedules, and delivery dates. 2. Progress Reports: The progress reports shall be made on a weekly basis and shall contain information concerning what progress has taken place in the construction in the previous week, what is to be accomplished in the following week and any questions or conditions • which could enhance or inhibit the construction process. It shall be submitted to the Owner at the weekly job meeting in duplicate. SUBMITTALS 3. Shop Drawings, Samples and Product Data: Section IG -Page 4 a. Contractor shall prepare and submit all shop drawings required by all sections of the Specifications, and all incidental shop drawings required for proper performance of the work. The shop drawings shall illustrate fully the requirements of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings, and shall accurately show quantities, kindsof material, methods of assembly, and all data required for fabrication, erection, and installation. The relationship to adjoining work, furnished under other Sections of the Specification, shall be properly shown. b. Samples shall be as called for in other Sections of these Specifications. c. Product data shall contain the information called for by the appropriate section of these Specifications. 4. Inspection and Test Reports: Inspection and test report shall pro- vide information concerning what was inspected or tested, the dates of inspection or test, who performed the inspection or test, the results as measured against the requirements of the Project Manual, and any deviations therefrom. - 5. The Schedule of Values: The schedule of values shall contain the necessary information concerning the amounts of money to by used in the parts of construction and will be used as a basis for the Con- tractors "Application for Payment." Upon request by the Owner, the Contractor will provide substantiating data to support the values provided. 1-04. UPDATING AND REVIEW Show all changes of the construction progress on the Project Schedule on a bi-weekly basis. Indicate the progress of each activity. Include changes in scope, revised projection and other identifiable changes. The original schedule shall be submitted within ten (10) days of award of contract. A monthly updated copy of the schedule shall be submitted with the "Request for Payment." 2. Shop drawings, samples and product data shall be submitted in a timely manner. The Contractor will assume unless otherwise instructed by the Architect a minimum of fourteen (14) days per submission for items for architectural review only. 3. The schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect after acceptance of the Progress Schedule by the Owner. Review by the Architect shall be not longer than five (5) days. SUBMITTALS Section IG - Page 5 1-05. CORRECTIONS Any corrections requiring revision and/or resubmission of schedules, shop drawings, samples, product data, test and inspection reports shall not be a basis for delay in the progress of construction. END OF SECTION 1G • • CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section IH - Page I SECTION IH - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1-01. GENERAL Requirements of all other Sections of Division I of these Specifica- tions apply to work of this section. 1-02. SCOPE Work of this Section includes everything necessary for or incidental to completing temporary facilities and controls. 1-03. SITE ACCESS Site access shall be limited to access required by Owner, City or Architect. 1-04. TEMPORARY SERVICES I. Temporary Electric Service: • a. Temporary electric service required in the performance of the Contract shall be furnished and paid for by the Contractor who shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary poles and overhead construction, transformers, meters, drops, and other wiring and fittings for both light and power at locations required in the Work, and shall bear the cost of making the service connections. Before final acceptance, temporary electrical service facilities installed by Contractor shall be removed, excavation backfilled and compacted, and service connections severed in acceptable manner. b. Adequate lighting and convenience outlets shall be furnished and installed in the temporary structures and elsewhere as may be necessary for proper performance and inspection of the work. • CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section IH - Page 2 2. Temporary Heat: a. When required for proper installation or protection of any portion of the Work, Contractor shall furnish and install, operate and maintain temporary heating units. Open salamanders shall not be operated where smoke will damage finished work or interfer with satisfactory installation of finishes. b. When heating and ventilating systems are installed and operable, Contractor shall arrange for temporary operation of the heating system, paying all costs of operation. Before the date of Substantial Completion, all registers, diffusers and filters Shall be cleaned or replaced. 3. Temporary Closures: Contractor shall erect temporary closures over openings when weather conditions render such action necessary for proper installation of any portion of the Work. 4. Temporary Telephone Service; Telephone shall be readily available for the use of the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect/Owner, Engineers and trades employed on the Work. Toll and long distance _ calls shall be made only under arrangement with the Contractor who shall be responsible for the collection and payment of all charges in connection therewith. In addition to office telephone services paid for by the Contractor, the Contractor may install a separate coin telephone for general use. 5. Temporary Water: a. Water required in the performance of the Contract shall be provided and paid for by the Contractor. Water used for human consumption shall conform to the requirements of State and local authorities for potable water. b. Contractor shall furnish and install all mains, laterals, branch lines and service pipings and fittings to supply temporary water in sufficient quantity at required locations of the building and shall bear costs of making the service connections at approved locations. Temporary connections and piping shall be removed and all openings closed at end of the Work. • CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section IH - Page 3 6. Toilet Facilities: The Contractor shall install and maintain temporary toilet facilities for the duration of the operations. The buildings shall be weathertight, floored structures and shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition acceptable to the Architect. Chemical toilets may be used if approved by local authorities. 7. Temporary First Aid; a. The Contractor shall provide an emergency First Aid Kit prominently displayed in the construction field.office as required by OSHA. b. Contractor shall prominently display in the construction field office all emergency phone numbers. 8. Temporary Fire Protection: Contractor shall provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire hoses and other equipment necessary for fire protection during construction. Such equipment shall be used for fire protection only. • 9. Scaffolds and Runways: a. Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain for duration of the Work as required, all scaffolds, runways, guard rails, platforms and similar temporary construction as may be necessary for the performance of the Contract. Such facilities shall be of type and arrangement as required for their specific use; shall be substantially constructed throughout, strongly supported, well secured, and shall comply with all applicable rules and regulations of applicable State and local codes and OSHA. b. The several levels of the structure shall be connected by means of suitable ladders, ramps and temporary stairs. Open wells and shafts shall be enclosed as required by O.S.H.A. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section IH - Page 4 II. Temporary Stairs, Ladders, Ramps, Chutes, Etc. a. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, scaffolds, chutes, etc., as required for the proper execution of the xork. b. All such apparatus., equipment and construction shall meet all requirements of the Labor Law and other State or local laws applicable thereto. 12. The Contractor shall provide and install a temporary 6' high chain link construction enclosure fence around the entire building area. aa(c fence shall be constructed as necessary, to remain safely in place for the duration of construction and shall be located approximately as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide gate openings as required for the access of all trades and equipment. Upon completion of construction the Contractor shall remove the fence and properly dispose of all materials used therein. 13. Barricades: The Contractor shall provide such protective barricades as deemed necessary to protect openings, storage areas, and work in place, subject to approval as to type and appearance. 14. Protection of Work in Place: a. All forms of protection shall be constructed in such manner that, on completion, the entire Work will be delivered to Owner in unblemished condition. b. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished cement surfaces. Reinforced non -staining Kraft Building Paper and plywood or planking must be laid over all types of finished floor surfaces in traffic areas and before moving any materials over these finished areas. c. Roof surfaces shall not be subjected to traffic nor shall they be used for storage of material. Where some activity must take place in order to carry out the Contract, adequate protection, subject to the approval of the Architect sha11 be provided. CONSTRUCTION FAC[L[T[ES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section IH - Page 5 15. Site Access: Construction traffic to the site shall be limited to the site access approved by the Owner. Contractor and all other parties connected with the Project shall use only designated parking areas. The closure of Acjachema Street is subject to the Owner's approval. 16. Protection of Adjacent Premises: a. The Contractor shall avoid any encroachment on adjacent properties. It is directly stipulated that the Contractor shall repair and make good any damage to adjoining pro- perties or improvements caused by his men or by equipment, including any damage or loss to adjoining tenant or property owners, whether to buildings, paving and landscaping, stocks of merchandise or trade fixtures. 17. Dust and Mud Control: a. Contractor shall provide and apply dust control at all times including holidays and weekends, as required to abate dust nuisance on and about the site which is a result of construction • activities. Dust control shall be by means of sprinklered water and other approved means, except no chemicals, oil or similar palliative shall be used. Quantities and equipment for dust control shall be sufficient to effectively prevent dust nuisance on and about the site; and when weather conditions warrant, sprinkling equipment shall be on hand at all times for immediate availability. The Architect shall have authority to order dust control work whenever it is required in his opinion, and there shall be no additional cost to the Owner thereror, but dust control shall be effectively maintained whether or not the Architect specifically orders such work. J. Similarly, Contractor shall take proper measures to prevent tracking mud onto City streets, roads or drives. Such measures shall include but are not limited to, covering muddy areas on site with clean dry sand. All egress from the site shall be maintained in a dry condition, and any mud tracked onto streets, road, or drives shall be immediately removed and the affected area cleaned. The Architect or Owner may order such work at any time the conditions warrant. C. Erosion control shall be provided in accordance with approved city standards. 10 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section IH - Page 6 18. Signs: No signs will be permitted on this Project except the project sign, identifying captions over offices, certain directional and warning signs required for safety and protection. Contractor shall take all necessary steps to prevent installation of any unauthorized signs and, should any appear, cause them to be removed immediately, and repair and repaint any damage caused thereby without additional cost to Owner. 19. Project Sign: The project sign shall be located as shown on Sheet Al and shall conform to the standards of the city. It shall measure 4 ft, by 6 ft. and shall be adequately supported on 4 x 6 posts oriented perpendicular to the plane of the sign. It shalt be painted in three colors, including border and text listing at least the name of the project, required city and county officials, names and addresses and phone numbers of the Contractor, Architect and Consultants. Exact design, colors, and text shall be provided by the Architect. 20. Field Offices and Sheds: a. The Contractor shall erect and maintain, for duration of operations and in location as approved, suitable temporary office facilities as required for the Contractor's administration of the Work. Provide necessary sheds and facilites for proper storage of tools, materials and equipment employed in perfor- mance of the Work. Temporary office building shall include electric lights and suitable means of air conditioning and ventilation. Subcontractors shall provide their own offices and storage buildings as necessary. Temporary offices may be approved trailers. Such trailers require a siting permit and the city will waive the fee. b. The following minimum facilities shall be provided: (I) Office facilities for the Full-time Project Representative shall have the following minimum features: A room of minimum 120 square feet not less than 8 feet in any direc- tion, 80 foot candles of light at desk level, 2 power outlet, I -line telephone, screen doors and operable screened windows, 8 lineal feet of layout table, drawing racks with five sticks, adequate air conditioning facilities to maintain 75 degrees F., a copy machine, a telecopy machine com- patible with those of the Architect and Structural Engineer, and a meeting table and chairs to seat 8 persons. (2) Office facilities and all structures necessary for the storage of tools, materials and equipment for Contractor and Subcontractors, shall be erected and maintained. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS Section IH - Page 7 i -- 21. Removal of Temporary Construction: Temporary office facilities, toilets, storage sheds, and other construction of a temporary nature shall be removed from the site as soon as the progress of the Work will permit; and the portions of the site occupied by same shall be properly restored. 22. Pumping and Drainage: Surface or subsurface water or other fluids shall hot be permitted to accumulate in excavations or in and about the premises. Should such conditions be encountered or develop, the fluid shall be controlled and suitably disposed of by means of temporary pumps, piping drainage lines, troughs, ditches, dams or other methods. END OF SECTION IH i MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section II - Page I SECTION II - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 1-01-. GENERAL (Related Requirements specified elsewhere) All sections of the Specifications are hereby made a part of this Section. 1-02. INSPECTION OF MATERIALS BY THE CONTRACTOR Contractor shall make a close inspection of all materials as delivered, and shall promptly return all defective materials without waiting for their rejection by the Architect. 1-03. STORAGE I. All material shall be stored on site. Suitable stored material will be interpreted by the Architect to mean such as not to interfere with building operations, not be exposed to weather if unsuitable, or invitation to tampering or theft. Such storage shall be at the Contractor's risk and as provided under insurance. Material sheds shall be the responsibility of the individual trades. • and Subcontractors. 1-04. MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS Unless otherwise noted, all manufactured materials, products, processes, equipment or the like shall be installed or applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, directions, or specifi- cations. Said application or installation shall be in strict accordance with printed instructions furnished by the manufacturer of the material concerned for use under conditions similar to those at the job site. Six (6) copies of such instructions shall be furnished to the Architect and his approval thereof obtained before work is begun. Any deviation from the manufacturer's printed recommendations shall be explained and acknowledged as correct for the circumstances, in writing by the particular manufacturer. Contractor will be held responsible for all installations contrary to the manufacturer's recommendations. If any item of equipment or material is found to be installed not in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, Contractor shall make all changes necessary to achieve such compliance. END OF SECTION II r • SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS Section IJ - Page SECTION IJ ^ SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 1-01. DESCRIPTION Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: a. Substitutions during bidding.- Instructions to Bidders. b. Coordination - Section IB. c. Schedule of Values - Section IG. d. Shop drawings, project data,,samples , Section IG. e. Materials and Equipment Section 11. f. Storage and protection - Section IH. 1--02. PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS I. Wherever in the Specifications any material, process, or article • is indicated or specified by grade, patent, or proprietary name or by name of manufacturer, such Specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of facilitating description of material, process, or article desired and shall be deemed to be followed by "or approved equivalent" and Contractor may, unless otherwise stated, offer equivalent or better in every respect to that so indicated or specified. If material, process or article offered by Contractor is not, in opinion of Architect and Owner substantially equivalent or better in every respect to that specified, then Contractor shall furnish material, process, or article specified. Burden of proof as to equality of any material, process or article shall rest with Contractor. Contractor shall submit request, together with substantiating data, for substitution of an "approved equivalent" item within fourteen (14) days after award of Contract. Provision authorizing submission of "approved equivalent" ,justifi- cation data shall not in any way authorize an extension of time for performance of this Contract. 2. In event the Contractor furnishes material, process, or article more expensive than that specified, the difference in cost of such material, process, or article so furnished shall be borne by the Contractor. SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 3. Acceptance of each "equivalent" product discretion of Architect and Owner, and qualifications: Section IJ - Page 2 is entirely at the subject to following a. Equivalent in quality of materials used, in structural strength and in details of construction. b. Equivalent in performance, mechanically and technically. c. Equivalent in finish, or in characteristics permitting specified finish to be applied. d. Equivalent in Arrangement of Plan: If substitutions for specified products require rearrangement of partitions, openings for pipe work or ducts, intakes, exhausts, etc., such arrangement must, in opinion of the Architect and Owner, be equal in convenience and practicability to original arrangement. If such arrangement is approved by the Architect and should involve additional cost, such additional cost must be borne by the Contractor. e. Equivalent in Price: Materials and equipment which are equivalent in quality and utility are competitive products that are approximately equal in price on the open market. If approval is requested for materials or equipment materially cheaper than specified products, the Architect may if approved by Owner at his discretion, require the specified products. f. Equivalent as to the availability of the requested substitutions. 4. Repair and Maintenance: An important conditon in determining equality of substitute materials and equipment is availability of replacement parts and maintenance service. An inequality in this condition as between proposed substitutions and specified products may be the determining factor in whether or not approval is granted. 1-03. PRODUCTS LIST Within fourteen (14) days after date of Contract, submit to Architect installation. 2. Tabulate list by each specification section. SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS Section IJ - Page 3 3. For products specified under reference standards, include with listing of each product: a. Name, address and phone number of representative of manufacturer. b. Trade name. c. Model or catalog designation. d. Manufacturer's data. (I) Performance and test data. (2) Reference standards 1-04. CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS I. For products specified only by referenced standards, select any product meeting standards, by any manufacturer. 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any product and manufacturer named. •. 3. For products specified by naming one or more products, but indicating the option of selecting equivalent products Contractor must submit request, as required for substitution, for any product not specifically named. 4. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option, and no substitution will be allowed. 1-05. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. During Bidding, Architect will receive written requests from prime Bidders for substitutions. 2. Within fourteen (14) days after date of Contract, Architect will consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place of those specified. 3. Submit five copies of request for substitution. Include in request: a. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS b. For products: Section IJ - Page 4 _ (I) Product identification, including manufacturer's name, address, and representative's phone number. (2) Manufacturer's literature: (a) Product description. (b) Performance and test data. (c) Reference standards. (3) Samples (4) Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, and data of installation. c. For construction methods: ( I ) Detailed description of proposed method. (2) Drawings illustrating methods. d. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. e. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. f. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 4. In making request for substitution, Bidder/Contractor represents: a. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. b. He will provide the same guarantee for substitution as for product or method specified. c. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitition into Work, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects. d. He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which consequently becomes apparent. SUBSTITITIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS Section IJ - Page 5 e. Cost data is complete and includes all reIate d costs under his Contract, 5. Substitutions will not be considered if: a. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or project data submittals without formal request submitted in accord with Paragraph I-05. b. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. END OF SECTION IJ • CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section IK - Page I SECTION IK - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1-01. PREREQUISITES TO FINAL PAYMENT I. In addition to the requirements of the General Conditions: a. Satisfactory completion of construction work as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion signed by the Architect, Contractor and Owner. b. Satisfactory completion of construction work and acceptance by Public Authorities having jurisdiction. c. Receipt by Owner of Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified herein. d. Receipt by Owner of Certificate of Occupancy. e. Receipt by Owner of General Contractor's One (1) Year Guarantee In form stipulated in the General Conditions. • f. Receipt by Owner of written guarantee in form stipulated on each phase of the work and each major supplier. g. Owner shall have received a complete list of Subcontractors and principal vendors, including addresses, telephone numbers and names of individuals to contact who are familiar with the Project (including the General Contractor). h. Affidavit of Release of Liens. 1. Cleaning. J. As -Built Drawings. 1-02. GUARANTEES (Not to be construed as a complete list) I. In addition to the special Guarantee(s) required elsewhere, the Contractor shall Guarantee the entire work for one (1) year from the date set forth below. All guarantees required by these Specifications shall be in writing and in a form acceptable to the Architect. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section IK - Page 2 2. By accepting a Contract for the work covered by these Specifi- cations, the Contractor guarantees against any failure, in proper use or operation, caused by omissions of material, defective material or workmanship and pay for any damages to the other work resulting threrefrom which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of completed work. All machinery and equipment, parts thereof, for which guarantees are customarily furnished in the trade, for machinery and equipment of special design, for which detail designs or requirements are not prescribed in the Specifications, shall be Guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the completed work. This Section will not relieve the Contractor from delivering to the Owner Warranties or Guarantees of longer duration if they are standard for the particular item or required by the techanical sections of the Specifications. 1-03. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS I. Description: Contractor shall provide operation and maintenance manuals covering all mechanical or related equipment installed on the Project. Whenever special maintenance procedures are required to assure the proper operation and durability manuals shall be furnished whether specified or not. 2. Required Information: Provide complete Operation and Maintenance Manual as hereinafter described, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Manufacturer's printed product literature. b. Manufacturers printed maintenance requirements and safety precautions. c. Wiring, piping, installation diagrams. d. Guarantees and warranties. e. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor, Subcontractor, Installer, Manufacturer, Manufacturers Representative Service Organization and any other. f. Set of approved Shop Drawings and Product Data. g. Operating instructions. h. Copy of the Warranties. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section IK - Page 3 IV 3. Description of Manual: The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two (2) bound Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Manuals shall be bound in hard vinyl covered three ring loose leaf binders. 4. Include the following products and all other products as required in the Operations and Maintenance Manual: a. Built up tile roofing. b. Calking and sealants. c. Finish hardware. d. Painting. e. Ceramic and quarry tile. f. Toilet partitions. g. Toilet room accessories. Illy h. Plumbing fixtures and equipment i. Electrical switch gear. j. Light fixtures. k. Ventilationg and air conditioning equipment. 1. Carpeting. m. Planting. n. Landscape sprinkler system. o. Appliances and projection screen. 1-04. CLEANING I. Scope: a. Perform clean up and disposal work as specified, complete. This article forms a part of all Sections of the Specifications and shall be coordinated with such additional clean up and disposal requirements as may be specified in other Sections. 06- CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 2. Clean up and Disposal: Section IK - Page 4 a. General: The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by his employees or work, or the employees or work of any Subcon- tractor, and at the completion of the work shall remove all rubbish from and about the building and all his Subcontractor's tools, scaffolding and surplus materials and shall leave the work "bFoom clean" or its equivalent, except as hereinafter specified. to case of dispute between the Contractor and other contractors employed ort or about the structure or structures upon which the work is to be done, as herein provided, as to responsibility for the removal of the rubbish, etc., or in case the same be not promptly removed as herein required, the Owner may remove the rubbish, etc., and charge the cost to the several contractors as Owner shall determine to be just. b. Clean Up During the Work; At all times the building, working areas and site shall be kept clean and orderly. All dirt, debris, waste, rubbish and disused implements and equipment shall be removed frequently and not allowed to accumulate. Flammable and toxic materials shah) not,be stored in the structure. 3. Final Clean Up; In addition to the requirements specified above, Contractor shall thoroughly clean the inside and outside of the structures, including all fixtures, equipment, walls, ceilings, floors and hardware. This shall include thorough cleaning of roofs, window and opening ledges and sills, horizontal projections, exterior steps and platforms, walkways, rails, other surfaces and all on site designated construction work areas. Wash clean all exterior walkways and courtyards upon completion of construction and prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the Work. 4. Cleaning; a. Dust, dirt, stains, handmarks, paint spots, plaster droppings and like shall be completely removed from all surfaces. Metal surfaces shall be cleaned and polished, using only non -corrosive and non-abrasive materials. Ceramic surfaces will be washed, and glazed surfaces polished. W. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section IK - Page 5 b. Fixtures and Equipment: Plumbing and kitchen fixtures and like items shall be cleaned and polished. Lighting fixtures shall be free of dust, dirt, stains, or waste materials. Equipment and machinery shall be cleaned, serviced and left ready for use. c. Glass shall be washed and polished on both sides and left free of dirt, marks, labels or spots. d. Floors: Concrete and vinyl floors shall be washed and mopped dry, free of streaks or stains and waxed as required. Carpeting shall be vacuumed. e. Final Inspection: Any deficient cleaning operations, as determined by the Architect, shall be immediately corrected as directed. 5. Disposal: Under no circumstances shall rubbish or waste material be disposed of in fills or backfills. All debris, rubbish and waste or surplus materials shall be removed from the Owner's property and legally disposed of at the cost of the Contractor. . 1-05. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS I. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition. 2. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. 3. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Architect and Owner. 4. Marking Devices: Provide colored felt tip or ball point pens for all marking. 5. Recording: a. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in I inch high printed letters. b. Keep record documents current. c. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. (I) Prints shall be marked to show the precise location of concealed work and equipment, including concealed or embedded piping and conduit. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section IK - Page 6 d. Contract Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: (1) Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to first floor level. (2) Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improve- ments. (3) Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction on referenced to visible and accessible features of structure. (4) Field changes of dimension and detail. (5) Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. (6) Details not on original Contract Drawings. e. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark up each section to record: (1) Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and phone number of supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. (2) Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. (3) Other matters not originally specified. f. The accuracy of the information furnished by the Contractor remains the responsibility of the Contractor. 6. Submittal: a. At completion of Project, deliver record documents to Architect. b. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: (1) Date. (2) Project title and number. (3) Contractor's name and address. (4) Title and number of each record document. (5) Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate. (6) Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. c. All such Drawings shall be done carefully and neatly by a competent draftsman and in form approved by the Architect. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section IK - Page 7 . 7. Checking Record Documents: a. Prior to the covering of any concealed and underground work, ascertain that all required information is recorded in the proper documents. b. Ascertain that all chagnes due to field orders, changes orders, and other modifications to the construction are recorded in the proper documents, as the changes are made. c. Ascertain that all changes or substitutions of materials, products, and equipment are recorded in the proper documents. d. Ascertain that all shop drawings and other documents designated to be retained as part of the record documents are properly filed. e. At the completion of the Project, ascertain that all record information is delivered to the Architect for his use or delivery to the Owner. END OF SECTION IK SUBSOIL DATA W. Section IL - Page I SECTION IL - SUBSOIL DATA 1-01. GENERAL 1. Subsoil data and the subsoil investigation report is on file at the Clerk's office at City Hall and is available for review there. 2. The subsoil data is for information only. The Architect and Owner assumes no responsibility for the conclusions drawn therefrom. The data was developed by Professional Engineers at the request of the Owner. 3, The data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of the accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor. The data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. • 4. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION IL TESTING AND INSPECTION Section IM - Page 1 SECTION 1M - TESTING AND INSPECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Testing and inspection shall be performed by an independent test laboratory approved by the Architect and paid by the Contractor. 2. Testing of aggregates and design of mortar, grout and concrete mixes. 3. Inspection of field practices, and mortar and concrete quality control including formwork, reinforcing steel and handling, placing and curing of concrete 4. Coordination and cooperation with the testing laboratory in furnishing incidental labor to assist in obtaining samples for testing. 5. Inspection and testing in conformance with ASTM E329. 6. Testing of welds and mill tests on cement and steel. 7. Submittal of test reports to the Architect. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Soils testing, Section 2B 2. Submittals, Section 1G 1-03. QUALITY CONTROL 1. The Contractor's testing laboratory will do the following work: a. Field tests of concrete: During the progress of the work there shall be taken from the concrete of each strength placed on any one day, at least four representative test cylinders for each fifty cubic yards of concrete of each strength placed on the structure. Cylinders sahII be taken when approximately half the batch has been placed. b. Field testing of mortar and grout. c. Permanent records of the details of all tests shall be main- tained by the testing laboratory. TESTING AND INSPECTION Section 1M - Page 2 d. Project site inspectors shall record in a field book the v following data: (1.) Weather conditions and temperatures. (2.) Temperature of mortar and concrete when placed. (3.) Test cylinders cast and locations from which taken. (4.) Results of slump tests and times made. (5.) Admixtures used for each batch, and field conformance with specifications. (6.) Mixing time and volume capacity of concrete in transit - mix trucks. (7.) Air content of concrete placed. e. Architect shall receive copies of reports of all laboratory and field tests. f. Laboratory data records and field books shall be available for examination by authorized parties upon request. g. Inspect the bending, placement, size, and positioning of all reinforcement on the project for full conformity with the approved shop drawings, and report on same. h. Testing of field welds. 2. Reports covering compression tests (2-7 day and 2-28 day cylinders) shall be issued immediately upon completion of each test and shall include the percent air content of samples. 3. The laboratory inspector shall report any material or work performed that fails to meet with job specifications immediately to the Contractor, and then to the Architect if any further corrective measures are required. Work will be checked as iP progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not in any prevent later rejection or obligate the Architect for final acceptance. 4. The Contractor shall supply additional cylinders from concrete being poured upon the request of the Architect, if in his opinion it is deemed necessary. 11A, - TESTING AND INSPECTION Section 1M - Page 3 5. During the progress of the work, there shall be taken from each batch of concrete (when half of the batch has been placed) two representative test cylinders one of which shall be tested at 7 days and one at 28 days. 6. The Contractor shall furnish copies of mill test reports of all shipments of structural steel, cement and reinforcing steel to the Architect. 1-04. ENFORCEMENT OF REQUIREMENTS AND ACCEPTANCE 1. 1f test results are not satisfactory to the Architect, the Contractor shall remove from the work all affected construction and replace such defective work in a satisfactory manner, all without further compensation. END OF SECTION 1M END OF VOLUME 1 0 • PROJECT MANUAL VOL 2 OF 2 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO, CALIFORNIA ORANGE COUNTY BOARD OF SUPERVISORS BRUCE NESTANDE - 3RD DISTRICT, CHAIRMAN ROGER STANTON -1ST DISTRICT HARRIET M. WIEDER - 2ND DISTRICT BRUCE B. CLARK -4TH DISTRICT THOMAS F RILEY-5TH DISTRICT E. M. SMITH -ORANGE COUNTY LIBRARIAN SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY COUNCIL LAWRENCE F BUCHHEIM - MAYOR ANTHONY L. BLAND - MAYOR PRO TEM KENNETH E. FREISS GARY L.HAUSDORFER PHILLIP R. SCHWARTZE STEPHEN B. JULIAN -SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY MANAGER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ROBERT LAWSON 312 OCEAN AVE. LAGUNA BEACH, CA. 92651 714 494 0776 MICHAEL GRAVES ARCHITECT P.A. 34 WITHERSPOON ST., PRINCETON, N.J. 08540 609 924 6409 MECHANICAL LANDSCAPE ENGINEER ARCHITECT THOMAS A. POLISE WOODWARD DIKE, INC. 20 WATERSIDE PLAZA 580 BROADWAY, SUITE 218 NEW YORK, NY. 10010 LAGUNA BEACH, CA. 92651 212 683 5530 714 494 7095 MAY 6, 1982 CIVIL ENGINEER SOUTH COAST ENG. 420 W EL CAMINO REAL SAN CLEMENTE, CA. 92672 714 492 - 3241 EARTHWORK Section 2B Page 1 • SECTION 2B - EARTHWORK PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Excavating, 2. Preparation of subgrades. 3. Removal of unsuitable material. 4. Compacted fills and backfills. 5. Porous fills under slabs on grade. 6. Dewatering. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE • I. Excavating, trenching and backfilling for mechanical and electrical work, Divisions 15 and 16. 2. Foundation drains and filter stone, Section 2D. 1-03. QUALITY ASSURANCE I. The Owner shall obtain the services of a qualified soils engineer and pay all costs incurred thereby. 2. The soils engineer shall be responsible for the following: a. Approval of fill materials. b. Inspection and approval of subgrades. C. Continuous supervision of placing and compacting procedures. d. Performance of laboratory and field testing. e. Determine maximum dry density and optimum moisture content values of soil samples. EARTHWORK Section 28 Page 2. f. Certification that densities conform to Specification require- ments. g. Submit test results to the Architect. 3. Where tests indicate soil densities do not conform to Specification requirements all additional work necessary to achieve the specified densities shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1-04. SUBMITTALS I. Submit a sample of each significantly different soil type proposed for use in compacted fills and backfills to the soils engineer. Submit samples at least 2 weeks prior to intended use. 1-05. UTILITIES 1. Contact utility companies in writing and obtain all available information on existing utilities prior to proceeding with the work. Conform to rules and regulations governing respective utilities when executing work. .. 2. Protect active utilities shown, which are indicated to remain, or until removed or relocated under other Sections. Protect active utilities encountered which are not shown, pending further instruction of the Architect. 3. Remove as required inactive and abandoned utilities obstructing the work. 1-06. PROTECTION OF PROPERTY Use every precaution to prevent damage to existing structures and utilities above and below ground that are adjoining or included in the area under Contract, and except as otherwise specified, repair or replace at no additional cost to the Owner any material or work damaged or destroyed because of Contract operations. 2. Provide all safeguards such as fences, barricades, guard lights, etc., as required. In removing work below grade, perform all work required to protect adjoining areas. • EARTHWORK Section 28 Page 3 1-07. DEWATERING Keep all excavations free from water. Protect uncompleted work from flooding. Prevent flow of surface and/or ground water from entering areas where work is in progress. 2. Provide, maintain and operate pumps, well point systems, trenches, etc., to keep work from being damaged by water during all stages of construction. 3. Remove dewatering work when no longer needed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Except as noted below, materials for fills and backfills of work within the building shall consist of approved excavated materials free from rubble debris, and organize matter, maximum particle size of 8 inches. 02. Excavated soil shall be blended with the sandy soil from cut areas to dilute the expansiveness of the clayey soil to improve compactability. 3. Vapor Barrier: 10 mil polyvinyl chloride or equivalent covered with at least 2 inches of clean sand, and over 1 inch of clean sand on compacted sub grade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION All excavation work shall be considered unclassified excavation. Unclassified excavation shall consist of the removal of earth, shale, rock, abandoned utilities, foundations and all other materials encountered of whatever nature. 3-02. MINIMUM DENSITIES I. Minimum densities, expressed as a percentage of maximum obtainable density as determined by ASTM D1557, shall be as follows: a. Subgrades: 90 percent. b. Compacted fills and backfills: 90 percent. Section 2B Page 4 EARTHWORK c. Porous fills under slabs on grade: 90 percent. d. Foundation wall backfills: 90 percent. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for materials and methods used in obtaining densities specified for subgrades and fills. 3. Moisture content shall be uniform and at least 3 percent above optimum, except at asphalt paving, 2 percent above optimum. 4. Where tests indicate soil densities do not conform to Specification requirements, all additional work necessary to achieve the specified densities shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional costs to the Owner. 3-03. SUBGRADES Subgrades in existing soil shall be inspected and approved by the soils engineer prior to proceeding with the fill operations. Before placing, tills, clean the subgrades of foreign substances. Proofroll where required to obtain minimum densities. 2. Ruts, soft or yielding spots, areas having inadequate density and _ deviations from line and grade in subgrades shall be corrected by loosening, removing, and adding approved material, reshaping to line and grade and recompacting to the specified density requirements. Provide recompaction, where required to obtain minimum densities at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Unless noted otherwise, all surfaces to receive fill, including stripped surfaces, shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, and processed as necessary to achieve the specified densities at optimum moisture content. a. At parking and driveway areas, the surfaces shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches and moisture conditioned to achieve the density specified. 4. Subgrade slopes greater than 5 horizontal and 1 vertical shall be contour ploughed or benched prior to placing of fill. 3=04. FILLING AND BACKFILLING Perform all cutting, filling and compacting of fills, and rough grading required to bring the subgrades for building slabs on grade to the underside of the drainage blanket, and for footings, to eleva- tions noted on the Drawings. E EARTHWORK Section 2B Page 5 2. Fills shall be placed in sections which are essentially horizontal. Slopes of compacted fills shall be not steeper than I horizontal to I vertical. No fill shall be placed on saturated subgrades. No fill material shall be used in compacted fills and backfills until approved by the soils engineer. Fill materials used for compacted fills and backfills shall conform with the approved samples. 3. No fill or backfill shall be placed during weather conditions which will alter moisture content of the fill materials sufficiently to make adequate compaction impossible. After placing operations have been stopped because of adverse weather conditions, no additional fill materials shall be placed until the last layer placed has been inspected by soils engineer and found to be compacted to the specified densities. The fill surface must be made smooth and free.from ruts or indentations at the end of any working day when significant precipitation is forecast and/or at the completion of the compactions operations in that area in order to prevent ponding on the fill material. 4. Place and spread fills in successive horizontal layers.for the • full width of the cross section, in loose thickness of 6 to 8 Inches under slabs on grade. 5. Compaction shall be accomplished by use of vibratory roller, machine tampers and other mechanical equipment. If necessary, soil shall be moistened or dried to the correct moisture content before and during compaction. 6. Rough grading and/or excavation for slabs on grade shall be to the base of the subfloor porous fill layer. The Contractor shall verify that the minimum thickness of the subfloor porous fill is. provided. 3-05. EXCAVATING FOR BUILDINGS AND STRUCTURES Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated; allow additional space as required for construction operations and inspections. 2. Minimum depth of foundations shall be as indicated. Bearings for foundations and subgrades for concrete shall be inspected by the soils engineer and Architect prior to placing of concrete. Notify Architect of completion of bearing and subgrade surfaces, as work EARTHWORK Section 2B Page 6 progresses; do not proceed until authorization is obtained. If suitable bearing is not encountered at depths indicated, notify Architect and await instructions. Contract Price will be adjusted if additional excavation is required. 3. Shore and brace excavations as required to maintain them secure; remove shoring as backfill progresses. 4. Maintain pits and trenches free from water at all times. Trench bottom soils softened or disturbed prior to concrete placement shall be removed and backfilled with concrete. 5. Where soil conditions will permit, trenches may be excavated to the exact dimensions of the concrete and side forms omitted. Fill excess cut under foundations with concrete. Fill excess cut under slabs withapproved materials free from organic matter and thoroughly compact. 6. Do not place concrete on saturated ground. When inclement weather may be expected, do not excavate. to the full depth indicated, unless the concrete can be placed immediately after the excavation has been completed. Protect the bottoms so excavated from water if placement _ of concrete is delayed. 3-06. FILLING AND BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES I. Perform required filling and backfilling within and adjacent to buildings and structures. 2. Backfilling, filling and compacting against and adjacent to other construction shall be performed in such manner as to avoid excessive stresses and damage thereto. 3. Before depositing fills and backfills remove debris and other unsuitable material from areas to be filled or backfilled; scarify and recompact subgrades as hereinbefore specified. Do not deposit fills until subgrade has been inspected and approved. Depositing and compaction of fills shall be as hereinbefore specified. 3-07. BORROW AND WASTE Use shall be made of materials obtained from excavating operations when such material is of suitable quality and capable of being adequately worked and compacted to the density specified. EARTHWORK Section 28 Page 7 2. Furnish materials from off site sources in quantity necessary to complete the work, where existing material is considered unsuitable for use by the soils engineer, or where necessary to supplement suitable on site materials, at no addition to the Contract Price. 3. Surplus materials resulting from excavations and materials unsuitable for use as fills shall be disposed of off site at no additional cost to the Owner. 3-08. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I. Soils engineer must inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed thereon. a. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon method). b. Make at least one field density test of the subgrade for every 1000 square feet of area, but in no case less than 3 tests. C. In each compacted backfill or fill layer, make one field density test for every. 1000 square feet of overlaying area, but in no case less than 3 tests. • 2. If, in the opinion of the Architect based on reports of the soils engineer and inspection, the subgrade or fills which have been placed are below the specified density, additional compaction and testing will be required until satisfactory results are obtained. a. The results of density tests of soil in place will be considered satisfactory if the average of any 4 consecutive density tests which may be selected are in each instance equal to or greater than the specified density, and if not more than I density test out of 5 has a value more than 2 percent below the required density. 3-09. MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified tolerances. 3. When completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construc- tion operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, re -shape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction. END OF SECTION 213 0 BITUMINOUS PAVING Section 2C Page 1 • SECTION 2C - BITUMINOUS PAVING PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Finish course. 2. Base course. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Rough grading - Section 28. 2. Storm drainage.- Section 2D 1-03. STANDARDS I. Unless otherwise specified, materials and workmanship for this work shall conform to the Requirements of California State Trans- portation Standard Specifications as currently amended for a • subgrade soil R -Value of 50. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Surface Course: 3 inches of asphaltic concrete conforming to CalTrans requirements for Type 'B," 1/2 inch maximum aggregate size 2. Base Course: 6 inches of aggregate base conforming to CalTrans Class 2, 3/4 inch maximum aggregate size. 3. Miscellaneous materials specified in the CalTrans Standard Speci- fications to complete the paving. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I. Paving shall be constructed in conformance with the Standard Specifications specified herein. • BITUMINOUS PAVING Section 2C Page 2 2. A sequence of work including grading operations and irrigation system shall be established in order to facilitate the pavement construction. 3. During work, store materials and equipment where directed. Keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. 4. Protect work and materials from damage due to all operations including operations by other Contractors and trades and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or replace damaged work as directed. END OF SECTION 2C STORM DRAINAGE Section 2D Page I • SECTION 2D - STORM DRAINAGE PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Excavating, trenching and backfilling. 2. Furnishing and laying of new piping and extended within 5 feet of building line and including the following: a. Tieing into the roof drainage system. b. Storm drainage piping. c. Foundation drains. 3. Extension of existing storm lines as shown on Drawings. 4. Drainage structures. • 5. Testing and cleaning. 6. Record drawings. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Related building and roof drainage piping to 5 feet beyond building lines - Division 15. 2. Landscape irrigation - Section 2G. 1-03, SUBMITTALS I. Submit product data on materials proposed for use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Concrete Pipe: ASTM C76. Class IV, Wall B with compression joints conforming to ASTM C443. 2. Porous Drain Pipe: Standard and extra strength non -reinforced porous concrete pipe ASTM C654, including required fittings. STORM DRAINAGE Section 2D Page 2 3. PVC Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034, SDR 35 wall thickness, with elastomeric gasket joints. 4. Reinforced Concrete: Conform to Division 3 for requirements concerning reinforcing and mixes. 5. Provide cleanouts as required and shown on Drawings. 6. Drainage structures, salt hay, filter blanket and related items shall conform to California State Transportation Standard Specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I. Install drainage systems in accordance with the best practices of the various trades and the 'Standard $pecificati,ons." install specialty products in conformance with the manufacturers recommenda- tions and approved shop drawings. 2. Install pipe to obtain the point invert elevations noted on the Drawings, and pitched to drain at a grade of not less than 1/8 inch per foot and preferably 1/4 inch per foot except as otherwise indicated. Catch basin inverts shall be maintained. 3-02. EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING Conform to the applicable requirements of Section 2B. 3-03. STORM STRUCTURES Concrete: Execute concrete work in accordance with Division 3. 3-04. STORM SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION Storm Pipe Laying: a. Commence at the lowest point in the system and lay the pipe with bell or groove upgrade. Test pipe for soundness and clean interior and joint surfaces before lowering the pipe into the trench. Lay pipe in straight lines and on uniform grades between points where changes in alignment or grade are shown. Bed the pipe barrel firmly and uniformly. Check the line and invert grade of pipe from a top line carried on batter boards not over 25 feet apart. Fit the pipe to form close 0 STORM DRAINAGE Section 2D Page 3 concentric joints. Perform pumping or bailing as necessary to avoid laying the pipe in water and to protect joints. Keep a stopper in the pipe mouth when the pipe laying is not in progress. 2. Storm Pipe Jointing a. Factory made compression type tapered, and elastomeric joints shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturerts instructions. 3. Construct drainage structures as specified in the "Standard Speci- fications." 3-05. POROUS DRAIN PIPE (Foundation Drainsl: I. Use extra strength pipe near building and foundations and standard strength pipe elsewhere. 2. Surround porous drain pipe in all directions with minimum 12 inches • of specified filter stone, cover with salt hay. 3. Maintain a pitch of 1/8 inch per foot. 4. Make changes. in direction using fittings compatible with and made by the manufacturer of the pipe. 5. Provide compatible solid non -porous pipe for lines leading to storm lines. 3-06. FLUSHING I. Flush lines using a sewer jet, with water in sufficient volume to obtain free flow. Remove obstructions and correct defects. Remove silt and trash from catch basins and inlets prior to final acceptance of the work. • STORM DRAINAGE 3-07. RECORD DRAWINGS Section 2D Page 4 _ Record the final location of utility lines by offset distances to surface improvements such as buildings or curbs. Reference under- ground bends, ends of sewers, etc., by offset distances to established bench marks. At completion of work, transfer accurately all such records in waterproof drawing ink to a set of white prints of the utility drawings and delivery to the Architect. END OF SECTION 20 • • r� L J LANDSCAPE PLANTING SECTION 2E - LANDSCAPE PLANTING 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN Section 2E Page 1 Work Included: All labor, materals, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: a. Examine all other Sections for work related to those other Sections and required to be included as work under this Section. b. Landscape planting. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Earthwork - Section 26. 2. Landscape irrigation system Section 2G. 3. Plant establishment and maintenance - Section 2F. 1-03. QUALITY ASSURANCE Furnish plant materials certified by State or Federal Department of Agriculture to be free from hazardous insects or apparent disease. 2. Furnish plant materials inspected by Architect at the growing site and tagged or otherwise approved for delivery. 3. Inspection at growing site does not preclude right to refection at construction site. 1-04. SUBMITTALS The Owner will request inspection of delivery slips for materials to verify specified quantities of bulk deliveries of soil amendments and fertilizers. 2. Seed Mixtures: Furnish dealer's guaranteed statement of composition, mixture, purity, and germination. LANDSCAPE PLANTING Section 2E Page 2 1-05. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver fertilizer to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade mark, and conformance to state law. 2. Deliver plant material with legible identification labels. 3. Protect plant material during delivery to prevent damage to root ball or dessication of leaves. 4, Notify Architect of delivery schedule in advance so that plant material may be inspected upon arrival at job site. 5. Remove unacceptable plant material immediately from job site. 1-06. JOB CONDITIONS I. Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice. 2. Plant trees, shrubs, and liner stock material before lawns and seeded areas are installed. 1-07. SUBSTITUTIONS Substitute plant materials for the indicated plant materials will not be permitted unless specifically approved in writing by the Architect 1-08. GUARANTEE Guarantee boxed and field grown trees to "live and grow" in an "acceptable, upright position" for a period of one (I) year after completion of the specified maintenance period and final acceptance. Definition of "live and grow" and "acceptable, upright position" shall mean that the tree must, during the guarantee period, sustain a healthy, vigorous appearance. If the tree, during the guarantee period, does not sustain this appearance, it shall be removed and replaced with a tree equal to the original specifications. Any damage to contiguous planting, structures, lighting or irrigation systems during replacement operations shall be replaced or repaired at the Contractor's expense. is LANDSCAPE PLANTING Section 2E Page 3 2. Guarantee all cuttings, sod and c6ntainer plant material up to and including 15 gallon size as to growth and health for a period of 90 days after completion of the specified maintenance period and final acceptance. 3. Within 15 days of written notification by Owner, remove and replace all guaranteed plant materials which for any reason fail to meet the requirements of the guarantee. Replace with plant materials originally specified and meet original guarantees. 1-09. SOIL SUITABILITY AND FERTILITY ANALYSES REPORT In addition to these Documents, comply with the recommendations of the Soil Suitability and, Ferti lity Analyses Report, as directed by the Owner. 2. Where no soils report is available, obtain a soil test after rough grading has been completed. Soil test shall be made by the Soil and Plant Laboratory, Santa Ana, California (714) 558-8333 at Contractor's expense. Send one copy of soils report and recommendations to the Architect • PART 2- PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS Topsoil: Use natural friable soil of the region, free from lumps, clay, toxic substances, sticks, debris, vegetation, stones over I inch in minimum dimension, and containing no decomposed stone, salts, or alkali. 2. Import Topsoil: a. Silt plus clay content not to exceed 15 percent by weight. J. Boron content not to exceed I PPM as measured by saturation extract. c. Sodium absorption ratio (SAR) shall not exceed 6 and the electrical conductivity of the saturation extract shall not exceed 3.0 millimhos per centimeter at 25 degrees C. LANDSCAPE PLANTING Section 2E Page 4 d. Free from herbicides. e. Free from noxious weeds. 3. Organic Amendment: a. Nitrogen stabilized: (1) 0.4 to 0.6 percent N based on dry weight for redwood sawdust. (2) 0.56 to 0.84 percent N based on dry weight for fir or cedar sawdust. (3) 0.8 to 1.2 percent N based on dry weight for fir.or pine bark. b. Particle Size: (1) 95-100 percent passing 6.35 mm CI/4 inch) standard sieve. (2) 80-100 percent passing 2.38 mm (No. 8, 8 mesh) standard sieve. (3) 0-30 percent passing 500 micron (No. 35, 32 mesh) standard sieve. c. Soluble Salts: (1) Maximum 3.5 millimhos/centimeter at 25 degrees C., as determined by saturation extract method. 4. Organic Soil Conditioner with Fertilizer: Use Gro -Power Plus as manufactured by Southern California Organic Fertilizer Company. 5. Commercial Fertilizer: a. Use commercial fertilizer, uniform in composition, free flowing, conforming to state and federal laws, and suitable for application with equipment designed for that purpose. LANDSCAPE PLANTING Section 2E Page 5 • 6. Plant Material: a. Use plants of the variety and size as shown on the Drawings. b. One of each bundle or lot shall be tagged with the plant name in accordance with the recommendations of the American Association of Nurserymen. c. Use plants with a habit of growth that is normal to the species, are sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests, plant diseases, sun scalds, fresh abrasions of the bark, excessive abrasions or other objectionable disfigurements. Tree trunks shall be well hardened off and sturdy. All plants shall have normally well developed branch systems and vigorous and vibrous root systems which are not root or pot-bound. 7. Tree Stakes: Copper napthanate, green color, impregnated Lodge Pole Pine: a. 10 feet long for 5 gallon and 15 gallon plant material. . b. 12 feet long for 24 inch box and larger material. 8. Tree Ties: a. Single Strike: Use Cinch -Tie as manufactured by V.I.T. Company. b. Double Stake: Use Twist -Brace as manufactured by V.I.T. Company. 9. Vine Ties: Clear plastic disc with eye to receive green plastic covered wire ties. Secure disc to surface with approved adhesive. 10. Herbicides: a. Pre -Emergency Herbicide - Dymid: Granular or wettable powder, manufactured by Elano Products Company, used in conjunction with Treflan, granular or emulsifiable concentrate, manufactured by Elano. • LANDSCAPE PLANTING Section 2E Page 6 b. Contact Herbicide: (1) Ortho Paraquat: As manufactured by Ortho Division of Chevron Chemical Company, to be used with Ortho -X-77 Spreader (Surfactant). (2) Rad -E -Cate 35: As manufactured by Vineland Chemical Company. C33 Round -Up: As manufactured by Monsanto. II. Gravel Sumps: 3/4 to I inch diameter sharp crushed rock gravel. 12. Hydraulic Seeding Materials: a. Fiber: Cellulose fiber to be Conwed Hydro Mulch or Silva Fiber. b. Fertilizer: B-3-2 + 3 percent Fe, or Gro,Power. c. Organic Soil Stabilant: Ecology Controls M -Binder. 2-02. MIXES I. Contractor to secure Agricultural Suitability Soil Analysis from soil and plant laboratories at Santa Ana, California for this site. Amendments shall match this report. 2. Soil Preparation Mix - Mixture for Each 1,000 square feet: a. All turf and ground cover areas (excluding slopes steeper than 3:1). (1) 4 cubic yards of nitrogen stabilized organic amendment. (2) 15 pounds 12-12-12. b. Alternate Mix: t50 pounds Gro -Power plus. 3. Planting SoIIMix - Mixture for Plant Pit Backfill: a. 6 parts by volume of top soil (use import top soil when required). b. 4 parts by volume of organic amendment. C. I pounds 12-12-12 fertilizer per cubic yard of mix. LANDSCAPE PLANTING Section 2E Page 7 0 • 40 4. Agriform Plant Tabs: Add to Plant Pit Backfill; a. Per each 15 gallon plant; 4 tablets. b. Per each 5 gallon plant: 3 tablets. c. Per each I gallon plant: I tablet. d. Box trees; I table per each 1/2 inch trunk caliper. 2-03. SEED MIXES I. Lawn Seed: a. Lawn seed shall be fresh, clean, new crop seed, composed of the following varieties mixed in proportions and testing minimum percentages of purity and germination. Common Name Prop. By Weight Purity Germination Derby Perennial Rye 70 percent 100 percent 90 percent Fylking Bluegrass 15 percent 100 percent 90 percent Newport Bluegrass 15 percent 100 percent 90 percent b. Lawn seed may be mixed by dealer or by an approved method on the site. If seed mixed by dealer, furnish dealer's guaranteed statement of composition of mixture and percentage of purity and germination of each variety in original containers bearing dealer's guaranteed analysis. c. Hydroseed lawn area with the following mix in the proportions indicated. Pounds per Acre Item 300 Seed Mix 1500 Fiber 100 Stabilizer 1000 B-4-2 + Fe 3 percent LANDSCAPE PLANTING. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSPECTION Section 2E Page 8 1, Verify final grades for accuracy prior to beginning planting operations. 2. Verify that soil testing is performed where no soils report Is available. 3. Inspect trees, shrubs and ground cover plant material for injury, insect infestation, and trees and shrubs for improper pruning. 4. Do not begin planting of trees until deficiencies are corrected or plants replaced. 3-02. PREPARATION Grading: a. Moisture Content; Do not work the soil when the moisture content _ is so great that excessive compact Pon will occur nor when it is so dry that dust will form inithe air or when clods will not break readily. Apply water if necessary to provide ideal moisture for filling and for planting. b. Tolerance: All areas will be received by the Contractor at substantially plus or minus 1/10th of a foot of finish grade. c. Finish Grading and Weeding: All lawn and planting areas shall be graded smooth, even and to uniform plane with no abrupt change of surface. All weeds shall be removed and disposed of by Landscape Contractor. d. Finishing: Dispose of buried debris, found upon any excavation, to any convenient legal dump at no expense to the Owner. 2. Soil Preparation: a. Cultivate all areas to be planted (except slopes greater than 3:1) to a depth of at least 6 inches so that the soil becomes loose and friable. Remove from the top 2 inches of soil in all cultivated area, stones, roots larger than I inch in diameter and other deleterious matter which might become a hindrance to planting and maintenance. • • r1 L J LANDSCAPE PLANTING Section 2E Page 4 b. For planting areas, uniformly broadcast and thoroughly incorporate to a depth of 4 inch soil amendments by means of rototiller or accepted equal. 3. Herbicide Application: a. Pre -Emergency Herbicides: Apply to planting areas, except lawns and seeded areas, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. After application, apply I to 2 inches of water per square foot. b. Contact Herbicides: Apply per manufacturer's recommendations to areas to receive seed. Prior to application, moisten areas for 14 days to encourage weed germination and growth. Apply contact herbicide before weeds attain 6 inches in height. Remove higher weed growth manually. 3-03. PLANTING I. Scheduling: Do not commence planting until all construction work, grading, soil preparation and irrigation systems installation have been completed. 2. Layout and Spacing: When plant material is spaced in rows, verify the total dimension and space the plants equally within the designated area. Where plant material is shown in a random pattern, space the material as shown, at all times maintain an unequal spacing as shown on the Drawings and as desired by the Landscape Architect. Space ground cover plantings at the spacing indicated, in a random pattern and not planted in straight rows. 3. Plant Pits: Excavate plant pits with level bottoms, width twice the diameter of the root ball and 6 inches deeper than the length of the root ball, unless noted otherwise. 4. Auger Sumps: For all tree pits indicated on the Drawings to receive auger sumps, install gravel filled auger drilled drainage sumps. 5. Removal from Cans: Open canned stock by cutting can vertically on opposite sides of can with an accepted instrument for the purpose. Do not use an axe or spade. LANDSCAPE PLANTING Section 2E Page 10 6. Setting: Set plants in plant pits so that they bear the same relation to soil level when planted as they did when in container. Center plant in pit. 3-04. PLANTING PIT, BACKFILL Backfill plant pit with specified soil mix. Backfill pit with planting soil half its depth and water thoroughly. Backfill remainder of pit with planting soil. Firm down, eliminating air pockets. Do not pack. Form a shallow basin around the plant to hold enough water to saturate the root ball and backfill. Water plants in immediately after planting. 2. Fill all planters with planting soil to within 2 inches of top. 3-05. TREE STAKING Single Stake: Stake trees designated to be staked, as per detail, with stake on windward side of tree. Set tree in plant pit, drive one tree stake 30 inches to firm soil next to root ball, backfill with prepared soil mix. Secure tree to stake with two "Cinch -Ties" per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Double.Stake: Set tree in plant pit, drive one tree stake to firm soil next to the root ball on each side and backfill pit with prepared soil mix. Secure tree to stakes with "Twist -Brace" per manufacturer's recommendations. 3-06. PLANTING - ROOTED CUTTINGS Plant rooted cuttings sufficiently deep to cover all roots. 2. Keep ground cover plants (rooted cuttings) in flats until time for transplanting. At time of transplating, provide sufficient moisture so that the soil does not fall apart when lifting plants from the flat. Plant each plant with its proportionate amount of flat soil In a manner that will insure minimum disturbance to the root system. 3. Do not allow rooted cuttings to dry out before or while being planted. Firm down soil around each plant sufficiently to force out air pockets. 4. Topdress all rooted cuttings planted areas with 1/2 inch thick mulch. LANDSCAPE PLANTING Section 2E Page 11 3-07. SEEDING Prior to sowing seed, make the surface of the area to be seeded sufficiently loose and friable to receive the seed. 2. Sow seed evenly. Exercise care to keep the seed mixture uniform, avoiding uneven distribution. 3. Following the sowing of seed and application of mulch, apply water in a manner which keeps areas moist, but not glistening wet, until time for the final inspection. 4. Where depressions have developed, fill with accepted topsoil, lightly compact and bring up to finish grade. Reseed filled areas. 5. if any seeded areas are planted prior to the planting of trees and other container material, the Contractor shall be responsible for an" damage to the seeded area caused by his operations and shall repair any damage at his expense. END OF SECTION 2E • • 0 PLANT ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE Section 2F Page 1 SECTION 2F - PLANT ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: a. Examine all other Sections for work related to those other Sections and required to be included as work under this Section. b. Plant establishment and maintenance. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Landscape irrigation system - Section 2G. 2. Landscape planting - Section 2E. 1-03. QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications: Contractor's representative shall be experienced in landscape maintenance and preferably should have educational experience in ornamental horticulture. 2. Materials: All materials used shall conform to either the Bid Specifications or shall have been previously approved as a sub- stitution by the Architect. The Architect shall be given a monthly record of all herbicides, insecticides and disease control chemicals Used, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. All turf and ground cover areas use ammonium phosphate 16-20-0. PLANT ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE Section 2F Page 2 2. In addition to these documents, comply with the recommendations of the Soils Suitability and Fertility Analysis Report. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. PLANT ESTABLISHMENT The plant establishment period shall be for a minimum period of 30 calendar days and shall be completed before the Architect will recommend acceptance of the Construction Contract by the Owner. 2. Plant establishment period will be extended beyond the specified period when plantings have not reached establishment in accordance with the Specifications. Any decisions regarding adequacy of plant establishment shall be determined by the Architect and the Architect's decision shall be final. 3. Ground covers and turf grasses prior to completion of the establish- ment period'shall consist of a uniform cover where a minimum of 80 percent of the seed germination percentage certified by the seed supplier has germinated and presents a healthy, vigorous color and shall exhibit growth to a minimum of 1 inch in height. 4. Ground covers planted from flats and rooted cuttings shall not exhibit die -back at the completion of the establishment period. 5. Trees and shrubs at completion of the establishment period shall not show evidence of die back. 6. Any seeded area which has not developed acceptably in the judgement of the Architect shall be re -seeded by the Contractor. No compensation shall be made for re -seeding areas where seed has not germinated and grown. 7. Shrubs and trees which are dead or show evidence of die back shall be replaced with new, vigorous, and healthy plants by the Contractor. 3-02. MAINTENANCE General: a. The contractural maintenance period shall extend for 60 calendar days from the date of acceptance of the Construction Contract by the Owner. • PLANT ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE Section 2F Page 3 b. During the specified maintenance period the Project will be made available for the Owner's use. The Contractor shall conduct his maintenance operations in such a manner as to minimize inconvenience to the Owner. C. It is the intent of this Section to provide a level of maintenance that will present a pleasing and desirable appearance at all times. The Architect shall be the judge as to adequacy of maintenance. 2: Turf Maintenance: a.. Mow all turf areas weekly, or as needed to maintain the height specified. The borders shall be neatly edged. Trim turf around sprinkler heads as needed to provide maximum water coverage and around planters. Remove all cuttings. b. Mow turf to the following minimum heights: (I) 1-3/4 inch (October through May). (2) 2-1/4 inch (June through September). .C. Irrigate turf as necessary to maintain a proper growth rate and optimum appearance. d. Maintain turf areas in a weed free condition. (1) Apply a pre -emergent crabgrass control to all turf areas between February 15 and April 15 before soil temperature exceeds. 45 - 90 degrees F. (2) Initiate chemical control of broadleaf weeds as required to maintain a "weed -free" turf condition. e. Fertilization: Apply ammonium phosphate 16-20-0 at the rate of 6-7 pounds per 1,000 square feet on a montly.basis beginning approximately 30 days after planting. f. Aerify compacted areas to improve water penetration as required. 3. Slope Maintenance: Maintain ground cover and slope plantings as tollows: a. Irrigate as required to maintain a reasonable appearance. • PLANT ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE Section 2F Page 4 b. Fertilize with ammonium phosphate 16-20-0 at 6-7 pounds per 1,000 square feet monthly. c. Control rodents, snails, and other pests and diseases as required. d. Maintain slopes weed free. e. Trim and edge to maintain sidewalks, curbs and adjacent areas free of plant growth. 4. Shrub and Ground Cover Maintenance: a. Control rodents, snails, and other pests and diseases as required. b. Irrigate as required to maintain a reasonable appearance. c. Fertilize with ammonium phosphate 16-20-0 at 6-7 pounds per 1,000 square feet monthly. d. Maintain shrubs and ground cover in a weed free condition. e. Prune shrubs under direction of the Architect/Engineer. 5. Tree Maintenance: a. Control pests and diseases including rodents and snails as required. b. Remove damaged branches back to point of growth. Treat cuts over 2 inches in diameter with an approved tree wound dressing. c. Restake and support trees as necessary. Place stakes and ties so that no chaffing or girdling of bark occurs. d. Check all guys and ties frequently and adjust to avoid chaffing and girdling. e. Irrigate as required to maintain adequate growth rate and appearance. f. Prune trees under the direction of the Architect PLANT ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE Section 2F Page 5 6. Irrigation System Maintenance a. Maintain the complete irrigation system in an operable manner. b. Repair and adjust all sprinkler heads to maintain proper coverage, including adjusting of heads to proper height. c. Adjust water application to compensate for changes in weather. Contractor will be responsible for damages occurring due to underwatering or overwatering. d. All replacements shall be made with original type material or alternates approved by the Architect e. Repair or replacement of equipment damaged as a result of Contractor's negligence shall be replaced at the Contractors expense within one watering period. f. Damage not resultinq from Contractor's negligence shall be reported promptly to the Architect, together with an estimate of costs for correction of the condition. Contractor • will be reimbursed the wholesale cost of vandalized materials and parts upon presentation of properly itemized list of damaged materials or.equipment. g. All systems shall be operationally checked by the Contractor a minimum of once per week. h. Irrigation shall be accomplished between 10 p.m. and 7 a.m. Irrigation scheduled at other times shall be subject to approval by the Architect 7. General Maintenance: a. Vegetation, either new or previously existing, shall be pruned or trimmed to prevent overhanging sidewalks at less than 7 feet in height or at roadways at lees than 14 feet in height. b. All operations shall be conducted so as to provide maximum safety for the public. C. Leaves, paper, weeds and any other debris shall be removed from landscaped areas and disposed of off site by the Contractor. 0 PLANT ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE Section 2F Page 6 d. Contractor will clean sidewalks, roadways, and any other areas affected by his maintenance operations. e. Notification of all "specialty type" maintenance operations shall be given to the Owner 48 hours prior to each of the operations by the Contractor. "Speciality Type" maintenance operations are defined as: Fertilization, pre -emergent applications of herbicides, turf aerification, turf dethatching, preventive application of turf fungicide, and annual type bedding plant replacements. f. Contractor shall maintain,an office and provide the office with phone service during normal working hours. If a telephone answering service is.utilized, the answering service shall be capable of contacting Contractor by radio or pager. g. Contractor is required to provide Owner with an emergency number for contact outside normal working hours. h. Whenever herbicides are used, Contractor shall apply them when air currents are still, to prevent herbicide drift onto adjoining property and non -target planting and to prevent any toxic exposure to persons whether or not they are in or on the grounds. I. Contractor shall provide uniforms that identify the name of the Contractor or Subcontractor, and name badges for all field personnel. j. Contractor shall prune plant materials adjacent to roadway intersections to provide adequate sight distance for vehicles entering the intersection. k. Contractor shall prune plant materials so that all traffic control signs are clearly visible to approaching drivers. I. Contractor shall compile and maintain "as built" drawings of all work including irrigation systems and including accurate locations and serial numbers of all major components. A complete set of "as builts" drawn in ink on a reproducible medium shall be delivered to the Architect before acceptance of the Project. "As builts" shall be complete and accurate to the satisfaction of the Architect PLANT ESTABLISHMENT AND MAINTENANCE Section 2F Page 7 m. During the Contract period for construction and maintenance, the Contcactor shall pay the cost of all water and electricity. Required permits for water and electricity shall be held in the name of the Contractor during the construction and maintenance period. At completion of the maintenance period, utility billings shall be transferred to the name of the Owner and any proportionate monthly utility billings shall be prorated, based on meter readings. END OF SECTION 2F i 0 . LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 1 SECTION 2G - LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work Includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: a. Examine all other Sections for work related to those other Sections and required to be included as work under this Section. b. Landscape irrigation. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE • I. Landscape planting - Section 2E, 2. Site drainage - Section 2D. 3. Electrical � Division 16. 4. Building plumbing - Division 15. 1-03. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturerts Directions.; Follow manufacturer's printed directions and detailed drawings in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in the work furnish directions covering points not shown in the Drawings or described in the Specifications. 2. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: a. Perform all work in full accordance with the rules and regulations of the 1973 National Electric Code; the Uniform Plumbing Code; and other applicable State or local laws or regulations. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. 9 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 2 b. When the Specifications call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above mentioned codes and regulations, the provisions of the Specifi- cations shall take precedence over the requirements of the said rules and regulations. c. The Contractor shall furnish without any extra charge any additional material and labor when required by the compliance with these rules and regulations, though the work is not mentioned in these particular specifications or shown on the Drawings. d. The Contractor shall erect and maintain barricades, guards, warning signs., and lights as necessary or required by California OSHA regulations for the protection of the public and workmen. e. Pay for all permits, fees and licenses required. 3. Explanation of Drawings: a. Due to the scale of the Drawings, It is not possible to Indicate al( offsets, fittings., sleeves. and other components which may be required. Carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting the work and plan work accordingly. Furnish such fittings and components as may be required to meet such conditions. b. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. install the work in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting, and architectural features. Equipment shown in paved areas is for design clarification only. Install such equipment within planted areas wherever possible. c. Do not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the Drawings when it Is obvious in the field that unknown obstruc- tions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. 1-44, SUBMITTALS I. Material List: a. Furnishthe articles, equipment, materials and processes specified in the Drawings and described herein. No substitution will be allowed without the prior written approval of the Architect. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 3 b. Submit a complete material IFst prior to performing any work. Include the manufacturer, model number and description of all materials and equipment to be used. c. Do not install equipment or materials without prior approval of the Architect. d. Approval of any item, alternate or substitute indicates only that the product or products apparently meet the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. on the basis of the information or samples submitted. e. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability under the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee. 2. Record and As Built Drawings; a. Provide and keep up to date a complete "as built" record set of blue line ozalid prints which shall be corrected to show changes from the original drawings and specifications and the . exact "as built" locations, sizes, and kinds of equipment. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Architect. Keep this set of drawings on the site and use only as a record set. b. Use these drawings as work progress sheets. Make neat and legible annotations thereon as the pork proceeds, showing the work as actually installed. Keep these drawings available at all times for inspection and in a location designated by the Architect. c. Before the date of the final inspection, transfer all information from the "as built" prints to an ozalid sepia, procured from the Architect. Make work neat, in ink, and subject to approval of the Architect. d. Dimension from two permanent points of reference such as building corners, sidewalks or road intersections, the location of: CI) Connection to existing water lines. C2) Connection to existing electrical power. (3) Gate valves. (4) Routing of sprinkler pressure lines and control wiring. (5) Electric control valves. (6) Quick coupling valves.. (7) Other related equipment as directed by Architect. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 4 e. On or before the date of final inspection, deliver the corrected and completed sepias to the Architect. Delivery of the sepias will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of turnishing required information that may be omitted from the prints. 3. Controller Charts: a. Have "as built" drawings approved by Architect before controller charts are prepared. b. Provide a controller chart for each controller supplied. c. Show the area controlled by the automatic controller. d. The chart is to be a reduced drawing of the actual "as built"' system. Make controller sequence legible when reduced. e. Use a different color to indicate the area of coverage for each station. f. When completed and approved, hermetically seal the controller chart between two pieces of minimum 10 mil plastic. g. These charts shall be completed and approved prior to final inspection of the irrigation system. 4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: a. Prepare and deliver to the Architect prior to completion of construction, two hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: CI) Index sheet stating Contractorts address and telephone number. C2) List of equipment with name and addresses of local manufacturer's representatives. (3) Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed. (4) Guarantee statement. (5) Complete operating and maintenance instructions and all major equipment. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 5 b. In addition to the above mentioned maintenance manuals, provide the Owner's maintenance personnel with instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Architect at the conclusion of the Project that this service has been performed. 5. Equipment to be Furnished: a. Two sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling and adjusting each type of sprinkler and valve supplied. b. Two 5 foot valve keys for operation of gate valves. c. Two keys for each automatic controller. d. Six quick coupler keys and matching hose swivels for each type of quick coupling valve installed. e. Show evidence in writing to the Architect that Owner has received such equipment. • 1-05. GUARANTEE 1. Provide a written guarantee in the form as stipulated in the General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. GENERAL I. Use only new materials of brands and types as noted on the Drawings and as specified. 2-03. GALVANIZED STEEL MATER PIPE AND FITTINGS I. Pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized mild steel screwed pipe. 2. Fittings: Medium galvanized screwed beaded malleable iron, Schedule 40. Galvanized couplings may be merchant coupling. 3. Paint all galvanized pipe and fittings below grade with two (2) coats Koppers #50 6itumastic. 0 LANDSCARPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 6 2-03. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) Pipe and Fittings: I. Constant Pressure Maint Line Piping - 2 inch diameter and larger: a. PVC Class 315 with solvent weld joints. b. PVC Class 160 with rubber ring joints. 2. Constant Pressure Maint Line Piping 1-1/2 inch Diameter and Smaller: a. PVC Schedule 40 with solvent weld joints. 3. Intermittent Pressure Lateral Line Piping: a. PVC Class 200 with solvent weld joints. b. PVC Schedule 40 with solvent weld joints where indicated. 4. Fittings: PVC Schedule 40 solvent weld and factory manufactured, or Schedule 40 with rubber ring joint. 5. Piping; a. Install PVC plastic pipe and fittings below grade. b. PVC Pipe; NSF approved Type 1, Grade I compound conforming to ASTM D1784. c. PVC Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 pipe: ASTM 01785 and ASTM D2466. d. PVC Class 160, Class 200, and Class 315 solvent weld and ring tite pipe; ASTM D2241. - e. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM 02564. Use type and installation methods as prescribed by manufacturer. 2-04. BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS 1. Red brass screwed pipe conforming to Federal Specification WW -P-351. 2. Red brass fittings conforming to Federal Specification WW -P-460. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 7 0 2-05. COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS I. Pipe: Hard drawn copper Type K: ANSI h-26-1 and ASTM 688. 2. Wrought Copper or Bronze Solder Fittings: ANSI 8=16.22. Solder 50/50 tin/lead. 2-06. GATE VALVES AND VALVE BOXES I. Use gate valves of the same size as the pipe lines in which they are installed. 2. For Sizes 2 Inches. and Smaller; 150 pound saturated steam rated; brass body - ASTM B62; screwed joints; nonrising stem; screwed bonnet; solid disc; malleable iron "tee" handle or handwheel. 3. For sizes 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: 200 pound O.W.G.; iron body ASTM A126 Class B; flanged joints; non -rising stem; bolted bonnet; double disc type; equipped with square operating nut. 4. Provide two operating keys for valves buried 18 inches or deeper. is5. Valve Boxes: Lock lid type, adjustable 8 inch inside diameter concrete sleeve with cast iron lid in paved areas- Plastic with bolt down lid in planted areas. 2-07. BACKFLOW PREVENTER: I. Use type as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Use piping materials between point of connection and backflow, preventer of type as required by local code. 2-08. QUICK COUPLING VALVES, COUPLERS AND HOSE SWIVELS I. Valves of brass or bronze construction with built in flow control and self closing. Locking top. 2-09. CHECK VALVES I. Vertical type of same size as riser with stainless steel spring C5 to 6 poundsl loaded bronze type poppet valve lined with a flat neoprene disc. Valve seat tapered to seat against disc. 0 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 8 2. Horizontal type constructed of bronze with closing disc plate set on angle, disc holder to contain renewable composition disc designed to close tight to prevent drain back. 3. Use type as indicated on the Drawings. 2-10. AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER I. Use type and size as indicated on the Drawings. 2-(I. ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVES I. Use type and size as indicated on the Drawings.. 2. Use valves of same manufacturer as automatic controller. 2-12. CONTROL WIRING 1. Use direct burial copper wire AWG-U.F. 600 volt for connections between the automatic controller and the electric control valves. No wire size less than #14. Use black color wire for pilot, _ white for common. 2. Install wiring along same route as pressure supply or lateral lines wherever possible. 3. Where more than one wire is placed in a trench, tape wiring together at 10 foot intervals. 4. Provide an expansion curl within 3 feet of each wire connection. 5. Make splices with Scotch -Lok #3577 Connector Sealing Packs or Pen- Tite wire connectors. Use one splice per connector sealing pack. Do not make field splices. 2-03. SPRINKLER HEADS I. Use sprinkler heads of the same size, type, and same rate of precipitation with the diameter Cor radius) of throw, pressure, and discharge as shown on the Drawings. 2. All sprinkler heads of the same type to be of the same manufacturer. 3. Install in the riser nipple of each impact type sprinkler one line size VAL CON #ADV anti -drain valve. LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSPECTION All scaled dimensions are approximate. Verify all size dimensions and receive Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work under this Section. 2. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Check existing utilities duawings for existing utility locations. 3. Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials, including pipe, so there is no interference with utilities, other construction, or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs and ground covers. 4. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely proceed before starting work on the sprinkler irrigation system. 3-02. PREPARATION • I. Water Supply: System designed is based on minimum operating pressure shown at each point of connection, Maximum GPM demand specified. Verify all pressures on site prior to construction. 2. Electrical Supply: 120 volt electrical power outlet for automatic controller furnished under Electrical Section. Verify location. 3. Physical Layout: Layout irrigation system as shown on the Drawings for approval by Architect before construction is started. Any changes, deletions or additions shall be determined at this check. 3-03. INSTALLATION Trenching: a. Excavate trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom'of trench. Lay pipe to an even grade. Follow layout as indicated on the Drawings and as noted. b. Provide for a minimum of 24 inches cover for all pressure supply lines. 0 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 10 c. Provide for a minimum of 24 inches cover for all control wiring. d. Provide for a minimum of 12 inches cover for all intermittent pressure lateral line piping. 2. Backfill: a. Do not backfill trenches until all required tests are performed. b. Carefully backfill trenches with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, Ica, sandy clay, sand or other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones. c. Mechanically compact backfill in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting area. Make Backfill conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps or other surface irregularities. 3. Trenching and Backfill Under Paving: a., All pipe under paved areas to be minimum PVC Schedule 40 pipe installed prior to paving. b. In addition to control wire sleeves shown on the Drawings, .install wire sleeves of sufficient size under all paved areas prior to paving. c. Backfill trenches with 6 inches of sand below pipe and 3 inches above pipe and compact in layers to 90 percent relative compaction, as specified in section 2B - EARTHWORK. d. Pressure test all piping under paving prior to paving work. 4. Assemblies: a. Roughing of sprinkler irrigation lines as indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Install lines (and various assembiies7 in such a manner as to conform with the details per plans. b. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. • LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 11 C. Install all assemblies specified herein in accordance with respective detail. In absence of detail drawings or specifi- cations pertaining to specific items required to complete work, perform such work in accordance with best standard practice. d. Thoroughly clean PVC pipe and fittings before installation. Use installation and solvent welding methods as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer. e. On PVC to metal connections, work the metal connections first. Use teflon tape on all threaded Joints. Screw hand tight and 1/2 turn by wrench. Where threaded PVC connections are required, use threaded PVC adapters to which the pipe may be welded. 5. Line Clearance: Minimum 6 inches from each other and from lines from other trades. Do not install parallel lines directly, over one another. 6. Automatic Controller: • a. Final location of automatic controller shall be determined by the Owner and Architect b. Install automatic controller in conformance with detailed drawings and manufacturer's. written instructions. c. Connect remote control electrical valves to controller in numerical sequence as shown on the Drawings. 7. Electric Control Valves: a. Install valves as shown on detail drawings. When grouped together, allow at least 12 inches between valves. b. Install each valve.in a separate valve box. 8. Flushing of System: a. After all new sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, all necessary diversion work completed, and prior to installation of sprinkler heads, open control valves and flush out system with a full head of water. b. Install sprinkler heads only after flushing of system has been accomplished. 0 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 12 9. Sprinkler Heads; a. Install the sprinkler heads as designated on the Drawings. b. Do not exceed maximum spacing of heads indicated on the Drawings and in no case exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer. 3-04. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Adjustment of the System; a. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways, and buildings as much as possible. b. Select the best degree of arc to fit existing site conditions. c. Set all sprinkler heads perpendicular to finished grades unless otherwise designated on the Drawings. 2. Testing of Irrigation System: a. Perform a coverage test in the presence of the Architect to determine if the water coverage for planting areas is complete and adequate. Furnish materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from Drawings, or where the system has been wilfully installed as indicated on the Drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the Architect b. Perform this test before any ground cover is planted. c. Test all pressure lines under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch, and prove watertight. d. Pressure test all piping under paved areas under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch, and prove watertight prior to paving. e. Sustain pressure in lines for not less than two (2) hours. If leaks develop, replace joints and repeat test until entire system is proven watertight. E LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 2G Page 13 f. All hydrostatic tests shall be made only in the presence of the Architect or other duly authorized representative of the Owner. Do not place backfill until tests have been• approved. g. Furnish necessary force pump and all other test equipment. h. Upon completion of each phase of work, test and adjust entire system to meet site requirements. 3-05. MAINTENANCE The entire sprinkler irrigation system shall be under full automatic operation for a period of 7 days prior to planting. The Architect reserves the right to waive or shorten the operation period. 3-06. FINAL INSPECTION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE 1. Operate each system in its entirety for the Architect at time of final inspection. Rework any items deemed not • acceptable to Architect 2. Show evidence to Anccitect that Owner has received accessories, charts, record drawings, and equipment as .required before final inspection. END OF SECTION 2G 0 . SITE CONCRETE Section 2H Page I SECTION 2H - SITE CONCRETE PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Work Included: All labor, materials, aopliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work ir:cludes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Examine all other Sections for work related to those other Sections and required to be included as work under this Section. b. Furnishing, erection, and removal of forms and shores. c. Furnishing and placing reinforcing steel for concrete. . d. Furnishing and placing all concrete. e. Grout and drypack work, except as otherwise specified. f. Finishing and curing of concrete g. Placing of embedded anchor bolts and inserts. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Preparation and grading of earth below concrete, Section 2B. 2. Concrete formwork, Section 3A. 3. Concrete reinforcement, Section 3B. 4. Cast in place concrete, Section 3C. 5. Concrete curing, Section 3D. 1-03. SUBMITTALS: (Refer to Section IG for procedures) I. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical data for products, methods and procedures for integral color admixtures and surface retardants. 0 SITE CONCRETE Section 2H Page 2 - 2. Samples: Prepare 24 inch square and 4 inch thick samples for integrally colored, exposed aggregate, and specially finished concrete. Prepare as many samples as are required for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Furnish materials meeting the following requirements: a. Form Lumber: WCLIB "Construction" or better, WWPA No. I or better, or equal. b. Form Plywood: PS 1-74, Group I, Exterior B -B Plyform or better, minimum 5 ply and 5/8 inch thickness, grade marked, not mill oiled. Plywood having medium or high density overlay is acceptable. c. Form Ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, or threaded internal disconnecting type, not leaving metal within 171/2 inches of concrete surface. d. Form Coating: Resin type free of oil, silicon, wax and ncn- drying material, not grain raising. e. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615,.Grades 40 and 60. f. Reinforcing Mesh: ASTM A185, mesh size and gage as indicated, 60 ksi minimum tensil strength. g. Welding Electrodes: AWS A5.1, 80 or 90 series, low hydrogen per AWS D1.4-79. h. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali. Do not change brand without prior approval. Use Type V if sulfate content of soil greater ,than 0.2 percent. i. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage minimum. j. Water: From potable domestic source. k. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751 and 01752, as specified. Non-bitumastic. • SITE CONCRETE Section 2H Page 3 I. Joint Sealer: Thiokol polysulfide polymer. Color as indicated. m. Non -Shrink Grout: Master Builders "Embeco," Grace "Vibrofil," or equal. n. White Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I from one approved source. Use for integrally colored concrete. o. Brass Screeds: 1-1/4 inch high by 1/8 inch wide brass with galvanized anchor terrazzo screeds. Available from United Terrazzo Supply Co., Inc. p. Aggregates: ASTM C33 crushed rock and fresh water sand, sized and graded as required for the design mix specified. q. Color Admix: L.M. Scofield Company "Chromix." r. Surface Retarder: L.M. Scofield "Lithochrome Surface Retarder." Top Surface Grade. • 2-02. CONCRETE MIXING I. Furnish ready mixed concrete from an approved commercial offsite plant. Conform to ASTM C94, except materials, testing, and mix designs as specified herein. 2. Exposed Aggregate Concrete Mix: a. Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi. Aggregates: Pea Gravel Mix (50 percent sand and 50 percent aggregate). b. Batching: Batch in accordance with L.M. Scofield's Technical Bulletin A-30. 2-03. FABRICATION OF REINFORCING STEEL I. Fabricate in conformance with ACI 315, American Concrete Institute Manual of Practice. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. FORM ERECTION ANq REMOVAL I. Comply with ACI 347 and 301 except as exceeded by requirements of Code, regulatory agencies, or herein. • SITE CONCRETE Section 2H Page 4 2. Construction: Coat forms with specified material, not oil. Build forms to exact shapes, sizes, lines and dimensions as required to obtain accurate alignment, location and grades, and level and plumb surfaces in finished structure. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses, molding, reglets, chamfers, screeds, anchorages and other required features. Make forms easily removable without hammering or prying against concrete. Install metal spreads to provide accurate spreading of forms. Construct forms so no sagging, leakage of concrete mortar, or displacement occurs during and after placing concrete. Secure inserts in forms according to shop drawings and instructions of other trades. 3. Form Joints: Fill joints to produce smooth surfaces, intersections and arrises. Provide adequate fillers at joints and where forms abut existing concrete to prevent leakage of mortar. 4. Time of Form Removal: Do not remove forms until concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its own weight and all imposed loads, and removal is approved. 5. Re -Use: Clean and recondition form material before reuse. 3-02. EMBEDDED ITEMS Provide facilities for supervision required for installation of inserts specified under other Sections and perform cutting and reinforcing of forms required to accommodate them. 2. Set such items according to approved shop drawings and setting plans. Furnish ties and supports necessary to keep embedded items In place when concrete is placed. 3. Do not place any concrete until all inserted items are installed in their proper locations, secured against displacement, cleaned, inspected and approved. 3-03. PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE PLACEMENT Remove excess water from forms before concrete is deposited. Remove hardened concrete, debris, and foreign materials from interior of forms and from inner surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment. • SITE CONCRETE Section 2H Page 5 2. Wetting: Wet wood forms sufficiently to tighten up cracks. Wet other materials sufficiently to reduce suction and maintain concrete workability. 3. Earth Subgrade: Lightly dampen 24 hours in advance of concrete placing, but do not muddy. Re -roll where necessary for smoothness and remove loose material. 4. Screeds: Set screeds where indicated. 3-04. PLACING CONCRETE Place and consolidate concrete so as to completely fill all spaces in the forms. Compact and tamp concrete to bring 1/8 to 1/4 inch of mortar to surface, and wood float to straightedges and screeds. Do not use steel or plastic floats of any kind for initial floating operations. Do not apply finish until surface water disappears and surface is sufficiently hardened. Remove bleed water and laitance as it appears. 3-05. JOINTS I. Expansion Joints: Conform to details on Drawings. Fill joints with pre -moulded joint filler as specified. Install joint filler strips vertically extending the full depth and width of the work in which they are installed. Fill joint within 3/8 inch of any surface of the concrete. Trim off excess material to the specified dimension in a neat manner. a. Provide i inch transverse expansion joint at maximum 20 foot intervals and where walks abut rigid structures, unless indicated in the drawings. No panel should exceed a length +ry wlri+h ratin of 7 to 1. b. Sealed Joints: Hold filler down 1/2 inch unless otherwise shown, ready to receive sealant specified. 2. Weakened Plane Joints: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, construct joints transverse to the line of work and at regular intervals not exceeding 10 feet. • SITE CONCRETE Section 2H Page 6 a. Control Joints: After preliminary trowelling, part concrete to a depth of 2 inches with a straight edge to create a division in the coarse aggregate. Refloat concrete to fill the parted J oint with mortar. Mark headers or formwork to locate the weakened plane for final joint finishing. Use a jointer tool having a depth of 1/2 inch and radius of 1/8 inch. Do not make the finished joint opening wider than 1/8 inch. b. Scoring: Provide where shown or directed. Conform tool size and configuration to Architect/Engineer's approval. 3-06. FINISHING Make finished surfaces level or sloped as indicated with maximum deviation of 1/8 inch from a 10 foot straightedge. Keep surface moist with fine fog spray of water as necessary. Dusting with cement or sand during finishing operation is not permitted.. Finish exposed edge of slabs and slab joints with edging tool. 2. Rough Slabs: Broom surfaces of slab after initial set of concrete leaving coarse aggregate slightly exposed. Apply on concrete to receive deferred cementitious toppings or mortar setting beds. 3. Monolithic Trowel Finish: For all slab and flatwork surfaces not otherwise indicated or specified. After surface water disappears and floated surface is sufficiently hardened, steel trowel and retrowel to smooth surface. After concrete has set enough to ring trowel, retrowei to a smooth uniform finish, free of trowel marks and other blemishes. Avoid excessive troweling that produces burnished areas. 4. Steel Float Finish: Same as monolithic trowel finish, except omit second retroweling. Apply on indicated surfaces. 5. Swirl Non -Slip (Sweat Trowel) Finish: Same as monolithic trowel finish except omit second retroweling. Produce non -slip finish by circular motion and slight lifting of trowel. Apply to indicated surfaces. 6. Broom Finish: Prepare same as steel float finish, then apply uniform approved medium texture by sliding wire broom in one direction along straightedge guide placed at right angles to direction of traffic flow. Apply to indicated surfaces. • SITE CONCRETE Section 2H Page 7 • 7. Abrasive Aggregate Finish: Same as for monolithic trowel finish. Just before performing retroweling, uniformly apply abrasive aggregate at rate of 1/4 pound per square foot minimum, and lock into cement matrix with the final retroweling. Lightly rub the hardened green concrete to exposed grains and remove cement film. Apply to indicated surfaces. 3-07. EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE FINISH Placing of Concrete: Place concrete and avoid tamping so that coarse aggregate will remain near the surface. Apply wood float finish. 2. Application of Retarder: As soon as final finishing has been completed, apply Lithochrome Surface Retarder, Top Surface Grade, as manufactured by L.M. Scofield Company, evenly over the surface in accordance with L.M. Scofield's Tech—Data Bulletin D-203. NOTE: If temperature is exceedingly high or humidity low, cover the concrete after placing with a polyethelene film until the surface is removed. 3. Aggregate Reveal: Remove retarder between 8 and 20 hours after placement with a coarse fibered scrub brush and jet of water. 4. Curing: After the surface has been removed and the aggregate exposed, cure surface with new, non—staining, curing paper. Do not use liquid type curing compounds. 3-08. CURING Apply curing after finishing operations without marring surfaces, and in any case on same day. Apply liquid compounds in accordance with material manufacturer's published application rates; apply 2 coats, second coat at right angle to first coat. Mask and protect adjoining surfaces where compound is used. Spray equipment shall have spray nozzles and a wind shield as required for wind conditions. 2. Curing Period and Protection: Maintain curing materials in proper sealed condition for minimum 10 days after application. Keep traffic on curing surfaces to minimum possible, and completely off liquid compound cured gurfaces. Immediately restore any damaged or defective curing media. SITE CONCRETE Section ZH Page a 3. Restriction: do not use liquid membrane forming curing compound on concrete to receive subsequent concrete or mortar, or on surfaces to receive subsequently applied materials unless such use and the compound used are approved by manufacturer of material to.be applied; verify with related trades. 4. Liquid Curing Compound: Use for slabs, subject to above restriction. 5. Sheet Curing: Use curing sheet material, joints sealed with pressure sensitive tape; immediately repair tears during curing period. Verify that surfaces remain damp for full curing period; if necessary lift sheeting, wet surfaces with clean water and replace sheeting. Use on surfaces where curing compound is not permitted. 6. eater Curing: Option to curing compound or sheet curing method. Keep concrete continuously wet for entire curing period. END OF SECTION 2H • FOUNTAINS Section 21 Page 1 SECTION 21 - FOUNTAINS PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for an incidental to performing all opeations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: a. Examine all other Sections for work related to those other Sections and required to be included as work under this Section. b. Fountains. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Site plumbing, Division 15. 2. Cast in place concrete, Division 3. 3. Waterproofing, Division 7. 4. Tile work, Division 9. 5. Electrical, Division 16. 1-03. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit color samples and shop drawings for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. HAND CARVED STONE FOUNTAIN 1. Melon Two Bowl: a. Height: 72 inches. b. Large Bowl: 32 inches. c. Round Pool • d. Stone: Pale Rose FOUNTAINS Section 21 Page 2. 2. Fountain as manufactured by Cantera. Available from Ceramic Design, 1436 S. Grand Avenue, Santa Ana, California 92705 (714) 835-1436. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION I. Install fountain components as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. ENO OF SECTION 21 CONCRETE FORMWORK Section 3A Page 1 • SECTION 3A - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Wood formwork for cast in place concrete, complete with shoring, bracing and anchorage. 2. Form openings for mechanical and electrical work. 3. Coordinate installation of items supplied by other sections of work. 4. Pre_formed construction joints. 5. Dovetail ancbor slots. 6. Flashing reglets. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE • I. Masonry accessories to be embedded in concrete - Section 4A. 2. Metal fabrications to be embedded in concrete - Section 68. 3. Mechanical items to be embedded in concrete - Division 15. 4. Electrical items to be embedded in concrete - Division 16 5. Testing 8 Inspection - Division 1, Section 1M 1-03. QUALITY ASSURANCE - 1. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 318 and 347 and applicable construction safety regulations for place of work. 1-04. REFERENCES 1. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 2. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork. CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. WOOD FORM MATERIALS Section 3A Page 2 - Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one side, medium density over- laid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean true edges. 2. Lumber: Dougle Fir species; construction grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. 3. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required; of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while pouring concrete. 2-02. FORMWORK ACCESSORIES Form Ties: Snap -off metal type of fixed length. 2. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. _ 3. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Rigid foam plastic type; 34 inch by 3/4 inch maximum possible lengths. 2-03. CONCRETE ACCESSORIES Form Construction Joints: Minimum 18 gage galvanized steel; tongue and groove type profile; knockout holes at 6 inches on center to receive dowelling; complete with anchorage; manufactured by Superior Concrete Products or equivalent. 2. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Minimum 24 gage galvanized steel; foam filled; release tape sealed slots; bent tab anchors; securable to concrete formwork manufactured by Superior Concrete Products or equivalent. 3. Flashing Reglets: Minimum 24 gage galvanized steel: Longest possible lengths; complete with alignment splines for joints; securable to concrete formwork; manufactured by Heckman Building Products or equivalent. . CONCRETE FORMWORK Section 3A Page 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. FORMWORK ERECTION I. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Verify that dimensions agree with Drawings. 2. Construct formwork, shoring and bracing to meet design and code requirements, so that resultant finished concrete conforms to required shapes, lines and dimensions. 3. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping, so that concrete is not damaged during its removal. 4. Align joints and make watertight, to prevent leakage of mortar disfigured appearance of concrete. Keep form joints to minimum. 5. Obtain Architect's review for use of earth forms. When using earth forms, hand trim sides and bottoms, and remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete. • 6. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Prop or strengthen previously constructed formwork liable to be overstressed by construction loads. 7. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of beams, columns and walls. 8. Construct formwork to maintain following maximum tolerances: a. Deviation from horizontal and vertical lines: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. b. Deviation of building dimensions indicated on Drawings and position of columns, walls and partitions: 1/4 inch. c. Deviation in cross sectional dimensions of columns or beams or in thickness of slabs and walls: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 9. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. • CONCRETE FORMWORK Section 3A Page 4 10. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete. Il. Do not apply form release agent where wood graining characteristics are required on finished concrete surfaces. Leave formwork dry in these areas. 3-02. INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves and other work to be embedded in and passing through concrete. 2. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. 3. Coordinate work of other sections and cooperate with trade involved In forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. Do not perform work unless specifically indicated on Drawings and reviewed prior to installa- tion. 4. Install concrete accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. 5. Place formed construction joints in floor slab in the pattern pouring sequence shown on Drawings. Set top screed to required elevations. Secure to resist movement of wet concrete. 6. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close temporary ports or openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3-03. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect and check completed formwork, shoring and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and parts are secure. • CONCRETE FORMWORK 0 Section 3A Page 5 2. Inform Architect when formwork is complete and has been cleaned, to allow for observation. Obtain review prior to placing concrete. 3. For exposed concrete surfaces do not reuse wood type formwork more than three (3) times. Do not patch formwork. n. Allow Architect to raview each section of for7wcrk oricr to reuse. 3-04. CLEANING I. Clean forms 'as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter. Remove cuttings, shavings, and debris from within forms. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean out ports. 3-05. FORM REMOVAL I. Notify Architect prior to removing formwork. 2. Do not remove forms and bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight, and construction and design load which are liable to be imposed upon it. 3. Remove formwork progressively and in accordance with code require- ments and so that no shock loads or unbalanced loads are imposed on structure. 4. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, and tools against concrete surfaces. 5. Leave forms loosely in place, against vertical surfaces, for protec- tion until complete removal is reviewed by Architect. 6. Store removed forms, for exposed architectural concrete, in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Marked or scored forms will be rejected. END OF SECTION 3A • CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Section 38 Page 1 SECTION 3B - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Reinforcing steel bars, and welded steel wire fabric for cast -in-place concrete, complete with tie wire. 2. Support chairs, bars supports, spacers, and tie wire for reinforcing. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Section 3C: Cast -in-place concrete. 2. Section 4A: (04340) Reinforcement for masonry. 3. Testing and Inspection: Division 1 - Section 1M • 1-03. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Perform concrete reinforcing work in accordance with CRSI 63 and 65 unless specified otherwise in this Section. 1-04. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1. Submit certified copies of mill test report of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical and chemical anslysis. 1-05. REFERENCES 1. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 2. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Rein- forcing Bars. 3. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Suports, Specifications and Nomenclature. 4. ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Section 38 Page 2 5. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 6. AWS D12.1 - Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction. 7, ACI 315 - American Concrete Institute - Manual of Standard Practice. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. REINFORCING 1. Grade Minimum Yield Strength 40 40,000 psi 2. Reinforcing Steel: 40 yield grade; deformed billet steel bars, ASTM A615, plain finish. 3. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: (Plain type, ASTM A185;) in (flat sheets;) plain finish. 2-02. ACCESSORY MATERIALS 1. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gauge annealed type, or patented system accepted by Architect. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcing during construction conditions. 3. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Plastic coated type: sized and shaped as required. 4. Arc -welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM -A233 2-03. FABRICATION 1. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315. 2. Locate reinforcing splices, not indicated on Drawings, at points of minimum stress. Location of Splices: Reviewed by Architect. . CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Section 3B Page 3 3. Where indicated, weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D12.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. PLACEMENT 1. Place reinforcing supported and secured against dis- placement. Do not deviate from true alignment. 2. Before placing concrete, ensure reinforcing is clean, free of loose scale, dirt, or other foreign coatings which would reduce bond to concrete. 3. Welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualifications Procedure" Such qualifications test shall have been passed within the preceding 12 -month period. • END OF SECTION 3B r 1 U • CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 3C Page 1 SECTION 30 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Poured -in-place concrete foundations and walls. 2. Floors and slabs on grade. 3. Poured -in-place equipment pads. 4. Vapor barrier under slabs on grade. 5. Surface finish of walls, and slabs. 6. Prepare concrete base slabs to receive toppings. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE • 1. Section 3A: Formwork for concrete. 2. Section 3B: Con rete reinforcement. 3. Section 3B: Concrete floor finishing. 4. Section 3D: Concrete curing. 5. Section 4A: Masonry accessories to be cast in concrete. 6. Section 5B: Metal fabrications to be cast in concrete. 7. Division 15: Mechanical items to be cast in concrete. 8. Division 16: Electrical items to be cast in concrete. 9. Section 1M: Testing & Inspection 1-03. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Perform cast -in-place concrete work in accordance with ACI 318, unless specified otherwise in this • Section. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 3C Page 2 - 1-04. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1. Inspection and testing will be performed by firm in accordance with Division 1. 2. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm. 3. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of work.. 4. Tests of cement and aggregate may be performed to ensure conformance with requirements stated herein. 5. Four concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 or less cu. yds. for class of concrete placed, for each day of concreting. 6. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. 1-05. REFERENCES 1. 1979 Edition of the Uniform Building Code. 2. ACI 319 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 3. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. PRODUCTS 1. Cement: Moderate -Type 11 Sulphate resistant -Type V, Portland type, ASTM C150. 2. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. • CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 3C Page 3 3. Water: Clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious material. 2-02. ADMIXTURES 1. Chemical: ASTM C494 (Type A - water reducing). 2-03. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1. Acceptable Manufacturers of Admixtures: a. Sika Chemical Corp. b. Masterbuiiders Co. C. Triscosal 2. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with Division 1 - Section 1J. 2-04. ACCESSORIES • 1. Vapor Barrier: 10 mil clear polyvinyl chloride film, type recommended for below -grade application. 2. Non -shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in 2 days and 7000 psi in 28 days. 2-05. CONCRETE MIXES 1. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. 2. Provide concrete of following strength: a. Compressive strength: 2500 psi at 28 days. b. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 3.8 Method 1, and Method 2, or Method 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 0 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 3C Page 4 - 3-01. PLACING CONCRETE 1. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304. 2. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commence- ment of concreting operations. 3. Verify anchors, seats, plates, and other items to be cast into concrete are placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. Rectify same and proceed with work. 4. Maintain records of poured concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 5. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, formed expansion and contraction joints, and embedded parts are not disturbed during concrete placement. 6. Pour concrete continuously between predetermined or previously approved construction and control joints. (Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.) 7. Pour floor slabs in the pattern indicated on Drawings. Provide control joints as indicated on Drawings. 8. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, in- sert steel dowels and pack solidly with non -shrink grout. 9. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect upon discovery. 10. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: Item Coverage Walls (exposed to weather or backfill) two inches Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth three inches Slabs on grade two and one half inches • CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 3C Page 5 11. Install vapor barrier under interior stabs on grade with 2 inches of clean sand above and 1 inch of clean sand below. Lap joints minimum twelve inches and seal. Do not disturb or damage vapor barrier while placing concrete reinforcing. If damage does occur, repair areas before placing concrete. Use vapor barrier material, lapped over damaged areas minimum 12 inches in two directions and seal. 3-02. SCREEDING 1. Screed (slabs -on -grade) and concrete base for topping level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/8 inch in 10 ft. 3-03. PATCHING 1. Allow Architect to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. Patch imperfections as directed. 3-04. DEFECTIVE CONCRETE • 1. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required lines, details and elevations. 2. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed architectural concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. 3-05. CONCRETE FINISHING 1. Provide concrete wall surfaces to be left exposed with sack rubbed finish. 2. Provide concrete floor finishes as follows: a. Exterior wearing surfaces - medium broom finish b. Interior surfaces to receive carpet - steel trowel C. Surfaces to receive topping - wood float • CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 3C Page b 3-05. CURING AND PROTECTION Beginning immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. Main- tain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydra- tion of cement and hardening of concrete. END OF SECTION 3C . CONCRETE CURING Section 3D Page 1 SECTION 3D - CONCRETE CURING PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Initial and final curing. 2. Curing materials. 3. Sealing materials. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Section 3C: Cast -in-place Concrete. 2. Section 3A: Formwork PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS 1. Water: Potable 2. Absorptive Mats: Burlap -polyethylene, minimum 8 cz/sq. yd. bonded to prevent separation during handling, placement, curing. 3. Membrane Curing Compound: Acrylic, or chlorinated rubber type, pigmented. 4. Polyethylene Film: 6 mil thick, opaque color. 5. Sealer: Super floor coat by Euclid Co., Masterseal by Master Builders, or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. SPRAYING 1. Spray water over slabs and maintain wet for seven days continuously. • CONCRETE CURING 3-02. ABSORPTIVE MAT Section 3D Page 2 1. Saturate burlap and place burlap -side down over (slabs,) lapping ends and sides minimum six inches, and maintain in place for seven days. 3-03. MEMBRANE CURING COMPOUND 1. Apply curing compound in two coats with second coat at right angles to first. 3-04. POLYETHYLENE FILM 1. Spread polyethylene film over slabs lapping edges and sides a minimum of 12 inches, maintain in place with pressure sensitive tape and plywood for seven days. 3-05. SEALER 1. All exposed slabs shall receive a final sealing coat _ of specified sealer just prior to completion of construction at the rate of 400 square feet per gallon, unless otherwise recommended by the Manu- facturer of the sealer to be used. END OF SECTION 3D r� L J CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Section 4A Page i SECTION 4A - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Concrete unit masonry complete. 2. Mortar for masonry. 3. Grout for masonry. 4. Build in items supplied by other Sections. 5. Cut and fit for work of other Sections. 6. Parge concrete unit masonry surfaces where indicated. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Structural steel items to be built in masonry work - Section SPr. 2. Metal fabrications to be built in masonry work - Section 5B. 3. Rough carpentry attachment to masonry - Section 6A. 4. Reinforcing Steel - Section 3B 5. Flashing reglets to be built in masonry work - Section 7A. 6. Membrane waterproofing - Section 7E. 7. Testing and Inspection - Section IM 1-03. QUALITY ASSURANCE I. Perform masonry work in accordance with requirements of Chapter 24 of the 1979 Edition of the Uniform Building Code unless indicated otherwise herein. 2. Certification: Contractor shall furnish a certificate to the Architect, executed in triplicate, stating that all concrete blocks have been properly and thoroughly cured at the plant before shipment, and that they conform to al of the requirements of this Specification. Each certificate shall be signed by the block manufacturer and shall contain the name of the Contractor, the Project location, and the quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificate applies. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Section 4A Page 2 3. Tests: Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of a qualified testing laboratory to verify the quality and strength of masonry mortar and grout. Laboratory tests of mortar and grout shall be made in accordance with current ASTM Standard procedures. Test specimens shall be prepared and cured by a qualified laboratory. One set of at least two tests prisms each of mortar and grout shall be made each day for the first 3 working days at the beginning of masonry work. Contractor shall submit reports of all tests conducted by the Testing Laboratory to the Architect and Owner immediately upon completion of such tests. 1-04. REFERENCES ASTM C150 - Portland Cement 2. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 3. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 4. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 5. ASTM C476 Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry. 6. ANSI A41.1 Building Code Requirements for Masonry. 1-05. SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer's _certifications and product data in accordance with Division I. 2. Submit two samples of each type of concrete masonry unit, as a shop drawing submittal. No concrete masonry construction shall proceed until the above mentioned samples have been approved by the Architect. 3. Mix designs: Upon receipt of acceptable design mixes for mortar and grout, the Contractor shall submit same to the Architect for approval. 1-06. PROTECTION Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Section 4A Page 3 2. Provide temporary bracing during masonry erection. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MASONRY Concrete Blocks: ASTM C90 Hollow Core 1500 psi, Grade N, Type I units; 6 by 8 by 16 inch size complete with corners, bases and fillers to match and complement block units; standard weight. Units shall be single open end, precision block as manufactured by Orco Block, Angelus Block Company or approved equivalent. 2-02. SUBSTITUTIONS Items of same function are acceptable in conformance with Division I. 2-03. MATERIALS I. Portland Cement: ASTM 0150, Type 11, Low Alkali, gray color. 2. Aggregates: Standard masonry type, ASTM C144 freezing and foreign . matter. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207 Type S. 4. Grout Aggregate: Clean and graded concrete aggregates, conforming to ASTM C33, proportioned as follows: 3 parts fine and graded concrete aggregate to 2 parts of graded 3/8 inch maximum size coarse aggregate. 5. Water: Fresh, clean and potable, and free from such amounts of mineral and organic substances as would adversely affect the hardening of cement mortar. 6. Waterproofing Admixture: "Berylex" as manufactured by Berylex Western of Oakland, California, A.C. Horn's "Hydratite," Sonneborn's "Hydrocide Powder," or approved equivalent. Waterproofing admixture shall be added to both mortar and grout mixes in amounts recommended by the manufacturer but not to the extent that mortar and grout strengths specified cannot be easily obtained. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Section 4A Page 4 7. Reinforcing Steel: Furnish and install reinforcing steel for grouted block masonry under this Section in accordance with the requirements of Section 36 "Reinforcing Steel." 2-04. MORTAR I. Provide Type S mortar for grouted unit masonry. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 1500 psi. 2. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients, in quantities needed for immediate use. 3. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure uniformity of mix. 4. Use mortar within two (2) hours of mixing at temperatures over 78 degrees F. (26 degrees C.). 5. I'f necessary, retemper mortar within two (2) hours of mixing to replace water lost by evaporation. Do not retemper mortar after two (2) hours of mixing. 2-05. GROUT I. Grout Strength: Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 2000 psi. 2. Grout Mix: Grout shall be designed in accordance with ASTM C94 for manufacturer designed mixes. Slump shall be at least 10 inches. The use of an admixture for the purpose of reducing water content will be permitted, subject to approval by the Architect of the admixture, and provided the strength of grout is not impaired. Grout shall be proportioned approximately as follows: I part portland cement to 3 parts of fine and graded 3/8 inch maximum size coarse aggregate. Waterproofing admixture shall be added in amount recommended by the manufacturer but not to the extent that grout strength specified is impaired. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. PREPARATION Supply reinforcing steel and embedded items to Section 3g for placement. Provide sufficient quantity, and direct their correct placement. • • 7J CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Section 4A Page 5 2. Ensure items built in by other trades for this work.are properly located and sized. 3. Establish lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbances. 3-02. INSTALLATION I. Place masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on Drawings. 2. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections. 3. All head joints shall be constructed of at least one open end. This is an integral part of wall waterproofing. 4. Buttering corners of joints, deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. 5. Do not shift or tap masonry after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 6. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry with proper power tools to provide straight and true, unchipped edges. 7. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. Lay in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. 8. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking masonry corners. 9. Lay concrete block in running bond. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form flush mortar joints. 3-03. TOLERANCES I. Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit is 1/16 inch. 2. Maximum variation from vertical and horizontal building lines is 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 3. Maximum variation from cross sectional thickness of masonry cavity and walls is plus or minus 1/8 inch. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 3-04. REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES Section 4A Page 6 _ I. Place masonry reinforcing and anchorages for concrete unit masonry as follows: a. Vertical reinforcing bars shall be placed prior to laying the wall and shall be held in place by standard reinforcing supports. b. Horizontal bars shall be tied to vertical bars as the block work progresses and shall be embedded in grout. Placing of horizontal reinforcing in joints or mortar will not be permitted. 3-05. BUILT IN WORK I. As work progresses, built in nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items supplied by other trades. 2. Build in items plumb and true. 3. Do not build in organic materials which will be subjected to rot or deterioration. 3-06. CUTTING AND FITTING I. Cut and fit concrete block for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Cooperate fully with other Sections of work to ensure correct size, shape and location. 2. Obtain Architect's review prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on Drawings, or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work. 3-07. GROUTING 1. Grout construction shall conform to all requirements of Section 2415 of the 1979 "Uniform Building Code." 2. Grout shall be placed by means of an approved grout pump capable of handling at least 12 cubic yards per hour of the specified 3/8 inch maximum size aggregate mix, or by other accepted method if first approved by the Architect. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY I Section 4A Page 7 3. A small internal vibrator shall be used for consolidation and reconsolidation. No puddling and/or tamping of grout will be allowed. 3-08. CLEANING I. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completionof masonry work. 2. Point or replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. 3. Clean soiled surfaces using a non -acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning opera- tions. END OF SECTION 4A • 0 • GLASS BLOCK Section 4B Page 1 SECTION 4B - GLASS BLOCK PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Glass block. 2. Panel anchors. 3. Expansion strips. 4. Mortar. 5. Sealant. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Concrete unit masonry work, Section 4A. 2. Concrete work, Division 3 . 3. Stucco work, Section 4A. 1-03. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit product data and samples of materials and accessories proposed for use. 2. Sumbit layout shop drawings showing details of all adjoining conditions and including locations and methods of installation of accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS 1. Glass Block: Pittsburgh Corning Prism B, sized as detailed, or equivalent. 2. Expansion Strips: PC expansion strips. 3. Panel Anchors: PC panel anchors, No. 20 gage by 24 by 1-3/4 inch, perforated and hot dip galvanized GLASS BLOCK after perforating. Section 46 Page 2 - 4. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 5. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 6. Sand: ASTM C144, for thin joints. 7. Sealant: General Electric Construction Sealant SCS 1201, translucent. 8. Asphalt Emulsion: Type recommended by manufacturer. 9. Oakum and Waterproofing Admixture: As recommended and furnished by manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3-01. INSPECTION 1. Installer must examine the areas and conditions under which work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the In- staller. 3-02. MORTAR 1. Mix mortar in conformance with ASCM C270, using pro- portions by volume of 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part hydrated lime and 3-1/2 parts sand, add sufficient water to obtain a dry mix. 3-03. WORKMANSHIP 1. Conform to the requirements shown on approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Coat sill area with a heavy coat of water based asphalt emulsion. Adhere expansion strips to jambs and head with gobs of asphalt emulsion. Make certain 40 GLASS BLOCK Section 46 Page 3 expansion strip extends to sill. When emulsion on sill is dry, place full mortar bed joint, do not furrow. Set block. All mortar joints must be full and not furrowed. Steel tools must not be used to tap blocks into position. Install work plumb with joints level and perpendicular, and evenly spaced. 3. Place full mortar beds for joints not requiring panel reinforcing, do not furrow. 4. Omit mortar around perimeter of each panel at heads and jambs. Rake out all mortar joints to depth of 1/2 inch for sealant. Remove surplus mortar from faces of glass blocks and wipe dry. 5. After final mortar set, pack joint filler tightly be- tween glass block panel and jamb and head construc- tion. Leave space for sealant. Seal perimeter joints at head, jamb and sills and all joints between block, inside and out. • 6. Remove and reset all block which are damaged or out of plane. 3-04. CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION Surplus mortar shall be removed and the face of the blocks wiped dry at the time joints are raked. Use an ordinary household scrub brush having stiff bristles. After mortar has attained final set but before becoming dry on the block surfaces perform all necessary final cleaning. Do not use abrasive cleaners (steel wool, wire brush, or acid) in con- junction with removing mortar or dirt from the faces of glass block. 2. Protect units in place as recommended by the Manu- facturer. END OF SECTION 4B. • 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME I PART I BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Invitation to Bid Instructions to Bidders - AIA Document A 701 Bid Bond Form - AIA Document A 310 Proposal Form Non -Collusion Affidavit Performance Bond - AIA Document A 311 Labor and Material Payment Bond - AIA Document A 311 Agreement Form - AIA Document A 311 General Conditions - AIA Document A 201 Supplementary General Conditions PART II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Division 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 1A Summary of Work Section 1B Coordination Section 1C Cutting and Patching Section 1D Field Engineering • Section 1E Regulatory Requirements Section IF Alternate Bids Section 1G Submittals Section 1H Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Section 11 Material and Equipment Section 1J Substitutions and Product Options Section 1K Contract Closeout Section 1L Subsoil Data Section 1M Inspection 8 Testing VOLUME II Division 2 SITEWORK Section 2A Site Clearing Section 2B Earthwork Section 2C Bituminous Paving Section 2D Storm Drainage Section 2E Landscape Planting Section 2F Plant Establishment and Maintenance Section 2G Landscape Irrigation Section 2H Site Concrete Section 21 Fountains Division 3 CONCRETE Section 3A Concrete Formwork Section 3B Concrete Reinforcement Section . 3C Cast -In -Place Concrete Section 3D Concrete Curbing TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 4 MASONRY Section 4A Concrete Unit Masonry Section 48 Glass Block Division 5 METALS Section 5A Structural Steel Section 5B Miscellaneous Metals and Fabrications Division 6 WOOD & PLASTIC Section 6A Rough Carpentry Section 613 Millwcrk Section 6C Glue -Laminated Prefabricated Structural Units Section 6D Wood Decking Division 7 THERMAL 8 MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 7A Built -Up Roofing Work Section 713 Calking Section 7C Building Thermal Insulation Section 7D Tile Roofing — Section 7E Waterproofing Section 7F Roof Hatch Division 8 DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS Section 8A Wood Doors Section 8B Glass 8 Glazing Section 8C Finished Hardware Division 9 FINISHES Section 9A Stucco Section 9B Metal Framing and Gypsum Wallboard Section 9C Ceramic Tile Section 9D Quarry Tile Section 9E Painting Section 9F Carpeting Division 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10A Metal Toilet Partitions Section 10B Toilet Room Accessories Section 10C Portable Extinguishers Section 100 Signage Section 10E Metal Lockers Section 1OF Display Cases - Section 10G Announcement Boards LJ TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 10 SPECIALS Section 10H Book Depository Section 101 Metal Fireplace Section 10J Flagpole Section 10K Fabric -Covered Tackboard Division 11 EQUIPMENT Section 11A Appliances Section 1113 Projection Screen - Alternate #14 Division 12 NOT USED Division 13 NOT USED Division 14 NOT USED Division 15 MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Mechanical Trade Requirements Section 156 Plumbing and Drainage Section 15C Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Division 16 ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Electrical Trade Requirements Section 16B Electrical Work CJ SITE CLEARING SECTION 2A - SITE CLEARING PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN Section 2A page 1 I. Clearing grubbing, and removal of existing paving. 2. Protecting vegetation to remain. 3. Site layout. 4. Cleaning up. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Excavating, filling and grading, Section 2B. 1-03. DISPOSAL I. Burning of debris at the site will not be allowed. . 2. Debris shall be legally disposed of off site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (None) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. CLEARING AND GRUBBING I. Clearing, if any, shall consist of the removal of trees, logs, branches, deadwood and other debris, including existing paving. 2. Grubbing, if any, shall consist of the removal of stumps and root system from within and to a line 15 feet outside of and parallel to the areas of building, paving and from other areas with less than 2 feet of cover below finish grade. 3. Except where compacted fills are to be placed as specified under Section 2B Earthwork, depressions excavated below existing grades for or by removal of stumps and roots, shall be filled with suitable compactable material. LJ SITE CLEARING Section 2A Page 2 3-02. PRESERVATION OF EXISTING VEGETATION Preserve and protect existing vegetation such as trees, shrubs and grass on or adjacent to the site and along access to the site. Be responsible for unauthorized cutting or damaging of trees and shrubs, including damage due to careless operation of equipment, stockpiling of materials or tracking of grass areas.by equipment. 2. Where trees to remain are located adjacent to construction, access ways, storage and work areas, they shallI be protected by temporary fences and cribbing. Protection for individual trees to remain shall be constructed with 4 by 4 inch posts, located at least 4 feet from the center of the tree. 3. Existing trees, within or adjacent to the Contract Limits, that are to remain, which are damaged or destroyed during the life of this Contract because of the Contractor's operations or negligence, shall be removed, replaced or repaired at the Contractor's expense, as directed by the Architect. 4. Neatly trim with sharp pruning tools, all roots of existing trees that are to remain, that are uncovered during the course of any work under the Contract. Cover all roots with at least 4 inches of soil. Paint, with an approved tree paint, all cuts 1 inch in diameter and larger. 5. Carefully cut off branches of trees in way of construction or which have been broken or injured during construction. Use of axes for trimming trees will not be permitted and where tree climbing is necessary, the use of spurs will not be permitted. Immediately paint, with an approved tree compound or pruning paint, all scars I inch in diameter and larger. 3-03. SITE LAYOUT 1. Locate bench marks, monuments and other reference points for elevation and location of building. Notify Architect of apparent discrepancies in indicated locations. Protect reference points from dislocation or damage. Replace or repair immediately any points damaged, destroyed or dislocated in an approved manner. SITE CLEARING Section 2A Page 3 2. Verify locations of vertical and horizontal reference points. Accurately locate building on site according to Contract Documents. Erect batter boards and set grade stakes securely, to remain in place until corners and heights are permanently established. 3-04. PROTECTION Be responsible for and protect adjoining property, including thoroughfares from damage due to cleaning and disposal operations. 2. Be responsible for and protect any existing items to remain from damage. Provide and maintain all necessary temporary protection. 3-05. CLEANING UP Periodically clean up areas within Contract Limit Lines and on adjacent property, if affected, during site operations and at completion of such work. 2. At completion of Project, remove protective boxing, cribbing, temporary fencing and debris. END OF SECTION 2A STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 5A Page 1 • SECTION 5A - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Structural steel framing members, struts, and braces with required welds and fasteners. 2. Baseplates and anchor plates. 1-02. WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED BY OTHERS I. Anchorages cast in concrete - Section 3C. 2. Anchorages embedded in masonry - Section 4A. 3. Miscellaneous metals - Section 5B. 1-03. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Grouting base plates and bearing plates - Section 3C. 2. Insoection and Testing - Section IM 1-04. REFERENCES I. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. 3. ASTM A501 - Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 4. AWS 01.1 - Structural Welding Code. 5. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 6. FS TT -P-31 - Paint, Oil: Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, Red and Brown. 1-05. SHOP DRAWINGS I. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 1. • STRUCTURAL STEEL Section 5A Page 2 2. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, and fasteners. 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. indi- cate net weld lengths. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36. 2. Structural Tubing: ASTM A501. 3. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307. 4. Welding Materials: AWS DI.1; type required for materials being welded. Arc welding electrodes shall conform to ASTM -A2333 5. Primer: FS TT -P-31 (red.). 2-02. FABRICATION I. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Specifi- cations. 2-03. FINISH I. Clean, prepare, and shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded or in contact with concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. ERECTION I. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specification. 2. Make provision for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. 3. Field welding shall be allowed only where approved by the Architect and then shall be performed during the inspection of a qualified Test Laboratory Inspector, unless otherwise directed. Inspection shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of Section 5 of the Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction of the American Welding Society. STRUCTURAL STEEL _Section 5A Page 3 a. Welding shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with the American Welding Society "Standard Qualification Procedure" to perform the type of work required. Such qualifica- tion test shall have been passed within the preceding 12 month period. 4. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of the Architect. 5. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Use a primer consistent with shop coat. END OF SECTION 5A • MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND FABRICATION Section 58 Page 1 SECTION 5B - MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND FABRICATIONS PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Bike racks. 2. Aluminum pipe and tube railings, balusters and fittings. 3. Stainless steel aircraft cable and turnbuckles. 4. Dedication plaque. 5. Clothes rods. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Structural steel work - Section 5A. 2. Concrete work - Division 3. • 3. Rough carpentry - Section 6A. 1 4. Millwork - Section 6B 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit shop drawings and product data for review. 2. Submit samples of materials and finishes for review. 3. Submit plaque rubbing for review. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. TUBULAR RAILS AND POSTS 1. Tubular rails and posts shall conform to ASTM A501 Welded and Seamless Tubing. All tubular material shall be 10 gauge steel. Provide flush welded connections and fitting. Wall brackets shall be of cast wrought iron as detailed. All exterior work shall be hot -dip glavanized and primed. MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND FABRICATION Section 5B Page 2 2. Except where wall brackets are used, posts shall be set in sleeves not less than 6 inches deep embedded in concrete. Posts that are 36 inches high or higher shall be reinforced with 18 inch long internal reinforcing sleeves of aluminum tubing. 3. Provide wall mounted handrails with wall end returns. 4. If any railing or component as shown or specified by the Architect cannot meet the minimum requirements of OSHA regulations for any reason, the Architect shall be so advised before fabrication of that item is begun. 2-02. 131KE RACK I. Permanent Model #710 manufactured by Miracle Recreation Equipment Company and distributed by Keith Vint and Associates, P.O. Box 1685, San Pedro, California 90733 C213) 831-2700, (714) 581-0370, or equivalent. 2. Standard rack shall be fabricated of galvanized tubing, 1-1/2 inch outside diameter for frame and I inch outside diameter for dividers, to accommodate 18 bikes. _ 2-03. DEDICATION PLAQUE Dedication plaque shall be of cast bronze, 18 by 24 inches unless otherwise -shown. Lettering and border shall be of type, size and spacing selected. In addition to the name of the Project and dedication date, the plaque text shall consist of titles, names of individuals, and incorporating in raised relief the Orange County seal, to an overall design supplied by the Architect. The raised faces of borders, designs and letters shall be polished finish with the background a dark contrasting color. Plaque shall be fastened to wall with concealed machined non-ferrous anchor bolts screwed into bosses on reverse side of plaque. Plaque shall be as manufactured by Metallic Arts; Spokane, Washington, Champion Ornamental Castings, Cleveland, Ohio, or equivalent. 2-04. AIRCRAFT CABLE 1. Cables between gazebos shall be 1/8 inch diameter manufactured of stainless steel wire conforming to ASTM A492. U 0 MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND FABRICATION Section 5B Page 3 2. Provide stainless steel turnbuckles and devices for attachment and tensioning. 2-05. CLOTHES RODS I. Provide at closets noted, clothes rods made of 1-1/4 inch outside diameter anodized bronze aluminum with matching brackets to support rods at 4 foot centers. 2-06. FABRICATION I. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 2. Fit and shop assemble sections in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site and installation. 3. Supply matching components required for secure anchorage of all items including handrails and railings. 4. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 5. Make exposed joint butt tight, flush, and hairline. 6. Accurately form components required for anchorage of all items to each other and to building structure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION I. Install as shown on approved shop drawings and in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Erect items plumb, level and true to line, securely fastened to building construction. 2. The Contractor shall verify and check measurements at building when- ever necessary, and shall consult with the other trades involved regarding the methods for connecting to the various materials. 3. Provide cutting, patching and drilling as required for the installa- tion of work under this Section. Provide miscellaneous fastenings, clips, anchors, etc., as necessary for a complete installation. Include backing plates for installation in drywall partitions. MISCELLANEOUS METALS AND FABRICATION Section 56 Page 4 4. Furnish items to be built into concrete and masonry work and drywall partitions in a timely manner, with setting templates and erection drawings to appropriate sections. 3-02. DISSIMILAR MATERIALS Surfaces of aluminum which will be in contact with masonry, concrete or steel shall be painted with one heavy brush coat of alkali resistant bituminous paint or zinc chromate primer prior to erection, or shall be separated by a heavy coat of mastic calking compound, or by a non-absorptive tape or gasket. END OF SECTION 58 ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 6A Page 1 • SECTION 6A - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Structural and non-structural wall, floor and roof framing. 2. Built up structural beams and columns. 3. Site fabricated trusses and beams. 4. Wall and roof sheathing. 5. Preservative treatment of wood members where required. 6. Fire retardant treatment for trellis wood members. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Setting anchorage in foundations for wood framing - Section 3C. • 2. Wood Decking - Section 6D. 3. Prefabricated structural wood framing - Section 6C. 4. Millwork - Section 66. 5. Setting anchorage in masonry for wood framing - Section 4A. 6. Gypsum Wallboard - Section 96. 1-03. QUALITY ASSURANCE I. Lumber to have visible grade stamp, of an agency certified by WCLIB. 1-04. REFERENCES I. MIL -L1914 -C Lumber and Plywood, Fire Retardant Treated. 2. MtL-V-13518C(I) Wood Preservative: Tetrachorophenol and Pentach- lorophenol, Surface Sealing Compound. 3. PS I•- Construction and INdustrial Plywood. 4, PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 0 5. 1979 - Uniform Building Code. ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 6A Page 2 6. NFPA National Forest Products Association National Design Specifi- cation for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. LUMBER AND SHEET MATERIALS Stress Group Species (Commercial Design) A Douglas Fir, Larch. B Hem -Fir C Eastern Hemlock, Tamarack, Jack Pine, Pacific Coast Yellow Cedar, Pacific D Coast Sitka Spruce, Ponderose Pine, Spruce -Pine -Fir E Eastern White Pine, Red Pine, Western Cedars, Western White Pine. Lumber exposed to be subject to an equilibrium moisture content in excess of 20 percent, should be pressure treated to prevent deteriora- tion. Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with 'WCLIB Grading Rules; maximum moisture content of 18 percent; of the following species and grades: a. Structural lighf framing: Stress groupt A; No. I grade. b. Non-structural light framing: Stress group B or C; construction grade. c. Studding; Stress group A; construction grade. 2, Douglas Fir Plywood: CC Grade with exterior glue 2-02.ACCESSORIES Nails, Spikes, and staLIes: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations, and treated wood; Bronze Annular nails for terior Lattice Structures and Paint Line Trim; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit applications. 2. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium carbon steel; sized to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interhor locations. ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 6A Page 3 3. Joist Hangers finished. Sized and profiled to suit application; galvanized 4. Fasteners: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 2-03. WOOD TREATMENT 1. Fire Retardant chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread, fueld contribution/smoke development rating of 25; as manufactured by Koppers or equivalent. 2. Wood Preservative: Fugitive type, clear manufactured by Koppers or equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. WOOD TREATMENT I. Shop pressure treat and deliver to site ready for installation, wood materials requiring pressure impregnated preservatives. Provide U.L. approved identification on fire retardant treated materials. 2. All cut ends to be field treated with a compatible U.L. approved fire retardant material to manufacturer's recommendations. 3-02. FRAMING I. Erect wood framing members true to lines and levels. Do not deviate from true alignment more than z inch in 30 feet. 2. Space framing members at 16 inches on center unless shown or noted otherwise. 3. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths 4. Construct and erect required built up beams, lintels, and trusses. 5. Double wall framing members at openings over 100 square inches. Space short member above and below openings in same manner as for walls. 6. Provide double joist headers at joist ends and around roof and ceiling openings. Provide solid blocking at ends of members. • ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 6A Page 4 7. Coordinate installation of prefabricated structural wood beams and joists. 8. See Section 96, item 3.03 3-03. SHEATHING I. Place roof and wall sheathing with end joints staggered. Secure sheets over firm bearing. Maintain minimum 1/16 inch and maximum 1/8 inch spacing between joints. Place perpendicular to framing members at roof, parallel to framing members at walls. Block edges. 3-04. FASTENINGS Minimum Requirements: Nailing and bolting of wood members shall conform to the minimum requirements of the "Uniform Building Code," 1979 edition, Vol. I, Chapter 25, and as specified herein and shown on the Structural Drawings. 2. Bolting: Bolts shall be standard stock machine bolts conforming to U.S. Bureau of Standards coarse thread series. Exposed bolts shall be all square or hexagonal head with matching huts. All bolted — connections shall be retightened before final acceptance or, in the case of bolted connections in concealed locations, immediately before the area is sealed off. 3. Nailing: Conforming to the nailing on structural drawings. Connectors shall be as called for or on the Drawings, all fabricated by an approved manufactureris published instructions. Nails shall be untreated steel for interior work and concealed framing, and bronze annular for all exposed work on exterior. Unless connections are detailed or steel connectors indicated, nails shall not be driven closer together than 1/2 of their length nor closer to the edge of a member than 1/4 their length. When wood tends to split with size of nail used, predrill holes for nails. Penetration of nails or spikes into pieces shall not be less than one-half the length of the nail or spike. 4. Washers: Provide all bolts and lag screws bearing on wood to the requirements of the Drawings. Installed in accordance with the requirements of their approvals, ROUGH CARPENTRY Section 6A Page • Framing Anchors, Connectors, and Hangers: Shall conform to the requirements of the Drawings. Installed in accordance with the smoothly drilled holes, all in accordance with the manufactucer's written instructions. Expansion bolts shall be installed so that the load acts on the bolts in shear rather than withdrawal. Expansion bolts shall be carefully located in order.to eliminate the risk of damage to concrete, steel reinforcement, and other embedded items. Expansion bolts shall be located at least 4 inches from the soffit of beams, joists, openings, etc. Expansion bolts are permitted in soffit of joist stems and at rough door and window openings. Expansion bolts shall not be used except where first approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION 6A • MILLWORK Section 68 Page I 0 SECTION 6B - MILLWORK PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Work counters, plastic laminate finish. 2. Built in benches. 3. General casework. 4. Fixed and adjustable wood shalving. 5. Standard and running trim, including railings, base and window and door frames. '6. Redwood soffits. 7. Light sconces. • 8. Wood grills, for transparent and•for painted finish. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Wood deck - SeLtion 6D. 2. Finishing, except as otherwise specified - Section 9E. 3. Rough carpentry - Section 6A. 4. Prefabricated wood framing - Section 6C. 5. Drywall;- Section 9B. 6. Wood doors - Section 8A. 7. Display cases - Section 10F. 0 MILLWORK 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit shop drawings for approval. Section 68 Page 2 2. Submit two (2) samples each of the following; a. Material and finish for factory finished items. b. Laminated plastic finish. c. Factory installed hardware. d. Material and finishfor field finished items. 1-04. STANDARDS I. Except as otherwise specified, the type and quality of work +o be furnished hereunder, including materials and fabrication, shall conform to Custom Grade of the Woodworking Institute of California. The contractor shall furnish the Architect with an affidavit certifying materials and products delivered to the' _ Project meet the requirements specified. 1-05. STORAGE OF MATERIALS I. Do not deliver millwork items until the building is sufficiently dry so that they will not be -damaged by excessive changes in moisture content. 1-06. WORKMANSHIP I. Woodwork shall be finished smooth on exposed surfaces. Joints shall be rabbeted together to conceal any shrinkage and shall be closely fitted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. CASEWORK I. Casework shall be plastic laminated finish and custom grade birch for paint and transparent finish for exposed and semi -exposed surfaces noted, as defined WIC, Custom Grade. • !41 LLWORK Section 6B Page 3 2. Casework hereunder shall consist of any wood cabinets, counters, benches, and shelves not specifically noted under other Sections and Parts, including but not limited to the following items: a. Base and wall cabinets. b. Light valances. c. Countertops and backsplashes. d. Open shelving. e. Benches. 3. Casework shall be as detailed with doors and drawers or open as shown and in compliance with WIC specifications. 4. Surface countertops and backsplashes with high pressure lam+nated plastic, Formica, or approved equal. Laminated plastic shall conform to NEMA LD -3, 1/16 inch thick, except as required by WIC specifications, pattern as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standards. Core material shall be 3/4" hardwood faced veneer core plywood, exterior type at sink locations, unless shown thicker. Provide splashes and counter edge trim as shown. Edge trim shall be transparent finish. 5. Where not noted with plastic laminated or another finish, veneer and plywood faces for exposed surfaces shall be Custom Grade Birch for paint and transparent finish, selected for uniformity of color, figure, and grain. Veneer and plywood faces for semi -exposed surfaces shall be Economy Grade. Plywood for concealed surfaces shall be underlayment grade or be particleboard. 6. Solid stock Birch shall be Custom Grade in exposed surfaces and Economy Grade in semi -exposed surfaces. 7. Casework door faces and edges shall be as specified. Cores of 3/4 inch doors shall be veneer core , and shall be banded with pressure glued solid stock. Cores of doors 1 inch and thicker shall be lumber stave core with matching edges or cupboard door cores of solid "ladder" type with built in banding to match faces. Doors shall be shop hinged. 40 MILLWORK Section 6B Page 4 8. Hardware for casework shall be heavy institutional type, polished brass US3, as selected by the Architect. a. Hinges shall be 5 knuckle tight pin construction, wrap around type, except for brass piano hinges where noted for hinged tops. b. Knobs shall be Baldwin #4939, polished brass US3. c. Catches shall be heavy auty magnetic type. d. Locks shall be cast bronze 5 -pin tumbler, master keyed. e. Provide locks for cabinet doors noted on Drawings. f. Adjustable shelf standards and brackets shall be heavy duty type. g. Provide ball bearing rollers for all drawers. 9. Shelves in and above casework shall be of matching species and finish. 10. Provide non-ferrous wall angle brackets for unsupported counters or as detailed for unsupported millwork items. 2-02. STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM, BASE, DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES AND RAILINGS 1. Door and window frames, baseboards, wood grills, railings and trim shall be WIC Custon Grade, poplar species for interior; exterior millwork shall be clear white pine. 2-03. FIELD FINISH ITEMS I. Unless authorized otherwise, the following items of millwork shall be field finished under Section 9E; doors, windows, trim, and other items not prefinished. - 2-04. REDWOOD SOFFIT 1. Exterior soffits shall be 3/4" tongued and grooved Redwood, unfinished. i • 0 PART 3 - EXECUTION Section 6B Page 5 3-01. INSTALLATION OF MILLWORK Install finish carpentry, and millwork items accurately, plumb, level and true. Wherever required, neatly and accurately scribe members in place, maintaing full width of end members wherever possible. Install material in full length, not pieced, except where the use of single length would be impracticable or impossible. Miter exterior angles and cope interior angles of molded parts. Wherever work of this Section abuts on the work of other trades, make neat tight joint. Exposed finish woodwork to be painted or finished shall be smoothly dressed and hand sanded at the bench prior to erection, free from open joints. Install plugs over countersunk fasteners and sand smooth. 2. Scribe millwork neatly and accurately in place, maintaining full width of end members where possible. In all instances, where casework adjoins wall surfaces of building structures make neat, tight joints, Fasten securely to building construction. 3. Use concealed means of fastening the various parts together. All nails used in exposed woodwork shall be fine casing nails, carefully and neatly set for putty stopping without hammer marks. Screws shall be countersunk without impact and all holes carefully filled. 4. Fasteners for items finished with laminated plastic shall be concealed. 5. Install soffit T 8 G with bronze nails as shown. 3.02. PROTECTION I. Protect finish surfaces until acceptance. 2. Perform all necessary repairs to damaged work in manner acceptable to Architect. Correct damaged factory finished work by replacement except as otherwise approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION 66. GLUE LAMINATED PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL UNITS Section 6C Page 1 • SECTION 6C - GLUE LAMINATED PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL UNITS PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Glued laminated structural beams and joists complete with required attachment brackets and hardware 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Wood decking - Section 60. 2. Site finishing and varnishing - Section 9E. 1-03. REFERENCES I. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.. 2. ASTM A307 - Bolts for Structural Steel Joists Including Suitable Nuts and Plain Washers. • 3. ASTM D2559 - Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for use Under Exterior (WEt Use) Exposure Conditions. 1-04. SHOP DRAWINGS I. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section IG. 2. Indicate pertinent dimensions, grades, shop applied finishes, cuts and drilled holes, fasteners, erection details, and connection materials and finishes. 1-05. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING I. Arrange delivery of glue laminated prefabricated members in accordance with construction schedule to avoid double handling. 2. If double handling is necessary, store members well off ground and separate to allow complete air circulation. Cover members with an opaque moisture resistant membrane. 3. Use padded, non -marring slings when handling members. L J GLUE LAMINATED PREFA3RICATED_STRUCTURAL UNITS Section 6C Page 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS I. Acceptable Manufacturers; a. Trus -Joist. b. Tim Joist. c. Weis Joist. 2. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with Section IJ. 2-02. MATERIALS I. Glue laminated members; Douglas Fir laminating stock and adhesive of type to suit service grade. 2. Hardware and Connections.: Type atmospheric corrosion resistant steel. 3. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Type recommended for structural steel joints; ASTM A307, of medium carbon steel galvanized. 4. Sealer: Penetrating type for exposed and primer sealer for concealed members.. 5. Adhesive: ASTM D2559; type waterproof, exterior. 2-03. FABRICATION 1. Fabricate glue laminated beams in accordance with American Institute of Timber Construction. Grade: Industrial. Make adequate provision for possible erection stresses. 2. Fabricate glue laminated joist in accordance with the approved ICBO Report # PFC 2436, PFC 2992 or PFC 3245 whichever is applicable. Grade shall be as shown and noted on Drawings or equivalent. 3. Do not splice or join members in locations other than that indicated, without permission of the Architect. GLUE LAMINATED PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL UNITS Section 6C Page 3 Ll 4. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded and ground smooth. 5. Seal glue laminated members after fabrication. Double coat end joints. 6. Clean, prepare and galvanize steel hardware and connections. Provide minimum 1.25 ounces per square foot galvanized coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. ERECTION I. Set structural laminated members to level and plumb and in correct positions. 2. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage required to hold members in place until permanently secured. 3. Fit members together properly and accurately without trimming, cutting, or any other unauthorized modification. Report discrepancies to Architect immediately upon discovery. END OF SECTION 6C 9 . WOOD DECKING Section 6D Page 1 SECTION 6D - WOOD DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01, WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Dressed solid wood decking with penetrating sealer where exposed and primer. Sealer concealed from view. 1-02, RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Section 6A - Rough carpentry. 2. Section 6C - Glue -laminated prefabricated structural units. 3. Section 9E - Finishing exposed surfaces. 1-03. REFERENCES • 1. NFPA National Forest Products Association Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening, 2. PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1-04, DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1. Where decking is exposed as a finish, handle with care during shipping and installation to maintain undamaged and unmarked exposed face. Damage mem- bers will be rejected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS 1. Wood Decking: Douglas Fir select. Select grade, in accordance with NFPA Grading Rules: (5) inches wide by one and one half thick with single tongue and groove on each edge. 2. Nails and Spikes: Galvanized; size and type to suit application and as noted on drawings. 0 WOOD DECKING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. PLACEMENT Section 6D Page 2 1. Place wood decking perpendicular, to support mem- bers. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongues upward. 2. Place decking in a controlled pattern, so that end joints are staggered. Continuous line of end joints is not permitted over interior points of support. 3. Extend plank over at least one support member. Planks not extending over at least one support are not permitted. 4. Secure decking rigidly to support members. Side spike planks together, through predrilled holes where necessary. END OF.SECTION 6D 0 BUILT UP ROOFING WORK Section 7A Page 1 SECTION 7A - BUILT UP ROOFING WORK PART I - GENERAL -01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Built up roofing, aggregate surfaced, including walkways. 2. Sheet metal flashing, concealed. 3. Installing roof insulation. 4. Prefinished sheet metal copings, cap flashings and other exposed sheet metal items.. 5. Building in of items furnished by others. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Wood blocking and plywood sheathing - Section 6A, 2. Furnishing of lead flashing for plumbing vents passing through built up roofing - Division 15. 3. Furnishing roof insulation, Section 7C. 4. Tile roofing, Section 7D. 5. Roof hatch, Section 7F. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit built up roofing specification for approval. 2. Submit shop drawings of sheet metal details for approval. 3. Submit ASTM compliance certifications. 4. Roofing guarantee and sheet metal finish guarantee. • BUILT UP ROOFING WORK 1-04. QUALITY CONTROL Section 7A Page 2 Roofing work shall conform to the referenced manufacturers standard specifications and any additional requirements specified herein. 2. Contractor shall maintain strict control over bitumen temperature, and shall identify and correct voids, skips,. dry spots, entrapped moisture, fishmouths and wrinkles. 3. Materials shall be in conformance with the ASTM Standards referenced in the manufacturer's specifications. Submit applicable compliance certifications. 4. Sheet metal work shall be in accordance with "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. 5. Prior to start of roofing work, the General Contractor, Roofing Contractor, Architect and the Ownerts representative shall meet to discuss and outline roofing procedures and scheduling. Included shall be cold weather and other adverse application techniques, _ reminders of bitumen temperatures, limits and protection of each roofing day, protection of stored insulation, roof materials, etc. 1-05. GUARANTEE I. Furnish Owner with an unconditional guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for a period of five C5) years from final acceptance covering insulation, built up roofing, base flashing and sheet metal work, concealed and exposed. 2. During the Guarantee Period, the Contractor agrees that within 24' hours of receipt of notice from the Owner he will inspect and make immediately emergency repairs to defects or to leaks in the built up roof system and related metal work. He further agrees that within a reasonable time, he will restore the affected items to the standard of the original specifications. All emergency and permanent work during the life of the guarantee to maintain built up roof system will be done without cost to the Owner, except in the event it is determined that such leaks were caused by abuse, lightning, hurricanes, tornado, hail storm, other unusual climatic phenomena of the elements or failure of related work (except related roof sheet metal work included under the guarantee) installed by other parties. BUILT UP ROOFING WORK Section 7A Page 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. BUILT UP ROOFING I. Hot applied, coal tar pitch bitumen, rosin sheet, and 4 ply, slag surfaced, modified Fiberglas Specification No. 42P -',IGD by Owens- Corning; No. 4GNG modified to specified requirements by Johns - Manville; or equivalent 20 year, 4 ply and coal tar pitch roof system for flat roofs. Note that 2 specified plies are required under sloped stucco and under tile roofing and 3 piles for vertical surfaces. 2. Roof Tape: Fiberglas reinforced roof tape, 6 inches wide; to be used only in single layer application of insulation, unless plywood is shown. 3. Red rosin sheet for mechanical fastening on plywood under base ply. 4. Ply Sheet: Shall be Fiberglass Parma Ply -R conforming to ASTM 02178, Type W, and the required Federal Specification SS -T-6208 and as required in the Specification. • 5. Coal Tar Bitumen: Conform to ASTM D450. 6. Vapor Retarder: One ply of Permaply roofing felt under rigid insula- tion on wood decks. 7. Mechanical Fasteners: As recommended and approved by the roofing and insulation materials manufacturer. 8. Base Flashing: Fiberglas Specification PM -1 or PM -2 according to height of curb or wall. 9. Slag shall be commercial grade, washed, opaque, 3/8 to 5/8 inch slag complying with ASTM Specification D1863-63 or latest revision thereof. No more than 10 percent of any lot shall be outside these size requirements. All slag shall pass through a 3/4 inch screen and none shall pass through a 1/4 inch screen. Slag shall be dry and free of dust, soil and foreign matter. Georgia roofing grade white marble or quartz chips may be substituted for slag under Bid Alternate #7. 0 BUILT UP ROOFING !'WORK 2-03. SHEET METAL ITEMS Section 7A. Page 4 _ Mill finish 0.032 inch aluminum or ASTM A167, Type 304, 2-D finish, 0.015 inch thick dead soft annealed flashing quality sheet stainless steel, where concealed and for splash pans -on roof. 2. All exposed prefinished sheet metal copings and caps shall be 0.04 inch prefinished aluminum finished with 20 year guaranteed paint finish of various colors. Flash under all joints with 12 inch long splice plate with concealed caulk. Corners shall be of welded construction. 2-04. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS Calking shall be single component polysulfide or silicone sealant, conforming to Federal Specification TT -S-230, color as selected by Architect. 2. Walkways on flat roof shall be asphalt traffic pads 1/2 inch thick with ceramic granule finish,.3 feet wide, Carey Tred or equivalent. 3. Cap flashing on walls and where shown on Drawings: cap flashing _ with continuous cleat, aluminum 0.025 inches thick. Flash under all joints with 12 inch long splice plate with concealed caulk. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION - GENERAL Installation of all roofing materials shall conform to the manu- facturer's specifications and the requirements of referenced standards, whichever are more stringent. 2. Sheet metal work not covered by definite specifications or details shall be in conformance with the best practices described in the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. 3. Take special care to insure that bitumens are heated and applied at the proper temperature as specified by the roofing materials. manufacturer and that upper temperature limitations are not exceeded. Do not use overheated bitumens. Such materials will be rejected and removed from job site. Provide an accurate and I LJ BUILT UP ROOFING WORK -Section 7A Page 5 clearly readable thermometer on all kettles and bulk storage equipment. In addition, provide a portable and accurately calibrated bi-metallic or mercury thermometer readily accessible for use at job site. 4. Subject to the approval of the Architect, built up roofing installa- tion may be continued in cold, dry weather providing that all provisions of these Specifications can be complied with and no overheating of the bitumen is necessary. 5. Materials must be clearly labeled with pertinent information, including Underwriters' Labels. Bituminous materials delivered to job 1n hot bulk equipment shall be accompanied by a Certificate from the roofing materials manufacturer clearly stating the type, quality and softening point. 6. Deliver materials. to Project in manufacturers original unopened packages or containers. Store insulation and roll goods on wood pallets or dunnage elevated above ground or roof deck surfaces and completely covered with waterproof wraps (plastic or canvas) securely tied to prevent intrusion of moisture. Materials improperly stored or which become wet or damaged shall be identified, . conspicuous{ -y marked as rejected and removed from the job site. 7. Coordinate roofing work with supporting construction and installation of curbs, roof fixtures, appurtenances and equipment. 8. Build in items furnished under other trades including but not limited to roof drains, plumbing vent flashings, pitch pockets, roof hatch, etc. 9. Schedule application of insulation, built up roofing and related flashing to assure that work started in any particular area will be completed, including final surfacing at the end of each day's work. Rooting that has been partially completed and left exposed to the elements will be rejected. 10. Surfaces on which insulation is laid shall be smooth, dry and free from foreign materials. • BUILT UP ROOFING WORK Section 7A Page 6 3-02. INSTALLATION OF INSULATION I. On all plywood and wood decks, one ply of red rosin paper or Parma Ply roofing felt shall be mechanically secured 6 inches on centers within the 2 inch sidelaps and 18 inches on center in lines 12 inches from each edge of the Perma-Ply roofing felt. 2. Insulation Stops: AT all open eaves and edges, treated wood blocks the thickness of the insulation and approximately 6 inches wide shall be installed to act as a stop for the insulation. Around all roof openings, vents, stacks, drains, etc., wood nailers, equal in thickness to the insulation, shall be provided and secured in place for nailing. Water based preservative such as Wolman's shall be used. 3. Cants: At the intersection of at roofs and vertical surfaces, to be flashed, cants shall be provided and installed. 4. The flat rigid insulation on the steep deck shall be mopped or mechanically secured, Lay insulation in one layer, in parallel courses with joints between insulation staggered. Tightly butt joints between boards. Cut boards accurately where necessary for tight joints. Discard damaged boards. 5. Contractor has the option of applying two staggered layers of insulation in conformance with manufacturer's specifications. 6. Keep insulation dry before and during application. Keep all materials and surfaces to receive insulation clean and dry before and during installation of insulation. 7. Prevent damage to insulation during and after installation by use of plank walkways. Do not drop pieces of roofing on the insulation. Do not leave installed roof insulation exposed to the weather. Lay no more insulation than will be covered with complete roofing system at the end of the day's work. 8. Apply insulation to deck using solid mopping of bitumen applied at a nominal rate of 30 pounds per 100 square feet. 9. Roof tape if required for single layer application shall be laid evenly, smoothly, centered on the joints, and embedded in a uniform coating of bitumen, applied at a rate of not less than 15 pounds. • BUILT UP ROOFING WORK Section 7A Page 7 per 100 square feet of tape. Care is to be taken to assure smooth application of tape, and that the tape is in full contact with the bitumen. On a hand mop application the bitumen should extend a minimum of (/2 inch beyond both sides of the tape. Appli- cation of the bitumen and tape may be made by either mopping the insulation joint and rolling and pressing the tape into place, or by use of a taping machine (small felt layer) which will apply bitumen and tape in a continuous operation. Lap ends at least 4 inches. 10. Provide temporary water cutoffs at the end of each day's work and whenever rain or snow is imminent. Water cutoffs shall be applied to exposed edges of roof insulation, extend 6 inches on roof, carry up and over roof insulation and extent 6 inches on the top of roof insulation. Remove water cutoffs before continuing with installation of the roof insulation system. H. install all insulation in accordance with these Specifications and in a manner recommended by the insulation manufacturer and acceptable to the manufacturer of the roofing. 12. Set traffic pads in bitumen before gravel is placed. 3-03. BUILT UP ROOFING I. Apply red rosin sheet Cover wood decks only) and base ply of Parma Ply -R with 2 inch sA delaps (The red rosin sheet should be staggered a minimum of 6 inches from sidelaps of the base ply of Parma Ply -R). Mechanically secure the base ply 9 inches on center at sidelaps and 18 inches on center on two lines 12 inches from each edge (staggeredl. Mechanical securement shall be accomplished using mechanical fasteners recommended by the deck manu- facturer. 2. Begin application at the low point of the roof deck. Embed three plies of Parma Ply -R in shingle fashion (starter sheets required), lapping 27-1/2 inches, in uniform solid moppings of hot bitumen using a nominal 30 pounds per 100 square feet per ply. 3. At gravel surface roofing embed not less than 400 pounds of gravel or 300 pounds of slag per 100 squaee feet into hot bitumen, using not less than 75 pounds per 100 square feet. BUILT UP ROOFING "IORK Section 7A Page 8 4. Felts may be applied by a mechanical felt layer or rolled into a hand mopping of hot bitumen. It shall be shingled in, free of buckles and fishmouths. Each ply shall be laid so that the flow of water is over or parallel to but never against the lap. End laps shall be a minimum of 4 inches and shall be a minimum of 12 inches apart. 5. Embed the full width of each ply in hot bitumen applied at a nominal rate of 30 pounds, a minimum of 25 pounds and a,maximum of 35 pounds, per 100 square feet. 6. The bitumen shall be sufficienity hot to insure a complete bond of ply to ply.' "Brooming in" is required under normal conditions for both felt layers and hand mopping. Brooming is essential in cold weather and must be done promptly and efficiently to eliminate void and to insure adequate adhesion. A moderately soft, commercial type push broom should be used for this purpose. 7. When "roiling in" by hand, the mopping bitumen shall be kept within 6 feet of the roll. Keep the mop full, and flow bitumen on the roof. Do not scrub withthe mop. 3-04. BUILT UP BASE FLASHING Set caps and cant strips mechanically fastened to wall and deck. 2. Apply built up roofing plies per specifications extending all plies to and up the cant cementing to the cant. 3. Embed layer of felt not more than 12 feet long in a smooth uniform 1/8 inch thick layer of plastic cement with minimum 3 inch end laps extending from outer edge of the cant to a point on the roofing at least 4 inches beyond the toe of the cant. 4. Embed a second layer of felt not more than 12 feet long in a smooth uniform 1/8 inch thick layer of plastic cement with minimum 3 inch end laps staggered no -less than 24 inch centers from the previously ply. Extend I inch further out over the roof than the first layer. 5. Embed third or cap layer in plastic cement. Cap shall extend from the outer end of the cant to 1 inch further out over the roof than the second layer. CERAMIC TILE Section 9C Page 7 6. Control joints shall be filled with specified calking compound in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. Conform to applicable requirements of Section 76 — Calking. 7. Apply specified calking compound to joints between ceramic wall t le and hollow metal and other frames and at receptors. g. Protect all work from dirt and damage until building is accepted by Owner. 3-04. EXTRA TILE I. Furnish 5 percent extra t le of each type and color including accessory units used in the work. Deliver to Owner in original factory wrapped condition at acceptance and store as directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION 9C CERAMIC TILE Section 9C Page 6 • 2. Thin Set Floors: TCA F113 Dry Set Mortar Method, and ANSI -A108.5 1976. 3. Thin Set Wall Tile and Base: TCA W223 or W242 Organic Adhesive Method and ANSI A108.4, on dry wall. 4. Marble Thresholds: TCA method applicable to tile installation method. 5. Ceramic Mosaic Tile Floor Over Slabs on Grade with Drains Mud Set: Reinforced cement mortar bed Method TCA F -III and ANSI A108.1. 3-03. GROUTING, CALKING AND CLEANING Remove strings or wedges, where used to space ti le or ti le sheets, before grouting but not until the has firmly set. Clean the set in adhesive with solvents recommended by the adhesive manufacturer only; avoid the use of excess solvents. Before grouting allow time for evaporation of volatiles from adhesive in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. Follow grout manufacturer's directions with respect to the wetting of t le joints for the appli- cation of grout to t le set by thin set methods. 2. After the -has sufficiently set, force a maximum of grout into the joints by trowel, squeegee, brush, or finger application. Before grout sets, strike or tool the joints of cushion edge tile to the depth of the cushion. Fill all gaps or skips. Clean excess grout off with clean burlap, other cloths or sponges. Where white grout has been used, do not permit dark cement to show through the grouted joints. Leave joints against frames open for calking. 3. Sponge and wash ti le thoroughly with clear water after the grout has stiffened. Then clean by rubbing with damp cloths or sponges, and polish with clean dry cloth. 4. Apply waterproof paper over floor ti Is as soon as grouting is completed. Lap joints at least 4 inches. Weight the laps with planks or sand and leave in place for not less than three (3) days. Keep traffic off floors during this time. 5. Control joints shall be provided in ceramic the floors. Locate control joints along all column lines, over beams, around the perimeter of each area, at partitions, receptors, and at other locations as shown on approved shop drawings. • 0 CERAMIC TILE Section 9C Page 5 2. Prime or seal surface of concrete before applying dry set mortars. 3. Do not apply mortar to surfaces covered with water. Minimum temperature for installation of ti le shall be 40 degrees F., and rising. 4. Center fields and patterns on applied areas so that no the is less than half size. 5. Cut and drill the and trim shapes accurately without damaging. Rub all exposed cut edges smooth with abrasive stone. 6. Except where otherwise shown or specified, make joints in floor tile perpendicular and parallel to walls. 7. Press the firmly into mortar and beat it to a true surface before initial set occurs. See that full contact is obtained to insure that there are no sizeable voids.. Adjust any the that is out of alignment. 8. Coordinate wall the work with other trades to allow installation of, mechanical work such as fixtures, accessories and other items. 9. Every precaution shall be taken not to stain tiles before they are set in place. No warped, over or under burned, stained or spalled the shall be placed in the work. 10. Locate expansion and control joints and accessories precisely before tile is installed. 11. During the installation of water resistant organic adhesives, provide and safely operate sparkproof fans when natural ventilation is _ inadequate; prohibit smoking where flammable adhesives are being used. 3-02. STANDARD METHOD SPECIFICATIONS I. Tile installation work shall conform to methods described in the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" published in the "Tile Council of America" (TCA) to the installation specifications of the "American National Standards Institute" (.ANSI), and as specified herein; whichever has the more stringent requirements shall govern. CERAMIC TILE Section 9C Page 4 • 10. Sand shall conform to ASTM C144. Sand for setting mortar shall pass a No. 8 sieve, but not over 5 percent shall pass a No. 100 sieve. Sand for pointing and grouting shall pass a No. 30 sieve but not over 5 percent shall pass a No. 100 sieve. Use white sand with white cement. 11. Water shall be clean and fresh, suitable for drinking. 12. Joint fillers and grouts shall be as manufactured by UPCO Chemical Division of USM Corporation, or equivalent. Color shall be as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard color range. a. Grout for ceramic mosaic ti le floors shall be "Hydroment" or equivalent. b. Grout for wall ti le and base shall be equal to "Tile -Mate 719" or equivalent. 13. Primer, Sealers, Underlayment and Solvents: Of types and consistency as recommended by the manufacturer of dry set mortar and thin set • adhesive. The application of underlayment over surfaces shall be required only where it is necessary to level or straighten the surfaces to provide a satisfactory the installation. 14. Reinforcing: 2 by 2 'inch by 16/16 gage welded wire mesh or equivalent. 15. Cleavage Membrane: 15 pound roofing felt or 4 mil polyethylene film. 16. Water resistant organic adhesive shall conform to ANSI A136.1, Type I. 17. Calking compound shall be Dow Chemical 784 silicone sealant, or equivalent, mildew resistant, white or color as selected. 18. Control Joint Filler: Neoprene or vinyl, full depth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION I. Apply leveling coats or underlayment over surfaces where it is necessary to level or straighten the surfaces to provide a satisfactory tile installation. 0 CERAMIC TILE Section 9C Page 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS Ceramic the shall be Quality Certified by the manufacturer to equal or exceed Standard Grade in conformance with TCA 137.1 1976, Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. Furnish a Master Grade Certificate for each type of tile, signed by the manufacturer and the Contractor, certifying the grade, type and quality of the tile. 2. Tile containers shall be branded with, or have sealed within, the shipping mark and other designations corresponding with the informa- tion given on the Master Grade Certificate. The Tile Council of America (TCA) certification mark shall appear on each label or carton of tile. 3. Colors as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. After award, Architect will furnish color and pattern applications schedule. Floor patterns in American Olean price range "B" or approved equivalent. 4. Wall Tile and Base: American Olean, Matte or Crystalline, 6 by 6 inch and matching trim. 5. Mosaic ceramic floor ti le shall be vitreous body, unglazed smooth all purpose edge, 2 inch square, or I inch square, or I by 2 inch, factory mounted. Provide all Crime as required including for Interior and exterior corners, and cover base units. 6. Dry set mortar shall be a powdered mortar mix complying with the requirements of ANSI A118.1. The mortar shall be manufactured under license by the Tile Council of America, and shall bear their hall- mark. The powdered mortar mix may be furnished pre -mixed with portland cement, or as a concentrate to the job mixed with portland cement. 7. Marble thresholds shall be of Grade A domestic stone, in color selected, with honed finish, to detail shown, coped to fit opening, beveled both sides. 8. Portland cement, gray or white shall conform to. ASTM C150, Type I. 9. Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C207, Type S. CERAMIC TILE 1-05. ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES Section 9C Page 2 Prior to installing tile, the Contractor shall inspect surfaces which are to receive tile. Correct any serious defects or con- ditions which will interfere or prevent a satisfactory installation. Do not proceed with the work until corrections have been made. Surfaces shall be free of greases and oils. 2. Installation of the shall be deemed acceptance of the substrate and assumption of responsibility of any unacceptable finished work caused by substrate condition. 1-06. SUBSURFACE TOLERANCES Surfaces to receive portland cement mortar shall not vary more than 1/4 inch above and 1/4 inch below required plane in any undivided space, nor shall there be more than 1/16 inch variation within any running foot. 2. Surfaces to receive dry set portland cement mortar shall not vary more than 1/8 inch above and 1/8 inch below required plane in any undivided space, nor shall there be more than 1/16 inch variation within any running foot. 3. Surfaces to receive water resistant organic adhesives shall not vary more than 1/16 inch above and 1/16 inch below required plane in any undivided space; nor shall there be more than 1/32 inch variation in any single running foot. 4. Provide leveling coats where necessary to bring surfaces within the tolerances. 1-07. TYPES OF SETTING BEDS Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1. 2. Adhesive, Waterproof: ANSI A108.4. 3. Dry Set Mortar: ANSI A108.5. 4. Leveling Coats: Apply where thin set bed would otherwise exceed 1/4 inch thickness. • • CERAMIC TILE Section 9C Page 1 SECTION 9C - CERAMIC TILE PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Ceramic mosaic floor tile. 2. Cermaic wall the and base. 3. Marble thresholds. 4. Control joints and talking. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Concrete Slab - Section 3A. 2. Gypsum Wallboard - Section 9B. 3. Toilet Accessories - Section IOB. 4. Quarry Tile - Section 9D. 5. Floor Drains - Division 15. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit samples for approval and color selection. 2. Submit layout of control joints in ceramic tile floors for approval. 1-04. DELIVERY AND STORAGE I. Deliver packaged materials to the site in original unopened containers, clearly indicating manufacturer's name, brand name, and other identifying information. 2. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and in such a manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials which have become damaged or otherwise unfit for use. METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONSTRUCTION Section 98 Page 8 2. Apply acoutsical sealant at control joints, at vertical intersections where backerboard abutts terminal walls and around the perimeter of all face layers, outlets, switch boxes, pipes, plumbing and electrical fixtures and other holes cut in the face layers. 3. Electric outlets shall not be placed back to back, but shall be separated, at least, with a thickness of sound attenuation blanket. SEALING OF OPENINGS Where partitions extend above ceilings, provide all necessary work to close openings in partitions for beams, columns, struts and other through construction, and for the passage of mechanical and electrical work. Sea'I'openings as specified above. END OF SECTION 9B 0 • 0 METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONSTRUCTION Section 9B 'age 7 3--09. JOINT TREATMENT I. Apply bedding compound to edge and end joints and to fastener heads. Shear off surplus leaving a tapered groove for embedding tape. Leave no material on high edge. Allow 12 hours for drying before taping. 2. Apply a uniformly thin layer of bedding compound over the joint approximately 4 inches wide. Center tape over joints and embed into compounds. 3. Allow compound to dry thorughly for approximately 24 hours. Cover tape with a coat of compound and spread out 3 inches on each side of tape. Feather out at edges. 4. After preceding coat is thoroughly dry, apply another coat with slight, uniform crown over joints. This coat must be smooth and with edges feathered out 3 inches beyond preceding coat. 5. All fastener heads and dimples shall receive at least 3 coats of compound. Apply as each coat is applied to joints, allowing at least 24 hours between each coat. 6. Cover flanges of beads and trim with at least 2 coats of compound. First layer shall be bedding compound. Apply along with respective coats of compound on joints. Feather out compound approximately 9 inches from metal beads. 7. Sand coats of compound when thoroughly dry, if sanding is needed. Avoid roughing surfaces of wallboard. 8. Leave wallboard uniformly smooth and ready for decoration. 3-10. SOUND CONTROL I. Install sound control insulation in stud space at partitions where shown on Drawings. Fit insulation board between studs snugly; fill all voids with loose insulation material. METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONSTRUCTION Section 9B Page 6 • 3-07. SINGLE LAYER APPLICATION Apply gypsum wallboard with long dimensions parallel to studs and furring channels and fastened with screws spaced not less than 12 inches on centers. Aubtting edge joints shall occur over webs of furring channels or flanges of studs. Joints shall be neatly fitted with end joints staggered. 3-08. LAMINATED WALLBOARD APPLICATION 1. Base Layers: Apply backerboard with long dimensions vertical and with end joints located on or between framing members. Space fasteners 16 inches on centers maximum. 2. Finish Layer: Apply with long dimensions of finish board horizontal and perpendicular to backerboard. Vertical joints shall be minimized by using longest available sheets. 3. Apply finish layer using the adhesive or screw method. Out and fit boards to provide snug fit which will not result in deformation of edges. • 4. Apply adhesive to back of finish board or to face of backing board, in accordance with recommendations of adhesive manufacturer, using recommended spreader blade. If long life adhesive is used, position board and hold in place temporarily with sufficient screws or bacing to ensure adequate bond between layers. Allow adhesive to dry 24 to 48 hours. Remove temporary screws and shoring. Fill holes with joint treatment compound. 5. If fastener application method is used for finish layers, use screws specified for use, spacing screws at 12 inches on centers maximum along edges and at 16 inches on centers along supports in field of board. Stagger edge fasteners of adjacent boards at butt joints minimum of 2 inches. 6. Mix adhesive compounds in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Mix only enough at one time to be used up during recommended pot life of compound. 7. On curved wall applications do NOT exceed minimum dry bending radius. Follow manufacturer's recommendations. METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONSTRUCTION Section 98 Page 5 5. Install metal trim at exposed edges and corners, according to the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Cut openings in wallboard to fit electrical outlets, plumbing, heating, piping, etc. Openings shall fit snugly and shall be small enough to be covered by plates and escutcheons. Both face and back paper shall be cut for all cutouts which are not made by use of a saw. Support wallboard securely around all' cutouts and openings. Provide sealant for all cutouts and perimeter joints. Provide additional supports for built in or recessed items. 7. All ends and edges of gypsum wallboard shall occur over framing members or solid backing except where treated joints occur at right angles to framing or furring members. 8 . Fasteners: a. Install fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch to end or edge.. b. Space fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends or edges. c. Begin fastening from center of wallboard and proceed toward outer end or edges. d. Apply pressure on wallboard adjacent to fasteners being driven to insure that wallboard will be secured tightly to framing member. Check for looseness at fasteners. e. Drive fasteners with shank perpendicular to face of board. f. Drive screws with a power driven screwdriver as recommended by the wallboard manufacturer. g. Surface of head shall be below surface of paper without cutting paper. h. Nail gypsum wallboard using double nailing method at wood studs. Fasten gypsum wallboard to ceiling framing using screws. 9. Confirm that additional wood blocking or reinforcement is in place for wall mounted fixtures, toilet partitions and accessories, shelving, cabinets and other items hung from drywall partitions. Provide toggle bolts or similar approved fasteners. METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONSTRUCTION Section 98 Page 4 • 3-04. GENERAL I. Install water resistant gypsum backing board wherever ceramic ti le finish is scheduled on wallboard. 2. Install gypsum backing board as first layer of laminated wallboard work. 3. Install gypsum finishing wallboard wherever paint finish is scheduled on wallboard. 3-05. ACCESSORIES AND ITEMS FURNISHED BY OTHERS I. Install casing beads where gypsum wallboard abutts perpendicular surfaces of other than gypsum wallboard, at cased openings, and as shown. Install corner beads at all exposed corners. 2. Maintain metal edge in a true line. • 3. Install frames and casing for items furnished by others to be built in. 3-06. WALLBOARD APPLICATION I. Examine and inspect all surfaces and supports to which gypsum wall- board is to be applied. Remedy all conditions which will jeopardize satisfactory finish prior to installation of dyrwall. Check align- ment and plumb of all framing. 2. All wallboard joints shall be butted loosely together. Butt ends shall not be placed against a tapered edge. Maximum allowable gap at end joints shall be 1/4 inch. 3. Install in maximum practical lengths to span wall and ceiling framing without end (butt) joints with long dimension parallel to supports. If butt joints do occur, stagger joints and locate as far as possible from center of walls and ceilings. 4. Joint layout at openings shall be made so that no end joint will align with eges of openings. r �J METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONSTRUCTION Section 98 Page 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. PARTITIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING Attach metal runners to floor and to underside of structural construc- tion above with suitable fasteners spaced no more than 24 inches on centers. 2. Insert metal studs into runners and twist into position. Space studs at 24 inches on centers, except where closer framing is required for proper support of finish, such as curved walls and ceramic tiled walls. Crimp studs to runners using crimping tool, or fasten with 2 sheet metal screws, top and bottom. Provide additional studs not more than 2 inches from jambs, abutting partitions, and other construction. At partition corners, position a stud so that it forms the outside corne r. 3. Provide offsets and furring metal framing to form soffits and vertical offsets for incombustible framing, for pipe chases and other work. Space framing at no greater than 16 inch centers. Fasten members where required for rigidityusing sheet metal screws or staples, as recommended by framing manufacturer. 4. Framing shall be accurately located, plumb, level and true to line. 3-02. WALL FURRING Space furring channels on 24 inch centers and attach to existing wall surface with power driven anchors to suit wall construction. Space fasteners on 24 inch centers through alternate wing flanges. End splices shall be made by nesting channels no less than 8 inches and securely anchoring with two fasteners in each wing. Furring channels shall be shimmed out to plumb and true alignment. 3-03. FRAMING FOR ITEMS FURNISHED BY OTHERS Frame out for fixture frames and other items of mechanical and electrical work. 2. Provide additional framing members where required to support items attached to the walls by others. Install backer plates or other wall reinforcing items as furnished by others to support their work. METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONSTRUCTION Section 9B Page 2 • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Standard Non -Bearing Furring Channels, Studs and Runners: For interior wallboard work, conform to ASTM C645, screw type, fabricated of not less than 25 gage galvanized steel, 20 gage for double studs at each side of door openings, Special C -H studs to suit shaft wall boards. 20 gage studs where shown or required for strength. 2. Furring Clips: Type recommended by manufacturer as approved. 3. Gypsum Finishing Wallboard: ASTM C36-78, thickness detailed, tapered edge, Type "X." Flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested per ASTM E84 -77a. 4. Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C442-78, thickness detailed, square edges, Type "X " 5. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630-78, thickness detailed; tapered edges, Type "X." . 6. Accessories: Except for special moldings, accessories shall be of type requiring joint treatment, metal or plastic at Contractor's option. a. Metal Accessories: Of not less than 28 gage galvanized steel, with expanded mesh flanges, 800 series by U. S. Gypsum or equivalent. 7. Fasteners (drywall nails and screws): ASTM C646-78, Phillips head, black oxidized screws and ASTM C594 nails, lengths to suit wal'Iboard thickness. 8. Joint Treatment Materials: Tape and spackle, ASTM C474-67 (1978) and ASTM C475-64 (1975). 9. Acoustical Sealant: As approved by the wallboard manufacturer. 10. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665-78, Federal Specification HH -1-521E, Type I, mineral fiber sound attenuation blanket, 2 inches thick, unless noted otherwise. METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONSTRUCTION Section 98 - Page 1 SECTION 98 - METAL FRAMING AND GYPSUM WALLBOARD CONSTRUCTION PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREI-N I. Coordinate installation with installation of thermal insulation and other items furnished under other Sections. 2. Metal studs, furring and framing. 3. Gypsum wallboard. 4. Accessories and trim. 5. Taping and spackling. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Wood Framing - Section 6A. 2. Thermal Insulation - Section 7C. 3. Lath and Plaster - Section 9A. 4. Finish Painting - Section 9E. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit product data and appli,cati,on recommendations for approval. 2. Submit samples of accessories and trim. 1-04. INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS 1. Inspect the work for any serious defects or conditions which would interfere or prevent a satisfactory installation of materials under this Section. Do not proceed with the work until corrections have been made. Installation shall be deemed acceptance of the related construction. 1-05. STANDARDS I. ANSI A97.1-1965 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Wallboard. ASTM C754-79 Specifications for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard and Backing Board. STUCCO Section 9A Page 6 • 7. Provide 2 coat plaster installation on metal lath and two coat doubled back work on masonry. The final coat shall be a "mission style" steel trowelled finish to match the exterior of 31531 Camino Capistrano. 3-03. CURING PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER CSTUCCO WORK) Moist cure each coat of plaster not less than 48 hours. Allow brown coat to dry after curing period. 2. In hot weather, moist cure by applying a fine fog spray of water. Protect from uneven and excessive evaporation. Dampen scratch coat if required prior to application of brown or finish coat. 3. In cool weather, protect each coat during 48 hours curing period. 4, in case of wet weather, scratch coat shall be allowed to dry for an extended period in order to provide proper suction for brown or finish coat. 3-04. REPAIRING AND POINTING I. Repairing and pointing up of plaster installed under this Section shall be thoroughly and neatly performed. Cracks. and indentations in plastered • surfaces shall be thoroughly raked out or cut out, the surfaces moistened, the imperfections filled with new material and then troweled or tamped flush with adjoining surfaces. The surfaces around fixtures, outlet boxes, switch plates, fittings, piping, and other materials or appliances abutting or extending into plaster shall be pointed up and finished flush with the adjacent plaster. Where plaster is to be joined to the other plaster which has been installed for more than 48 hours, the abutting edge of the existing plaster shall be beveled to a plane so that the joint assumes approximately a 45 degree angle. 3-05. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from doors, frames, windows, and other surfaces which are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls and other surfaces which have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris. 2. Installer shall advise the Contractor of requirements for the protection of plaster from deterioration and damage during the remainder of the construction period. END OF SECTION 9A STUCCO Section 9A Page 5 5. Install plastering accessories, anchored to substrates 8 inches on center along each flange. Miter corners and spline joints to form tight accurate joints without offsets. 6. Reinforce internal corners with cornerite. 7. Install casing beads at openings and exposed terminations of plaster work or as detailed. 8. Leave 1/4 inch sealant pocket at exterior casing beads. 9. Install control joints where indicated. 10. Build in access panels, fixtures, frames and other items furnished under other Sections. 3-02. APPLICATION OF STUCCO FINISHED PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER Before Plastering: I'ns.pect surfaces to receive plaster and see that spacers, grounds, furring, screeds, base screeds, casing beads, plaster stops, corner lath, metal trim, and lath are secured in place. See that grounds are set to receive the specified thickness of plaster. 2. General: Comply with ANSI A42.2; and with manufacturer's instructions. which are more detailed or whichever are more stringent. 3. Mechanically mix plaster materials at the Project Site; do not hand mix except where small amounts are needed, using less than one bag of plaster material. 4. Grout hollow metal frames, bases and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base coat plaster material. 5. Sequence plaster installation properly with the installation and protection of other work, so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the other. 6. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built in metal items or accessories which act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise shown. Where plaster is not terminated by casing beads, form corners before plaster sets. Conform to rounded corners on front entry door frame of building at 31531 Camino Capistrano. STUCCO Section 9A Page 4. • 3. Wire for Ties: ASTM A641-71 C1975i Class I coating, galvanized soft temper wire or approved equalvent clips. 4. Stucco Accessories: Except as otherwise noted and detailed standard gage solid zinc accessories as required, including casing beads, one piece control joints, and similar units. Do not provide corner beads. a. Special Moldings: Fry Reglet Corporation or approved equal non- ferrous type. 5. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, of type and length suitable for adequate penetration of the substrate. Equip fasteners with 1/4 inch furring device, where material fastened is indicated to be held away from substrate. 6. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated Kraft paper for vertical surfaces.. Sloped surfaces shall receive 2 plies of felt specified under roofing. 2-03. PLASTER MIXES General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with A42.2 as applicable, • except comply with manufacturer's instructions where more stringent than standards. 2. Mix for Exterior Stucco: Include bonding additive, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING Clean plaster bases and substrates to be plastered, removing loose materials, coatings and other substances which might impair the work. 2. Apply self furring metal lath by nesting ribs and nailing at I foot on center, and wire tie or clip as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Install corner reinforcement at external corners of exterior stucco work. 4. Install temporary grounds and screeds as required to control plaster thickness and comply with tolerances. STUCCO Section 9A Page 3 1-08. SAMPLE PANELS 1. Provide 3'-0" by 3'-0" sample panels for stucco finish. Do no finishing plaster work until approval is obtained from the Architect. Panels shall remain intact until completion of stucco work. Panels shall show rounded corners indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS I. General: Provide either neat or ready mixed materials, at I.nstaller's option, complying with ANSI A42.2. 2. Water shall be clean, fresh and free from quantities of mineral and organic substances that will retard or accelerate the setting of plaster. 3. Base Coat Cement: Portland Cement, ASTM C150, Type I or IA. 4. Base Coat Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, Type S, ASTM C6 or C206. 5. Base Coat Aggregate: Sand, conform to ANSI A42.2. 6. Base Coat Fiber: Hair or fiber; mix with plaster for scratch coat on metal lath. 7. Prepared Second or Finish Coat: Factory prepared finish for stucco type recommended by the manufacturer for the color and texture indicated. a. Texture: Rough texture to match sample panel. b. Color: Integrally mix color pigment with finish coat to match Architect's sample, or paint as specified under Section 9E. 2-02. REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES I. Self -Furring Metal Lath: Expanded copper bearing steel sheet, deformed to hold main plane of lath 1/4 inch from substrate; FS QQ-L-101. Provide galvanized lath for exterior work. 2. Corner Reinforcement: Special stucco type woven wire corner rein - forming strips, solid zinc or stainless steel. STUCCO Section'9A Page 2 • a. A42.2 Portland Cement and Portland Cement -Lime Plastering, Exterior (Stucco) and Interior. b. A42.3 Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement and Portland Cement Lime Plastering, Exterior (Stucco) and Interior. 2. Allowable Tolerances: For flat surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 8 feet for bow, warp, plumb or level. 1-05. SUBMITTALS Submit 2 copies of the manufacturers product specifications and installation instruction for each material, and include other data as may be required to show compliance with these Specifications. 2. Submit samples of all materials including accessories for approval. 1-06. DELIVERY AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS Deliver all manufactured materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles and bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand name. 2. Protect plaster, lath and all cementitious materials against dampness • until used. Store materials off ground, under cover and away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces. Protect metal accessories in manner to prevent rusting. Do not install rusted metal accessories in the work. 1-07. PRECAUTIONS AND PROTECTIONS Do not perform exterior stucco and Portland cement plastering unless an exterior temperature of 50 degrees F., and rising is excpected during plastering operations and for at least 4 days thereafter. Protect plaster from uneven or too rapid drying. Do not apply plaster to surfaces that are wet. After plaster has set hard, provide and maintain free circulation of air to prevent sweat outs. 2. Where finished surfaces such as metal frames, metal windows, or other finished surfaces. have been installed in areas prior to completion of plastering, finished surfaces shall be protected from damage during plastering. 3. Examine surfaces which, are to receive plaster, grounds and other accessories which act as grounds or screeds, and notify the Architect, in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the plaster work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 0 STUCCO Section 9A Page 1 SECTION 9A - STUCCO PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Metal lath. 2. Accessories. 3. Portland cement plaster stucco. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECI,FI;ED ELSEWHERE I. Finish painting - Section 9E. 2. Sheathing and wood stud framing - Section 6A. 3. Gypsum wallboard construction - Section 98. 4. Two plies roofing felt for sloped stucco - Section 7A. 1-03. THICKNESS AND NUMBER OF COATS 1. Unless greater thicknesses are shown on the Drawings, the minumum thickness of plaster as measured from face of substrate to finished plaster surfaces shall be one inch. 2. Number of coats. a. Plastering on metal lath at sheathing and masonry: 2 coat work. 1-04. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE I. Except as otherwise specified or indicated, materials, methods and workmanship for all plastering work to be provided hereunder shall conform to all applicable requirements of the following specifications published by the American National Standards Institute: FINISHED HARDWARE Section 8C 'age 11 4. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 5. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and hairline joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts, pivots and similar items, if any. 6. Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws, of the proper type for permanent anchorage and of matching non- ferrous metal which will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal. 7. At exterior doors, and elsewhere as indicated, set each edge of threshold in a seal strip of butyl rubber sealant or polyiso- butylene mastic sealant. 8. Install weatherstripping and seals in full, uninterrupted lengths at locations where scheduled. 3-02. ADJUST AND CLEAN Adjust and check each operating item or hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite -type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. 2. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. ENO OF SECTION 8C FINISHED HARDWARE Set #15 Single interior door at Staff Toilet (#36) Each opening to receive: 1-1/2 pair butts I each lockset 6055 1 each floor stop 1 threshold to suit Set #16 Section SC Page 10 Single exterior door at Janitor (#10) NOTE: For Alternate Bid #2 provide hardware for double doors (set #14) 1-1/2 pair butts I each lockset 6005 1 each O.H. holder I each closer I threshold to suit PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION and I set weatherstripping ( I a I ) (gal) (3d1) (4a2) I. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware" by NBHA, except as otherwise specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise specified or directed by the Architect. 2. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, re -install each item. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. 3. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. • • FINISHED HARDWARE Section 8C Page 9 Set # I I Single exterior doors at Patio (#3, 5) Each opening to receive: 1-1/2 pair butts (lag) I each mortise lockset (6al) I each O.H. stop (3cl) I each closer (4a2) I threshold to suit and I set weatherstripping Set #12 Single interior doors at Office (#34, 35, 37, 42) Each opening to receive: 1-1/2 pair butts (lag) I each lockset 6110 (2al) I each O.H. stop (3cl) Set #13 Single interior doors at Auditorium 425, 26) Each opening to receive: 1-1/2 pair butts (lag) 1 each O.H. stop (3cl) 1 each push plate (2cl) 1 each pull plate (2dl) 1 each close (4al) Set #14 Pair exterior doors at Patio, Staff, Courtyard, (#2, 4, 12) Each opening to receive: 3 pair butts (lag) I each lockset 6130 (gal) I pair flush bolts (tel) 2 each O.H. holders (3dl) I threshold to suit and I set weatherstripping 2 each closer (4a2) FINISHED HARDWARE Section 8C Page 8 • Set #7 Pair exterior doors at Courtyard 414, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 45) Each opening to receive: 3 pair butts (lal) I.set exit device (63 function) (3al) I set exit device (10 function) (3al) 2 each closers (4a2) 2 each O.H. holders (3dl) I threshold to suit and I set weatherstripping Set #8 Single interior doors at closets (#30, 31) Each opening to receive: 1-1/2 pair butts (la2) I each lockset 6010 (2al) I each floor stop (2gl) Set #9 Single interior doors at storage, kitchen, proj, staff area (#21, 22, 27, 28, 29, 32, 33, 38, 39, 43, 44) Each opening to receive: 1-1/2 pair butts (lag) I each lockset 6010 (gal) I each O.H. stop (3cl) Set #10 _ Single interior doors at Toilets (#23, 24, 40, 41) Each opening to receive: 1-1/2 pair butts (IA2) I each push plate (2cl) I each pull plate (2dl) I each closer (4al) I each mop plate (2bl) 1 threshold to suit • FINISHED HARDWARE Set #4 Single exterior doors at Gallery 06) Each opening to receive: Section 8C Page 7 1-1/2 pait butts (lal) I set exit device (63 function) (3a2) I each closer (4a2) I each O.H. Holder (stop) (3dl) I each exit alarm (5al) I threshold to suit and I set weatherstripping Set #5 Single exterior doors at Courtyard (#II) Each opening to receive: 1-1/2 pair butts (lal) I each exit device (04 function) (3a2) I each closer (4a2) I each O.H. Holder (3dl) I each exit alarm (5aJ) I threshold to suit and I set weatherstripping Set #6 Single exterior doors at Courtyard (#13) Each opening to receive: 1-1/2 pair butts (lal) I set exit device (10 function - no outside trim) (3a2) I each closer (4a2) I each O.H. holder (3dl) I each exit alarm (Sal) I threshold to suit and I set weatherstripping FINISHED HARDWARE Set #I Single exterior door at Auditorium (#8, 9) Each opening to receive: Section 8C Page 6 1-1/2 pair butts (lal) I ea. exit device (63 function) (3a2) I ea. closer (4a2) I ea. O.H. Holder (3dl) I threshold to suit and I set weatherstripping Set #2 Prs exterior doors at Lobby (#7) Each opening to receive: • 3 pair butts (lal) I set exit device (63 function) (3al) I set exit device 2 ea closer (10 function) (3al) • (4a2) 2 ea O.H. stops (3cl) 1 threshold to suit and I set weatherstripping Set #3 Prs exterior doors at Entry (#I) Each opening to receive: 3 pair butts (lal) I set exit device (63 function) (3al) I set exit device (1 0 function (3al) 2 ea closers (4a2') 2 ea O.H. holders (3dl) I threshold to suit and I set weatherstripping 0 FINISHED HARDWARE 1-05. TEMPLATES Section 8C Page 5 All necessary Templates for the accurate setting and fitting of finish hardware shall be furnished to all Subcontractors and other Contractors in ample time to facilitate the manufacture or progress of the work. 1-06. PRODUCT HANDLING Provide secure lock up for hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation. 1-07. JOB CONDITIONS Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately , with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and installation and function. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation. 1-08. HARDWARE SUPPLIER'S RESPONSIBILITY The Finish Hardware listed herein shall in no way be construed as a complete hardware schedule and shall be considered as an indication of the hardware requirements desired by the Owner. It shall be the hardware supplier's responsibility to examine the Drawings and Door Schedule and provide all necessary or additional hardware as required but not scheduled herein. Such items of hardware shall be of the same type, quality and quantity as that scheduled for similar doors used for similar purposes in other parts of the building. A schedule of fabrication and delivery shall be executed to avoid any delay of the entire Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. HARDWARE SET NUMBERS I. All doors shall be equipped with hardware of the type listed and in accordance with the following set numbers. The Contractor is referred to the schedule and plans for the total number of each set required. FINISHED HARDWARE Section 8C Page 4 • (2) Provide No. 34 for door stops on wood frames. h. Samples, Finished Hardware: (I) Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to delivery of hardware, submit one sample of each exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged with full description of coordination with the schedule. Sample will be reviewed by the Architect for design, color and texture only. Compliance wit other requirements is exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. (2.) Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparision procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. 1-04. KEYS AND KEYING I. Cylinders and Key locks shall be Master Keyed to a new Master Key System as per the instructions of the Architect and/or Owner. • 2. Furnish: a. Three (3) Master Keys b. Five (5) keys per each change 3. Supply one (1) key cabinet: The cabinet shall have an approved labeling system, consecutively numbered. For each key hook, furnish a fiber tag of permanent locking type, approximately 1-1/2 inch in diameter which shall bear the legend "FILE.KEY: MUST NOT BE LOANED" and shall be stamped to correspond with the consecutive numerals on the labels on the hook pockets. The cabinet shall contain a receipt form for recording all keys. The Cabinet shall have a cross index for recording all keys alphabetically, numerically and by a serial number, be complete and as manufactured by Telkee Incorporated, Glen Riddle, Pa, Series "AWC- 150S." The filing system shall be set up by Telkee. 4. Delivery of Keys: All keys shall be delivered by hand, or via registered mail, to the Owner or their authorized representative. • FINISHED HARDWARE Section 8C Page 3 (3) Sargent and Company (a) Exit Devices (Approved Equivalent: Corbin, Russwin) (1) Rim Vertical Rod 9700 Series x PTB z function as noted x MKD cylinder US3 (2) Rim Type 9800 Series x PTB x function as noted x MKD cylinder US3 (b) Mortise Cylinders (Approved Equivalent: Corbin, Russwin) (1) No. 41 US3 (c) O.H. Stops (d) O.H. Holders (4) Norton (a) Door Closers (5) Detex Corporation (a) Exit Alarms (6) Corbin (Approved Equivalent: Corbin, Russwin) (1) 690S - Concealed US3 (Approved Equivalent: Corbin, Russwin) (1) 690H concealed US3 (Approved Equivalent: Sidro) (1) 78 E/F GB (2) 78 E/F x 2018S offset plate GB (Approved Equivalent: Sidro) (1) 504AC x MS -2049F Magnetic Door Switch x CS -915 Cyl. Switch (a) Cylinders (1) Mortice type 5252-1-1/8 x US3 e. Door Stripping and Seals: (1) Interlocking head jamb and rabbeted meeting stile protection as schedule in 25 B $ S gauge bronze series 10F as manufactured by Zero Weatherstripping Co., Inc. f. Thresholds: (1) Furnish bronze finish thresholds #1674 for Quarry Tile and carpet, and #664 for concrete areas, by Zero Weatherstripping Co., Inc., or approved equivalent. g. Silencers: (1) Furnish grey rubber door silencers as manufactured by Russwin hardware Division, Embart Industries, Inc., or approved equivalent. FINISHED HARDWARE I c Section 8C Page 2 is proven equivalent in every respect. Any request for deviation from this Specification as to manufacturer, type, size, material or finish of any item or its components must be submitted to the Architect in accordance with the provisions of Section IG -Submittals. Quality: All hardware shall be uniform in color and free from any imperfections affecting serviceability or marring its appearance. Finishes: Except where specifically noted, finishes on finish hardware shall be as follows: (1) Polished Brass US3 Types of Hardware: The numbers listed in the Specifications are taken from the catalogs of the following manufacturers with type of hardware required noted, and in each case of specific size change or lock function requirements, this additional information will be so noted in the Hardware Sets. (.I) Stanley Hardware (Approved Equivalents: McKinney, Hager) (a) Hinges CI) FBB191 4} x 4}" NRP US3 (2) FBB179 4} x 41" US3 (2) Baldwin Hdw. Mfg. Corp. (a) Locks (b) Mop Plates (c) Push Plate (d) Pull Plate (e) Flush Bolts (f) Floor Stops (Approved Equivalents: None) (1) Lock function as noted x 5025 Knobs x 5002 Rose x less cylinder US3 (1) 4" high x 2' L.D.W. x .051 US3 (I) 2154 - 4" x 16" US3 No. 2335 US3 Approved Equivalent: Ives) (I) 0600 -12" US3 Approved equivalent: Ives) (1) 4000 or 4001 US3 • r �J 1] FINISHED HARDWARE SECTION 8C - FINISHED HARDWARE PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN Section 8C Page 1 The General Contractor shall furnish all labor, material and equip- ment required to complete all work under the above hearing as indicated on the Drawings or herein specified or both. 2. Finish Hardware shall be furnished for the following items: a. All finish hardware for wood doors in wood frames. b. All finish hardware necessary to complete the Project shall be furnished, whether particularly mentioned or not, and shall match in quality and finish the material specified. 3. The Hardware Dealer shall submit to the Architect and/or Owner, at least three (3) copies of.a detailed Hardware Schedule. These Schedules shall be complete and describe in detail the finish hardware for all door openings, or occurrence of Finish Hardware. a. These Schedules are to be checked and approved by the General Contractor and Architect. No hardware is to be ordered, or templates issued prior to the receipt by the Hardware Dealer of these approved schedules. Upon approval of schedule, the Contractor shall supply the Architect with five (5) final copies. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Millwork hardware - Section 6B. 2. Toilet partition hardware - Section IOA. 1-03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Manufacturers: a. The following listed material is intended to serve as a guide for the requirements of this Project. Hardware manufactured by other than those manufacturers specifically described or listed in this Specification will be considered, providing it GLASS AND GLAZING Section 86 Page 4 3-02. CLEANING The Contractor will be held responsible for and shall make good without extra charge or cost to the Owner, all glass furnished hereunder, which may become broken or defective from any cause whatsoever during the construction of the building and until the building is completed and turned over to the Owner. The glass at completion shall be clean, whole and perfect to the satisfaction of the Architect. 2. All easily visible defects as noted by the Architect shall be cause for rejection. END OF SECTION 88 LJ • GLASS AND GLAZING PART 3 — EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION Section 8B Page 3 Perform all glazing in conformance with the Standards of the Flat Glass Jobber Association's "Glazing Manual." Examine the Drawings, Schedules and Details for the locations of the various. types of glass. Follow additional instructions of the window, door, glass and sealant manufacturers with reference to installation and use of glazing compounds. 2. Inspect all openings for glass. Do not proceed with glazing until all defects, if any, i.n related work have been corrected. Failure to notify the Architect of such defect, or the beginning of glazing, will indicate acceptance of all previously placed related work of other trades and will nullify subsequent claims of such defects by this Contractor. 3. Take sizes for glass from the actual opening requiring glazing. Set all glass in place. Assume all responsibility with regard to correct sizes. Sizes where indicated on the Drawings are approximate; use for estimating purposes only. All clearances shall conform to the recommendations of the glass manufacturer. 4. Provide spacer shims and setting blocks for all glass larger than 50 united inches. 5. Bed glass for frames in glazing compound or tape and secure in place with the glazing beads supplied with the doors.and frames, except where premolded glazing channels and gaskets are furnished. 6. Perform glazing using the Pecora or Tremco Glazing System in strict conformance with the methods outlined and described in Contractor's submittals and as approved by the Architect. Any special recommenda— tions of the glazing materials manufacturer applicable to the work shall be followed for glazing. 7, Mark glass lights with large labels or other warning to workmen as a deterrent to passing objects through the glazed openings. GLASS AND GLAZING Section 88 Page 2 • 4. Tempered Plate Glass: 1/4 inch thick tempered plate glass, "Tuf Flex" by L.O.F., or "Herculite" by PPG Industries, clear as indicated. 5. Insulating Glass, I inch thick: Hermetically sealed insulating glass units. Interior pane shall be 1/4 inch clear float or tempered where indicated, or required by Code, and exterior pane shall be 1/4 inch clear float. Units shall be "Thermopane" or "Twindow" or equivalent. Use in all window areas as indicated. a. The double glazed units shall be guaranteed not to develop material obstruction of vision as a result of dust or film formation on the inner glass surfaces caused by failure of the seal, other than through glass breakage within a period of 5 years from date of installation. Any units failing to comply with the terms of this guarantee shall be replaced without cost to the Owner. 6. Insulating Glass, 5/8 inch thick: Hermetically sealed insulating glass units. Interior pane shall be 3/16 inch float or tempered, where indicated or required by Code, and exterior pane shall be 3/16 inch clear float. Units shall be "Thermopane" or "Twindow" or equivalent. Use in window areas noted. a. Guarantee shall be listed above for 1 inch units. • b. Interior pane at toilets shall be obscure rough plate to obscure vision. 2-02. GLAZING MATERIALS Glazing of exterior frames shall be performed with the "Pecora" glazing system using extruded butyle tape and one part polysulfide sealant, "Synthacalk GC -9,'' as manufactured by Pecora Chemical Corporation, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, or approved equivalent system by Tremco, except where preformed glazing gaskets and channels are supplied with the frames. 2. Glazing of interior work shall be performed using extruded resilient, polyisobutylene/butyl rubber "Extru-Seal" tape and a one part, gun grade, butyl rubber sealant, Type BC -158 as manufactured by Pecora or approved equivalent system by Tremco. 3. Resilient setting blocks and spacers for glass lights shall be neoprene or other suitable resilient material as furnished and recommended by the glass supplier. GLASS AND GLAZING SECTION 8B - GLASS AND GLAZING PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Windows and doors.. 2. Truss lights. _Section 88 Page I 3. Borrowed lights and glazed partitions. 4. Replace broken and damaged glass. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Preformed glazing gaskets, beads and channels in doors - Section 8A. 2. Wood stops and frames for interior truss and all windows - Section 66. 3. Glass specifically called for under other Sections. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit samples in duplicate for approval. Submit outline and descrip- tion and shop drawings for glazing systems for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. GLASS TYPES I. All glass materials shall conform to Federal Specifications DD -G-14038 and DD -G -451D, and shall be products of Libbey-Owens-Ford, PPG Indus- tries, American Saint Gobain Corporation, CE Glass, or equivalent. Every sheet of glass shall bear the manufacturer's grade label which shall remain on the glass until after inspection and approval. 2. Tempered glass shall be used in all locations required by Local and National "Safety Glazing REgulations," and elsewhere noted on the Drawings. 3. Tinted Glazing: 1/4 inch thick gray tinted float glass, Graylite by PPG, Grey Float by L.O.F., or equivalent. Use at reception counter area or where else noted. Provide cutouts as required. WOOD DOORS Section 8A Page 3 2. Finish hardware with factory applied finish shall be carefully fitted and then carefully protected while any painting work is performed. 3. Readjust all doors for proper operation after glazing has been completed. END OF SECTION 8A WOOD DOORS Section 8A Page 2 PART 2 - PROUDCTS 2-01. SOLID CORE WOOD DOORS 1. Doors shall be custom grade, flush type, as defined in WIC quality standards. Doors shall be as manufactured by Weyerhaeuser Company, Cal -Wood Door Company, Santa Rosa, California or approved equivalent. 2. Doors shall have staved lumber core. Exterior doors shall be medium density overlay faced with top flashing at out - swinging doors. 3. Doors shall have faces of plain sliced Birch for opaque finish in conformance with CS -171-58, and shall have matching stiles. 4. Light openings, including flashing for exterior doors, shall be as shown in the Drawings. Provide beads for openings tacked in loose. 5. The lock stile of all hinged doors shall have a bevel of 1/8 inch 2 inches. Clearance at head and jambs shall be not more than 1/8 Clearance at bottom shall be coordinated with threshold conditions that clearance above a threshold is not more than 3/16 inch or 3/8 inch above finish floor where no threshold is used, except where I undercut is scheduled. in inch. so 6. Doors shall be toxic and water repellant treated for opaque finish. Doors shall be individually wrapped in plastic or paper. inch 7. Furnish manufacturer's standard written limited warranty covering prompt repair, replacement or refund of purchase price for any wood door which may provide defective within the life of the installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION Hang wood doors. Cut each door accurately, trim and fit to its respective frame and hardware, with due allowance for finish and possible swelling and shrinkage. Doors shall operate freely, but not loosely, without sticking or binding, without hingebround conditions, and with all hardware properly adjusted and functioning. • • L_J WOOD DOORS SECTION 8A - WOOD DOORS PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Flush solid core wood doors. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Glass and glazing - Section 8B. 2. Finish hardware - Section 8C. 3. Finishing - Section 9E. 4. Wood frames and trim - Section 66. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit shop drawings for approval. Section 8A Page i 2. Submit two (2) corner samples of door construction for approval. 3. Submit manufacturer's written door guarantee. 1-04. STANDARDS I. Except as otherwise specified, the type and quality of work to be furnished hereunder, including materials and fabrication, shall conform to Custom Grade, WIC. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect e with an affidavit certifying materials and products delivered to the Project meet the requirements specified. 1-05. STORAGE OF MATERIALS I. Do not deliver wood doors until the building is sufficiently dry so that they will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content. ROOF HATCH Section 7F Page 2 • 3-02. INSTALLATION Install work as shown on approved shop drawings and in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. • END OF SECTION 7F ROOF HATCH Section 7F Page 1. SECTION 7F - ROOF HATCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Roof hatch. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. ROOF HATCHES 1. Type: Bilco Type "S" or equivalent. 2. Fabricate of galvanized sheet steel, #14 gage for curb and cover and #22 gage for liner. Cover shall be hinged type, and equipped with lifting assist mechanism and hold open arm. Cover shall be pro- vided with interior and exterior latch handles to operate a springloaded latch equipped on the interior with a padlock hasp and neoprene seal. Curb shall be 12 inches high and formed with a deck flange with holes provided for securing to roof deck. Curb shall be equipped with an integral metal cap flashing, of same gage and material as curb. Curb and hatch shall be insulated with 1 inch thick mineral wool insula- tion. A11 hardware shall be zinc plated. Factory finish shall be paint bond galvanized steel and red oxide primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSPECTION The Installer must examine the supporting structure and the conditions under which the work is to be erected, and notify the General Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. WATERPROOFING Section 7E Page 4 6. Cover joints and cracks, including hairline cracks, with approximately 100 mils of elastomeric membrane waterproofing during the normal course of application. 7. Form I inch cants using the approved membrane material where horizontal planes intersect vertical surfaces. END OF SECTION 7E • WATERPROOFING Section 7E Page 3 2. Seal voids or cracks around pipes, conduits, and other penetractions or projections through face of subsurface with calking compound prior to applying membrane coating. 3. Apply primer to surfaces that are recommended by membrane manufacturer to receive a primer. 4. Fill construction and expansion joints over 1/8 inch in width with calking compound. Primers, backing and materials, and calking work shall follow applicable requirements as specified in Section 7B. 5. For areas to receive waterproof membrane, after calking, apply a bond breaker such as wax emulsion, over the filled joint and 3 inches on either side of the joint. Treat working cracks with the bond breaker as specified above. 3-02. APPLICATION Surfaces receiving waterproofing shall be dry and free of dew or frost. Prior to and during application remove dust and dirt from the substrate by blowing air (under pressure), brushing with a soft broom or by vacuum cleaning. Application of waterproofing shall not commence unless ambient temperature is 40 degrees F., and rising, or higher. Do not apply during inclement weather. 2. Apply the elastomeric waterproofing membrane material to a minimum thickness of 50 mils in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not exceed potlife time when using 2 component materials. 3. Protect the waterproofing membrane against puncture or damage by installing protection board over completed surface. Where required to obtain adherence of protection material against vertical or sloped surfaces, use membrane material or mastic cement as recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 4. Follow the installation of the protection material as closely as possible with the succeeding materials, such as backfilling. 5. Perform as necessary work to waterproof mechanical, electrical and other items which project through waterproof membrane. WATERPROOFING 1-07. GUARANTEE Section 7E Page 2 1. Furnish Owner with an unconditional guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from final acceptance covering waterproof membrane, sealing of pen- etrations.through membrane, and protection board over membrane. 2. During the Guarantee Period, the Contractor agrees that within 24 hours of receipt of notice from the Owner he will inspect and make immediately emergency repairs to defects or to leaks in the waterproofing system. He further agrees that within a reasonable time, he will restore the affected items to the standard of the original specifications. All emergency and permanent work during the life of the guarantee to maintain waterproofing system will be done without cost to the Owner, except in the event it is determined that such leaks were caused by abuse, earthquake, or other acts of God, or failure of related work (except work included under the guarantee) installed by other parties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Material for fluid applied elastomeric membrane waterproofing shall be at the Contractor's option either a single or two component polyurethane based compound, self -leveling type for horizontal surfaces and non -sagging type for vertical or sloped surfaces, as manufactured by the following companies, or equivalent. a. A -H Seamless Membrane System by Anti -Hydro Waterproofing Company. b. Karnak One-Kote System by Karnak Chemical Corporation. c. Duramem System by Pecora Corporation. d. Tremproof 60 System by Tremco. 2. Membrane protection board shall be a minimum 1/4 inch thick, "Seal -tight PC -2" as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc., or equivalent. 3. Calking compound shall be 2 component polysulfide type, "Synthacalk" as manufactured by Pecora Corporation, or equivalent. 4. Primer shall be type recommended by the waterproofing manufacturer. 5. Bond breaker over sub -surface joints shall be type as recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. SURFACE PREPARATION Surfaces to be protected shall be smooth, dry, firm, and shall be free of voids, incidental projections, loose material, oil, grease, asphalt, curing compounds, and all other foreign matter. Fill large voids in surface with cement mortar. • • WATERPROOFING SECTION 7E - WATERPROOFING PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Waterproofing membrane. Section 7E Page 1 2. Sealing penetrations through membrane. 3. Protection board over membrane. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Roofing work - Section 7A. 2. Calking - Section 7A. 3. Parging - Section 4A. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit product data and installation methods for review. 2. Submit manufacturer's installation inspection certification. 1-04. INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS I. Inspect the work for any serious defects or conditions which would interfere or prevent a satisfactory installation of materials under this Section. Do not proceed with the work until corrections have been made. Installation shall be deemed acceptance of the related construction. 1-05. SUPERVISION By MANUFACTURER I. Contractor shall notify the waterproofing manufacturer in sufficient time to allow inspection of substrates and supervision of application of the waterproofing materials by manufacturer's authorized representa- tives. 2. Work shall be performed under the direct and continuous supervision and inspection of the manufacturer. 1-06. QUALITY CONTROL 1. Materials shall be in conformance with the ASTM standards referenced in the manufacturer's specification. 2. Waterproofing membrane shall, as a minimum, meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C836-76 Standard Specifications for "High Solids Content, Cold Liquid Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course." TILE ROOFING Section 7D Page 3 c. All tiles in contact with mortar shall be immersed in water for 2 minutes before laying. d. Nailers shall be set at rake, ridge and hips. END OF SECTION 7D TILE ROOFING Section 7D Page 2 • 2-02. MATERIALS Tiles shall be with light antique mission tile finish. 2. Adjacent trim items, starters, boosters, and ridge shall be factory formed from the same material, gauge and finish as the roofing panels. Caulking to be furnised at those trim conditions recommended by the manufacturer and as designated on shop drawings. 3. Underlayment shall be two layers 15 pound saturated rag felt or equivalent, with hot applied coal tar pitch bitumen as specified in Section 7A: Built -Up Roofing Work. 4. Fasteners shall be 9 gauge galvanized nails as recom- mended by the manufacturer of the roofing tiles. Fasteners must go through plywood, rigid insulation and penetrate wood deck a maximum of 1 inch and not to go through the exposed wood deck, or as recommended by the tile manufacturer for this type of installa- . tion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION 1. Install all items as noted above and in strict accor- dance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Unless otherwise noted, lay tiles at 10-1/2 inches o.c. with regular exposure of 17 inches, over the underlayment. a. First row of tops after gable roll shall be set in cement mortar. Double cover tiles at eaves using a booster t le set in cement mortar. b. Where the joins hips and ridges, voids shall be filled with cement mortar. Cap hips and ridges with cover tiles and point neatly with cement mortar. C J TILE ROOFING Section 70 Page 1. SECTION 7D - TILE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Tile roof system, prefinished. 2. Adjacent trim and accessories. 3. Underlayment and fasteners. 4. Shop Drawings. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Rigid insulation - Section 7C. 2. Wood blocking, plywood and nailers, Section 6A. 3. Wood deck, Section 6D. 4. Built-up roofing systems, Section 7A. 5. Metal flashing, copings and caps, section 7A. 1-03. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit shop drawings for approval and special guarantee for the finish. 2. Submit prefinished sample of roofing tile and ridge cap and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. TYPE AND MANUFACTURER 1. Sloped t le roofing shall be "Mission 20" clay the manufactured by "San -Valle", Corona, California, a, or approved equivalent. BUILDING THERMAL INSULATION Section 7C Page 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. TIMELY DELIVERY 1. Provide timely delivery of materials to be installed under other Sectons, such as roof insulation and wall insulation. 3-02. INSTALLATION OF THERMAL BATT INSULATION 1. Install batt insulation as shown, with vapor barrier to the inside of heated spaces. Securely fasten in place. Leave no voids. END OF SECTION 7C BUILDING THERMAL INSULATION Section 7C Page 2 . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. THERMAL BATT INSULATION 1. Batt Type Insulation: Minteral fiber felt baits, or blankets, meeting ASTM C665 and Federal Specifi- cation HH -1-521 E, Type II. 2. Except as otherwise noted, batt insulation shall have a thermal resistant rating and nominal thick- ness as follows: a. Exterior stud walls: R-11, 3 inches thick. b. Ceilings and soffits: R-19, 6 inches thick. 3. Fasteners shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer to suit construction. 4. Batt insulation shall be "Thermafiber" as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum or approved equal. 2-02. RIGID ROOF INSULATION 1. Insulation for t le or sloped roofing areas: Per - lite -Urethane Composite, or Urethane composite board "FURI" as manufactured by Owens Corning Fiberglass Corporation or approved equal, maximum aged conduc- tance "C" or .06 and minimum aged Resistance "R" of 16.66. 2. Tapered Edging Strips: Fiberboard, 1-1/2 inch taper in 18binches, fiberboard shall comply with Federal Specification LLL -1-535. 3. Cant Strips: Fiberboard, 2 inches thick, width as required to form 4 inch high cant, fiberboard shall comply with Federal Specification LLL -1-535. 4. Incombustible Insulation Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and FM approved. 5. Nails: Insulation clip fasteners with disks as manufactured by Lexsuco or approved equal, length as required. • • • BUILDING THERMAL INSULATION Section 7C Page 1 SECTION 7C - BUILDING THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Thermal batt insulation. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Pipe and duct insulation, Divisions 15 and 16. 2. Installation of rigid roof insulation, Section 7A. 3. Acoustic Insulation, Section 96. 1-03. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit product data and samples of insulation for approval. 2. Submit certification that insulation meets per- formance tests. 1-04. INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS 1. Inspect the work for any serious defects of condi- tions which would interfere or prevent a satisfactory installation of materials under this Section. Do not proceed with the work until corrections have been made. Installation shall be deemed acceptance of the related construction. 1-05. COORDINATION 1. Coordinate with the work of other trades. 1-06. DELIVERY AND STORAGE 1. Deliver insulation to Project in manufacturer's original unopened packages or containers. Store insulation on wood pallets or dunnage elevated above ground or roof deck surfaces and completely covered with waterproof wraps (plastic or canvas) securely to prevent intrusion of moisture. Materials improperly stored or which become wet or damaged shall be identified, conspicuously marked as rejected, and removed from the job site. CALKING Section 7B Page 3 5. Where joints are deeper than 3/4" install sufficient backup material to leave proper calking recess at face. 6. Where joints are shallow install bond breakers. 7. Install calking compound by pneumatic methods, in generous "rounded" bead neatly smothed and completely filling the joint. Gun nozzle shall be proper size to fit joints. Apply calking at temperature above 40 degrees F. 8. Point calked joints on flush surfaces neatly flush and remove excess material. Point calked joints in inter- nal corners nearly with a coving tool, and remove ex- cess material. 9. Strip masking and clean adjacent surfaces which have been soiled; and leave work in a neat, clean condition. 10. When done, inspect work in detail and replace any found in any way defective or unsightly. END OF SECTION 7B CALKING _Section 7B Page 2 • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS 1. Primer: Type recommended by calking manufacturer. 2. Back Up Material: Closed cell rubber; closed cell butyl; open cell polyurethane; polyethylene bond breaker tape (shallow joints only); as recommended by calking manufacturer appropriate for the type of joint involved. 3. Calking: Federal Specification TT -S-00230, Type ll, general purpose, non -sagging, "Mono" by Tremco;. or, Synthacalk GC -9 as manufactured by Pecora Corporation, 165 Wambold Road, Harleysville, Pennsylvania 19438, or approved equal. 4. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's standard full color selections. PART 3 - EXECUTION • 3-01. APPLICATION 1. Apply calking and related materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the approved submissions, using experienced and skillful workmen. 2. Prepare wall surfaces of calking groove by chipping and grinding to remove excessive protrusions and roughness. Clean joints thoroughly, removing oil films, dust, dirt, and loose materials. 3. Mask adjacent surface prior to commencing work. 4. Prime joints as recommended by the calking manu- facturer. Submit certification from the manu- facturer if a primer is not required. Do not apply primer or calking on surface containing frost, dirt, or moisture. • CALKING SECTION 7B - CALKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN Section 7B Page 1 1. Preparation of joints to be calked. 2. Calking of all open fixed joints between dissimilar materials. 3. Calking of all exposed control and expansion joints. 4. Calking of any other joint as required for weather tightness,dust tightness or for finished apparance. 5. Removal of masking and cleaning of adjacent sur- faces. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Sealing as part of ceramic the work - Division 9. 2. Sealing as part of glazing operations - Section 8B. 3. Sealing as part of roofing work - Section 7A. 1-03. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit product data on calking materials and an outline description of procedure for each type of joint to be calked, for approval. 2. Submit color samples for selection. 1-04. INSPECTION OF SURFACES 1. Prior to application, inspect joints to be calked. Notify General Contractor and the Architect in writing of conditions which will interfere or pre- vent a satisfactory installation. Do not proceed with the work until corrections have been made. Starting of installation shall imply acceptance of the surface. BUILT UP ROOFING 'WORK Section 7A Page 11 15. Furnish the various trades concerned with the necessary items of sheet metal to be built in by them. 16. Roofing installer shall be responsible for the proper attachment of roofing work to any roofing metal that is embedded in or in contact with roofing work and becomes an integral part of the specified roofing system. 3-06. CLEANING AND PROTECTION 1. Properly and effectively protect the workmen from exposure to solvents 2. Bear costs and repairs and corrections of all work damaged by the roofing installation. 3. Upon completion of the work, all unused materials, containers, equip- ment, etc., shall be removed from the site. All surfaces that are stained, marred, or otherwise damaged by the work under this Section shall be cleaned and repairs and all work shall be left in a clean and perfect condition. END OF SECTION 7A BUILT UP ROOFING WORK Section 7A Page 10 n LJ 7. When finished, clean sheet metal work of flux, scrapes and dirt. On large areas, clean up as each section of work is finished. Neutralize excess flux which may cause acid stains by washing with a 5 to 10 percent solution of washing soda. After neutralizing, wash the sheet metal off with clean water. Conform to manu- facturer's recommendations for removal of stains from surfaces of factory finished products. 8. Exposed edges of sheet metal shall be folded back to form a 1/2 inch wide hem on the side concealed from view. Finished work shall be free from water leakage under all weather conditions. The workmanship and methods employed for forming, anchoring, cleating and accommodating expansion and contraction of sheet metal work shall conform to applicable details and description as indicated in current edition of the referenced publications unless other methods are indicated on Project Drawings or specified herein or recommended by the manu- facturer. 9. Surfaces to which sheet metal is to be applied shall be even, smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry and free from projecting nail heads or other defects that would affect the application. 10. Seal all loose joints, cap, gravel stop and coping joints, flashing • joints and all joints, noted to be calked or otherwise, for water tightness. 11. Cap Flashing: Lap end joints a minimum of 3 inches; do not solder or weld joints; overlap base flashing a minimum of 4 inches. Bottom edge of cap flashing shall be folded back 1/2 inch on under side and provided with a continuous break to obtain spring action. Extend cap flashing into masonry walls not less than 3-1/2 inches or as detailed. Use 12 inch long splice plates at wall caps. 12. Strip in flanges of pitch pockets, roof curbs, lead flashings, etc., with a 2 ply felt and bitumen flashing system. 13. Fill any pitch pocket collars with bitumen. 14. Install all roof edge and caps and copings with concealed splice plates finished to match with expansion joints. Provide continuous cleats for attachments. Do not nail finished and exposed material. Conform to details. 0 BUILT UP ROOFING WORK Section 7A Page 9 6. Where finished roof surface is gravel, apply bitumen pour coat and gravel up to the toe of the cant. 7. Install counter flashing or compression clamp at metal cants. 3-05. SHEET METAL WORK Furnish and install all items of sheet metal to provide a weather tight installation at roof perimeters, where roofing abutts vertical surfaces, at valleys and elsewhere as shown. Items of sheet metal designated to be built in by others shall be preformed and delivered to the job site in time to be incorporated in the work of respective trades. Sheet metal items shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the dtaiIs indicated and, if not shown, shall conform to applicable details and methods described in the SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever are more stringent. 2. Concealed sheet metal including roof top splash pans shall be fabricated of 0.032 aluminum or 0.015 inch thick stainless steel except as otherwise specified. Exposed sheet metal shall be aluminum to include roof edge, gravel stop -fascia and copings and caps. 3. Apply flashing over plywood or wood blocking over a layer of 15 pound felt. 4. Prime surfaces to bond with a base flashing with primer recommended by roofing manufacturer. 5. Isolate dissimilar metals from each other with a heavy caot of asphaltic compound and a layer of felt. 6. Tin all edges before soldering. Solder immediately after applica- tion of flux. Upon completion of soldering neutralize acids and clean finished surfaces thoroughly. Flux shall be of type specifically recommended by sheet metal manufacturer for use with stainless steel. Welding of aluminum shall conform to the requirements -of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers CNAAMM). . QUARRY TILE Section 9D Page 1 SECTION 9D - QUARRY TILE PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Quarry Tile, thin set. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Concrete Slab - Section 3A. 2. Ceramic Tile - Section 9C. 3. Wood Base - Section 6B. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit samples for approval and color selection. 1-04. DELIVERY AND STOAGE • I. Deliver packaged materials to the site in original unopened containers, clearly indicating manufacturer's name, brand name, and other identifying information. 2. Store materials in a dry location, off the ground, and in such a manner as to prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials which have become damaged or otherwise unfit for use. 1-05. ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES I. Prior to installing tile, this Contractor shall inspect surfaces which are to receive tile. Notify the General Contractor in writing with copies to the Architect of any serious defects or conditions which will interfere or prevent a satifactory installation. Do not proceed with the work until corrections have been made. Surfaces shall be free of greases and oils. 2. Installation of the shall be deemed acceptance of the substrate and assumption of responsibility of any unacceptable finished work caused by substrate conditions. QUARRY TILE Section 90 Page 2 • 1-06. SUBSURFACE TOLERANCES Surfaces to receive dry set portland cement mortar shall not vary more than 1/8 inch above and 1/8 inch below required plane in any undivided space, nor shall there by more than 1/16 inch variation within any running foot. 2. Provide leveling coats where necessary to bring surface within the tolerances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS Quarry ti le shall be Quality Certified by the manufacturer to equal or exceed Standard Grade in conformance with TCA 137.1 1976, Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. Furnish a Master Grade Certificate for each type of tile, signed by the manu- facturer and the Contractor, certifying the grade, type and quality of the tile. 2. Tile containers shall be branded with, or have sealed within, the shipping mark and other designations corresponding with the informa- tion given on the Master Grade Certificate. The Tile Council of American (TCA) certification mark shall appear on each label or carton of tile. 3. Colors as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard earth tone color range. After award, Architect will furnish color and pattern application schedule. 4. Quarry Tile: 6 by 6 by 1/2 inch, grooved back, extruded, square edge; American Olean Murray Quarry Tile or approved equal. Floor t le shall be abrasive nonslip fadeproof type. Color shall be as selected. 5. Dry Set Mortar: Presanded Portland Cement and additives, complying with ANSI A118.1. a. Use only the type of dry set mortar to set the types of ti le for which they are labeled. 6. Latex Portland Cement Mortar: Latex modified portland cement thin set mortar complying with ANSI A118.4. • 0 a. Grouts shall be as manufactured by Upco Chemical Division of USM Corporation, or approved equal. Color shall be as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard color range. a. Grout for quarry ti le and base shall be "Hydroment" grout/joint filler. 9. Control Joint Filler: Neoprene or vinyl, full depth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION I, Apply leveling coats or underlayment over surfaces where it is necessary to level or straighten the surfaces to provide a satis- factory the installation. Z. Do not apply mortar to surfaces covered with water or foreign substances. Minimum temperature for installation of the shall be 40 degrees F., and rising. • 3. Center fields and patterns on applied areas so that no the is less than half size. 4. Cut and drill the and trim shapes accurately without damaging. Rub all exposed cut edges smooth with abrative stone. 5. Except where otherwise shown or specified, make joints in floor tile perpendicular and parallel to walls. 6. Press ti le firmly into mortar and beat it to a true surface before initial set occurs. See that full contact is obtained to insure that there are no sizeable voids. Adjust any the htat is out of alignment. 7. Coordinate wall the work with other trades to allow installation of mechanical work. S. Every precaution shall be taken not to stain tiles before they are set in place. No warped, over or under burned, stained or spal led tile shall be placed in the work. 9. Locate expansion and control joints and accessories precisely before tile is installed. 0 QUARRY TILE Section 90 Page 3 7. Water shall be clean and fresh; suitable for drinking. a. Grouts shall be as manufactured by Upco Chemical Division of USM Corporation, or approved equal. Color shall be as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard color range. a. Grout for quarry ti le and base shall be "Hydroment" grout/joint filler. 9. Control Joint Filler: Neoprene or vinyl, full depth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION I, Apply leveling coats or underlayment over surfaces where it is necessary to level or straighten the surfaces to provide a satis- factory the installation. Z. Do not apply mortar to surfaces covered with water or foreign substances. Minimum temperature for installation of the shall be 40 degrees F., and rising. • 3. Center fields and patterns on applied areas so that no the is less than half size. 4. Cut and drill the and trim shapes accurately without damaging. Rub all exposed cut edges smooth with abrative stone. 5. Except where otherwise shown or specified, make joints in floor tile perpendicular and parallel to walls. 6. Press ti le firmly into mortar and beat it to a true surface before initial set occurs. See that full contact is obtained to insure that there are no sizeable voids. Adjust any the htat is out of alignment. 7. Coordinate wall the work with other trades to allow installation of mechanical work. S. Every precaution shall be taken not to stain tiles before they are set in place. No warped, over or under burned, stained or spal led tile shall be placed in the work. 9. Locate expansion and control joints and accessories precisely before tile is installed. 0 «r QUARRY TILE Section 90 Page 4 3-02. STANDARD METHOD SPECIFICATIONS Tile installation work shall conform to methods described in the "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" published in the "Tile Council of America" (TCA), to the installation specifications of the "American National Standards Institute" (ANSI) and as specified herein; whichever has the more stringent requirements shall govern. 2. After ti le has sufficiently set, force a maximum of grout into the joints by trowel, squeegee, brush, or finger application. Before grout sets, strike or tool the joints of cushion edge the to the depth of the cushion. Fill all gaps or skips. Clean excess grout off with clean burlap, other cloths or sponges. Where white grout has been used, do not permit dark cement to show through the grouted joints. Leave joints against metal frames open for calking. 3. Sponge and wash tile thoroughly with clear water after the grout has. stiffened. Then clean by rubbing with damp cloths or sponges, and polish with clean dry cloth. 4. Apply waterproof paper over floor tiles as soon as grouting is completed. Lap joints at least 4 inches. Weight the laps with planks or sand and leave in a place for not less than 3 days. 5. Protect all work from dirt and damage until building is accepted by Owner. 3-04. EXTRA TILE Furnish 5 percent extra ti le of each color and type used in the work. Deliver to Owner in original wrapped condition at acceptance and store as directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION 90 9 PAINTING Section 9E Page I SECTION 9E - PAINTING PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. All building surfaces, except as otherwise specified or noted, shall be painted. 2. Generally the following materials will not be painted or finished, unless specifically noted to be painted or finished. a. Concrete, quarry and ceramic tile. b. Aluminum, copper and stainless steel items. c. Plastic laminate finish. d. Glass and finish hardware. • e. Exterior redwood soffits. f. Factory finished materials and equipment. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Shop priming specified in other Sections. 2. Identification painting of piping and equipment. 1-03. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit color samples for approval. 2. Submit schedule or listing of proposed brand names and manufacturers for approval. 1-04. INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS 1. inspect the work for any serious defects or conditions which would interfere or prevent a satisfactory application of materials under this Section. Do not proceed with the work until corrections have been made. Application shall be deemed acceptance of the related surfaces. 0 PAINTING Section 9E Page 2 1-05. COLORS AND SAMPLES I. Colors and tints shall be as selected by the Architect. A minimum of 15 colors will be used and a minimum of 2 colors in any one room or area. 2. Prior to his beginning work, the Contractor shall receive from the Architect sample color chips with a color schedule. The colors of these chips shall be matched by the Contractor who wits prepare samples for the Architect's approval. 3. The colors and surface finishes of the approved samples shall be matched in the completed work by the Contractor who shall do all mixing and blending necessary to achieve this result. 4. Base coats and undercoats of paint and enamel shall be tinted or shaded as directed. Tinting and shading colors are not to be conaldered as separate colors and no extra or additional payment will be made for such tinting and shading work. 5. Each coat of paint shall be slightly darker than the preceding — coat unless otherwise directed by the Architect. 1-06. STORAGE OF MATERIALS AT JOB SITE I. Store paint and equipment in assigned areas. 2. Protect floor, walls and other surfaces against damage. 3. Take necessary precautions to keep fire hazards to a minimum. 4. Leave surfaces of storage space clean and in condition required for _ equivalent spaces in the Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MANUFACTURERS I. Paint shall be as manufactured by one of the following companies or equivalent: a. Benjamin Moore and Company. b. Devoe and Reynolds. • PAINTING Section 9E Page 3 c. Sherwin Williams. d. Glidden Paint Company, San Francisco, California. e. Ameritone Paint Corporation. f. PPG Industries. 2-02. PAINT MATERIALS I. Paint materials shall be of types and brands as specified. 2. Primers and intermediate coats, unless otherwise specified, shall be those recommended by the manufacturer of the finished materials. 3. Paint used for the various coats on each type of surface shall be selected for compatability one to the other. . 4. Other painting materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, thinners, shall be of highest quality and shall have identifying labels on containers. 3. Deliver paint to the site in manufacturer's sealed containers. Labels shall give manufacturer's name, type of paint, formula- tion, color of paint, and instructions for reducing. 6. Materials shall be new and free from defects impairing the strength, durability or appearance, best commercial grade designed for their particular function and situation in structure. 7. Remove any unapproved materials from site immediately. 8. Paint shall be well ground, shall not settle readily, cake, or thicken in containers, shall stir up easily to a smooth consistency, and shall have good brushing properties. 2-03. BRAND NAMES I. Braned names used herein are Benjamin Moore brand names to indicate the quality of the various paint materials. • PAINTING Section 9E Page 4 Type of Finish Moore's Brand Name Vinyl latex primer Latex Quick Dry Prime Seal Zinc chromate primer Iron Clad Zinc Chromate Primer Alkyd Undercoater Alkyd Enamel Underbody Alkyd semi -gloss enamel Satin Impervo Enamel Alkyd oil gloss enamel Impervo Nigh Gloss Enamel Galvanized primer Iron Clad Galvanized Metal Primer Wood filler Benwood Paste Wood Filler Dull varnish Benwood Satin Finish .Varnish PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-0I. PROTECTION OF ADJACENT SURFACES I. Caution shall be observed in painting not to daub any bright or plated work adjacent to painted areas and not to spatter floors or other finished work. 2. Cover floor and other horizontal work with drop cloths. 3. Cover or otherwise protect adjacent work of other trades. 4. The Contractor shall also protect his own painted work and be responsible for same. _ 3-02. PREPARATION OF SURFACES I. General: a. Spaces shall be brook clean before painting is started. b. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and adequately protected from dampness. c. Surfaces shall be smooth, even and true to plane. d. Surfaces shall be free of any material which will adversely affect adhesion or appearance of applied coating. • PAINTING 2. Metal Surfaces: Section 9E Page 5 a. Remove dirt and grease with,minerai spirits. b. Remove rust, mill scale, and defective paint down to sound surface. Feather out shoulders at edge of sound paint to prevent them from photographing through finish coats. c. Touch up bare spots and damaged shop coats with primer. 3. Wood: a. Sandpaper to smooth and even surface, then dust off. b. Touch up spots of damaged shop primer. c. Holes, splits and scratches shall be filled smooth. 4. Gypsum Wallboard and Stucco: a. Fill minor irregularities with spackling compound and trowel • to a flush level surface, texture to match adjacent surface. 3-03. UNSUITABLE CONDITIONS 1. No work shall be done under conditions which are unsuitable for the production of good results. a. Do not apply paint when temperature is below 50 degrees F. b. Do not apply exterior paint in damp, rainy weather. Weather must be "drying." C. Do not apply finish in spaces where dust A s being generated which would speck the finish. d. Interior areas shall be maintained at a temperature of not less than 70 degrees. F., while paints are being applied. 3-04. APPLrCATrON I. Brush each coat on well and work out evenly so as to leave no brush marks or "holidays." 0 PAINTING Section 9E Page 6 2. Float each coat on smoothly, free from sags or runs. 3. Rate of application shall not exceed average rate of coverage recommended by paint manufacturer for the type of surface involved. 4. Apply additional coats of paint or finish as required to cover surfaces completely and to provide uniform color and appearance. 5. Minimum drying time shall comply with that recommended by paint manu- facturer. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry before application of succeeding coats. 6. Thoroughly sand or steel wool surfaces of woodwork and metal work between coats, unless prefinished. 7. Do not apply final coat on interior work until other trades are finished, their materials and debris removed and the premises left in a substantially broom clean condition. 8. Door bucks may generally be painted a dissimilar color from adjacent surfaces. 9. Tops and bottoms and both edges of doors shall be finished as specified for faces. of doors. Remove and rehang doors after fitting to obtain specified finish. 10. The colors and surface finishes shall match the aprpoved samples. 3-05. CLEANING AND RETOUCHING The Contractor shall remove all paint spatters from windows, floors, tile, woodwork, metal or other work, leaving the work clean. and free from paint spots or other disfigurements caused by his work. 2. Remove from the building surplus painting materials and implements. 3. At the completion of the work, correct defects in the painting work no matter by whom caused and leave the work in perfect condition. 4. Damage to the adjacent work due to painting, carelessness or accidental performance of the Contractor or any of his employees, shall be repaired or more good at the Contractor's expense. • PAINTING • 0 3-06. SCHEDULE OF PAINTING Section 9E Page 7 I. Unless otherwise noted, the kinds of paint and minimum number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be as follows: 2. Interior and exterior metal work (unless prefinished): a. Field touch up of shop prime coat. b. If not shop primed, one coat zinc chromate primer or if galvanized one coat of galvanized primer. c. Two coats alkyd oil gloss enamel. 3. Interior and exterior wood surfaces, painted finish (unless pre - finished): a. Field touch up of shop prime coat. b. if not shop primed, one coat alkyd undercoater. c. Two coats alkyd oil semi -gloss enamel. 4. Gypsum wallboard and stucco: a. One coat vinyl latex primer. b. Two coats alkyd semi gloss finish on drywall. c. Two coats flat vinyl latex finish on stucco. 5. Mechanical equipment Cin finished areas): a. Except as otherwise directed, two coats of gloss enamel in six (6) bright trim colors as selected by the Architect, on all exposed items of mechanical and electrical work (pipes, insulation, conduits, panels, boards, grilles, diffusers, registers, etc.) that are not specified with factory applied finish in Divisions 15 and 16. 'f t PAINTING �� Section 9E Page 8 _ 6. Graphics and certain door signs: a. Two coats, compatible with general surface finishes. b. Letter designs as selected by Architect. c. Required door signs on both sides of doors as noted on Drawings. d. Graphics, as shown. 7. Interior woodwork, transparent finish: . a. One coat wood filler. b. Two coats satin varnish. END OF SECTION 9E 0 0 0 CARPETING Sejon 9F Page 1 SECTION 9F - CARPETING PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Direct glue down type carpeting. 2. Edge trim. 3. Underlayment. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Concrete subfloor - Section 3A. 2. Room base - Section 6B. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit wear and static control guarantees. 2. Submit seam layout drawings for approval. 3. Submit color samples and carpet specifications for selection. 4. Furnish 3 maintenance manuals for the carpet installed. 5. Submit certificates of tests of representative samples of carpet to be used showing flame spread, smoke developed and fuel contributed rate. 1-04. INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS I. Inspect the work for any serious defects or conditions which would interfere or prevent a satisfactory installation of materials under this Section. Do not proceed with the work until corrections have been made. installation shall be deemed acceptance of the related construction. CARPETING 1-05. PREPARATION OF SUBFLOOR Section 9F Page 2 I. Work shall include preparation and treatment of substrate to obtain required bond for installation; include application of troweled or other type under Iayment where required to correct rough floors. 1-06. GUARANTEE I. Adjustment: During I year guarantee period and within 15 days written notice, restretch, repair seams and edges. 1-07. QUALITY ASSURANCE I. Installer: Engage a carpet installation firm, which has at least 5 years successful experience in carpet installation similar in size and type to the carpeting requirements of this Project. 2. Manufacturer's Representative: Obtain carpeting materials from only manufacturers who will, when requested, send a qualified technical representative to the Project Site, to advise the installer of — proper installation procedures. 3. Flame Spread Rating: Provide only carpet which has been tested and passes the Federal Flammability Standard DOC -FF -1-70 (The pill test) and ASTM E84, Class A Flamespread rating of 25. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. CARPET TYPE I. Carpeting shall be a type suitable for direct glue down installation. In order to establish a standard of quality and appearance, the published specifications of interweve, Nylon Carpet by Bigelow, are by reference made part of this Specification. 2-02. MATERIAL I. Carpet Description: ASTM E84, rating of Class A. a. Face: 100 percent Antron i11, Nylon or equal, with statis control. b. Type: Woven through. c. Pitch: 212 Two Heddle. • CARPETING Section 9F Page 3 d. Rows/inch: 6.4. e. Wire Size: 250 inch uncut. f. Yarn Ply: 8 ply yarn dyed, textured diagonal weave. g. Face Weight: 30 ounces per square yard. h. Backing Materials: Polyester warp, fiber lock filling, no stuffer.. I. Total Weight: 60 ounces per square yard. j. Width: 12 feet. 2-03. ACCESSORIES I. Carpet Accessories: Metal stops, saddles, half saddles as required by job conditions. • 2. Primer and Adhesive for Carpet: Provide primer and release type adhesive as. recommended by the carpet manufacturer which will allow removal of carpet at any time without damage to carpet. Provide adhesive which complies with flame spread rating required for the carpet installation. a. Miracle Ma -84 or MS -85, or equal, white emulsion type. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION I. install as shown on approved shop drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. 2. The floor shall be checked for moisture content. Floors shall be free from dust, oils, grease, or other foreign matter. Cracks 1/8 inch or more, holes and uneveness shall be filled with latex based floor filler. 3. Broom clean and prepare floor surface to satisfactory condition to receive carpet, including application of troweled or other type under- Iayment where required to correct rough floors. • CARPETING Section 9F Page 4 4. Building shall be preheated to 68 degrees F., for at least 24 hours prior to installation. Temperature shall be kept constant night and day during installation. 5. Apply primer to subfloor to be carpeted. Apply adhesive in accordance with the carpet manufacturer's directions. Primer and adhesive shall be compatible, and of the types recommended by the carpet manufacturer. 6. Cut edges shall be trued and treated to form non -ravelling joints where exposed. End to end seams not shown on approved shop drawings but required due to lengths of materials received shall be located as directed. Trim woven selvages to insure good side seams. Seal seams with a coating of latex edge sealer applied to base and side of pile yarn. 7. Cut and fit carpet at room perimeter and at permanent equipment. Use standard binder bars or approved metal trim at doorways or where carpet abuts other floor finishes and no thresholds or saddles is being furnished under other Sections for that location. NOTE: Do _ not run carpeting through doorways which have fire rated labels on the doors. 8. Following installation, allow a minimum of 24 hours curing time, before subjecting installation to heavy traffic, particularly rolling loads. 3-02. CLEANING AND PROTECTION I. Remove debris from installation, carefully sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of. Wrap, label and turn over to Owner all usable scrap and excess material for future repairs. 2. Vacuum carpet with a commercial machine, with rotating agitator or beater nozzle. Remove soiled spots. 3. The Contractor shall protect the carpeted areas during the remainder of the construction period, so that carpet will be in undamaged and unsoiled condition at the time of acceptance. Recommend the type of non -staining cover material that should be used for protective cover. END OF SECTION 9F • METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10A Page 1 SECTION IDA - METAL TOILET PARTITIONS PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Water closet compartments. 2. Urinal screens. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Toilet room accessories - Section IOB. 2. Plumbing fixtures - Division 15. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit color samples and shop drawings for approval. Submit any deviations in design to conform to the Standard Practice of the • manufacturer for approval. 1-04. FIELD MEASUREMENTS 1. Take and be responsible for such field measurements as may be required for fabrication or installation. Coordinate with other work which comes in contact with the work of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MANUFACTURERS I. Partitions shall be as manufactured by the following companies or equivalent. a. Sanymetal Products Company, Los Angeles, California b. Flush Metal Partition Corporation. c. Global Steel Products Company, City of Commerce, California. d. Metpar Steel Products Corporation, Pico Rivera, California. e. Penner Partitions, Inc., Anaheim, California. 0 METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Section 10A Page 2 - 2-02. MATERIALS I. Partitions shall be flush pilaster floor mounted type. 2. Panels, pilasters, and doors shall be of flush sandwich type construc- tion, a honeycomb core permanently bonded to face sheets of galvanized bonderized steel. Edges shall be interlocked with a stainless steel molding, welded at corners and ground smooth. 3. Minimum requirements for the partitions shall be as follows: a. Panels: i inch thick, 20 gage (.stainless steel face at urinals). b. Doors: i inch thick, 22 gage. c. Pilasters: Adjustable, 1-1/4 inches thick, 18 gage. d. Edge Moldings: 20 gage stainless steel. e. Pilaster Plinths: 3 inches high, stainless steel. f. Brackets: Chrome plated brass, 3 brackets per panel edge. g. Lower Hinge Assembly; Concealed, gravity type. opposing cam action, adjustable, self lubricating. h. Upper Hinge: Stainless steel pintle, self lubricating bushing. I. Latch: Stainless steel and/or cast non-ferrous alloy chrome plated. j. Bumper Coathook: Cast non-ferrous alloy chrome plated and rubber tip, one per compartment. _ k. Exposed Fasteners: One way type. 1. Reinforce panels as required for -grab bars and accessories. 4. Provide outswing, over sized doors with large handles and easy to operate hardware at water closet compartments for the handicapped. 2-03. FINISH I. Doors, panels, and pilasters shall have a baked on enamel finish. Colors as selected from manufacturer's standard calors. METAL TOILET PARTITIONS Section IOA Page 3 • a. Stainless steel items shall have a polished finish. b. Aluminum items shall have a natural color satin anodized finish. c. Chrome plated items shall have a polished finish. . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION I. Install as shown on approved shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Erect work plumb, true and rigid. Holes cut in finishes shall be concealed by work under this Section. Adjust hardware and leave in perfect working condition. Clean exposed surfaces. 2. Floor anchors shall be rigidly fastened to structural concrete floor slab through the finish flooring material. Wall anchors at hollow wall construction shall be toggle bolt type. 3. Extend pilasters at walls to floors. END OF SECTION IOA E • • TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES Section 108 Page 1 SECTION IOB - TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Grab bars. 2. Toilet paper dispensers. 3. Combination paper towel dispensers and disposal. 4. Framed mirrors. 5. Sanitary napkin dispenser and disposal. 6.. Mop rack -and shelf unit, pail hooks. 7. Liquid soap dispensers. . 8. Paper towel dispensers. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Coat hooks mounted on toilet partitions - Section IOA. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit product data and schedule of items for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MANUFACTURERS I. Accessories shall be as manufactured by one of the following companies or approved equivalent. a. Accessory Specialties, Inc, supplied by W.H. Steele Co., Inc., Los Angeles, California. b. Bradley Corporation, Los Angeles, California. c. Charles Parker Company, Santa Fe Springs, California. d. American Dispenser Company, Inc. TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 2-02. MATERIALS Section 10B Page 2 Except as otherwise noted, accessories shall be recessed type with sub -frames, fabricated of 302 or 304 series 18-8 alloy stainless steel, welded construction, seamless corners, burr free edges, with a No. 4 satin finish on exposed surfaces. Protect finish with a removable vinyl coating during construction period. 2. Catalog numbers used herein are "Accessory Specialties" numbers to indicate the style line, type unit, capacity, mounting, material and appurtenances required for each accessory. 2-03. TYPES OF ACCESSORIES Grab Bars: Series 3200PZ, concealed mounting flanges, 1-1/2 inch diameter stainless steel tubing, .064 inch wall thickness, non -slip gripping surface, 1-1/2 inch clearance from wall meet State require- ments. a. At each new handicapped water closet: 2 grab bars, one 36 inches and one 28 inches long straight grab bars, installed level at height above the finished floor, as s4own on Drawings.. 2. Toilet Paper Roll Holder; Model 0710, surface mounted, single roll, chrome plated, 18 gage steel. Omit brake spring action device in handicapped stalls. a. Provide toilet paper holders for each water closet compartment. 3. Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Disposal; No. 6461 -WC with sub -frame for recessed mounting, 18 gage stainless steel body and 16 gage stainless steel door, satin finish, continuoue hinge, key - lock, removable heavy duty container, dispenses 600 C -Fold or 800 Multi -Fold, overall size I4-1/4 by 58 by 4-3/4 inches. a. Provide one unit for each toilet room. 4. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser: Model 0468 with sub frame for recessed mounting, Dual Type, 22 gage body and 18 gage door, stainless steel, satin finish, continuous piano hinge, overall size 17-1/4 by 27-1/4 by 4-I/4 inches. Provide for Women's toilet rooms noted. 9 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES Section 106 Page 3 5. Paper Towel Dispenser: 0210 surface mounted, 22 gage stainless steel body, 20 gage stainless steel back with No. 4 finish, fitted with tumbler lock and stainless steel piano hinge with 3/16 inch barrel. Dispenses 400 C -Fold or 525 Multi -Fold paper towels, over all size 11-1/2 by 14-1/2 by 4 inches. Provide for toilet rooms noted. 6. Framed Mirrors: Model 0620, 20 gage, satin finish stainless steel channel frame, mitred corners with hairline joint, concealed theft proof locking devices, 1/4 inch thick quality polished plate glass mirror with 10 year gauarantee against silver spoilage. Provide one for mounting over each lavatory. 7. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Model 852, 22 gage stainless steel, satin finish, continuous piano hinge, bottom door with hidden spring tensioned self catching lock, mounted on partitions as shown, overall size 9 by 11 by 4-1/4 inches, coin operated with 25¢ slots. B. Mop Rack and Shelf Unit: Model 1316, surface mounted, 18 gage stainless steel, 36 inches long with 4 mop holders, 3 utility hooks, and an 8 inch deep shelf, for custodial room where noted. • 9. Soap Dispensers: Surface wall type Model 0340 liquid, chrome plated brass valve and body, and stainless steel internal working parts. Capacity of 40 fluid ounces, top filling. Mount one for each lavatory. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION Install as shown in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommenda- tions at the proper height, in alignment one to the other, straight, plumb, and true. Installation shall be done in a careful manner by skilled workmen accustomed to handling this type of material. 2. Use all metal type fasteners such as anchors, plates, screws, bolts, and expansion shields as required by the construction to which accessories are to be secured. Exposed hardware shall match finish of the accessory. 3. Install grab bars as required to meet requirements of California regulations governing the accommodation of physically handicapped persons. Coordinate reinforcing required in partition construction. 4. Remove temporary protective coating just prior to turning the building over to the Owner. 0 END OF SECTION 108 PORTABLE EXTINGUISHERS Section 100 Page I SECTION IOC - PORTABLE EXTINGUISHERS PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Extinguisher cabinets. 1-02. SUBMITTALS I. Submit data sheets and schedule of items for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Fire extinguishers and cabinets shall be as. manufactured by J.L. Industries, 4450 Ravenhorst Circle, Bloomington, Minnesota 55435, or equivalent. • 2. Fire extinguisher; Cosmic Model 5E, dry chemical type, 5 pound size, 2A -106;C rating, UL and FM approved fire extinguisher. Provide with wall bracket when noted to be wall mounted. 3. Extinguisher Cabinet: Ambassador Model #1815 recessed, white epoxy coated box, face trim and door with S21 solid door, continuous hinge, satin finish pull handle, roller catch. Interior Dimensions: 24 by 1-1/2 by 4-1/2 inches deep. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION 1. Install fire extinguishers where shown, charged, tagged and ready for operation. Securely fasten wall brackets to building construc- tion. Build in and securely anchor recessed cabinets. END OF SECTION IOC 0 • SIGNAGE Section 100 Page 1 SECTION IOD - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Outdoor raised -letter signs. 2. Outdoor plaques. 3. Interior plaques for rooms and stacks. 1-02. SUBMITTALS 1. Schedule of plaques shall be submitted for approval of Owner and Architect. 2. Shop drawings showing spacing, leading and point sizes of all signage shall be submitted for approval of Owner and Architect. 2-01. MATERIALS . 1. Exterior raised lettering to be cast bronze characters model #205 (Prismatic Roman) with #50 satin bronze finish as manufactured by "Metal Arts", 410 6th Street, Mandan, N.D. 58554, 701-663- 65351 or approved equivalent. Manufacturer to furnish scaled shop draw- ings for Architect's approval. Full size drilling template for stud locations to be furnished with letters when shipped to con- tractor for his use when installing. A. Entry Portal sign - 3" letters: San Juan Capistrano Public Library B. Address at southeast corner of building - 611characters: 31495 2. Exterior plaques shall be sub -surface printed plaques on 1/8" thick matte finish plastic with 1/8" thick extruded bronze - anodized aluminum frame. Frame is to be 1/2" wide with 1/4" border on front face. Sides of frame to be continuous with bottom and top, with a 1/8" wide side slot. Both frame and plaque to be manufactured by "The Supersine Co.," etc. (see 2-01-3) Type A. 11-3/4" x 4-3/4" plaque, 12" x 5" frame: • Book Drop SIGNAGE Section 10D Page 2 Type B. 9-3/4" x 9-3/4" plaque, 10" x 10" frame - 2 total: Library Hours 10-9 Mon - Thurs 10-5 Fri - Sat 3. Interior plaques and mounting frames. A. Plaques shall be sub -surface printed plaques on 1/8" thick matter -finish plastic. Mounting frames to be fabricated from 1/8" thick thermal extruded plastic, 1/2" wide with 1/4" border on front face. Sides to be continuous with top and bottom and shall have 1/8" wide slot on sides except where noted. Both frame and plaque to be manufactured by "The Supersine Co.", 6000 E. Davison Avenue, Detroit, Michigan 48212, 313-892-6200, or approved equivalent. Design and color to be specified by Architect, Type. 1. 2" changeable letter chips 20 alphabets 20 number sets 20 blank chips 20 dashes 60 frames - 2}" x 9}" 120 frames - 24" x 3" Type 2. 2-3/4" x 11-3/4" plaque, 12" x 3" frame: Qty. Lettering 1 - Microfiche Reader 2 - Business Reference 3 - Microfilm Reader 10 - Reference 2 - Libros de consulta 1 - Revistas en Espanol 2 - Libros an espanol 2 - Biographies 4 - Pamphlets 2 - New Books 2 - Braille Talking Books 2 - Mysteries 2 - Large Print Books 2 - Westerns 1 - Phone Books 4 - Adult Fiction 6 - Adult Non -Fiction Qty. Lettering 2 - Fiction 6 - Non -Fiction 1 - Reference 1 - Magazines 1 - Paperbacks 1 - Pamphlets 2 - Biographies I - New Books 1 - Childrens Records 4 - Picture Boods 2 - Primary Non -Fiction 1 - Readers 1 - Holiday Books 1 - Scout Materials Libros Juveniles in Espanol • SIGNAGE Section 10D Page 3 Type 3. 3-3/4" x 17-3/4" plaque, 4" x 18" frame for each plaque: Qty. Lettering 2 COM Catalog Room 1 COM Catalogs 1 Children's Room 3 Reference 1 Adult Fiction 1 Adult Non -Fiction 1 Sala de libros en espanol Magazine Lounge Friends of the Library Room 1 Copy Machine Room 1 Children's Primary Room 1 Children's Fiction Room . 4 Information 1 Check Out Type 4, 1-3/4" x 7-3/4" plaque, 2" x 8" frame for each plaque: • Qty. Lettering 2 Magazines on Mocrofilm are Available at the Check Out Counter 8 Headphones are available at the Information Desk 4 Headphones are available at the Children's Librarians Desk 3 Ask your librarian at the Information or Children's Desk Type 5. 11-3/4" x 2-3/4" plaque, 12" x 3" frame for each plaque: Qty. Lettering 3 Staff Only 1 Men's Restroom 1 Women's Restroom 1 Conference Room 1 Janitor 1 Emily Lyons - Librarian 1 Friends of the Library Type 6. 3/4" x 5-3/4" plaque, 1" x 6" frame with 1/8" border on front face 280 plaques and frames. • SIGNAGE Section 100 Page a Type 7. 1-3/4" x 7-3/4" plaque, 2" x 8" frame of 1/8" bronze anodized aluminum with additional horizontal strip at base for use as freestanding desk -top sign. Qty. Lettering 12 Each Staff Members Name 2 Check Out 2 Book Return 2 Library Cards PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION 1. All raised letters and numbers, frames and plaques should be level and in alignment with one another at heights and spacing as directed by Architect. A. Flush mount exterior raised letters in strict conformance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Exterior plaques shall be flush mounted with stainless steel - toggle -bolt and spacer for depth of stucco. Bolts will be counter sunk and covered with bronze anodized aluminum rosette. Both frame and plaque are to be perforated by manufacturer where bolt attachments are required. Block as required for secure attachment. C. Interior mounting frames are to be attached through gypsum board to provided blocking, using stainless steel counter- sunk flat -head screws. Frames will have fabricated perforations where screw attachments are required. D. Interior mounting frames are to be attached to metal shelves with "3M" foam tape or equivalent. END OF SECTION 10D • METAL LOCKERS Section 10E Page 1 i 0 SECTION IOE - METAL LOCKERS PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Triple tier lockers. 2. Key locks. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Wood, masonry and/or concrete bases - Section 3A, 4A or 6A. 2. Wood nailers - Section 6A. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit color samples for selection. 2. Submit shop drawings for approval. 3. Submit numbering plane for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Lockers shall be Mondrian Lockers as manufactured by Republic Steel Industrial Products Division, Los Angeles, California 90022, (213) 685-7770, or equivalent. 2. Lockers shall be of unit construction, like parts interchangeable. Locker body parts shall be made from 24 gage minimum mold cold roller sheet steel free from surface imperfections. Doors shall be of. 16 gage minimum box annealed cold rolled patent leveled steel. 3. Lockers shall be triple tier type, with flat top, verti-vent system in doors, baked enamel finish, key lock, lift type latch, rubber silencers, coat hooks on each side and back. Locker shall be 9 inches wide by 16 inches deep unless shown otherwise. 4. Hinges shall be at least 2 inches wide of full loop type, tight pin style, securely welded to frame and riveted to door. Doors shall have 2 hinges per locker. METAL LOCKERS Section 10E Page 2 5. Lockers shall have lift type latch with rubber silencers. Provide built-in flat key locks with 2 keys per lock. 6. Front fillers shall be 16 gage minimum. Wherever possible use matching fillers for recessed installation. 2-02. FINISHING Clean parts thoroughly before painting. Apply 5 bonding and rust resisting phosphate undercoats followed by a finish coat of enamel baked on. Body parts shall be finished In a standard neutral color. Exposed parts shall be colors as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard, but selection must have at least 12 colors to choose from. a. Nuts, bolts, hooks, etc., shall be plated with zinc, chrome or cadmium as standard with manufacturer. 2-03. LOCKER NUMBERS Each locker shall have a number plate, numbers as directed by Owner or as shown on Drawings. 2-04. LOCKER ENDS Furnish and install end panels on all lockers. End panels shall be fabricated of 16 gage sheet steel as specified for locker doors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION Install as shown on approved shop drawings and in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Erect lockers plumb, level and true to line, securely fastened to building construction. 2. Lockers shall be securely anchored to base and walls with fasteners appropriate for the adjacent construction. The lockers shall be fastened at every other locker with fastenings as near as possible to the dividing partition of the lockers. END OF SECTION IOE . DISPLAY CASES Section IOF Page 1 SECTION IOF - DISPLAY CASES PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Recessed wall mounted display cases with glass shelves, brackets, trim and hinged doors. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Drywall work, Section 9B. 2. Wood framing and blocking, Section 6A. 1-03, SUBMITTALS I. Submit color samples and shop drawings for approval . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Display cases shall bemadeup of modified "JX" Series as manufactured by Greensteel, Inc., Anaheim, California (714) 630-2620, or approved equivalent. a. Wall recessed units: Sized as shown on Drawings by 9 inches deep. b. Colored finish on aluminum components, baked enamel, 20 year guaranteed finish, color to be selected. - c. Hinged doors per• unit with continuous hinges, flat key tumbler locks, elbow catches, and glazed with 1/4 inch thick clear plate glass. d. Two adjustable glass shelves per unit, 1/4 inch thick clear plate glass. 0 DISPLAY CASES Section 10F Page 2 e. Four shelf standards per unit with brackets and rubber cushioned glass rests, K & V No. 80 and 180, finish to match door frames. f. Top, bottoms and backs: Plywood, 3/4 inch thick, primed for paint finish. g. Exposed Metal: Extruded aluminum 6063-T5 alloy, #892-T and #893-T trim and #891-T door frames. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION I. Install as shown on approved shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Erect plumb, level and securely fastened to the wall construction as shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION • ANNOUNCEMENT BOARDS _Section 10G Page SECTION IOG - ANNOUNCEMENT BOARDS PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Wall mounted directory boards. 2. Directory letters. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Gypsum wallboard substrate, Section 9B. 2. Display cases, Section IOF. 3. Wood blocking, Section 6A. 1-03. SUBMITTALS • I. Submit color samples and shop drawings for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Announcement boards shall be made up of "Naco NH Series" Glass Enclosed Directory Boards, surface mounted, as manufactured by Nelson -Adams Company, Burlingame, California 94010, (415) 589-3787 or Walnut, California 91789, (714) 598-2779, or approved equivalent. a. Wall mounted units: Sized as shown on Drawings by 2 inches deep. b. Hinged door frame, 1/8 inch extruded aluminum and glass frame shall be-Naco #GF -I complete with rubber gaskets between glass and frame. c. All aluminum components shall receive a 20 year guaranteed baked on enamel finish, color as selected. 0 ANNOUNCEMENT BOARDS Section 10G Page 2 d. Hinged doors with continuous piano hinge, flat key tumbler locks, catches, and glazed with 1/4 inch thick clear plate glass. e. Fixed panel for Directories shall be 1/2 inch plywood grooved every 1/4 inch, covered with wool felt-, color as selected. f. Directory Letters: Upper and lower case Roman type face plastic letters, with wings top and bottom for insertion, color and size as selected with 3/8 inch minimum size for lower case and 3/4 inch minimum size for upper case. Provide miscellaneous items such as periods, commas, dollar and cent marks, percent signs, diagonals, question marks, hyphens, arrows and stars. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION Install as shown on approved shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Erect plumb, level, and securely fastened to the wall construction as shown on Drawings. END OF SECTION n LJ BOOK DEPOSITORY . Section 10H Page 1 SECTION IOH - BOOK DEPOSITORY PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Fully assembled complete book depository unit for in -wall installa- tion. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Substrate wall and framing, Sections 6A and 96. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit color samples and shop drawings for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Depository shall be Model No. 615 SD as manufactured by the Mosler "Depository" Corp., Grandview, Mo. 64030 (816) 761-8911, or approved equivalent. a. Housing and chute extension shall be heavy gauge paint grip steel, electric arc welded at the seams and ground smooth, thoroughly cleaned and painted a base coat of zinc chromate primer. b. Front facing frame and door and all exposed component parts thereof shall be aluminum with 20 year guaranteed baked on enamel finish, color as selected. Provide standard face wording engraved in front frame and black filled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION I. Unit shall be on hand before construction begins at point of installation. 2. Install as shown on approved shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Erect plumb, level, and securely • fastened to the wall construction, END OF SECTION • METAL FIREPLACE Section 101 Page 1 SECTION 101 - METAL FIREPLACE DART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Factory built fireplace system. 2. I.C.B.O. Rating. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Framing and substrates, Divisons 3, 6 and 9. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit color samples and shop drawings for approval. 2. I.C.B.O. rating for approval by City Fire Marshall. • 3. Twenty-five year limited warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS I. Fireplace system shall be Model No. 738, front open, zero clearance radiant heat type with all refractory interior, TFIO chimney components and cumbustion air kit, as manufactured by Superior Fireplace Company, Fullerton, California 92633, or approved equivalent. 2. Components and accessories shall include the following (U.L. Listed)[ a. Double walled chimney sections. b. Firestop spacers. c. Offset and return elbows. d. Stabilizer and locking band. e. Flashing with storm collar for appropriate roof slope. • MIETAL FIREPLACE -Section 101 Page 2 _ f. Contemporary termination device with built in spark arrester. g. Combustion air kit. h. Hearth extensions Model No. HE 36. i.. Wall shields WS 40. j. Fireplace grates Model MFG 36. k. Refractory patch and tint kits. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION I. Unit system shall be on hand before construction begins at point of installation. 2. Install as shown on approved shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Erect plumb, leve;, an securely fastened to the wall construction as shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 0 FLAGPOLE Section IOJ Page I SECTiON'"?J - FLAGPOLE PART I - GENZRAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Foundation and appurtenances. 2. Flatpole and accessories. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Concrete work, Division 3. 1-04. SUBMITTALS I. Submit color samples for selection. • 2. Submit shop drawings for review. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. FLAGPOLE MATERIALS 1. Flagpole shall be ground set, standard cone tapered aluminum flagpole as manufactured by AABEC Flagpoles Company, Division of Morgan - Francis Co., Inc., Stratford, Conn. 06497, (203) 378-2664, or approved equivalent. 2. Pole characteristics shall be as follows:. Exposed Height 25 feet Setting Depth 3 feet Overall Length 28 feet Straight Butt Portion 17 feet FLAGPOLE Section lOJ Page 2 Aluminum - Alloy 6063-T6, 20 year baked on Kynar paint finish. Length of Tapered Top Portion - II feet. Taper - Approximately I inch in 5.5 feet. Wall thickness - .188 inches. Outside butt diameter - 5 inches. Outside top diameter - 3.25 inches. Ball diameter - 5 inches, 20 ounce copper, seamless, gold leafed. Truck - double halyard type, aluminum body, ball bearing, revolving, non -fouling, match pole finish. Halyards - two (2) 5/16 inch #10 white braded polypropylene ropes, with thermosetting plastic flagclasps. Cleats - two (2) 9 inch, cast aluminum. Cleat Covers - aluminum with staple and padlock. Ornamental Bases - Model No. MF -3349, I foot 10 inches high 22 inch outside diameter. 2-02. FINISHES Exposed aluminum surfaces shall have a 20 year guaranteed paint finish, color to be selected. Exposed hardware and accessories - shall be finished to match. 2-03. FABRICATION Fabricate poles with no visible joints. Deliver poles in one piece. 2-04. FOUNDATION MATERIALS Concrete materials shall conform with requirements specified in Division 3 - Concrete, for similar material. 2. Concrete shall be air entrained, 4 to 6 percent air entrainment, compressive strength of 3000 psi. 3. Combination curing anti-spalling compound shall be Durok Shield as manufactured by Durok Building Materials, Inc., or approved equal. 4. Metal components shall be as follows: a. Setting sleeve diameter - 10 inch, 16 gage galvanized corrugated steel pipe. b. Base plate - 16 by 16 by 3/8 inches. c. Support plate - 8 by 8 by 3/8 inches. d. Lightning ground spike - .75 inch diameter steel rod, minimum 6 inch bury. . FLAGPOLE Section 10.1 Page 3 2-05. FOUNDATION DESIGN Concrete foundations for poles shall be as detailed for paving and shall be founded on firm, undisturbed ground or compacted fill. Unless otherwise shown, top shall be 3 feet in diameter and the bottom at least 2 feet in diameter. 2. Concrete foundations and appurtenances if not detailed on the Drawings shall be in accordance with standard details and specifi— cations of flagpole manufacturer. 3. Setting depth of poles shall be at least 10 percent of the exposed height, but not less than 3 feet. Provide for setting sleeves, steel base plates with welded centering wedges and lightning ground spikes. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION . I. Install foundations as shown on approved shop drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. Coordinate with other concrete work in the immediate area. 2. After concrete foundations have set, erect poles in sleeves, plumb poles using hardwood wedges, pack space between poles and sleeves with dry sand, fill top 2 inches with waterproof compound and set collars in place. 3. Install accessories, secure in place using manufacturer's standard compatible fasteners. END OF SECTION • FABRIC COVERED TACKBOARD Section 10K Page 1 SECTION IOK - FABRIC COVERED TACKBOARD PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Tackable wall panels. 2. Fabric covering. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Gypsum wallboard substrates, Section 98, 2. Wood trim, Section 66. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit color samples for selection. 0 2. Submit certification of flammability rating. 1-04. INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS I. Inspect the work for any serious defects or conditions which -would interfere or prevent a satisfactory application of materials under this Section. Do not proceed with the work until corrections have been made. Application shall be deemed acceptance of the conditions. 1-05. WORKMANSHIP I. Wall panels shall be handled and applied in strict accordance with proper printed instructions. The work shall be neatly and closely fitted and trimmed throughout. Coordinate with adjoining work of other trades. 1-07. FLAMMABILITY RATING I. Both panel substrate and covering material when tested under ASTM EB4 shall have a fire hazard rating of Class A. • FABRIC COVERED TACKBOARD Section 70K Page 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. FABRIC COVERED PANELS I. The panels shall be sized as shown or scheduled and shall be prefabricated panels made up of a fabric covering adhesively applied to a tackable substrate as specified herein. 2. The substrate shall be "N.C.F.R. Homasote" building board as manufactured by Homasote Company, 'Nest Trenton, New Jersey, 08628 or approved equivalent. The substrate panel shall be homogeneous composition of wood fibre material completely impregnated with fire retardant chemical ingredients, treated for resistance to moisture and against termites, rot and fungus, and compressed in a dense structural panel 15/32 inch thick. Boards shall have the following characteristics as a minimum: a. Density, Ib./ft.3 38 b. Tensile Strength, p.s.i. 600 c. Mod. of Rupture, p.s.i. (in bending) 1,100 d. Apparent mod. of elasticity, p.s.i. 90,000 e. Water Absorption, by vol. 3 percent (2 hours Immers.) f. Conditioned Moisture Content by wt. 6 percent g. Expansion, at 50-90 percent rel, hum. 0.30 percent h. Lat. Nail Resist., lbs. 200 1. Nail Withdrawal (nail #2175), lbs. 75 j. Hardness (Janke Ball), lbs. 390 k. Screw Holding, lbs. 160 I. Shear in Plane of Board, p.s.i. 225 m, k factory 0.54 n. R value 0.85 o. Flame Spread 25 p. Fueld Contribution 0 q. Smoke Developed 20 3. The fabric covering shall be Gaspe/1400 as manufactured by Sunar or approved equivalent. Colors as selected by the Architect, 4, Adhesive shall be a waterproof glue as approved by the fabric manufacturer. . FABRIC COVERED TACKBOARD Section 10K Page 3 5. Bond fabric covering firmly to panel surfaces, wrap long edges and return on back at least 2 inches. Fabric shall be free of sags and wr i'nk I es . PART'3 'EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION Install wall panels where scheduled, and 1'n accordance with the manufacturer"s recommendations with the glue and screw system or glue only system. 2. Subsurfaces must be clean, dry, smooth and structurally sound. 3. After the first two panels have been installed, notify the Architect to inspect. If satisfactory proceed with work, if hot satisfactory, correct to Architects satisfaction. 4. Finished work shall be free of loose fabric, misfits and other visible defects. • 3-02. CLEANING I. Remove escessive adhesive, dirt and other foreign material from exposed surfaces of the panels. Use a mild soap or detergent dissolved In warm water. Rinse with clean water after washing. For stubborn surface stains use isopropyl alcohol or a mild solution of household bleach. END OF SECTION • END OF VOLUME II . APPLIANCES Section IIA Page I 0 0 SECTION IIA - APPLIANCES PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Refrigerator. 2. Cooktop. 3. Microwave. 4. Range hood. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Roughing in and final connections - Divisions 15 and 16. 1-03. SUBMITTALS I. Submit roughing in drawings and shop drawings for approval. 2. Submit manufacturer's 5 -year written replacement guarantee on refri- geration systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MANUFACTURER I. Appliances herein specified shall be as manufactured by Whirlpool Home Appliances, Los Angeles Sales Division, 917 East Katella Avenue, Anaheim, California 92805 (714) 634-9696, or equivalent. Colors as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standards. 2-02. REFRIGERATOR I. Model #EHT 161 JM, 15.6 cubic feet, no frost with 4.46 cubic foot freezer, 29-3/4 inches wide, 28-7/8 inches deep and 65-1/2 inches high, factory installed automatic ice maker, porcelain -on -steel interior liner, full width shelves (17.6 square foot area), separate controls for freezer and refrigerator, twin crispers, power saving heater control switch, door stops, doors with magnetic gaskets. APPLIANCES Section 1 1 A Page 2 2-03. COOK TOP I. Model #RC8400XK conventional "Imperial" with two 6 inch and two 8 inch plug-in surface units, corduroy pattern control panel, push to turn controls, 21 by 30 inches deep, two surface unit indicator lights, one piece chrome trim rings and reflector bowls, spill guard top, total connected load of 5.0 KW at 208 volts or 6.7 KW at 240 volts. 2-04. MICROWAVE I. Model #RJM 7100 microwave oven, automatic timer control for up to 30 minutes of continuous cooking or defrosting time, separate defrost setting, defrost guide, automatic oven light, balanced wave cooking system, wall mounting kit adaptable to installation over micro -shelf hood, sealed in ceramic shelf, black glass see through door, micro menus cookbook, variable output to 650 watts at 2450 MHz (based on I liter water load). 2-05. RANGE HOOD I. Model #RJH 3330 vented micro shelf hood, 30 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches high by 18 inches deep, duct with transition to 3-1/4 inch by 10 inch outlet, 120 v, I phase, 60 Hx, 20 amp service, vertical CFM : 210, 7.0 sones, adaptable for installation below microwave oven, filter, blower, covered light twin (full/night). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION Install as shown on approved shop drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Erect all appliances plumb, .level and securely fastened in place, tested and operating in proper order. END OF SECTION IIA • PROJECTION SCREEN Section 11B Page 1 SECTION IIB PROJECTION SCREEN BID ALTERNATE # 14 PART I - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN I. Motorized screen at Auditorium. 2. Wall type hangers. 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE I. Power and control wir.ing - Division 17. 2. Finished painting - Section 9E. 1-03, SUBMITTALS I. Submit product data, wiring diagrams, suspension and installation shop drawings. • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2-01. MATERIALS 1. Projection screen shall be Executive Electrol as manufactured by Da -Lite Screen Company, Inc., Warsaw, Indiana 46580, Ambassador by Draper Screen Company, or equivalent. 2. Screen shall be 9 by 9 feet size, mat white screen surface with 2 inch black borders. Screen surface shall be flame retardant and mildew resistant. 3. Motor Operator: 60 cycle, 110-120 volt A.C., 3 wire, instantly reversible, designed specifically for the purpose, with lifetime lubrication. To be equipped with internal thermal overload protector and fitted with mechanical brake to eliminate coasting. Motor to be mounted on rubber vibration insulators to minimize noise transmission. To have pre-set but easily accessible limits switches to autmmatically stop screen in "up" or "down" positions. Entire drive unit must be easily removable from case. 0 PROJECTION SCREEN Section 116 Page 2 4. Controls: Three position control switch for each unit shall stop or reverse screen at any point in its operating cycle. Multiple switch controls to operate without relays. Controls to be furnished complete with aluminum box and stainless steel cover plate. 5. Roller to be of rigid metal of diameters recommended by manufacturer for spans specified, 5 inch minimum. 6. Case shall be wood, with double top for extra rigidity and sound deadening, factory primed. A section of the bottom of the case shall be equipped with piano type hinges, 4 connected to the drive mechanism so that it opens and closes automatically with the lowering and raising of the screen. Balance of bottom panel shall be pegged for manual opening to provide access. Hinges mounted for offset mounting, recessed above ceiling for drywall. 7. Steel mounting brackets shall be at least 1/4 inch thick and wrap under bottom edge of case to hold screen securely, factory primed. 8. Entire unit shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear the U.L. label. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3-01. INSTALLATION Install as shown on approved shop drawings and in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate with adjacent materials. Prior to acceptance, operation shall be checked for proper function and any required adjustments made. 3-02. PROTECTION Protect finished surfaces until acceptance. 2. Perform all necessary repairs to damaged work in manner acceptable to Architect. Correct damaged finished work by replacement except as otherwise approved by the Architect. END OF SECTION IIB • MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS _Section 15A Page 1 SECTION 15A - MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS 15A-01. GENERAL I. The applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, Instructions at the beginning of these Specifications, Section 156 - Plumbing and Drainage and Section 15C - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning are hereby made an integral part of this Section. 15A-02. CONTRACT DRAWINGS I. The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the qeneral arrangement of the various systems and the approximate and relative locations if the materials and equipment included by these Specifications. Each Trade shall coordinate with and have the approval of the Architect for the exact location of materials and equip- ment. Each Trade shall check the Drawings and work required of all trades to verify space conditions and head -room requirements. Where space conditions or head -room requirements appear inadequate, the Architect shall be notified. No consideration or allowance will be granted for failure to notify the Architect, or for any al ledged misunderstanding of the aforementioned requirements. Installation, connection, and interconnection of all components of these system shall be complete and made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract, the manufacturers instruction and best practices of the trade. 15A-03. EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS Each Trade before submitting his proposal, shall examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to his work, and the work of all other trades, and shall become fully informed as - to the extent and character of the work required, and its relation to the work of other trades. No consideration shall be granted for an alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished or work to be done. 15A-04. VISIT TO SITE Before commencing work, each Trade shall visit the site, verify all measurements, and field conditions affecting his work. He shall be responsible for the correctness of all measurements and for any MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 2 connections to existing work. Submission of the proposal shall be considered evidence that each Trade has visited and examined the site. No extra payment shall be allowed to this Trade Trade for extra work caused by his failure to visit the site and to verify all conditions and measurements. 15A-05. VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENTS I. Each Trade shall be solely responsible for the verification of field measurements before ordering any materials or equipment, and before commencing any work. 2. Each Trade under his Section of the Specifications shall be responsible for coordinating the locations and sizes of sleeves, inserts, openings and chases with the Contractor. 3. No extra claims, charges, or compensation will be allowed due to any differences between the actual dimensions. and any dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 4. Any discrepancies which may be found shall be reported at once to the Architect for consideration and each Trade shall wait for a decision before proceeding with any work in the affected area. 5. The Architect's decision in such matters shall be final and binding _ upon each Trade land this Trade shall make his instal- lation accordingly. 15A-06. REGULAT[ONS AND CODES Each Trade shall perform his work in accordance with the respective applicable requirements of the American Society of Heating,UMC 1979 Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Underwriters' Labora- tories, National Fire Protection Association, National Electrical Code, Utility Companies, OSHA and local or state authorities having jurisdiction for this work, 15A-07. PERMITS, CERTIFICATES AND FEES Each Trade shall pay all fees for procuring the permits and certificates required. 2. Each Trade shall prepare all of the information and data for submittal to any authority as required for obtaining certificates of compliance for the permits. MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 3 15A-08. CODE CONSTRUCTION Pressure vessels and safety devices shall be inspected, stamped, certified, constructed in accordance with ASME test code and subject to inspection and tests by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Materials and equipment shall bear stamps and seals of the UL, ASME, AMCA, NEMA, IEEE and other industry regulating groups as hereinafter specified or required by code. 15A-09. TEMPORARY SERVICES 1. Temporary water, sanitary, and electric facilities are the responsibility of the respective Trades as detailed in the General Conditions and Special Conditions. Refer to same for specific requirements. 15A-10. SHOP DRAWINGS I. Each Trade shall submit shop drawings of equipment and materials materials for approval by the Architect. 2. The shop drawings are to be submitted promptly without causing any delays in the construction progress schedule. Shop drawings shall be stamped with each Trade and Contractor's approval, as evidence that it was checked for accuracy, and that all the dimensions and data were verified prior to submitting them. Approval of the submittals by the Architect shall not relieve the Trade from the responsibility for any errors contained within them or for compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications, unless specified mention is made of the variations therefrom and approval obtained for same. 3. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all equipment and materials Including but not limited to ductwork, automatic temperature controls, A/C units, exhaust fans, insulation, hangers, supports, sleeves, inserts, piping, fittings, unions, flanges, gaskets, valves, plumbing fixtures, drains, cleanouts and other items required by the Architect. L MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIRE`IENTS Section 15A Page 4 4. All mechanical equipment items requiring service utility connections shall have their respective shop drawings accompanied by manu- facturer's anu- facturers certified roughing in drawings indicating accurate locations and sizes of all service utility connections. 15A-11. COORDINATED EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS Each Trade shall furnish to the Architect dimensioned, coordinated drawings at a minimum scale of 3/8 inch equals I foot. Drawings shall include equipment foundations and all equipment, piping, conduit, ductwork, panels, control centers, etc. Drawings shall originate with the HVAC Trade who shall send sepia prints of the Drawings to the Plumbing Trade who shall show his work and then shall forward the sepias to the Electrical Trade. After showing his work, the Electrical Trade shall forward drawings back to the HVAC Trade for final check and review for clearances and layout before submission to the Architect. 15A-12. SAMPLES Each shall submit, for approval, samples of materials deemed necessary by the Architect. Samples shall be supplemented by essential catalogue data specifically applying to the samples submitted for approval, where such data would be necessary to properly evaluate the quality of the sample . Samples shall be specifically identified as to the service and location where they are to be used in the Project. 15A-13. INSTALLATION The equipment and materials under this Division of the Specifications shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the respective manufacturer. 2. Each shall cooperate and coordinate his work with the other trades. The locations of pipes, ducts, conduits, panelboards, lighting outlets, air outlets and other equipment must be coordinated in order to avoid any interferences of placing services at the wrong location. Each location of outlets, pipes, and other materials and equipment must be coordinated with and approved by the Architect. i MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 5 3. The work under this Section of the Specifications must be performed in an approved first class, workmanlike manner, and conform to the best practices of the trade. 4. Each Trade shall at all times protect and preserve all materials, equipment, fixtures and piping from corosion, dirt, paint, buildinq materials, acid, tools, overload and freezing. Each Trade shall repair or replace all equipment and materials which are damaged as the result of inadequate protection. Open ends of piping, equipment and ductwork must be capped or plugged during the construction schedule. 5. All materials and equipment shall be properly isolated against the transmission of vibration or noise to any part of the building. 6. Each Trade shall be responsible for the admission of materials and equipment in accordance with the construction progress schedule. 7. All materials and equipment installed by each Trade shall be new, the best in grade and quality, and manufactured in the United States of America with standards and ratings as specified herein. No substitution or deviation from the materials and equipment specified herein will be allowed except by written permission from the Architect. 8. No piping, valves, joints or fittings shall be erected over any motors, panelboards or other electrical equipment wherever possible. Any piping, valves, joints or fittings erected over any electrical equipment must have drain pans of 18 gage galvanized sheet metal with 2 inch high sides erected below the piping and piped to the nearest approximate floor -drain as directed by the Architect. 9. Air handling equipment must not operate during the construction period unless filters are in place. When the construction is completed, new filters must be installed prior to the final testing and balancing of the systems. 10. Sleeves and as built drawings shall be prepared by each Trade as hereinafter specified. MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 6 15A-14. COORDINATION WITH EXISTING UTILITIES Each Contractor must coordinate with the authorized representative of the Owner for scheduling of the work. Any interruptions or shut- downs of existing services must be held to a minimum. Shut downs shall be at the convenience of the Owner. 2. Caution shall be exercised in avoiding interference or of damage to all existing underground utilities not in this Contract during the installation of new work. 15A-15. CHASES, RECESSES AND OPENINGS The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all chases, recesses and openings (except as hereinafter specified) when each Contractor under this Division complies with the following: a. Each Trade under any Division requiring any opening, chase or recess in the construction for his work shall furnish the Contractor with the exact location, size and other necessary information in ample time to have them incorporated into the new structure during construction as approved by the Architect. b. If any Trade under this Division fails to comply with the above information requirements, then he shall do the necessary cutting and patching at his own expense, subject to the direc- tion and approval of the Architect. 15A-16. SLEEVES I. Sleeves shall be installed in all construction. Sleeves shall be the same weight and material as the passing piping. The pipe sleeves shall be two pipe sizes larger than the passing pipe, if uninsulated, or large enough to pass the insulated pipe without binding. Sleeves for ducts shall be constructed of galvanized sheetmetal, not less than 22 gage. 2. Sleeves shall be the proper design for waterproofing and flashing around the sleeves where required. The space between the piping and sleeve shall be calked with an approved waterproof compound. • MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 7 3. Each Trade shall furnishthe sleeves and set them in the new construction as required for the installation of his work. 4. Sleeve drawings shall be prepared by each Trade and submitted to the Architect for approval prior to the setting of sleeves. 5. Sleeves shall extend 2 inches above the floor in concealed areas, unfinished rooms and mechanical spaces. 15A-17. ANCHOR BOLTS Anchor bolts of the hook type and of proper size and length, as required for the various equipment specified hereinafter, shall be furnished by each Trade under his Section of the Specifi- cations. 2. Each Trade shall be responsible for the location and sizes of the anchor bolts before the concrete is poured. 15A-18. CONCRETE PADS I. Concrete pads for all equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. Concrete pads shall be complete with anchor bolts located from templates furnished by the equipment manufacturer and shall conform to Section "Reinforced Concrete". 15A-19. FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING Base flashing shall be as specified, and furnished and set in place by each Trade. The Contractor will be responsible for integrating flashings and into waterproofing membrane. 2. Flashing assemblies at plumbing vents shall be provided by the and installed by the Contractor under the roofing section. Vent flashing shall be 6 poung lead to extend 12 inches on roof. 0 MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 8 15A-20. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS I. A11 materials and equipment shall be adequately supported by approved methods acceptable to the Architect. All support components shall conform to Manufacturer's Standardization Society Specifications SP -58 and SP -69 and Federal Specifications WW -H-171 b. 2. Submit details of structural supports for materials and equipment to the Architect for approval before starting fabrication. 3. Hangers shall adequately support the piping systems and shall be located near or at changes in piping direction and concentrated loads. Hangers are to have vertical adjustments for maintaining proper pitch of piping. Bell and spigot piping shall be supported at each bell. 4. Provisions shall be made for the expansion and contraction of piping. Piping shall be anchored where required. 5. Other approved methods of supports from the wall, floor or ceiling may be submitted to the Architect for approval. 6. Chain, wire or perforated metal straps will not be acceptable. Threaded rods. shall be used with the proper pipe attachments. 7. Structural attachments shall be as approved by the Architect. 8. Pipe attachments shall be as follows: a. For steel pipe, use Grinnell Fig. 260 clevis type hanger. b. For copper pipe, use Grinnel Fig. CT -65 clevis type hanger. c. Pipe hangers and supports are to be manufactured by Grinnell, or approved equivalent. d. Hangers shall be galvanized or enamel paint finish. i1ECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 9 • E 15A-21 Horizontal piping shall be supported as follows: Type Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing Steel Up to 1-1/4 inch 1-1/2.to 2 inch 2-1/2 and 3-1/2 inch 4 and 5 inch 6 inch Copper Up to I inch I-1/4 to 1-1/2 inch 2 Inch 2-1/2 Inch 3 and 4 inch ACCESS DOORS 3/8 inch 3/8 inch 1/2 inch 5/8 inch 3/4 inch 3/8 inch 3/8 inch 3/8 inch 1/2 inch 1/2 inch 8 feet 10 feet 12 feet 15 feet 17 feet 6 feet 8 fe4t 9 feet 9 feet 10 feet I. Access doors, not less than 14 by 14 inches and of the type approved by the Architect, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor where required for access to concealed valves, control devices and appurtenances. Access door in ceiling shall be fire rated unless otherwise noted. 15A-22. ESCUTCHEON PLATES I. Escutcheon plates shall be installed by each Trade in finished areas where his piping is exposed. All plates shall be solid pattern. 2. Where pipes pass through toilet rooms, chromium plated escutcheon plates shall be used, securely locked and completely enclosing the ends of the sleeves. 3. In other areas, escutcheon plates shall be heavy malleable iron type, enamel painted. 15A-23. VALVE TAGS AND IDENTIFICATION I. All piping systems shall be identified by each Trade with the name of the service and with an arrow indicating the dirscrion of flow. Pipe identification shall be MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 10 accomplished by banding with polyvinyl chloride bands, as manu- factured by Zeston, Inc., installed at frequent intervals, all changes in direction, at valves, or there pipes pass through walls or floors. 2. Sizes of letters and bands shall be in accordance with the Mechani- cal Contractor Association of American Engineering Standards, Part V, latest edition. Colors for the various system shall be as selected by the Architect. 3. All valves shall be identified with valve tags. Valve tags shall be not less than 2 inches in diameter, with embossed or stamped numbers, and constructed of brass or phenolic, and secured with a brass chain or S -hook. 4. Each Trade under this Division shall prepare a complete set of inked or typewritten control and valve diagrams and charts and lists identifying and location all such respective items and shall attach corresponding numbered tags to each item. Each Trade shall attach corresponding numbered tags to each item, and shall submit the charts and diagrams and lists to the Owner. 15A-24. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING Each Trade under h.is Section of the Specifications. shall be responsible for the excavation, backfilling, shoring and care for all ground water for the complete installation of his work. Excavation and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of Division 2. 2. Each Trade shall also provide suitable indemnity for all accidents to humans, animals or equipment caused by his excavation work. He shall provide suitable guards or barricades, red Lanterns, flares and other precautions for an approved and safe installation. 3. The pipe trenches shall follow the grades as indicated on the Drawings or specified hereinafter. Trenches shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of the pipes or conduits and the banks shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. The bottom of the trenches shall be excavated 6 inches below the dimensions and depths indicated to provide for fine gravel bedding beneath the pipes. Whenever wet or otherwise unstabls soil that is incapable r� u MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 11 of properly supporting the pipe, as directed by the Architect, is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such soil shall be removed to the depth required. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid over— loading and to prevent slides or cave—ins. 4. All materials resulting from excavations and classified as earth and approved as suitable by the Owner shall be stockpiled for use as backfill, filling and such rough grading as required on the Project site. 5. All excavated materials not approved for backfill and fill all surplus material, boulders, roots and stumps shall be removed to the Owner's disposal area as described in Division 2. Excavated materials shall not be used as backfill in trenches beneath paved areas; provide acceptable borrow. 6. The Drawings indicate, in general, the alignment, finished grade elevations and invert grades and alignment as are found necessary in order to avoid interference and to adapt the piping to other special conditions encountered. 7. Fine gravel bedding shall be provided to not less than 6 inches in compacted depth below all pipelines and for the full width of the trenches. 8. Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as the construction and testing of the work will permit. 9. Backfilling of all trenches shall be accomplished in such a manner that displacement and injury to pipe lines is avoided. 10. All soft or otherwise unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material from excavation or borrow, as approved. H. After backfilling, each Trade shall remove all excess materials from the premises and, if the surface was paved or sodded, repave and replace sod with material equal to, and level with, the adjacent surface. 12. Care should be taken to protect all existing utilities, trees, bushes and planting during the installation of the underground work. VECHANICAL TRADE RE')LIREAE:NTS Section 15A Page 12 15A-25. ELECTRICAL MIRING AND EQUIPMENT All power connections and wiring for equipment furnished under Division 15 - Mechanical, shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Trade under Division 16 - Electrical, except that control wiring for Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) specified in Section 15C - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Con- ditioning shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Trade Line disconnecting or protective devices shall be furnished anc installed by the Electrical Trade Motor starters and Trade required to operate the equipment provided under Section i5B - Plumbing and Drainage or Section 15C - HVAC shall be provided by the respective Trade and installed by the Electrical Trade . 2. Where controllers, starters, etc., are furnished as an integral part of any equipment, the Trade supplying the equipment shall also furnish complete control wiring between controllers, starters and motors, unless otherwise noted. 3. The HVAC Trade shall set all motors and furnish, set and place temperature control and other special automatic temperature - c-ntrols. 4. The HVAC Trade shall furnish the Electrical Trade with complete wiring diagrams as required. 5. All motors shall be of size, class and type suited for the purpose intended and conform with the latest standards of the IEEE and NEMA. Electricaimotors shall be designed for continuous duty, 40 degrees F., temperature rise, with sliding bases unless directly connected. All belted fan motors shall have adjustable pitch sheaves for approved V -belts and protected with guards. 6. Current characteristics shall be 120 volts, single phase, 60 cycle, alternating current for all fractional horsepower motors under 1/2 HP, unless otherwise noted. 7. All motors 1/2 HP and over shall be 208 volts, three phase, 60 cycle, alternating current, unless otherwise noted or required. MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 13 8. The Contractor shall be completely responsible for the ATC wiring incidental to the temperature control system. The full extent of work depends on the particular equipment being furnished. All control and electrical power interlocks shall be installed in accordance with the respective manufacturer's recommendations and coordinated. 9. All starters furnished integral with the equipment shall conform . to the requirements as specified under Division 16 - Electrical Requirements. 10. All electrical equipment and prewiring of control devices and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code, NEMA and the authorities having jurisdiction. 15A-26. VIBRATION ISOLATORS I. Vibration isolators shall be installed on all mechanical equipment and piping to properly isolate the transmission of vibration of noise to any part of the building beyond the location of the • operation equipment. The maximum permissible transmission of structural -borne vibration, unless otherwise specified hereinafter, shall be 5 percent. 2. Each Trade shall refer to his Section of the Specifications and Drawings for specific isolation types and requirements. 15A-27. EXPANSION PROVISIONS Provisions shall be made for the expansion and construction of piping. Piping shall be properly guided and anchored as required 15A-28. AS BUILT DRAWINGS I. Each Trade shall prepare as -built drawings, showing the exact locations and elevations of all underground and concealed work such as piping, valves and appurtenances. 2. During the progress of Project Work, each Trade shall keep an accurate record of all deviations, changes and corrections from layouts shown on the Drawings, on the set of prints of the Drawings which are kept at the job site. After completion of work at the site, the Trade shall submit the marked up set of prints to the Architect for review, comments and approval, or reproducible drawings. MECHANICAL TRADE REQWRE'•IENTS Section 15A Page 14 15A-29. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS I. Each Trade shall instruct the Owner in the preventive maintenance and operation of the work he has installed. Each Trade shall submit four (4) complete booklets covering the maintenance and operation of each system. 2. The minimum period of instruction for each Trade shall be as follows: a. Plumbing: Two (2) hours. b. HVAC: Eight (8) hours. 15A-30. c. Electrical: Four (4) hours 15A-30. CLEANING I. The piping systems, ducts, materials, equipment and fixtures shall be completely cleaned prior to testing, insulating and placing the systems in operation. Piping systems shall be chemically cleaned _ where specified in subsequent sections. 15A-31. PAINTING 1. Each Trade shall do the following painting: a. Touch up damages to prime and/or finished paint coats on equipment. b. Protective coating or rust resistant paint on all bare ferrous materials in unfinished or concealed spaces or roof. c. All surfaces to be thoroughly cleaned by each prior to final painting. d. Furnish baked enamel painted finish for all equipment and materials in finished spaces. 2. The Contractor shall be resoonsible for all final painting. The Contractor shall Paint the inside of ductwork which is visible through air diffusers and grilles. Colors and other painting details shall be as specified in Division 9E. MECHANICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 15A Page 15 • 15A-32. GUARANTEE Each Trade shall guarantee and service the work except for cleaning filters, oiling motors, or general maintenance from -al defect in workmanship, material and operation for a period of )r one (1) year from date of acceptance by the Architect. Complete-. service and maintenance of all equipment, filters and oiling motors shall be the responsibility of Each Trade until the date of final acceptance. 2. Filters must be installed by the Contractor if the air handling units are to operate temporarily during the construction period. New filters shall be installed in the units prior to final acceptance of the systems by the Architect. END OF SECTION 15A 11 • PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Section 156 Page 1 SECTION 156 - PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE 15B - 1 GENERAL 1. The applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, Instructtions at the beginning of these specifications, and Section 15A - Mechanical Trade Requirementsare here- by made an integral part of this Section. 156 - 2 SCOPE OF WORK 1. Work included: The work under this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Water service piping, building sanitary piping and building rainwater piping throughout building to utility company termination points. • b. Soil, waste, rainwater and vent piping and fittings. C. Cold and hot water piping, fittings and valves. d. Electric hot water heaters. e. Electric water coolers. f. Plumbing fixtures. g. f=loor, area and roof drains. h. Wall hydrants. i. Insulation. j. Waterproofing for drains. k. Roughing -in and final connections for all plumbing services as required for kitchen equipment not fur- nished under this Section. I. Final connections to all equipment furnished under Section 15B - Plumbing and Drainage. PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Section 158 Page 2 M. Identification. n. Hangers and supports. o. Sleeves, pipe support, inserts, flashing and counter - flashing materials and setting. p. Sterilization of piping systems. q. Excavating and backfilling. r. Painting - factory finishes and protective coatings. S. Cleaning, testing and adjustments. 2. Work not included in this section; a. Finish painting to, be by the Contractor b. Wiring and connections for plumbing equipment, except internal wiring for same, or as otherwise specified, to be by the Electrical Contractor. C. Temporary sanitary facilities to be the responsibility of the Contractor d. Kitchen equipment furnished and installed by the Contractor, except for roughing -in and final connections, as required and indicated on the drawings. See list of alternates for plumbing work - affected. 15B - 3 PIPING FITTINGS AND JOINTS 1. Domestic hot and cold water piping below grade shall be type "M" rigid copper with wrought copper fittings, 95-5 soldered. 2. Domestic hot and cold water above grade shall be type "L" rigid copper with wrought copper fittings, 95-5 soldered. • PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Section 15B Page 3 3. Soil and waste piping within building: a. Below grade extra heavy cast iron with caulked and leaded joints, or mechanical joint (at Trades option and if approved by authorities having jurisdiction). b. Above grade, Type D.W.V. copper service weight cast iron no -hub, or galvanized steel. 4. Vent piping: a. Below grade extra heavy cast iron as per soil and waste piping above. b. Above grade, Type D.W.V. copper, service weight cast iron no -hub, galvanized steel, or P.V,C. schedule 40 0 if approved by local authorities. 5. Storm drainage piping within the building to a point 5'-0" beyond the building wall shall be as follows: a. Below grade extra heavy cast iron with caulked and leaded joints or mechanical joints (at Trades option and if approved by authorities having juris- diction). b. Above grade, plastic pipe with solvent cement joints schedule 40. All plastic pipe connections to roof drains to be made with flexible connections. 15B - 4 VALVES 1. Valves shall be designed for minimum 125 SWP or 200 WOG unless otherwise noted. Valves shall be as manufactured by Nibco/Scott, Stockham, Crane or approved equal. 2. Valves for the following applications shall be based on Nibco/Scott figure numbers. • PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Section 158 Page 4 a. Gate valves 2" and smaller shall be used for fully open or closed service only, bronze construction, solid wedge, rising stem, union bonnet, soldered or screwed ends as required - 5-124 or T-124. J. Globe and angle glove valves 2" and smaller shall be used for throttling services, bronze construction, union bonnet, renewable resilient disc soldered or threaded ends as required - S235 or T-235 globe, S-335 or T-335 angle. C. Swing type check valves 2" and smaller shall be Y -type, all bronze construction, renewable resilient disc soldered or screwed ends, as required, S-413. 3. Shut-off valves shall be installed at each plubming fixture and'at branch service lines serving each group of plumbing fixtures. 4. Shut-off valves shall be installed at termination of all service pipe rough -ins. 15B - 5 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES Main service shut-off valves and valve boxes shall con- form to the requirements of the local authorities. 156 - 6 THRUST BLOCKS Reaction or thrust -backing shall be applied on all lines, at all tees, plugs, caps, hydrants and all changes in directions, where required, whether or not specifically shown on drawings. Reaction or thrust -backing shall be 3,300 Ibs. concrete placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. The area bearing on pipe and on the ground shall be approximately 9 square feet each. The interior of the pipe must be kept free of trench water at all times. A minimum cover of 3 feet from top of pipe to grade shall be maintained at all locations. . PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Section 15B Page 5 Ll 1�1 15B - 7 DRAINS 1. Roof drains shall be Smith or approved equal, cast iron roof drain with removable dome and sediment cup, and non -puncturing flashing clamp device integral with gravel stop, where scheduled. 2. Floor drains - Smith, or approved equal, cast iron floor drain with double drainage flange and weepholes, adjustable strainer and flashing clamp, where scheduled. 3. Area drains - Smith, or approved equal, cast iron drain with double drainage flange,_weepholes, slotted re- movable sediment bucket and loose set square grate, where scheduled. 4. Refer to schedule on drawings for detailed requirements. 156 - 8 TRAPS AND CLEANOUTS 1. Traps with cleanouts shall be installed at all plumbing fixtures, floor and shower drains, and where required by the applicable Plumbing Code. 2. Cleanouts shall be installed at the base of all stacks, changes in direction, and where required by the applicable Plumbing Code. Cleanout covers inside of building shall be nikaloy finish and flush with finished surfaces. 3. Cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Smith, or approved eq aa i . 15B - 9 HOSE OUTLETS 1. Wall type hydrants, Smith model 5720 with integral vacuum breaker, nickel bronze box cover and t handle key. 2. In heated areas, hose outlets shall be brass sill cocks with 3/411 male hose tread outlets. PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Section 156 Page 6 15B - 10 INSULATION All surfaces shall be cleaned and piping shall be tested prior to applying the insulation. Piping insulation shall have a thermal cgnductivity not exceeding .26 BTU/Hr.sq. ft./oF/in. at 75 F. mean temperature. 2. Hot and cold water piping, except chromium exposed take- offs to plumbing fixtures, shall be insulated with 1" thickness glass fiber insulation with U.L. listed fire retardant pre -sized glass cloth white factory applied jacket in accordance with NFPA 255, having vapor barrier for cold and rain water piping only. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with same maerial, appearance and thickness as piping with field applied PVC premolded jackets. Joints shall be properly sealed with adhesive. Horizontal rainwater piping above the ceiling shall be insulated same as cold water piping. insulation shall be equal to Owens-Corning Fiberglass with ASJ jacket. 15B - 11 ELECTRIC HOT WATER HEATER The water heaters shall be a commercial type, as manufactured by Rheem, A.O. Smith, Vulcraft, or equivalent. The water heater shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories as an automatic storage type. The tank shall be uniformly and completely glass -lined with vitreous procelain enamel. The tank shall be 355 psi test pressure with 150 psi _ working pressure and shall have a factory installed magnesium anode. The heater shall have npt inlet and outlet water connections and shall have factory installed manual reset, high limit energy cut-off temperature controls, one for each heating element. The heater control system shall consist of surface mounted automatic snap action thermo- stats, one for each element. The heater shall have immersion type heating elements. The heater, shall be in- stalled with an approved, suitable AS,E rated temperature and pressure relief valve. The complete installation shall be made in accordance with all state and local codes and ordinances. • PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Section 158 Page 7 E 0 2. Heater tanks shall be guaranteed against leakage due to corrosion for not less than three (5) years, controls and accessories for one (1) year. 3. Refer to the schedule on the drawings for capacities, performance and other characteristics. 15B - 12 SHOCK ABSORBERS 1. Provide shock absorbers as required and as indicated in the hot and cold water lines to each toilet room. Shock absorbers shall be Josam Series 1480 or approved equal and shall be sized and located to conform with P.D.I. standards. 15B - 13 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1. Wall hung fixtures, unless otherwise noted,shall be supported from floor mounted chair carriers. 2. The exposed metal fittings, belts, legs, lugs, valves, traps and trim for the fixtures shall be chromium plated. 3. The plumbing fixtures shall be white and equal to the types indicated on the schedule. 15B - 14 PIPING STERILIZATION 1. The water supply systems shall be sterilized with chlorine solution of not less than 50 ppm free chlorine per gallon, left in lines for at least eight (8) hours. Valves and faucets shall be opened and closed three times, thirty minutes apart. At the conclusion of sterilization, the system shall be flushed and reflushed until the chlorine content is reduced to 0.05 ppm. The Contractor shall furnish the solution and test equipment and conduct the test in the presence of the Architect. PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE Section 156 Page 8 15B - 15 CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS 1. All piping shall be.cleaned and flushed out. 2. Underground, concealed, or insulated piping shall not be covered until tests have been approved by the Architect 3. All soil, water, waste, stormwater, and vent piping shall be tested with water to minimize head equal to the height of the building. 4. All plumbing water piping shall be tested to 100 psig hydrostatic. Underground water piping shall be tested to 150 psig. 5. Tests shall be maintained for minimum of six (6) hours to prove that the joints are tight. 6. All equipment, valves, and other devices shall be ad- justed and balanced for the proper performance of the systems. 7. All tests shall comply with all applicabie regulations. END OF SECTION • HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C Page I SECTION 15C - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 15C-01. GENERAL I. The applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, 1979 UMC Instructions at the beginning of these Specifications and Section 15A - Mechanical Trade Requrrements are hereby made an integral part of this Section. 15C-02. SCOPE OF WORK I. Work Included, The work under this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Self contained, roof mounted air to air heat pump units, all electric. b. Exhaust fans. c. Sheetmetal ductwork. • d. Grilles, registers and diffusers. e. Insulation ductwork and equipment, including acoustical. f. Automatic temperature control, including associated control wiring. g. Vibration isolation. h. Identification. 1. Hangers and supports. j. Sleeves, templates, flashings and counterflashings. k. Painting - factory finish on material and equipment and touch up of factory finishes. Protective coating on bare ferrous metals in unfinished or concealed spaces. C HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C Page 2 Electric motors and starters for equipment furnished under Section 15C, except as noted. m. Cleaning, testing, balancing and adjusting. 2. Work not included in this Section. a. Finish painting throughout to be by the Contractor. b. Power wiring and connections to HVAC equipment to be by the Contractor, except as otherwise specified. c. Chases and openings to be by the Contractor. d. Flashings integrated into waterproofing Contractor. 15C-03. ROOF TOP SELF CONTAINED HEAT PUMP UNITS All units to be factory assembled, piped internally wired and fully charged with R-22 factory run tested to check cooling and heating operation, defrost initiation and termination, fan and blower rotation and control sequence. Units designed to operate at ambient temperatures between 120 degrees F., and 30 degrees F., on cooling mode and 70 degrees F., and -20 degrees F., on heating mode. 2. Unit casing shall be of 20 gage steel, cleaned, phosphatized and coated with resin primer and gray green baked enamel finish. Access doors to provide access to unit controls, filters, indoor coil, supply air fans and optional economizer supply/return air dampers. Inside air section completely insulated with fireproof permanent, odorless to prevent leakage. The unit base pan to be insulated with polyurethane foam insulation. 3. All units to have 3,600 rmp hermetically sealed, high efficiency reciprocating compressors designed for heat pump duty. Compressors equipped with over temperature, over current, high pressure controls, and crankcase heaters. 4. All units to have expansion devices to provide proper refrigerant flow control in both heating and cooling. Heavy duty, high capacity solenoid type reversing (four way) valve to provide automatic refrigerant cycle changeover. • 0 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C Page 3 5. Outdoor coils shall be specially designed for heat pump appli- cation with widely spaced, wavy finned surface and staggered row copper tubing. 3/8 inch outside diameter seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. Each coil to be factory pressure and leak tested at 610 psig. 6. Indoor coils shall be 3/8 inch outside diameter seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins and factory pressure and leak tested at 610 psig. 7. Outdoor fans to be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced propeller fans. All fans to be weatherproof and UL listed for outdoor use with permanently lubricated motors with built in thermal overload protection. 8. Indoor fan to be belt driven,forward curved centrifugal type fans equipped with an adjustable motor sheave. Fan and motor bearings to be permanently lubricated. Motor to have built in overload protection. 9. Unit to be equipped with automatic defrost cycle. 10. Each unit to be furnished and installed with the following factory options: a. Throwaway filters. b. Roof curbs. c. Electric heaters. d. Enthalpy controlled economizer section. e. Nigh set back panel with room thermostats. II. All automatic controls, including temperature control, shall be factory furnished and internally wired, except for night set back and room thermostats which shall be furnished by the manufacturer for field mounting where indicated or directed. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C Page Mechanical Cooling sequence shall be as follows: (1) On a call for cooling by the room thermostat, the solenoid operated reversing valve is energized. The outside air economizer will use outdoor air to provide natural cooling. At ambient conditions below the outdoor enthalpy control setpoints the economizer outside and return air dampers will modulate to maintain proper space temperature. At outdoor conditions above the outdoor enthalpy control setpoint, mechanical cooling only is used and the economizer outdoor air dampers remain at minimum position. (2) if the economizer alone cannot satisfy the space cooling load, mechanical cooling will be activated. On the motor assembly single compressor unit, the economizer will be de -activated and mechanical cooling will be energized. On all other units, the economizer will continue to function, acting as first stage cooling while the second stage of mechanical cooling is activated to act as second stage cooling. Should the outside air conditions change such that the economizer can no longer be utilized, the mechanical cooling system will provide up to two individual stages of cooling. (3) As the thermostat becomes satisfied, thermostat second stage cooling contacts open and drop out one stage of mechanical cooling. When the thermostat is completely satisfied, the economizer, if operating, will close to its full closed position or minimum air setting if contin- uous fan has been selected at the room thermostat. If the economizer has not been operating, the first stage of mechanical cooling will be de -activated as the room thermostat is satisfied. Passive Cooling sequence shall be as follows: (I) When system is de -energized by placing unit in "vent" position, space thermostat shall automatically modulate motorized dampers located at the high point of each space to provide passive cooling. When system is in "vent" position, a room humidistat shall over ride dampers to provide mechanical cooling if space humidity rises above the humidistat set point. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C 'age 5 • c. Heating sequence shall be as follows: (1) During the cooling mode, the solenoid -operated reversing valve has been energized. On a call for heating by the room temperature, this reversing valve will be de -energized. (2) When the room thermostat first stage heating contacts are closed, the compressor will run to provide space heating. (3) On a call for further heating the �Aermostat activates electric heaters whose outdoor thermostat control setting is above the outdoor temperature. Compressors will continue to run to satisfy heating requirements. (4) The operation of the supplemental electric heaters are controlled from the room thermostats second stage heating command as well as through the outdoor thermostat controls. Outdoor thermostat controls are used to limit the amount of supplemental electric heat which is energized upon command of the indoor room thermostat. Two separate temperature adjustments of the outdoor thermostat controls will be made to correspond to two stages of supplemental • electric heaters. (5) As the thermostat becomes satisfied, second stage heating contracts open and electric heaters are de -activated. When the thermostat is completely satisfied, the compressor is also de -energized. d. Defrost cycle shall be as follows: (1) The demand defrost system shall monitor the temperature difference between the ambient air, and the outdoor coil _ and suction line temperature sensors. These temperature differentials are compacted with the stored memory of the outdoor control printed circuit board. If either difference is large (which indicates a frosted coil) a defrost cycle is initiated. • HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C Page 6 (2) The defrost control shall signal the defrost relay. This relay turns off the outdoor fan and energizes the reversing valve. The reversed hot refrigerant from the compressor is directed through the outdoor coil to melt the frost. The unit electric heat, will be energized to temper supply air to the conditioned space. (3) The defrost cycle is terminated under normal conditions when the unit senses that both the coil and suction line temperatures are significantly above the outdoor air temperature, indicating ice has been removed from the outdoor coils. An override timer will terminate defrost about 8 minutes. After defrost cycle termination, the defrost relay is de -energized and the unit shall switch back to a normal heating cycle. e. Night set back set up and time clock panel to provide automatic heating mode set back and cooling mode set up fully adjustable in time and duration. f. All required field wiring and associated devices to accomplish the hereinbefore specified operation shall be provided by HVAC Trade to conform with NEC standards. 12. HVAC Trade shall provide factory supervised start up and service of this equipment for one year from date of acceptance of the system. 13. Refer to schedule on the Drawings for performance data and other characteristics. 15C-04. TOILET, PROJECTION ROOM EXHAUST FANS Exhaust fans shall be quiet operating ceiling type centrifugal fans, Penn Ventilator "Zephyr," or approved equal, of size and capacity as indicated on the Drawings, rated and tested to ANC Stan- dards and so labeled. Fans shall be furnished complete with acoustical insulation, backdraft dampers, deluxe ceiling grilles, and roof caps. 0 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 15C-05. CONFERENCE EXHAUST FANS Section 15C Page 7 Exahsut fans shall be quiet operating cabinet type centrafugal exhaust fans, Greenheck type "SQB" or approved equivalent. Fans to be mounted concealed with vibration isolators in hanger rods. Flexible connectors to be installed on inlet and outlet. Fans to be as scheduled on Drawings. 15C-06. SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK All supply, return, and exhaust air duct systems shown on the Drawings shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets, except as otherwise specified, with bracing, reinforcement and construction dtails in accordance with the latest editions of the ASHRAE Guide, NFPA Pamphlets Nos. 90 and 96 and the SMACNA Guide. 2. Ductwork with internal insulation shall not be "cross broken" and shall be two (2) metal gages heaver than "cross broken" metal, or equivalent SMACNA construction as approved by the Architect. 3. Ductwork shall be adequately supported by rods, band iron, or other methods approved by the Architect. All joints shall be made airlfi4ht, taped with 4 inch wide duct tape. 4. All square elbows shall have hollow vanes. Round elbows shall have full throat wherever possible; other round elbows shall have hollow vanes. 5. Transformations: Slopes shall not exceed I inch in 7 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Provide and install blanacing dampers and/or adjustable splitters at all branch ducts and wherever else shown or required for balancing the systems. Each damper shall be adjustable with an approved guandrant or regulator. Dampers shall be opposed blade type where multi blade is required. 11 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C Page 8 7. Fire dampers with fusible links shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the NFPA Pamphlet No. 90A. Campers shall be UL labeled and approved, 1-1/2 hours rating up to i80 degrees F., and equal to Air Balance, Inc., Imperial Affco or Penn Airstream manufacture. 8. Flexible fire resistant connections of UL approved material shall be installed at the inlet and discharge connections of ai'r handling units and fans. 9. Access doors shall be installed in ducts where required for access to fire dampers and appurtenances. Where possible, access doors shall be not less than 16 by 16 inches, complete with hinges and tight closing latches. All access doors in insulated ducts shall be insulated pan construction. 10. Flexible ductwork connections to diffusers and plenums to be Clevaflex Type SFV, insulated flexible ductwork, clamped or screwed Fn place at Trade's option. II. Acoustical and thermal insulation shall be provided where indicated and as specified under Section 15C-8 insulation. 15C-07. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS All supply grilles, registers and diffusers shall be designed to distribute air thru•the zone or occupancy without drafts while maintaining uniform tempecatures, with a maximum ai'r motion of 50 fpm and a minimum of 20 fpm in the occupied zone. in the event of substitution, sizes of all diffusers indicated on the Drawings shall be adjusted if necessary to match this required per- formance for the air capacities indicated. 2. All return and exhaust registers and grilles shall conform to the type, size and free area of the device specified or indicated on the Drawings. 3. All grilles, registers and diffusers to be as specified on the Drawings. Exact locations and mounting details. to be as indicated on architectural drawings. Furnish with all frames and alignment fasteners as required and specified. 4. All finishes to be as directed by Architect. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C Page 9 15C-08. INSULATION I. All supply and return air ductwork shall be insulated as specified herein or elsewhere in the Specification, or as directed. 2. All insulation, including linings, jackets, facings, adhesives and vapor barriers shall be non-combustible as defined in Section 200 of the National Building Code and, except as otherwise specified, shall have a flame spread rating of not more than 25, and a smoke developed or fuel contributed rating of not more than 50, as defined In the Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of the Building Materials List of the Underwriters' Laboratortes, Inc., and shall be so labeled. Acoustical and thermal duct Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity not higher than .27 BTU/Hr/Sq.ft./degree F./in. at 75 degrees F., mean temperature with density not less than I pound per cubic foot. Optional insulation and thicknesses, if approved, shall provide equal transfer efficiency. 3. Except where other thicknesses are indicated or specified, and except factory pre insulated casings and as otherwise indicated, • all supply and return air ducts. and plenums shall be internally lined with I inch thickness combination thermal and acoustical glass fiber duct liner insulation. Insulation shall have a coating on the air stream side which shall impart no odor to the air, and which is guaranteed against air erosion at the velocities encountered. Friction factor, as installed, shall not exceed 1.2 times that of bare duct. a. For rectangular ducts, duct liner shall be applied to all Interior surfaces with a 100 percent coverage of fire resistant adhesive. All exposed edges and and the leading edge of all cross joint of the liner shall be coated with - the same adhesive used to secure the duct liner to the metal surface. Ducts over 12 inches wide or 16 inches high shall have liners additionally secured with welded pins and speed clips on a maximum of 15 inch centers. b. Round duct liner shall also provide 100 percent coverage, with insulation held in place by perforated metal retaining liner, shop fabricated and installed, 0 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C Page 10 4. Insulation shall be equal to Owens-Corning, Johns -Manville, Armstrong or Gustin-Bacon manufacture and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein. 15C-09. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS I, All automatic temperature controls necessary to operate the systems and equipment hereinbefore specified shall be provided by the HVAC Trade , as described for either factory installation and wiring by the equipment manufacturer, or field mounted and wired in accordance with the manufacturers diagrams as approved by the Architect. All accessory devices necessary to accomplish the specified operation shall be included. 15C-10. VIBRATION ISOLATION I. Vibration isolators for the heat pump units, exhaust fans and other mechanical equipment she(i be installed to properly isolate the transmission of vibration or noise to any part of the building beyond the location of the operating equipment. 2. The maximum permissible transmission of structure borne vibration shall be 5 percent and spring type isolators shall be used where necessary to achieve this efficiency. 15C -II. CLEANING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING All ductwork, materials, and equipment shall be completely cleaned prior to testing, insulating and operating the systems. 2. The automatic temperature control system, heat pumps and other equipment shall be properly adjusted and calibrated for optimum - systems performance. 15C-12. AIR BALANCING Air balancing shall be an independent air balance company not associated with Trade Upon completion of the balancing, the air balance company shall submit a certified test report indicating the following; HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15C Page 11 0 a. Temperature of air at air conditioner. b. Temperature if air leaving outlets. c. Quantity of air at each outlet after balancing. d. Static pressure readings. e. Velocities. f. Voltage, amperage 2. Upon submission of the certified report, the independent balancing company in the presence of the Architect and Engineer shall visit the job site for field verification of the report. 3. Within 10 days of award of this Contract, the Trade shall submit the name of the balancing firm he intends to use. No balancing shall be attempted before written approval of the balancing subcontractor is received from the Consulating Engineer. 4. Prior to installation of hung ceilings, the balancing Trade shall perform a prebalance to insure that all inaccessible dampers are adjusted properly. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. END OF SECTION 15C. 40 0 • ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page SECTION 16A - ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS 16A-01. GENERAL The applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, Instructions at the beginning of these Specifications, and Section 16B - Electrical are hereby made an integral part of this Section. 16A-02. CONTRACT DRAWINGS I. The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of the various systems and the approximate and relative locations of the materials and equipment included by these Specifications. This Trade shall coordinate with and have the approval of the Architect for the exact location of materials and equipment. This Trade shall check the Drawings and work required of all other trades to verify space conditions and head room requirements. Where space conditions or head -room requirements appear inadequate, the Architect shall be notified. No considera- tion or allowance will be granted for failure to notify the Architect, . or for any alleged misunderstanding of the aforementioned requirements. Installation, connection, and interconnection of all components of these systems shall be complete and made in accordance with the requirements of the Contract, the manu- facturer's instructions and best practices of the trade. 16A-03. EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS This Trade before submitting his proposal, shall examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to his work, and the work of all other trades, and shall become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work required, and its relation to the work of other trades. No consideration shall be granted for an alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished or work to be done. 16A-04. VISIT TO SITE I. Before commencing work, this Trade shall visit the site, verify all measurements, and field conditions affecting his work. He shall be responsible for the correctness of all measurements • ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 2 and for any connections to existing work. Submission of the proposal shall be considered evidence that this Trade has visited and examined the site. No extra payment shall be allowed this Trade for extra work caused by his failure to visit the site and to verify all conditions and measurements. 16A-05. VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENTS I. This Trade shall be solely responsible for the verification of field measurements before ordering any materials or equipment, and before commencing any work. 2. This Trade shall be responsible for coordinating the locations and sizes of concrete pads, sleeves, inserts, openings and chases with the Contractor. 3. No extra claims, charges, or compensation will be allowed due to any differences between the actual dimensions and any dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 4. Any discrepancies which may be found shall be reported at once to the Architect for consideration and this Trade shall wait for a decision before proceeding with any work in the affected area. 5. The Architect's decision in such upon this Trade and this accordingly. 16A-06. REGULATIONS AND CODES matters shall be final and binding Trade shall make his i-nstallation This Trade shall perform his work 1n accordance with the respective applicable requirements of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, National Fire Proection Association, National Electrical Code, Underwriters' Laboratories, National Electrical Manufacturers' Association, Insulated Power Cable Engineers' Association, Utility Companies, OSHA and other local or state authorities having jurisdiction for this work. 16A-07. PERMITS, CERTIFICATES AND FEES This Trade shall pay all fees for procuring the permits and certificates required, L1 ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 3 2. This Trade shall prepare all of the information and data for submittal to any authority as required for obtaining certificates of compliance for the permits. 3. The Electrical Trade shall obtain final approved inspection certificates from authorities having jurisdiction for the electrical installation. Electrical inspections shall be performed by Underwriters such as Insurance Service Organization (TSO) or approved equivalent. Final inspection certificates shall be delivered to the Architect before final payment for work will be made. 16A-08. CODE CONSTRUCTION I. Materials and equipment shall bear stamps and seals of the, 1978 NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE and other industry regulating groups as hereinafter specified or required by codes. 16A-09. TEMPORAR`f SERVICES I. Temporary electric and telephone service are the responsibility • of the respective Trades and the Contractor as detailed detailed in the General Conditions and Special Conditions. Refer to same for specific requirements. 16A-10. SHOP DRAWINGS I. Each Trade shall submit shop drawings of equipment and materials under his Section for approval by the Architect. 2. The shop drawings are to be submitted promptly without causing any delays in the construction progress schedules. Shop drawings shall be stamped with each Trade's and the Con- _ tractor's approval, as evidence that it was checked for accuracy, and that all the dimensions and data were verified prior to submitting them. Approval of the submittals by the Architect shall not relieve the Trade from the responsibility for any errors contained within them or for compliance with the require- ments of the plans and specifications, unless specific mention is made of variations therefrom and approval obtained for same. 3. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all equipment and materials including but not limited to panelboards, lighting fixtures, starters, safety switches, emergency power system, breakers and other items as required by the Architect. 0 ELECTRICAL TRADE REOUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 4 4. In addition, the Trades shall submit for review and approval a typewritten list OT all materials to be used. on the Project indicating the manufacturer and catalog number (where appropriate) he intends to use. No shop drawings will be reviewed until this list has been submitted and approved. 16A -II. COORDINATED EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS I. The HVAC, Plumbing and Electrical Trade,: shall furnish to the Architect dimensioned, coordianted 3/8 inch equals I foot scale drawings. Drawings shall include equipment foundations and all equipment, piping, conduit, ductwork, panels, control centers, etc. Drawings shall originate with the HVAC Trade who shall send sepia prints of the Drawings to the Plumbing Trade who shall show his work and then shall forward the sepias to the Electrical Trade After showing his work, the Electrical Trade shall forward drawings back to the HVAC Trade for final check and review for clearances and layout before submission to the Architect. 16A- 12. SAMPLES _ This Trade shall submit, for approval, samples of materials deemed necessary by the Architect. Samples shall be supplemented by essential catalog data specifically applying to the samples submitted for approval, where such data would be necessary to properly evaluate the quality of the sample. Samples shall be s.pecifically identified as to the service and location where they are to be used in the Project. 16A-13. INSTALLATION The equipment and materials under this Division of the Specifications _ shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the respective manyfacturer. 2. This Trade shall cooperate and coordinate his work with the other trades. The locations of pipes, ducts, conduits, panel - boards, lighting outlets, air outlets, motor controls and other equipment must be coordinated in order to avoid any interferences or placing services at the wrong locations. Exact locations of outlets, conduits and other materials and equipment must be coordinated with and approved by the Architect, ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 5 3. The work under this Division of the Specifications must be performed in an approved first class, workmanlike manner and conform to the best practices of the trade. 4. The Electrical Trade shall at all times protect and preserve all materials, equipment, fixtures and conduits from corrosion, dirt, paint, building materials, acid, tools, overload and freezing. This Trade shall repair or replace all equipment and materials which are damaged as the result of inadequate protection. Open ends of conduit and equipment must be capped or plugged during the construction schedule and remain capped or plugged until wiring is ready to be installed. 5. All materials and equipment shall be properly isolated against the transmission of vibrationor noise to any part of the building. 6. The Electrical Trade shall be responsible for the admission of materials and equipment in accordance with the construction progress schedule. • 7. All materials and equipment installed by this Trade shall be new, the best in grade and quality and manufactured in the United States of America with standards and ratings as specified herein. No substitution or deviation from the materials and equipment specified herein will be allowed except by written permission from the Architect. S. Sleeve and as built drawings shall be prepared by the Electrical Trade as hereinafter specified. 16A-14. COORDINATION WITH EXISTING UTILITIES This Trade must coordinate with the authorized representative of the Owner for scheduleing of the work. Any interruptions of shut downs of existing services must be held to a minimum. Shut downs shall be at the convenience of the Owner. 2. Caution shall be exercised in avoiding interference of or damage to all existing underground utilities not in this Contract during the installation of new work. • ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 6 16A-15. CHASES, RECESSES AND OPENINGS The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all chases, recesses and openings (except as hereinafter specified) when each under this Division complies with the following; a. Each Trade under this Division requiring an opening, chase or recess in the construction for his work shall furnish the Contractor with the exact location, size and other necessary information in ample time to have them incorporated Into the new structure during construction as approved by the Architect. b. If any Trade under this Division fails to comply with the above information requirements, then he shall do the necessary cutting and patching at his own expense under the direct supervision of the Contractor, subject to the direction and approval of the Architect. 16A-16. SLEEVES I. Sleeves shall be installed in all construction. Sleeves shall be standard weight iron pipe for passing conduits. The pipe sleeves shall be two pipe sizes larger than passing conduit and extend approximately 2 inches above finished floor. 2. Sleeves shall be the proper design for waterproofing and flashing around the sleeves where required. The space between the piping and sleeve shall be calked with an approved waterproof compound. 3. This Trade shall furnish the sleeves and set them in the new construction as required for the installation of his work. 4. Sleeve drawings shall be prepared by this Trade and submitted to the Architect for approval prior to the setting of sleeves. 5. Sleeves shall extend 2 inches above the floor in concealed areas, unfinished rooms and mechanical spaces. ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 7 16A-17. ANCHOR BOLTS Anchor bolts of the hook type and of proper size and length, as required for the various equipment specified hereinafter, shalt be furnished and set by the Electrical Trade 2. This Trade shall be responsible for the location and sizes of the anchor bolts before the concrete is poured. 16A-18. CONCRETE INSERTS I. Heavy duty approved box type inserts or other approved methods of support for securing all suspended materials and equipment shall be furnished and set by -this Trade . Hanger supports in crawlspaces shall be installed between planks at joints before grouting and topping placement. 2. This Trade shall be responsible for the locations and sizes of the inserts prior to the pouring of concrete. 16A-19. CONCRETE PADS • I. Concrete pads for all equipment shall be installed by the Contractor under his Section of the Specifications. Concrete pads shall be complete with anchor bolts located from templates furnished by the equipment manufacturer and shall conform to Section "Reinforced Concrete." 16A-20. FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING Base flashing shall be as specified, and furnished and set in place by each Trade under his Section of the Specifications. The Contractor will be responsible for integrating flashings fishings into waterproofing membranes. 2. Flashing assemblies at roof penetrations shall be provided and installed by the Contractor. 0 ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 8 16A-21. FASTENINGS, SUPPORTS AND HANGERS All fastenings, supports and hangers, clamps and anchors shall be of the type made for the specific purpose for which they are used. Toggle bolts or bolt fastenings shall be used for hollow tile, terra cotta or lath construction. Lag screws or bolts shall be used for wood fastening. To prevent swaying, vibrating and/or sagging, conduit shall be rigidly and firmly installed by using malleable or wrought steel hangers of standard design, with pipe clamps or fabricated steel supports, such as Kindorf or Unistrut. Perforated strap hangers will not be allowed. 16A-22. ACCESS DOORS I. Access doors not less than 14 by 14 inches and of the type approved by the Architect, shall be furnished by this Trade for Installa- tion by the Contractor where required for access +o :ess to junction boxes, control devices, appurtenancHs and as required by the applicable codes. Electrical Trades for Division 16 Electrical Requirements shall be responsible for indicating required access door locations. Access doors in ceiling shall be fire rated. 16A-23. ESCUTCHEON PLATES Where conduits are exposed in finished areas, provide heavy malleable iron type, enamel painted escutcheon plates. 16A-24. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING I. This Trade under his Section of the Specifications shall be responsible for the excavation, backfilling shoring and care for all ground water for the complete installation of his work. Excavation and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of Division 2. 2. This Trade shall also provide suitable indemnity for all accidents to humans, animals or equipment caused by his excavation work. He shall provide suitable guards or barricades, red lanterns, flares and other precautions for an approved and safe installation. • ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 9 3. The pipe trenches shall follow the grades as indicated on the Drawings or specified hereinafter. Trenches shall be of necessary width for the proper laying of the pipes or conduits and the banks shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. The bottom of the trenches shall be excavated 6 inches below the dimensions and depths indicated to provide for fine gravel bedding beneath the pipes. Wherever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe, as determined by the Architect, is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such soil shall be removed to the depth required. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid over- loading and to prevent slides or cave ins. 4. All materials resulting from excavations and classified as earth and approved as suitable by the Owner shall be stockpiled for use as backfill, filling and such rough grading as required on the Project Site. 5. All excavated materials not approved for backfill and fill, all surplus material, boulders, roots and stumps shall be removed to the Owner's disposal area as described in Division 2. Excavated materials shall not be used as backfill in trenches beneath paved area; provide acceptable borrow. 6. The drawings indicate, in general, the alignment, finished grade elevations and invert grades for underground utilities. The Trade , however, shall make such adjustments in grade and alignment as are found necessary in order to avoid interference and to adapt the piping to other special conditions encountered. 7. Fine gravel bedding shall be provided to not less. than 6 inches in compacted depth below all pipelines and for the full width of the trenches. 8. Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as the con- struction and testing of the work will permit. 9 Backfilling of all trenches shall be accomplished in rich a manner that displacement and injury to pipe lines is avoided. 10. All soft or otherwise unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material from excavation or borrow, as approved. ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 10 11. After backfilling this Trade shall remove all excess materials from the premises and, if the surface was paved or sodded, repave and replace sod with material equal to, and level with, the adjacent surface. 12. Care should be taken to protect all existing trees, bushes and planting during the installation of the underground work. 16A-25. ELECTRICAL WIRING AND EQUIPMENT All power connections and wiring for equipment furnished under Division 15 - Mechanical, shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Trade under Division 16 Electi-ical, except that control wiring for Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) specified in Section 16C - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Trade Line disconnecting or protective devices shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Trade . Motor starters and contactors required to operate the equipment provided under Section 16B - Plumbing and Drainage, or Section 15C - Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning, shall be provided by the respective Trade and installed by the Electrical Trade _ 2. Where controllers, starters, etc., are furnished as an integral part of any equipment, the Trade supplying the equipment shall also furnish complete control wiring between controllers, starters and motors, unless otherwise noted. 3. The HVAC Trade shall set all motors and starters furnished under Division 15, and furnish, set and pipe, as necessary, the flow and pressure switches, temperature control and other special automatic temperature controls. 4. The HVAC Trade shall furnish the Electrical Trade with complete wiring diagrams as required. 5. All motors shall be of size, class and type suited for the purpose intended and conform with the latest standards of the IEEE and NEMA. Electric motors shall be designed for continuous duty, 40 degrees F., temperature rise, with sliding bases unless directly connected. All belted fan motors shall have adjustable pitch sheaves for approved V -belts and protected with guards. ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 11 6. Current characteristics shall be 120 volts, single phase, 60 cycle, alternating current for all fractional horsepower motors under 1/2 horsepower, unless otherwise noted. 7. All motors 1/2 HP and over shall be 208 volt three phase, 60 cycle, alternating current, unless otherwise noted or required. 8. The HVAC Trade under his Section of the Specifications shall be completely responsible for the ATC wiring incidental to the temperature control system, unless otherwise indicated. The full extent of this work depends on the particular equipment being furnished. All control and electrical power interlocks shall be installed in accordance with the respective manufacturer's recommendations and coordinated by the HVAC and Electrical Trades. 9. All electrical equipment and prewiring of control devices and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code, NEMA and the authorities having jurisdiction. 16A-26. STARTERS . I. Manual Starters - fractional'horsepower, single phase motors shall be controlled by manubl, full voltage two -pole starters fitted with positive overload protection and heaters in a general purpose enclosure including toggle operator to indicate ON -OFF -TRIPPED. 2. Magnetic Starters - integral horwepower, three phase motors up to 40 horsepower shall be controlled by magnetic full voltage three pole starters fitted with three overload relays and three heater in a general purpose enclosure including momentary Start -Stop pushbutton, except units for automatic control, which shall include HAND -OFF -AUTOMATIC selector switch. Motors rated above 40 horsepower _ shall be controlled by magnetic reduced voltage starters of the auto transformer closed transition type unless specified to the contrary elsewhere in Specifications, otherwise similar in con- struction to full voltage units specified above. 3. Starters shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts, HAND -OFF -AUTO selection, pilot lights, control transformer for 120 volts, and other electrical appurtenances as required. All starters, breakers 0 ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 12 and panels for the Project must be the same manufacturer in order to facilitate maintenance and the stocking of spare parts. Refer to Section 168 and the drawings and descrition, sizes and requirements of the starters. 4. Starters shall be furnished under Division 16, unless otherwise noted. The Electrical Trade shall set and mount the above electrical items and coordinate with the HVAC Trade. 5. Refer to Sections 156 and 15C for starters furnished by others. 16A-27. EXPANSION AND VIBRATION PROVISIONS Expansion fittings in raceways shall be installed at all building construction expansion joints. 2. Flexible raceways shall be used at all motor connections and wherever required to isolate equipment from the structure. 16A-28. WIRE GAGE I. The sizes of copper conductors and thicknesses of metal shown on the Drawings or mentioned in these Specifications shall be under- stood to be American Wire Gage. 16A-29. LEGENDS - IDENTIFICATION Provide for each safety switch, panelboard and similar items of equipment, a laminated plastic nameplate of molded phenolic compound to indicate the device and equipment served. Characters shall be white, not less than 1/4 Inch high. 2. Provide approved tags for all feeders, at both ends, and at inter- mediate junction and pull boxes. Tag shall indicate feeder designa- tion or equipment served, and state phase and voltage of feeder. 3. On the inside cover of each fusible device, identify using plastic adhesive tape or paint with red letters "Use - A. Fuse Only" and fill in proper value as indicated on the Drawings or as required. 4. All raceways, junction boxes and enclosures containing primary voltage cable shall be finished with Bright Red Enamel over a suitable primer on all exterior surfaces. • • ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIREMENTS Section 16A Page 13 16A-30. COLOR IDENTIFICATION Color identification may be accomplished by painting, decals, or plastic bands with all bands installed at frequent intervals, change of directions, or where conduit passes through walls or floors. 16A-31. CLEANING I. The raceway systems, materials, equipment and fixtures shall be completely and thoroughly cleaned prior to testing and placing the systems in operations. 16A-32. PAINTING 1. The Trade shall do the following painting: a. Touch up damages to prime and/or finished paint coats on equipment. b. Furnish baked anemel painted finish for all equipment and materials in finished spaces. c. All surfaces to be thoroughly cleaned by the Electrical Contractor prior to final painting by the General Contractor. d. Protective coating of rust resistant paint on all bare ferrous materials in unfinished or concealed spaces or roof. 16A-33. AS BUILT DRAWINGS This Trade shall prepare as built drawings, showing the exact IocaTions and elevations of all underground and concealed work such as conduits, junction and pull boxes, and appurtenances. Refer to Division I - Record Drawings. 2. During the progress of Project work, each Trade shall keep an accurate record of all deviations, changes and corrections from the layouts shown on the Drawings, on the site of prints of the Drawings which are kept at the job site. After completion of work at the site, the Trade shall submit the marked up set of prints to the Architect for review, comment and approval. ELECTRICAL TRADE REQUIRENIENTS Section 16A Page 14 I6A-34. TESTS This Trade shall insure that all materials and equipment furnished under this Division have been given standard commercial tests prior to delivery to the site. He shall adjust and calibrate the equipment as may be required. 2. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment as required by the Architect in the making of any examinations or tests of the work during the course of construction. 3. Perform electrical continuity tests and megohommeter tests of the entire installation, high potential tests where specified, other miscellaneous tests, and perform start up tests of all equipment furnished or installed or connected under this Division. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to perform these tests. 16A-35. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS I. This Trade shall instruct the Owner in the preventive maintenance and operation of the work he has installed. This Trade shall submit eight (81 complete booklets covering the maintenance and operation of each system. 2. The minimum period of instruction for this Trade shall be as follows: a. Electrical: Four (4) hours. 16A-36. GUARANTEE The Electrical Trade shall guarantee and service his work from defects in workmaneship, materials and operation for a period of one C1) year from date of acceptance by the Architect. Complete service and maintenance of all equipment shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Trade until the date of final acceptance. END OF SECTION 16A • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 1 SECTION 16 B - ELECTRICAL WORK 16B - 1 GENERAL A. The applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, Instructions at the beginning of these specifications, and Section 16A - Electrical Trade Requirements, are hereby made an integral part of this section. 16B - 2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work includes: The work under this section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Underwriters' inspection 2. Grounding 3. Wiring methods and raceways • 4. Expansion joints 5. Fasteners and supports 6. Wire and cable, including installation 7. Empty conduit for incoming service work 8. Empty conduit for telephone service work and outlets 9. Empty conduit for master cable T.V. service 10. Empty conduit .for computer terminals 11. Empty conduit and cabling for audio visual systems 12. Junction, pull and outlet boxes 13. Power, lighting and receptacle panelboards 14. Locks and keys 15. Molded case circuit breakers ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 2 16. Ground fault receptacles 17. Receptacles 18. Switches 19. Fuses 20. Main distribution panelboard, metering cabinet and metering sockets. 21. Lighting fixtures, lamps and ballasts 22. Excavation and backfill 23. Power wiring to HVAC and plumbing equipment 24. Wiring and final connections to Dwyer unit 25. Cleaning and testing B. Work not included: 1. Painting of materials in finishedspaces and mechanical rooms to be by the Contractor, except identification painting and protective coatings in unfinished areas. 2. Chases, recesses and openings by the Contractor. 3. Access doors instarled by the Contractor. 4. Integral motor starting equipment for equipment furnished under Division 15. 5. Automatic temperature control wiring by the HVAC Trade, • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 166 Page 3 6. Audio-visual equipment, final connections of audio-visual cabling. 16B - 3 UNDERWRITERS' INSPECTIONS A. During the course of work and at periodic intervals, the Electrical Contractor shall, at his expense, have an inspection of the work made by a representative of Insurance Service Organization or approved equal underwriters. Corrections to the work as required by these inspections shall be accomplished immeditely at no cost to the Owner. B. Prior to the installation of finish materials, and while all concealed work is accessible, the.Electrical • Trade shall obtain a certificate from the Under- writers indicating approval of the rough wiring. C. Upon completion of the work, a Certificate of Approval shall be delivered to the Engineer for delivery to the State. 16B - 4 GROUNDING A. The complete grounding of the new electrical system shall be in accordance with the requirements of the _ 1978 national Electrical Code. B. All exposed non-current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, metallic cable armor, neutral conductor of the wiring system, and where indicated, shall be completely grounded. The main ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be extended to the point of entrance of the metallic water service, and to the ground rod assembly as shown on the drawings. C. Ground rods as required shall be of copper -clad steel • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 4 not less than 3/4" in diameter, 10 feet long, driven full length into the earth. The maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with three rods, additional rods shall be installed not less than 6 feet on centers or, if sectional type rods are used, additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, the Owner shall be notified immediately. D. Grounding conductor's shall be #4/0 bare electrical grade copper. All permanent grounding connections shall be made using the "cadweld" or "thermoweld" method except that mechanical connectors shall be used at ground busses where disconnection will be required and on materials where the "cadweld" or "Thermoweld" method cannot be safely used. E. Separate green -jacketed grounding conductors shall be provided for the grounding of all outdoor lighting circuits including the panels serving them. Grounding conductors for outdoor circuits shall be welded to metallic enclosures or to junction box. Conduits and raceways where terminated at boxes, cabinets and panelboards by means of locknuts and bushings shall be terminated with double locknuts for all voltages. Enclosure panels at which conduits are terminated shall be securely bonded to the frame of the enclosure by means of bonding jumpers or by means of welding in those cases where the panels need not be removable. 2. Where conduits are stubbed up out of the floor into a panel, equipment and related items, with no bottom, grounding bushings shall be used. A ground conductor connecting the bushings to the ground bus in the panel or switchgear shall be 0 ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 5 sized per National Electrical Code. 3. Metallic conduits or raceways shall be utilized as grounding conductors, except as otherwise noted or specified. Non-metallic raceways shall have a separate ground wire. 4. The neutral conductor of any system shall not be utilized as the grounding conductor. 16B - 5 WIRING METHODS A. All wiring for the project shall be run in metal race- ways, supported and anchored in place in an approved manner. All wiring shall be concealed wherever possible. Exposed wiring shall be run at right angles or parallel to the building construction. All exposed wiring shall be coordinated with and approved by the Architect. B. All bends in raceways shall be of the prefabricated type or machine made without kinks. Couplings shall,be pulled up tight to provide a good electrical bond with all joints watertight. Running threads shall not be permitted. Approved unions or Erickson couplings may be used where required. C. Minimum sizes of raceways shall be 3/4". PVC or fiber conduits shall be installed in concrete for underground service. Aluminum raceways will not be permitted. Race- ways shall be kept 6" away from parallel runs of water pipes. Raceways shall be concealed where possible within finished walls, ceilings and floors. D. Exposed raceways, where approved by the Architect, shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members or intersections of vertical planes and ceilings. 0 ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 6 E. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings. Field -made bends and offsets shall be made with an approved hickey or conduit -bending machine. Crushed or deformed race- ways shall not be installed. Trapped raceways in damp and wet locations shall be avoided where possible. Care shall be taken to prevent the lodgment of plaster, dirt or trash in raceways, boxes, fittings and equipment during the course of construction. Clogged raceways shall be entirely free of obstruction or shall be replaced. F. Conduits stubbed up.through concrete floors for connec- tions to free-standing equipment shall be provided with a short elbow and an adjustable brass top or coupling of brass or bronze threaded inside for plugs, set flush _ with the finished floor. Wiring shall be extended in rigid threaded conduit to equipment, except that, where required, threaded flush plugs shall be installed in conduits from which no equipment connections are made. G. All raceways and related fittings and appurtenances in concrete construction shall be approved by the Architect. In general, the following criteria shall be met in the installation of raceways in concrete. When conduits or pipes embedded in slabs are of larger outside diameter than 1" or when they come - closer than i" from either upper or lower surface of the slab, expanded metal orwire mesh shall be laid and extended beyond such conduit or piping at least 8" on all sides. 2. Conduits or pipes shall be spaced not closer than three diameters on centers and they must be so placed as to avoid changing the locations of the reinforcement from that shown on the drawings. 3. No conduits, sleeves or inserts shall be placed in beams or slab bands unless shown on the drawings and/or approved by the Architect. • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 7 4. Except when plans of conduits and pipes are approved by the Architect, embedded pipes or conduits, other than those merely passing through, shall be not larger in outside diameter than on -third (1/3) the thickness of the slab, wall or beam in which they are embedded. H. Raceways shall be securely supported and fastened in place at intervals of not more than 10 feet with pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers or ceiling trapeze. Fastenings shall be by wood screws or screw-type nails to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws, welded threaded studs or spring -tension clamps on steel work. Nail -type nylon anchors or threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in leiu of expansion bolts or machine or wood screws. Threaded C -clamps shall not be used. Raceways or pipe straps shall not be welded to steel structure, Holes cut to a depth of more than 1-1/2" in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth or more than 3/4" in concrete joints shall avoid cutting the main reinforcing bars. Holes not used shall be filled. In suspended ceiling construction, only lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. Conduits shall be fastened to all sheetmetal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where insulating bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, a single locknut and bushing may be used. All conduit clamps and fasteners shall be galvanized or enamel painted for steel raceways and copper clad for copper raceways. J. Lighting, power, telephone and signal -system raceways indicated shall be installed in accordance with the requirements for conduits. • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 8 K. in all instances, where recessed type panelboards are installed, provide a 1" conduit for each three future circuits for which "space" or "spare" provisions have been made in the panelboard. These conduits shall ex- tend between the panelboard cabinet and a convenient location above the ceiling construction. L. Underground secondary electric feeders, and telephone requirements to building shall be installed in separate heavy wall or PVC, galvanized steel conduits, or as indicated on the drawings. M. Conduits shall not be installed in cinder or earth fills unless encased in a minimum 3" - 3000 psi concrete en- velope. N. Separate boxes shall be provided for flush or recessed fixtures when required by the fixture terminal opera- tion temperature, and fixtures shall be readily removable for access to the boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided. Boxes and pendants for surface mounted fixtures or suspended ceilings to be supported independently of the ceiling supports. 0. Boxes shall be provided in the wiring or raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connec- tions and mounting of devices or fixtures. 166 - 6 RACEWAYS A. In general, raceways shall be 3/4" I.D. minimum size for all power and lighting wiring, including control and signal wiring. B. All conduits shall be rigid steel full weight, heavy wall steel pipe in crawlspace, underground and where exposed with a protective coating inside and outside by sherardizing or galvanizing methods. Conduits shall conform to Federal Specification WW -C-581. • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 9 Rigid steel conduit shall be National, Youngstown, Pittsburgh, Triangle Wire and Cable or approved equal. Paint underground steel conduit.s with bituminous mastic coating. A 200 Ib. test nylon fish cable shall be installed in each empty spare raceway. Electrical metallic tubing and intermediate grade rigid steel conduit may be used aboveground in chases and above hung ceilings. Electrical metalic tubing shall conform to the latest edition of Federal Specification WW -C-563. C. Fittings for rigid steel conduit shall be rust -resistant alloy or have rust -resistant finish. Castings shall pro- vide ample wiring space and have smooth round edges and fully threaded hubs. Fittings shall be Crouse -Hinds Appleton, O.Z., or approved equal. "Mogul" type shall be • used for sizes 1-1/2" diameter and larger. The con- nectors and couplings for the EMT shall be raintight and concrete -tight compression type and made of steel with nylon insulated throat equal to Thomas and Betts Series 5123 and 5120 manufacture. D. Locknuts, bushings and other fittings for standard rigid conduit shall be made of steel or malleable iron. Zinc die castings are not acceptable. E. Where rigid conduit is installed in a cabinet, junction box or auxiliary gutter,the conductors shall be pro- tected by an insulating bushing equal to Thomas and Betts, Series 222 manufacture. A locknut, equal to Thomas and Betts, Series 141 manufacture shall be pro- vided both inside and outside the enclosure to which the conduit is attached. F. Where rigid steel conduit is installed in outdoor or indoor locations exposed to continuous or intermittent moisture, connections at enclosures shall provide a liquid -tight seal. Steel or malleable iron "hub" fittings with a recessed sealing neoprene ring and nylon insulated throat, equal to Thomas and Betts, Series 170 manufacture. 0 ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 10 G. All threaded joints are to be thoroughly coated with KOPRSHIELD, a polished collodial copper, equal to Thomas and Betts, Series CP -8 manufacture. H. During construction, all conduit ends and conduit fittings shall be securely closed to foreign elements equal to Thomas and Betts "Push Penn" plugs, Series 1470 manufacture. I. Conduits encased in concrete construction must be carefully coordinated with the Architect and General Contractor. J. Underground galvanized steel conduits shall be painted with asphaltum. K. All empty conduit systems to be finished with "fish cables", for pulling of wires by others. 166 - 7 FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUITS A. Flexible steel conduits, conforming to Federal Specifi- cation WW -C-566, shall be used for motor connections, in lengths not to exceed eighteen (18) inches, and for connections to recessed lighting fixtures as required by the National Electrical Code. For motor connections, conduit shall be arranged to permit movement of•motor to adjust drive tension. B. Conduits shall consist of galvanized steel strip srirally wound, each convolution interlocked with those adjacent. Conduit shall be as manufactured by Triangle Conduit and Cable Corp. or approved equal. C. Flexible steel conduits used in damp or wet locations shall have a polyvinyl sheath. Conduit shall be equal to American Brass "Sealtite". Where the fittings are brought into an enclosure with a knockout, a gasket assembly consisting of an "0" ring and retainer shall be • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 168 Page 11 installed on the outside. Fittings shall have nylon insulated throat, equal to Thomas and Betts, Series 5531 manufacture. D. Provide a separate ground conductor where flexible steel conduit is used. Connectors for flexible metallic conduit shall be the angle wedge "Tite-Bite" with nylon insulated throat, equal to Thomas and Betts Series 3110 and 3130 manufacture. 16B - 8 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Where new conduits cross building expansion joints, Contractor shall provide approved expansion joints placed at right angles to the joint. Joints shall be equal to • Crouse -Hinds, Type XJ (maximum movement as selected). 16B - 9 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. No wire and/or cable shall be installed until construc- tion has progressed to the stage where there will be no possibility of water or foreign matter entering the raceway. Exercise due care during installation to pre- vent damage to the insulation. Use only powdered soap- stone or Underwriters' approved pulling compound to assist in pulling the wire. B. Splicing shall be done in outlet boxes or junction boxes and not in conduits. Solderless pressure connectors, properly taped and wire connectors of insulating material shall be used for all splices where practicahle 2. Splices of #10 wire and smallar shall be made with approved type pressure connectors and spring loaded insulating caps. Splices of #8 wire and larger shall be made with compression type sleeves and installed with a proper tool and then insulated to the same thickness as the original insulation • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 166 Page 12 with an approved type tape having high dielectric strength. 3. Wire connectors of insulating material or solderless pressure connectors properly taped shall be utilized for all splices where possible. 4. Soldered mechanical joint insulated with tape shall not be used. C. Connection to existing primary services shall be as in- dicated on the drawings. D. Conductor identification of branch circuits shall be by color coding. Control circuit conductor identifica- tion shall be made by color -coded insulated conductors, plastic -coated self -sticking printed markers, permanently attached stamped metal foil markers as approved by the Architect. Control conduit terminals of equipment shall be properly identified. E. Terminal and conductor identification shall match that shown on approved shop drawings. Hand lettering or marking is not acceptable. 168 - 10 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS) A. All wire and cable shall be of 98% conductivity copper, single conductor in all sizes. Wire in sizes #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid conductor. Wire in sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. B. All conductors for secondary power and branch circuits shall be type THW National Electrical Code Standard for 600 volts operation and shall comply with the latest standard of the IPCEA. Asbestos covered wire shall be used in areas subject to excessive heat, ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 13 C. Conductors smaller than @12 shall not be used for lighting and power, and no conductors smaller than $14 shall be used for control and signal work. D. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code and as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. E. Wires and cables shall be as manufactured by Triangle, General Electric Co., National or approved equal. 16B - 11 JUNCTION, PULL AND OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet and junction boxes shall be hot dipped galvanized sheet steel and code thickness. Junction and pull boxes • shall be installed where required by the National Electrical Code. B. Outlet boxes shall be not less than 1-1/2" deep, 4" square. Multiple gang boxes shall be not less than 2-1/4" deep. C. Outlet boxes installed underground, exposed to the weather or surface mounted shall be cost aluminum weatherproof type with threaded hubs as required. 16B - 12 DISTRIBUTION, POWER, LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE PANELBOARDS A. General: Panelboards shall be dead -front, equipped with thermal -magnetic molded case, bolt -on circuit breakers of frame, trip ratings, and interrupting capacities, as shown on the panelboard schedule. Panelboards shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest NEMA stan- dards and shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. and bear the UL label. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate locations and dimensions with the drawings. The panelboards shall be recessed or surface mounted depending on location approved by the Architect, • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 14 and shall be in accordance with Underwriters' Labora- tories, Inc. "Standard for Panelboards" and "Standards for Cabinets and Boxes" and shall be so labeled. Panelboards in finished areas to be flush type, unless indicated. Panelboard cabinets shall be located as shown on the drawings and placed approximately 6'-0" from floor to top of cabinet or as directed by the Architect. B. Main bus assembly: Each panelboard main bus, main lugs and/or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Current density shall be in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories,.Inc. requirements. Bus mounting for circuit breakers shall be bolted connections and accommodate any combination of circuit breaker units without further modification. Bus bars for all panelboards shall be sequence phased, - tin-plated copper. C.. Circuit breakers: Ail circuit breaker connectors shall be suitable for the type conductor used and have a current carrying capacity equal to the maximum frame rating of the breaker attached to the connector. All front faces of current breakers shall be flush with each other. All multi -pole breakers shall have quick break toggle mechanisms and shall be trip -free on over- load or short circuit. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by a handle position between the manual OFF and ON position. Ground fault interrupters shall be provided for outdoor receptacle circuits and as in- dicated. D. Cabinets and trim: The gauge of the steel box enclosing the panelboard assembly shall be as specified by Underwriters' Laboratories, In, standards. End walls shall be removable. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. standards. Trims shall be code gauge steel with primer and durable enamel finish. Trims shall be equipped with spring latch and cylinder lock keyed alike. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with two spring latches • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 15 and cylinder locks. Each individual circuit directory shall be clearly numbered on the face of the panelboard and a directory for circuit identification provided. E. Panelboard short circuit rating: The short circuit rating of the panelboard shall be established by short circuit testing in accordance with NEMA Standard PB -1-1971. Refer to the drawings for ratings. F. Refer to the drawings for sizes and types of circuit breakers and panels. Panelboards shall be approved equal to Square D, General Electric Co., or ITE manufacture. G. The Trade in panelboard shall be heavy duty type. The Trade shall be as manufactured by Automatic Switch Co. or approved equal. • 16B - 13 LOCKS AND KEYS A. All locks for panelboard cabinets shall be similarly keyed. 168 - 14 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Electrical circuits shall be protected by molded case circuit breakers. Manufacturers shall be same as for panelboards. B. Each pole of these breakers shall provide inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit protection. C. The breakers shall be operated by a toggle type handle and shall have a quick -make quick -break over -center switching mechanizm that is mechanically trip -free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. Tripping due to overload or short circuit shall be clearly in- dicated by the handle automatically assuming a position • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 168 Page 16 midway between the manual ON and OFF positions. All latch surfaces shall be ground and polished. All poles shall be so constructed that they open, close and trip simultaneously. D. Breakers must be completely enclosed in a molded case. Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible. Contacts shall be of non -welding silver alloy. Arc extinction must be accomplished by means of DE -ION arc chutes, consisting of metal grids mounted in an insulating support. E. The minimum interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the available short circuit at the line terminals as indicated on the drawings. F. Circuit breakers shall be listed with Underwriters` - Laboratories, Inc., conform to the applicable require- ments of NEMA Standards Publication No. AB 1-1969, and meet the appropriate classifications of Federal Specifi- cations W -C -375a. G. Circuit breaker ratings, modifications, etc., shall be as indicated on the drawings. All circuit breakers shall be bolt -on type. H. Molded case circuit breakers shall be of the thermal - magnetic standard. This type shall provide inverse time delay overload and instantaneous short circuit protec- tion by means of a thermal -magnetic element. 166 - 15 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT BREAKER A. Furnish and install in accordance with the National Electrical Code requirements, combination circuit breakers and ground fault interrupters. Pole and rating of the circuit breakers shall be as shown on the drawings. Circuit breakers shall be molded case bolt -on breakers. • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 17 1. 20 amp - medium yellow or red, B. Each breaker pole shall be provided with inverse time delay overload and instantaneous short circuit protec- tion by means of a thermal -magnetic element. The breaker shall be operated by a toggle type handle and shall have a quick -make, quick -break overcenter switch- ing mechanism that is mechanically trip -free from the handle so that contact cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. Line wiring terminals shall be of a box type and suitable for copper. and aluminum wire. C. All units will incorporate a thick film solid state ground fault interrupter circuit insulated and isolated from the breaker mechanism. The unit shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. as a class A, Group 1 device. The circuit breakers and ground fault inter- rupters shall be same manufacture as panelboards. 16B - 16 RECEPTACLES A. Single and duplex receptacles, unless otherwise noted on the drawings shall be rated 20 amperes, 125 volt/ 250 volt, two -pole, three -wire, grounded type NEMA 5-20R. B. Weatherproof receptacles shall be mounted in a box with a gas keted, weatherproof, cast metal coverplate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the coverplate by a short length of bead chain or shall be provided with a spring -hinged flap. C. Outdoor receptacles shall be provided with ground fault protection. • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 18 D. Floor receptacle shall be watertight type complete with flush -in -floor box, screw type brass cover plate, fittings and 20 A., 125V. grounded type duplex receptacle assembly. Floor receptacle shall be equal to Thomas and Betts or approved equal. 16B - 17 SWITCHES A. Wall swtiches shall comply with Federal Specifications W -S -896C and NEMA Standard WD -1. Not more than one switch shall be rated 20 amp, 120 volts for use on al- ternating current only. B. Pilot lights as required shall consist of yoke -mounted candelbrabase sockets rated 7.5 watts, 125 volts, fitted glass or plastic jewels. A clear 6 watt lamp shall be - furnished and installed in each pilot switch. Jewels for use with switches controlling motors shall be green and jewels for other purposes shall be red. C. Times shall be astronomical heavy-duty type. Rating as indicated an the drawings. Timers shall be equal to Tork, Paragon or approved equal type. 16B - 18 DEVICE PLATES A. Plates of the one-piece type shall be stainless steel material and provided for all outlets and fittings to suit the Slater "Medalist Decorator" devices installed. Plates in the unfinished areas and on fittings shall be brush chrome finish or stainless steel having rounded or beveled edges. 166 . 19 SAFETY SWTICHES A. Safety switches shall be quick -make and quick -break, arc quenching, for normal duty. Safety switches for outdoor . ELECTRICAL WORK Section 166 Page 19 use shall be weather-proof type. Safety switches shall be arranged for National Electrical Code cartridge fuses. For motor circuits, safety switches used as'disconnecting devices shall be fuseless and shall be motor rated. Safety switches shall be Square D or approved equal. Provide hasps for locking in ON and OFF positions. 166 - 20 THERMAL OVERLOAD SWITCHES A. Thermal overload switches for fractional horsepower, single phase motors shall consist of an ON and OFF switch combined with a thermal overload device operating on the soldered ratchet principle. Switch shall be in- capable of staying in the closed position under a sus- tained overload and shall be reset by throwing lever to • the OFF position. B. Switch shall have locking attachment. Switch nameplate shall be mounted on a standard switchplate to identify it. Where indicated on the drawings, switch shall be provided with an incandescent pilot light. Switches shall be Allen Bradley Bulletin No. 600, Square D or approved equal. 16B - 21 FUSES A. Fuses shall be provided for each fuse gap and shall be non-renewable type. Provide three (3) sets of spares for each size required. Provide dual element fuses to all motor circuits. Fuses shall be equal to Russman manufacture. 16B - 22 MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS OF OUTLETS A. All mounting heights and locations of all outlets shall be subject to checking with the details of the drawings, with all locations verified and coordinated by the ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 20 Electrical Trade and approved by the Architect before installat on of the electrical work. 166 - 23 EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEMS A. A complete empty conduit system including pull boxes, pull wires, backboxes, finish plates, etc. shall be furnished and installed for the audio-visual, television, telephone, door alarm, and computer systems. All sizes to be as indicated on the drawings. Conduit systems to be as specified in Part 6 and 11 of this specification. B. Audio-visual and T.V. cabling to be installed as speci- fied on plans - final connections by owner. 16B - 24 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. The Electrical Trade. shall furnish and install the raceways, cabinets, backboards, outlet boxes, junction and pull boxes for the telephone as indicated and re- quired. Provide pull wire in all conduits. 168 - 25 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT A. Provide lighting equipment for each outlet as indicated on the Architects drawings, and, fixture schedule. All - lenses, louvers, lamps, hangers, plaster frames, and accessories are to be included. They are to be of the same manufacturer as the fixture installed. B. Where additional brackets or supports are required for support of lighting fixtures, they shall be provided by the Electrical Trade C. Where recessed fixtures are installed in plaster or gypsum board ceilings, the plaster frames must be obtained and placed in position prior to the plastering • ELECTRICAL WORK Section 168 Page 21 of the area. Advise the Contractor of these locations and space requirements at each location in order that structural members be arranged to permit the installation of the fixtures. D. All fluorescent fixtures to be provided with high power factor ballasts which shall be CBM certified and ETL approved, have "A" sound rating and have internal ther- mal protection complying with UL requirements, for class "P" ballasts. Ballast for outdoor use shall be W.P. type and rated for -20°F. E. Where lamps of smaller size than the fixture design wattage are installed, socket extensions shall be in- stalled with the lamps to assure correct positioning of the lamp in reflectors. F. Lamps: Incandescent lamps shall be rated for 130 volts and be of the wattage and type indicated on the fixture schedule. Unless otherwise noted, fluorescent lamps shall be 430 m.a. rapid start type, 4' lamps shall be rated 3100 lumens. All fluorescent lamps shall be "cool white" in color unless otherwise noted. Mercury lamps shall be Deluxe White C.I. Lamps shall be products of General Electric, Westinghouse, or Sylvania only. G. All fixtures to be as specified on lighting fixtures_ schedule on architectural drawings. - H. All lighting fixtures are being specified based on an allowance per fixture. See lighting fixture schedule for fixture types and description. See bid proposal form for amount of allowance. 16B - 26 CLEANING AND TESTING A. The materials, conduits and equipment shall be completely cleaned prior to testing and operating the systems. 0 ELECTRICAL WORK Section 16B Page 22 B. Upon completion of the work and prior to acceptance by the Architect, the Trade shall test all cir- cuits to insure freedom from grounds, proper splicing and insulation values in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code requirements. C. The complete electrical equipment, components and system shall be adjusted for optimum operating conditions. D. The complete electrical system shall be balanced. E. All overload devices shall be set and adjusted to suit load conditions with the load conditions to be deter- mined with suitable instruments by the Electrical Trades. END OF SECTION PROJECT MANUAL I' III 'I I I I I SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA ORANGE COUNTY BOARD OF SUPERVISORS BRUCE NESTANIDE - 3RD DISTRICT, CHAIRMAN ROGER STANTON - tST DISTRICT HARRIET M. WIEDER - 2ND DISTRICT BRUCE B. CLARK -4TH DISTRICT THOMAS F RILEY-5TH DISTRICT E. M. SMITH -ORANGE COUNTY LIBRARIAN SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY COUNCIL LAWRENCE F BUCHHEIM -MAYOR ANTHONY L. BLAND -MAYOR PRO TEM KENNETH E. FREISS GARY L.HAUSDORFER PHILLIP R. SCHWARTZE STEPHEN S. JULIAN -SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY MANAGER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ROBERT LAWSON 312 OCEAN AVE. LAGUNA BEACH. CA 92541 714 494 0775 NAICHAEL GRAVES ARCHITECT PA. 34 WITHERSPOON ST, PRINCETON. N.J. 0940 609.924 6409 I MECHANICAL LANDSCAPE CIVIL ENGINEER ARCHITECT ENGINEER THOMAS A. POLISE WOODWARD DIKE. INC. SOUTH COAST E^IG. 2C WATERSICE 31 -AZA 580 SROACWAY SUITE 2t8 420 N EL CAPAINO '4EAL NEW YORK, NY :CCIO LACUNA BEACH CA, 92651 SAN CLENIENfE. CA 32572 212 683 5530 714 494 7095 714 492 3241 ADDENDUM $2 - San Juan Capistrano Public Library May 25, 1982 Total 22 pages Bidder must acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the B.id Proposal Form in the space provided therefor. This Addendum is issued for the purpose of amending the Contract Documents as noted hereinafter, and is hereby made part of and incorporated in full force as part of the Contract Documents. Unless specified hereafter, all work shall comply with the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Technical Specifications Section 101 Paragraph 2-01.2 Delete hearth extensions from the list of required fireplace components and accessories. Section 5B Paragraph 2-01.2 Replace paragraph with: 2. Except where wall brackets are used, posts shall be mounted on tubes set into concrete, as shown on the drawings. Section 9E Paragraph 1-05.1 Replace paragraph with: Section 16B 1. a. Exterior stucco shall have a maximum of three colors. b. All remaining exterior constructions, including but not limited to wood trim and lattice, metal rails and fittings, and clay pipe shall have a maximum of five colors total. C. Interior drywall surfaces shall vary from one to five colors per room, with a minimum total of five and a maximum total of ten for the entire project. d. Interior trim shall have a maximum of ten colors. e. All color changes on exterior stucco and interior drywall shall occur at corners or at changes of surface plane, or at trim. Add Section 16B-27: 166-27 Motorized Projection Screen Alternate Bid #14. Under the alternate provide a separate circuit for a motorized projection screen with control wiring to two three-way switches. Provide 120V 1P 20 amp disconnect switch for screen motor located on auditorium west wall and wire panel LPA -1 circuit 37 (1P 20A C.B.); extend control wiring in conduit to 3 -way switch at auditorium entrance and projection room. Section 15C-03 Paragraph 10.b Add the following: "Roof curbs for roof top units to be customized roof curb 6" high with high density 2" acoustic liner. Special spring isolator shall be built into top rail of curb. Custom curb shall be as manufactured by Custom Curbs Inc., Chattanooga, Tennesse. The HVAC contractor to furnish and install high density 2" acoustic liner on under- side of roof top unit and top of roof Inside curb." Note: revise Sheet 9 - Drawing 22 to accommodate the above addendum Architectural Drawings Sheet A2 1. Change construction of north walls of toilet rooms #159 and #160 from 2 x 6 stud to staggered 2 x 4 studs on paired 2 x 3 sills with i inch gap. Thickness of wall shall be 51 inches to outside face of stud. Notch bottom of studs for acoustical separation at sill. Provide acoustical insulation and acous- tical sealant as specified in Section 9B.2-01 and 913.3-10. Extend staggered studs and acoustical insulation to roof framing. 2. At door #6, slope the landing at the bottom of the stairs to drain beneath door #5 into the Outdoor Garden. Sheet A4 Drawing 3 1. Correct the east elevation of the audi- torium by deleting two vertical lines to match the elevation as shown on Sheet A3 - Drawing 8. Sheet A8 Drawing 2 1. Replace'3/8 inch moisture proof gypsum board at interior face of concrete block with 1/4 inch of the same material, to match thickness required for flush finish surface. Sheet A9 Drawing 35 1. Splash pans shall be "fabricated of metal" as specified in Section 7A.2-03.1, 12" wide, 24" long, and oriented with the long dimension perpendicular to the adjacent exterior vertical wall. Sheet A13 1. On Lighting Fixture Schedule - Sheet A23 fixture Type R shall be Dynaray emergency lighting model DR 800 as manufactured by Electro Powerpacs Corp., 253 Norfolk St., Cambridge, Mass. 02139, or approved equivalent. Install with 6 -volt battery pack and semi -recessed, according to manufacturer's instructions. Sheet A15 Key 1. The public telephones shall be as manu- factured by Phillips 8 Brooks, Inc., P.O. Box 43, Cumming, Georgia 30130, Tel. 404-887-9901, or approved equivalent; model PB -201 ABR in Room #141, model PB -201 MARTA in Room #167. Install per manufacturer's instructions and set height of coin slot 54" above the finished floor. Sheet A17 Drawing 7 1. On Sheet 17 - Drawing 7, at the Auditorium soffits shown at elevation 13'-0", the cove lights (detail 32/30) shall be - located at the center of the soffits. Sheet A20 Drawings 7,9, 8 11 1. Amend Sheet A20 - Details 7, 9, 11 - as follows: steel tube shall be 10 gauge not 16 gauge. Sheet 21 Replace the alternate fixture schedule with: ternate Bid #9 - Structural Liqhtinq Fixtures EI. Above Type* Fin. Floor** Wattage Model J CLG 180 Progress P3212 K CLG 100 Progress P3210 L 7'-11" 40 Progress P3037 N*** 14'-9" 100 Halo Power Trac L1534 P 8'-6" 100 Halo Power Trac L1534 W**** 15'-9" 100 Halo Power Trac L1534 Q 14'-9" 500 Progress P4436-60 T CLG 75 Progress P3706 V 7'-2" 50 Progress P3037 *Types shown on Lighting Fixture Schedule - Sheet A13, but not shown above, shall be incorporated unchanged into the above schedule. **Verify dimension point on fixture with Architect ***Replace original Type N, 30OW, with three (3) alternate Type N, each 100W, located at the three truss quarter -points. ****Replace original Type W, 20OW, with two (2) alternate Type W, each 100W, located at the two outer truss quarter -points. Sheet A22 1. On the Room Finish Schedule, Room 135 change the floor finish from carpet to quarry tile and provide a control.joint between Room 135 and Room 101, as required. Sheet A23 1. Amend the Door Schedule, follows: Door #16 - hardware Door #20 - hardware Sheet A23 as set #7, not #14 set #7, not #14 Mechanical 8 Electrical Drawings Sheet SU1 1. Provide shut off valves in the sidewalk at the library and auditorium domestic water service entrance points. 2. Provide pressure regulators if pressure of domestic water service line is in excess of 80 lbs. pressure. Sheet P1 1. Slop sink revised to Powers Fiat Model SB -6 24" x 24" with service faucet model 830 -AA, mop hanger model no. 889 -CC, hose and bracket model no. 832 -AA and bumperguard model no 1239 -BB. 2. Water heater revised to model no. 81SV30D 3. .Provide floor cleanout in library toilet core at handicapped water closet for 4" soil. 4. Provide (2) lockshield valves at library toilet womens lav (P.3) and mens lav (P-3) Chicago faucet model no. 952 with vacuum breaker. 5. Provide floor cleanouts in womens and mens auditorium toilets at handicapped water closets. 6. Provide lockshield valves at auditorium toilet womens lav (P -3A) and mens lav (P -3A). Chicago faucet model no. 962 with vacuum breaker. 7. Revise waste piping and vent piping for floor mounted slop sink. 8. Provide floor cleanout at drinking fountains; finish as directed by architect. Sheet P2 1. Provide floor cleanout with carpet flange in workroom 103; finish as directed by architect. 2. Provide wall cleanout at drinking fountains room 142; finish as directed by architect. 3. Revise waste piping and vent piping for floor mounted slop sink. 4. Provide (1) additional cleanout extended to grade in 4" building drain from auditorium located between columns 6 and 7 at column line E. 5. Provide 4" capped waste connection between columns 6 and 7, A and B for connection by fountain water. Sheet P3 1. Delete roof drain 'B' at columns B-1 &B-7. Sheet E1 1. Add three flourescent cove lights in office 111, north wall, wired to circuit LPL -1. 2. Add two flourescent cove lights in display room 142, wired to circuit LPL -17. 3. Add notes to drawing: 1. "For all fixture types and specifica- tions refer to architectural drawing A13, for exact location of all fixtures and devices refer to archi- tectural drawings." 2. "All switches adjacent to each other to be ganged in continuous boxes with single piece cover plates." Sheet E2 1. Telephone outlet indicated in room 150 south wail, east side of room to be indicated as T.V. outlet wired to A.V. cabinet "B". 2. Add additional receptacle in Xerox room 138, centered on west wall wired on individual 120V -20A circuit to panel PP -2 new circuit no. 8.IP 20A circuit breaker. 3. Add notes to drawing: 1. "Where T.V. and receptacles are Indicated furnish and install double gang box with baffle and provide one special continuous cover plate for duplex receptacle and T.V. outlet." Sheet E3 1. Riser diagram. Furnish and install duplex receptacles in weather proof boxes mounted on AC units 1, 2, 2, 4. Receptacles on AC 1, 2, 3 to be wired to panel PP -2 circuit 35 with IP 20A ground fault interruption circuit breaker. receptacle on AC -4 to be wired to panel LPA -1 circui.t 20 with IP 20A ground fault interruption circuit breaker. 2 Riser diagram. grounds on all local codes. Provide user service service equipment as per Drawing M2 1. Auditorium room 158 - Add 2 return air grilles type 4 over storage room doors 162, 163. MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT P.A. 34 MTNERSPCOM 3r, PRINCETON. NJ ossa 009 924 6a9 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY SAN JUAN CAPI3TRANO. CALIFORNIA At]:Z 1 PLEk;UM V ACOUSTIC LINING @ eM, 169 - COe2EG?!ON ?O AlL� MICHAEL' CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CA P I ST RA N O ,�:p, 2 34 SST, PUBLIC LIBRARY PRINCETON. TON. MNi . ODDAO 609 924 9409 I SAM JUAN CAPISTRANO. CAIIQORRIA -_GYQ ►2't{ 12't tZ��urC A!c- hOF�I` ,aGGE55 _ ��;�tl I_ IL�I�Ih�Ef2NP, L �I �1.64'A�10� ^4AL16 I- 8 11 Oil - �,YP. �t7, hOG'riT (YP '3D. IlJhcf, ----- rc��,,5r�2 ; �cc�.5 PaNE� h*YL 3Y ---T.tAiL12t�tt�o� ; ci KIQ4j P-11I1L�o2.\701 �1C� GO, TNG. _ �L�� FI(.L,410tZE GUIGAGtO, ISL. GOGaG `��: ral2 lr3G Iboo tauIVAL- �1 r AT'T'ACH TO FAME I,,!/GTSK.F:: 1-+EAp GYP. EL. 71.111 " hOi%� tT �EG'r10� _hcAl.;; i;2'I � I�•Oli IF% 2�1 YL!GtI�J. AGOLIh. _ —�YZM(� . Ah fZcCQ ±7 - A'f'raGU 'o 14�E•r L. W/ r'LA�� cAJ <jGfZ�4v'S -rbc e%� MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CA P I ST RA N O �. 2 74 MTH(RSPCON ST. PUBLIC LIBRARY J PRINCETON, MJ. odS 609 92, 1A09 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA 102 m� OF h06Flf -k�Gr. B-kltci�E�lE�'fc U�lii �._ ,ti. 107 -. �tnl'YE2, U�If rr ri r I CC i, ✓� , f P // ✓. .._8.'t1l•r�iVl GIV vI I v �'VI 2h� bZ, _hGAL'c ffi}f �-- i",: I A�-i'ERNa•TE �-r4 -[ENETTE pis - SID �7'�"8 MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT P.A. 34 mane Rs POON sr. PRINCETON. NJ. 04W 402 224 $400 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIPORNIA VENT STACK AT GOOF FENETFATIO'� TYF, I MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CA P I ST RA N O 34 mtTfpSPOON]T PUBLIC LIBRARY 5 ORINCITON. Mi. OlSAO !09 92, l�i SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA rL J m x VENT STACK AT GOOF FENETFATIO'� TYF, I MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CA P I ST RA N O 34 mtTfpSPOON]T PUBLIC LIBRARY 5 ORINCITON. Mi. OlSAO !09 92, l�i SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA -4jZ-1. - i0 1 I 0 Z r h w Q =� tP -X 5EE 2O F:NDANT LIGE? T TYFE N -SUPPORT @ TZUZ -7PE `N 51M , 3 =1 OIC MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT P.A. SAN JUAN CA P I ST RA N O 2 34 WITNERSPOON ST PUBLIC LIBRARY PRINCETON, NJ, 06310 609 93A 4109 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA 3" T � i T} � 7-11 I PENDANT LIGHT @ TKU55 -TYPES N 6" =1=0" MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CA P I ST RA N O Ate, 2 34 MTHEP3POCN 3T. PUBLIC LIBRARY PRINCETON, 4J, C9340 409 97A.AC9 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CA61FORNIA x � i T} � 7-11 I PENDANT LIGHT @ TKU55 -TYPES N 6" =1=0" MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CA P I ST RA N O Ate, 2 34 MTHEP3POCN 3T. PUBLIC LIBRARY PRINCETON, 4J, C9340 409 97A.AC9 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CA61FORNIA QW1 d 7 o� FA -;F V W -,Ij- 3 ai x 4 d 7 o� FA -;F V W M � X XN -LL (x r4 [� tr PE,'vG:- WT LJGHT -TYPE Q - 5UPRr--,K7 @ CUFrLA 1AN7, �FN MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CAP 1 ST RA N O UITSr PUBLIC LIBRARY PRINGETONOn. mi. J. OSSAO $09 02, "o SAN JUAN CAY13TRA140. CALIFORNIA II I ----I--E ix5�'2'F.IXor1z'1 IW� Gb11EHF�D SCf?EVvS To , Ei.GK6 THF�I �r,Ru�-ev I-ro �c�rrr �Fix-ft�fz� C�3cW PaIP/4WF �E 51 MICHAEL' CRAVES ARCHITECT P.A. 34 MrHCRSPCON ST. PNINCETON, N, 093A0 609 924 91-09 MET,czwPu IT Z x 1 j�2"i-Box CAv�� F� 1a a 2X10 81LKG THRID � NUT '(Ugh. To =vez > I ZIX 112.x pCT g N� SCIS TO� MJCK5, ESCUTCH=N It LI0,H7 7WE P @ SMPE 1PEP GE1UNG SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY SAN JUAN CAFI3TRANO. CALIFORNIA � wA1''5 HIl�I�.G�2Ar7E LACQUEtZ- :'� LAn.n� w/ - --L{l�Lli'!ZOI� W SZ • 2%O �3A�c d'/A GL, L i U' r';% '7%J C.� ExT L- I�HT Aetf7vE fit , A1)09c55 - 6EE 5H7AS- b W � 8 MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO N RSPOON ,T. PUBLIC LIBRARY 1 O PRINCETOCITO N. NJ. 085.01 409 991 9A09 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA ' �"�nlfT5EAM r nALVAt�TZLD- _11tr 3_. -:F t� - �LCCCIZA_� �- or —bD.1AGVlI' = rUGG�J -_WL,uil NI CQLl1A�f.} _-WU:1 : -- T - - - Y/)"l i I i1L01� "'I�BDLT I 7 I WI.2,E PLAVT 5l1PPOPT @ VINE. RZKE7-5 Tom, MICHAEL' CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. - SAN JUAN CA P I ST R A N O -\J 2 34 MTN!FSVOCN ST, PUBLIC LIBRARY 1 ►RINCETON. NJ. 04510 1 009 921 4109 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO, CALIFORNIA 2 Y LarN �INETI2��L.iS @ vurra7e G-�,�c�N - ��� �� 2-T3 MICHAEL' CRAVES ARCHITECT PA, SAN JUAN CA P I ST R A N O AD. :2 Y MTKePSPCCM ST. PUBLIC LIBRARY ►RINCLTC)p N. NJ, Oe3b 609 914 $409 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALI MANIA 0 ' I � z Jnr w.. w 0 VY MGM .;-ATH VINE MICHAEL' CRAVES ARCHITECT P.A. 34 MTNERSPOON ST. PRINCETON. Ni 09540 !09 924 9409 T1�ELL15 @ OUTLbO�Z G-�•IZp�:.N - SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA : 1 PROJECT MANUAL .SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY 'SAN JDAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA ORANGE COUNTY BOARD OF SUPERVISORS BRUCE NESTANDE - 3RD DISTRICT, CHAIRMAN ROGER STANTON-1ST DISTRICT HARRIET M. WIEDER-2ND DISTRICT BRUCE B. CLARK -4TH DISTRICT THOMAS F RILEY-5TH DISTRICT B. M. SMITH -ORANGE COUNTY LIBRARIAN SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY COUNCIL LAWRENCE F BUCHHEIM -MAYOR ANTHONY L. BLAND -MAYOR PRO TEM KENNETH E. FREISS GARY L. HAUSDORFER PHILLIP R. SCHWARTZE STEPHEN B. JULIAN -SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY MANAGER .STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ROBERT LAWSON 312 OCE AN AVE, LAGUNA tcLACH. CA. 92851 7141494 0776 MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT PA.' 34 WITHERSPOON ST., PRINCETON. N.J. 08540 609-924-6409 MECHANICAL LANDSCAPE CIVIL ENGINEER ARCHITECT ENGINEER THOMAS A. POLISE WOODWARD DIKE. INC. SOUTH COAST ENG. 20WATER;IDE PLAZA SBO BROADWAY, SUITE 216 420 N. EL CAMINO REAL NEW YORK, NY IOOtO LAGUNA BEACH. CA. 92651 SAN CLEMENTE. CA. 92672 mrr, M lull m .SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY 'SAN JDAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA ORANGE COUNTY BOARD OF SUPERVISORS BRUCE NESTANDE - 3RD DISTRICT, CHAIRMAN ROGER STANTON-1ST DISTRICT HARRIET M. WIEDER-2ND DISTRICT BRUCE B. CLARK -4TH DISTRICT THOMAS F RILEY-5TH DISTRICT B. M. SMITH -ORANGE COUNTY LIBRARIAN SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY COUNCIL LAWRENCE F BUCHHEIM -MAYOR ANTHONY L. BLAND -MAYOR PRO TEM KENNETH E. FREISS GARY L. HAUSDORFER PHILLIP R. SCHWARTZE STEPHEN B. JULIAN -SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CITY MANAGER .STRUCTURAL ENGINEER ROBERT LAWSON 312 OCE AN AVE, LAGUNA tcLACH. CA. 92851 7141494 0776 MICHAEL CRAVES ARCHITECT PA.' 34 WITHERSPOON ST., PRINCETON. N.J. 08540 609-924-6409 MECHANICAL LANDSCAPE CIVIL ENGINEER ARCHITECT ENGINEER THOMAS A. POLISE WOODWARD DIKE. INC. SOUTH COAST ENG. 20WATER;IDE PLAZA SBO BROADWAY, SUITE 216 420 N. EL CAMINO REAL NEW YORK, NY IOOtO LAGUNA BEACH. CA. 92651 SAN CLEMENTE. CA. 92672 212,083 5530 '714.494.7095 714,492 3241 c ADDENDUM #3 - San Juan Capistrano Public Library June 1, 1982 Total 3 pages Bidder must acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal Form in the space provided therefor. _This Addendum is issued for the purpose of amending the Contract Documents as noted hereinafter, and is hereby made part of and incorporated in full force as part of the Contract Documents. Unless specified hereafter, all work shall comply with the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. PART I BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS Section 1H Paragraph 1-04.19 Replace paragraph with: 19. The project sign shall be designed sand fabricated by the City of San Juan Capistrano at no cost to the Contractor, and shall be installed by the Contractor in the location shown on Sheet Al. PART II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Section 8C Paragraph 1-03.d(2)(a) Approved equivalent locks will be permitted. Section 10E Paragrapli 2-01.1 Change metal lockers from "Mondrian" style to "Standard" style. Section 10E Paragraph 2-01.3 Replace paragraph with: .3. Lockers shall be triple -tier type, with flat top, louvered for ventila- tion, baked enamel finish, coat hooks on each side and back. Locker shall be 9 inches wide by 15 inches deep by 20 inches high. Section 2D Paragraph 3-04.3 Modify as follows: Construct drainage structures as specified in the "Standard Specifications For Public Works Constru tion, 1979" and the "Standard Plans, Orange Count Environmental Management Agency, 1980." BITUMINOUS PAVING (Addendum 43) SECTION 2C - BITUMINOUS PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1-01. WORK SPECIFIED HEREIN 1. Aggregate Base 2. Asphalt concrete pavement 3. Concrete curb and gutters, sidewalk, driveway and alley approaches and sidewalk access ramps 1-02. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. Rough grading - Section 2B. 2. Storm drainage - Section 2D. 1-03. STANDARDS 1. Unless otherwise specified, materials and workmanship for this work shall conform to the Standard Specifications For Public Works Construction, 1979 Edition, within this section designated as the "Green Book." PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 2-01. AGGREGATE BASE DSATERIAL Aggregate base material shall conform to the requirements of Section 400 of the Green Book and the following supplement. In lieu of the second sentence of Section 200-2.4.1 at least 65 percent, by weight, of the material retained on the No. 4 seive shall be a crushed particle as determined by Test Method No. California 205. Evaluation of gradation and sand equivalent test results shall conform to the provisions of Subsection 400-1.4. The gradation and sand equivalent requirements of Subsections 200-2.2, 200-2.3, 200-2.5 and 200-2.6 shall be the moving average requirements. Individual test requirements for gradation and sand equivalent shall be as determined by the County of Orange EMA-Materials Lab. Placement and compaction of base materials shall conform to Section 301-2 of the Green Book. 2-02. SUBGRADE PREPARATION Subgrade preparation for all improvements shall be done in accordance with Subsection 301-1 of the Green Book and these Special Provisions. The'backfilling and compaction of backfill of voids left by the removal of existing facilities shall be done with native material and shall be included in the work done preparing subgrade. The provisions of Section 301-1.3 of the Green Book shall be modified as follows: Within the width of -the roadway the top six inches of the subgrade material shall be compacted to a minimum relative compaction of 95%. Shoulder areas and the subgrade material upon which curb, gutter, driveway and sidewalk are to be placed' -shall be compacted to a minimum relative compaction of 90%. After compaction and trimming, the subgrade shall be firm, hard -and unyielding. The provisions of Section 211-2 of the Green Book shall be amended as follows: Method 2 shall be used for compaction tests. Weed Killer The provisions of Section 302-5 of the Green Book shall be supplemented by the following: The subgrade of all areas to be surfaced with asphalt concrete over native soil shall be treated with a Polybor Chlorate (or equal) weed killer at the rate of not less than one (1) pound per gallon of water and not. less than four (9) gallons of solution per one hundred (100) square feet. The solution shall be uniformly applied with a power spray and the Contractor shall kill, by pressure injection, any weed growth that appears in the treated area within a year from date of application. The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection to prevent injury to adjacent plant life and property during the application of the weed killer. The Contractor shall also take measures to prevent overspray into areas to be landscaped, where designated on the construction plans. The Contractor shall insure that no weed killer is applied within two (2) feet of any area that is to be landscaped. 2-03. ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Asphalt concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 400 and these special provisions. Coarse aggregate shall consist of material of which at least 75 percent by weight shall be crushed particles in lieu of the requirements of Subsection 400-4.2.3. The viscosity grade of paving asphalt shal be AR -4000 or AR -.8000 as determined by -the Engineer. The exact proportions of aggregate and the amount of asphalt binder for each type of mixture shall be regulated as directed by the Engineer. Normally the asphalt content shall be between 5.8 and 6.0 percent by dry weight of aggregate. . Grading shall be III -B2, III -B3, III -C2, or III -C3 as indicated in the Green Book and determined by the Engineer. The final or surface laver of asphalt concrete shall not be placed until all on-site improvements have been comoletea ,including all grading, and until all unaccenrable concrete work has been removed and replaced unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. The sand equivalent and S -Value requirements of Subsection 400-4.3 shall be the moving average requirements..: Individual test requirements for sand equivalent and S -Value shall be as determined by the EMA-Materials Lab. 2-04. CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTERS, SIDEWALK, DRIVEWAY AND ALLEY APPROACHES, AND SIDEWALK ACCESS RAMPS Concrete items, as described above, shall -be constructed in accordance with Section 303-5 of the Green Book, the applicable OCEMA Standard Details, and as described herein. Slab thick- nesses and curb heights shall be as shown on the Construction Drawings. The last sentence of the second paragraph of Section 303-5.5.2 of the Green Book shall be modified as follows: The name of the Contractor improvement is constructed the completed work. and the year in which the shall not be stamped in Portland cement concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 400 and these special provisions. For 2500 class concrete, a prequalified mix design may be used in accordance with the provisions of ACI 318-71, Section 4.2.2.1, in which f = 2500 psi. The sodium sulphate loss requirement and the gradation X -value submittal required of Section 400-1.3.1 may be waived by the Engineer. The cement type requirement Section 201-1.2.1, shall be Type II or Type V as determined by the Engineer. Type II or Type V cement shall conform to ASTM C 150 and the low alkali requirements of Table lA therein. The Cleanness Value requirement of section 200-1.4 steal be replaced with the following: Tests Test Method No. Requirements Cleanness Value California 227 Individual Test 70 min.* Moving Average 75 Min.* The Sand Equivalent requirement of Section 200-1.5.3 shall be replaced with the following: Tests Test Method No. Requirements Sand Equivalent California 217 Individual Test 70 Min.* Moving Average 75 Min.* * For 2500 or less class concrete, except concrete pavement, a minimum 65 Individual Test Result and a minimum 70 Moving Average will be acceptable if 2500 psi 28 -day strength criteria of Section 201-1.1.4 are met, at a 6 -inch slump or greater. The testing and acceptance determination will be made by the EMA Materials Laboratory. Evaluation of Sand Equivalent and Cleanness Value results shall conform to the provisions of Subsection 400-1.4. Sheet A20 Ora King 35 Attach top of "Bracing" to ceiling joists or blocking with (2) #12 by 3 inch long wood screws, 11-311 between centers. .Attach bottom of "Bracing" to alternate shelf with hardware provided by shelving contractor. Locate "Bracing" as shown on drawing AD.3/1 of this addendum. Lu w >J M O,G. -ScE 20 LVc.5 N,I,G, m.. -m t_OGATIoN of MET, 6HEL.F 40 TOTAL MICHAEL' CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CA P I ST RA N O AD 34 dITNE1IS.00N 3T PUBLIC LIBRARY I � �R WCE fON. NJ OE 5+0 •OV 12, OW/ SAN JUAN CAI13TNANO. CALI:ONNIA woob NOL GoL. FLz, � I& v2 Q4 I cct4 . - FrE3-_- 2 12 WCOp _ ..W.1 -rl4 LHltG- .. I COLU► t. 4,+-4Guofz IF4 wi<Ll. MICHAEL' CRAVES ARCHITECT PA. SAN JUAN CA P I ST R A N O ,.T]T .PUBLIC LIBRARY •AlnCe TonOM NJ,, �. aes.o 409 934.4&00 SAN JUAN CAP3TRANO. CAIIIOANIA AD 3 2 2. K 1 Bid Proposal Form — Page Two (Addendum 3) All cosis attendant are included in this bid. have thorughly examined all documents and the site. This information is adequatelyreflected in the bid. 1 will include the following alternates when authorized by the City of San Juan Capistrano for the sums listed: Alternate I Deduct (S ) Alternate 2 Deduct (S ) Alternate 3 Deduct_ — (S ) Alternate 4 Deduct_ Alternate 5 Deduct_ Alternate 6 Deduct Alternate 7 Add/Deduct, Alternate 8 Add/Deduct Alternate 9 Deduct Alternate 10 Deduct_ Alternate 11 Deduct cS ) Alternate 12 Deduct (S ) Alternate 13 Add (S ) Alternate 14 Add/Deduct (S ) Alternate 15 Add (S ) Alternate 16 Addendum 3 Add/Deduct In submitting this Bid, I agree: I . To hold the bid open until July I, 1982. 2: 7o accept the provisions of the Invitation to bid regarding disposition of the Did Bond. 3. To enter into and execute a'Contract if awarded on the basis of this bid and to furnish all bond and insurance required by the Project Manual. 4. 7o accomplish the work In accordance with the Contract Documents as prepared by Michael Graves, Architect and his consultants. 5. la complete the work within the time alloted by the Invitation to Bid or to pay the liquidated damages accrued until completion. I ALTERNATE N0. 16: w All bidding contractors are requested to submit an alternate bid for rooftop gas/electric air conditioning units in accordance with the following schedule. AC -1 and AC -3 - TRANE #SFCBCIOL AC -2 and AC -4 - TRANE NSFCBCI2L Units shall have all controls and accessories (except electric strip heaters) as originally specified heat pump units. Provide all required gas piping and engineering of gas piping (from meter to units) in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations. Meter location is anticipated to be near the midpoint of the north wall of.the building, above grade. System #f5 shall remain as specified. STATE OF CALIFORNIA ) / ✓J ! r CO COUNTY OF*ORANGE ) ss. CITY OF SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO j I, MARY ANN HANOVER, City Clerk of the City of San Juan Capistrano, California, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the attached is a true and correct copy of an Agenda Item dated February 21, 1984, entitled "Resolution, Notice of Completion and Final Report - Accepting Improvements at San Juan Capistrano Public Library (Newport -Harbor Construction)." =ii— (SEAL) (SEAL) ? MARY ANN,#XNOVER,'CITY CLERK - San Juan,;Capistrano, California Dated: This 26th day of June, 1986. STATE OF CALIFORNIA ) COUNTY OF ORANGE ) as. CITY OF SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO ) I, MARY ANN HANOVER, City Clerk of the City of San Juan Capistrano, California, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the attached is a true and correct copy of the Notice of Completion for the construction of the San Juan Capistrano Public Library (Newport Harbor Construction). (SEAL) MARY ANN NOVER; CITY CLERK San Juan Capistrano, California Dated: This 26th day of June, 1986. v . • STATE OF CALIFORNIA ) COUNTY OF ORANGE ) ss. ) CITY OF SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO ) I, MARY ANN HANOVER, City Clerk of the City of San Juan Capistrano, California, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the attached is a true and correct copy of Resolution No. 84-2-21-4, adopted by the City Council of the City of San Juan Capistrano, California, at a regular meeting thereof held on the 21st day of February, 1984. (SEAL) r+e+nz cava q OVER, CITRK�� San Juan Capistrano, California Dated: This 26th day of June, 1986. Not fi r9 ti STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF ORANGE ) ss. CITY OF SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO I, MARY ANN HANOVER, City Clerk of the City of San Juan Capistrano, California, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the attached is a true and correct copy of Volume 1 of 2, of the Project Manual for the construction of the San Juan Capistrano Public Library. (SEAL) MARY ANN qJ5WOVER, CITY CLERK San Juan pistrano, California Dated: This 26th day of June, 1986. NAME AND ADDRESS OF AGENCY 'C IIP I `111':1 AFFORDING COVERAGES NEWPORT PACIFIC INSURANCE CORP. 3440 IRVINE AVENUE SUITE 250 /- �!,€�" Ia HARTFORD INSURANCE NEWPORT BEACH CA 92660 �`� II 1 -- =nn T ER C Er ILS REPUBLIC INDEMNITY �Zl TAME AND ADDRESS OF INSURED I S ' Id ,I C i , �, I " NEWPORT HARBOR CONSTRUCTION, ' -T R II,M _R C ISI �' I'` ` — _AN — A CORPORATION AND CECIL R. MAYS, AN INDIVIDUAL -T FRN �I.6 3439 VIA LIDO SUITE B NEWPORT BEACH CA 92663 -°T ER" IE.. This is to certify that policies of insurance listed belowhavebeen issuedt( Mains -ltd iiwr c at n•e: 11 ,in orceatthistime. Notwithstanding I, , the policies lea, of any contract or other document with respect to which this certificate r ay to i,;u c r r ay Far I i suranoe afforded by des terms, exclusions and conditions of such policies. Limits Of Llabi COMPANY-__.—_-_lCY ILTTER TY PE OF INSURANCE POLICY NO' GENERAL LIABILITY PROPERTY DAMAGE E1,000, COMPREHENSIVE FORM COMBINED PREMISES—OPERATIONS EXPLOSION AND COLLAPSE $1,000, HAZARD BODILY INJURY E UNDERGROUND HAZARD (EACH PERSON PRODUCTS/COMPLETED A OPERATIONS HAZARD PENDING CONTRACTUAL INSURANCE (EACH ACCIDENT) BROAD FORM PROPERTY 9-16-84 PROPERTY DAMAGE DAMAGE INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS PERSONAL INJURY PROPERTY DAMAGE E1,000, AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ■ COMPREHENSIVE FORM ❑ OWNED A ❑ PENDING HIRED NON OWNED EXCESS LIABILITY B X❑ UMBRELLA FORM PENDING ❑ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA IR — — .I ,ell �N DATE 'C IIP I `111':1 AFFORDING COVERAGES NEWPORT PACIFIC INSURANCE CORP. 3440 IRVINE AVENUE SUITE 250 /- �!,€�" Ia HARTFORD INSURANCE NEWPORT BEACH CA 92660 �`� II 1 -- =nn T ER C Er ILS REPUBLIC INDEMNITY �Zl TAME AND ADDRESS OF INSURED I S ' Id ,I C i , �, I " NEWPORT HARBOR CONSTRUCTION, ' -T R II,M _R C ISI �' I'` ` — _AN — A CORPORATION AND CECIL R. MAYS, AN INDIVIDUAL -T FRN �I.6 3439 VIA LIDO SUITE B NEWPORT BEACH CA 92663 -°T ER" IE.. This is to certify that policies of insurance listed belowhavebeen issuedt( Mains -ltd iiwr c at n•e: 11 ,in orceatthistime. Notwithstanding I, , the policies lea, of any contract or other document with respect to which this certificate r ay to i,;u c r r ay Far I i suranoe afforded by des terms, exclusions and conditions of such policies. Limits Of Llabi COMPANY-__.—_-_lCY ILTTER TY PE OF INSURANCE POLICY NO' GENERAL LIABILITY PROPERTY DAMAGE E1,000, COMPREHENSIVE FORM COMBINED PREMISES—OPERATIONS EXPLOSION AND COLLAPSE $1,000, HAZARD BODILY INJURY E UNDERGROUND HAZARD (EACH PERSON PRODUCTS/COMPLETED A OPERATIONS HAZARD PENDING CONTRACTUAL INSURANCE (EACH ACCIDENT) BROAD FORM PROPERTY 9-16-84 PROPERTY DAMAGE DAMAGE INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS PERSONAL INJURY PROPERTY DAMAGE E1,000, AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ■ COMPREHENSIVE FORM ❑ OWNED A ❑ PENDING HIRED NON OWNED EXCESS LIABILITY B X❑ UMBRELLA FORM PENDING ❑ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS' COMPENSATION A and PENDING EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY OTHER is subiect to BODILY INJURY E 8 PROPERTY DAMAGE $ E AGGREGATE 9-16-84 BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE E1,000, $1,000, COMBINED PERSONAL INJURY $1,000, BODILY INJURY E (EACH PERSON BODILY INJURY $ (EACH ACCIDENT) 9-16-84 PROPERTY DAMAGE E BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE E1,000, BODILY INJURY AND 9-16-84 PROPERTY DAMAGE I s41000, $4,000, COMBINED STATUTORY 9-16-84 8 L�;jl,I 11, V 11m1111■ 1100 010r 0111110 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES ALL OPERATIONS OF THE NAMED INSURED AS SET FORTH IN THE ABOVE STATED POLICIES. IT IS UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED THAT THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER IS ADDED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED, BUT ONLY AS RESPECTS TO WORK PERFORMED BY AND ON BEHALF OF THE NAMED INSURED ON THE FOLLOWING PROJECT: SOUTHEAST CORNER OF ACAJEMA AND CAMINO REAL, SAN JUAN u[ 1 O 11At]LY V Cancellation: Should any of the above described policies Ie cax=_IIEd befo a the expiration date thereof, the issuing com- pany will endeavor to mail 10 cays. Mlri'ten r olice t., the below named certificate holder, but failure to �/J mail such notice shall impose no ob I gation o liab Iil / or ary Ici id upon the company. - ---- NAME AND ADDRESS OF CER nFICATE HOLDEN: CITY OF SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO )ArE 32400 Paseo Adelanto San Juan Capistrano CA 92675 25 I I II �I I � r VIII II NAME AND 1DDRESS OIAGENCY 1 ;C IIP I f l AFFOROIN„ COVERAGES Saddleback Valley Insurance C(!-te: --- ----- — Post Office Office Box 2850 DF %N I Unigard Laguna Hills, Ca. 92653 `r ER— DI =NN Ili _ I ;T E4 — NAME AND 1DORESS Of INSURED {' Select Electric_ 205 Via San Andreas -_- San Clemente, Ca. 92672 R _ I S E? This is to certify that policies of insurance listed below have been issuedti I xeins.I d FI Ix: ATeI ,c � I orceatthistime. Notwithstandingariyrequiremente,tm,=Wition of any contract or other document with respect to which this certificate I sy I u o. r a) pert 1 I I i surance afforded by the policies described herein is subject mall the terms, exclusions and Conditions of such policies. ------- ---- Limits of Liabili in Thousan M000) COMPANY LETTER TV'[OF INSURANCE "OI ICY NUT ER ��„Y _ 11�xJt E AG ,RELATE 0]CEACH URRENCE GENERAL LIABILITY — --- ---_ — -'', jx�Y_i Od - BODILY INJURY $ $ "�L A COMI BE HENSIVE FORM I❑ PREMISES—OPERATIONS PROPERTYDAMAGE $ 3 ExPL)SION AND COLLAPSE MP51 9411 %/27/33-84 HAZARD I❑ - UNDI RGROUND HAZARD PRODUCTS/COMPLETED '.L OPERATIONS HAZARD BODILY INJURY AND L CONTRACTUAL INSURANCE I PROPERTY DAMAGE s 500 3 500 BROAD FORM PROPERTY COMBINED DAMAGE !❑ INDE'ENDENT CONTRACTORS PERSONAL INJURY PERSONAL INJUR” 1100 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY I BODILY INJURY $ ❑ (EACH PERSON) COMPREHENSIVE FORM ❑ BODILY INJURY $ (EACH ACCIDENT) OWN! D ❑HIRED PROPERTY DAMAGE s BODILY INJURY AND NON OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE S COMBINED EXCESS LIABILITY — ❑ UMBRELLA FORM BODILY INJURY AND $ ❑ OTHFR THAN UMBRELLA PROPERTY DAMAGE $ COMBINED FORM WORKERS' COMPENSATION A WC 15 9.157 STATUTORY 7/2'i/83-8 and EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY — $ 100 Ie, -;x ncaov OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES All operations Cancellation: Should any of the above described I olicie: to cancelled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing com- pany wilDCKd(7X,? X)Wimail _10 : Bys w' -it _en notice to the below named certificate holder, KQtX liFZ]ec§ 74�k17tf44�[tR4t4f�e�}�AfA0.�4L.R�JtA�R7� 44 F�3t4i�X44f:ti3iiYc�kT. NAME AND ADDRESS OF CERTIFICATE HOLDER: City of San Juan Capistrano DATE Acagema & Camino Real San Juan Capistrano,Ca. 92675 ACORD 25 00 P +kbl 4 A+lr SAN J R RAVIO 4 y i _ki (J1/q 92673 s ':,hri 1�L17 n February 28, 1984 Bob Lawson 312 Ocean Laguna Beach, California 92651 Dear Bob, We seem to be missing a copy of Change Order #20, the one in which the time was extended to October 31. Could you send us one for our files. Thanks. Sincerely, Pamela Hallan Gibson Senior Administrative Assistant PHG/fwm ! W I'a400 rA'beos�o cCaN�»ci�? SAN JLFA,It,,CAMSTRA�0, CAj- FQ1*]A 92675 .., [ p,RdN E;44 9] 117)' November 2, 1983 Newport Harbor Construction Company 3439 B Via Lido Newport Beach, California 92663 Re: Library Contract Change Order No. 20 Extension of Time Gentlemen: At their meeting of November 1, 1983, the City Council approved Change Order No. 20 for extension of time to October 25, 1983. If you have any questions, please don't hesitate to call. Very truly yours, MARY ANN 1KNOVER, CMC City Clerk MAH/mac cc: City Manager 0 SAN September 21, 1983 Newport Harbor Construction 3439 B Via Lido Newport Beach, California 92663 Gentlemen: 0 92675 Re: Library Contract Change Order No. 15 At their meeting of September 20, 1983, the City Council took action to approve Library Contract Change Order No. 15 in the amount of $8,997.50. The Change Order included a six-day time extension, bringing the completion date to September 28, 1983. If you need additional information, please let us know. Very truly yours, ZMARYANN RANOVER, CMC City Clerk MAH/cj CC: City Manager I 0 (''Cf� /� . �IIlZ fICIGJ? �QJOCGf/Llli2� 32400 PASEO ACELANTO SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA 92675 PHONE 493-1171 September 7, 1983 Newport Harbor Construction 3439 B Via Lido Newport Beach, California 92663 Re: Contract Change Order - San Juan Capistrano T:u-- _.. Gentlemen: At their meeting of September 6, 1983, the City Council approved Contract Change Order No. 14, in the amount of $5,647.67, for additional work and a 2 -day time extension to September 22. If you need additional information, please let me know. MAH/cj cc: City Manager Very truly yours, MARY ANN HANOVER, CMC City Clerk 0 • r. 32400 PA5EO ADELANTO SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. CALIFORNIA 92675 PHONE. 493-1171 August 3, 1983 Newport Harbor Construction 3439 B Via Lido Newport Beach, California 92663 Re: Acjachema Street Improvements - Library Gentlemen: At their meeting of August 2, 1983, the City Council took action to approve the Library Contract Change Orders Nos. 12 and 13, in the total amount of $81,239.89, for Acjachema Street revisions, miscellaneous work and an extension of time to September 30, 1983. If you need additional information, please let us know. Very truly yours, MARY ANN H OVER, CMC City Clerk MAH/cj CC: City Manager �p A ( . i 3400 Pfiglo':pD �,A1Y Y(Ip." 1 sit SAN JLA 215TRAi1p;CAI.IFOAVIA 92675 � "0HXyWJ%4914I I7p October 7, 1983 Newport Harbor Construction 3439 B Via Lido Newport Beach, California 92663 Re: Change Orders 17 and 18, San Gentlemen: At their meeting of October 6, 1983, the City Council took action to approve Change Orders Nos. 17 and 18, in the amount of $6,960.61, for miscellaneous work and a 10 -day time extension to October 8, 1983. If we can be of any further assistance, please do not hesitate to call. Very truly yours, MARY ANNIiANOVER, CMC___ City Clerk MAH/cj CC: City Manager �A<00 PJ�@OAO 6E�pN Tt SAN J",AkCAPISTRA*O, ICALAFp9N7A 92675 VHC$'NIB CSl+117J' October 19, 1983 Newport Harbor Construction 3439 B Via Lido Newport Beach, California 92663 Re: Change Order No. 19 - San Juan Capistrano Library Gentlemen: At their meeting of October 18, 1983, the City Council took action to approve Library Contract Change Order No. 19, extending the Library completion date by five days, to October 13, 1983. If we can be of any further assistance, please do not hesitate to call. Very truly yours, MARY ANN H NOVER, CMC City Clerk MAH/cj cc: City Manager It LI I I c7tc �% T" S CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND EXTE� I 11 1� i �l lil lily • • • • S NAME AND ADDRESS OF AGENCY BUTLER, CHRISTIAN & DUNN, INC. X IIP 1111 i; AFFORDING COVERAGES P. O. BOX 4519 — -_ — COVINA, CA 91723 01 iAN I' , TRANSAMERICA D' rAN SELECT INSURANCE El 1 R NAME AND ADDRESS OF INSURED NEWPORT HARBOR CONSTRUCTION, OIIRF �. A CORPORATION AND CECIL R. MAY:, -- — AN INDIVIDUAL E !RF �• 3439 VIA LIDO, STE B NEWPORT BEACH, CA 92663 El :R +: This is to certify that policies of insurance listed below have been issued f !re fire / ed ta, � ; al tre n. E P force at this time. Notwithstanding any r quirement3 term or condition of any contract or other document with respect to which this certificate rely la sr M la Nit 1 v ,tsurance afforded by the policies described herein is subject to all the terms, exclusions and conditions of such policies. COMPANY LETTER TYPEOF INSURANCE POLICY NL /3ER $ LIABILITY A Lid COMPREHENSIVE FORM lid 1889 488'! PREMISES—OPERATIONS $ BODILY INJURY AND EXPLOSION AND COLLAPSE PROPERTY DAMAGE $ , HAZARD UNDERGROUND HAZARD PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS HAZARD CONTRACTUAL INSURANCE BROAD FORM PROPERTY DAMAGE INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS PERSONAL INJURY AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ❑ COMPREHENSIVE FORM OWNED El HIRED A 1889 4882 NON OWNED EXCESS LIABILITY A F)('I U O (t O U1889 48,D,2 IJ UMBRELLA FORM E] OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKERS' COMPENSATION B and WC 510 9149 EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY OTHER I I ICY Limits of Liabili in Thousan s 00) ` 11' 3N DATE EACH CURRENCE I q(,GREGATE <C BODILY INJURY $ E 7%].6/84 7,' L6/84 — -- -7,' L6/84 7/16/84 NON lmillimmilmillillill PROPERTY DAMAGE $ S BODILY INJURY,AND PROPERTY DAMAGE $ 1,000,$1,000, COMBINED PERSONAL INJURY $1,000, BODILY INJURY $ (EAC H PERSON) BODILY INJURY $ (EACH ACCIDENT) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ BODILY INJURY AND l 0 00 PROPERTY DAMAGE $ , BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE $ 4,000 s4,000, COMBINED STATUTORY $2,000, DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES ALL OPE:RAT [ ONS OF THE, NAMED INSURED AS SET FORTH IN THE ABOVE STA7'EI) POLICIES. IT IS UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED THAT THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER IS ADDED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED, BUT ONLY AS RESPECTS TO WORK PERFORMED BY AND BEHALF THE NAMED INSURE Should any of the above descrel7 poli: e£ br c3r CBI e_-: etore the expiration date thereof, the issuing com- pany will endeavor to mail _l. day! -virlim n Qic� , "3e below named certificate holder, but failure to mail such notice shall impose no o )ligat ( n )r is Til ty, ri ii y Mind upon the company. SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO. NAME AND ADDRESS OF CERTIFICATE HOLDER. LATE CITY OF SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO 32400 Paseo Adelanto San Juan Capistrano, CA 92675 ACORD 25 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE NAME AND WDRESS OF AGENCY o "P AFFORDING COVERAGES BUTLER, CHRISTIAN 3L DUNN, INC. " P. 0. Box 4430 DP IN E1 Monte, California 91734 "' SELECT INSURANCE COMPANY CHICAGO INSURANCE COMPANY y' NAME AND %DDRESS OF INSURED I ER NEWPORT HARBOR CONSTRUCTION aBN 3439 Via Lido T Newport Beach, California 92663 �N _a T ' This is to certify that policies of insurance listed below have been issued to 1 : ins I d a : ,b I 1--c Y orce at this time. Notwithstanding any require of any contract or other document with respect to which this certificate r I/ be ..0 '_ a> -30 a surance afforded by the policies described hel terms, exclusions and conditions of such policies. _ -- -- - _-- - - - Limits of Liabilit in Tt COMPANY GENERAL LIABILITY COMPREHENSIVE FORM PREMISES– OPERAT IONS EXPLOSION AND COLLAPSE A HAZARD GA 509 177 UNDERGROUND HAZARD PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS HAZARD CONTRACTUAL INSURANCE BROAD FORM PROPERTY DAMAGE INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS PERSONAL JURY AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY TY PE OFINSURANCE POLICY NUI I'' -R ! r N PATE EA' COMPREHENSIVE FORM OCCUR NAME AND WDRESS OF AGENCY o "P AFFORDING COVERAGES BUTLER, CHRISTIAN 3L DUNN, INC. " P. 0. Box 4430 DP IN E1 Monte, California 91734 "' SELECT INSURANCE COMPANY CHICAGO INSURANCE COMPANY y' NAME AND %DDRESS OF INSURED I ER NEWPORT HARBOR CONSTRUCTION aBN 3439 Via Lido T Newport Beach, California 92663 �N _a T ' This is to certify that policies of insurance listed below have been issued to 1 : ins I d a : ,b I 1--c Y orce at this time. Notwithstanding any require of any contract or other document with respect to which this certificate r I/ be ..0 '_ a> -30 a surance afforded by the policies described hel terms, exclusions and conditions of such policies. _ -- -- - _-- - - - Limits of Liabilit in Tt COMPANY GENERAL LIABILITY COMPREHENSIVE FORM PREMISES– OPERAT IONS EXPLOSION AND COLLAPSE A HAZARD GA 509 177 UNDERGROUND HAZARD PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS HAZARD CONTRACTUAL INSURANCE BROAD FORM PROPERTY DAMAGE INDEPENDENT CONTRACTORS PERSONAL JURY AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ❑ COMPREHENSIVE FORM A ❑ OWNED GA 509 177 ® HIRED N'O'NOWNED EXCESSLIABILITY ® UMBRELLA FORM B ❑ OTHFR THAN UMBRELLA 55C 002978 FORM WORKERS' COMPENSATION A and WC 510 898" EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY OTHER 1 I 7-16-83 BODILY INJURY I s I s AGGREGATE PROPERTY DAMAGE $ $ BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE $ 1000, s 1,000, COMBINED PERSONAL INJURY $ 11000, - --_ - _--—� _ - --- BODILY INJURY (EACH PERSONi $ BODILY INJURY $ p (EACH ACCIDENT) 7-16-63 PROPERTY DAMAGE $ BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTYDAMAGE $1,000, II 111 I � 11 1 BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE s 4,000, s 4,000, 7_16-83 COMBINED 7-16-83 6i/APINDRIN, (U:H AC( DEMI DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES IT IS UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED THAT THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER IS ADDED AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED, BUT ONLY AS RESPECTS WORK PERFORMED BY AND BEHALF THE NAMED INSURED ON THE FOLLOWING PROJECT: SOUTHEAST CORNER OF ACAJEMA AND CAMINO REAL, SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO Cancellation: Should any of the above des5bbed [ olic I e -anc=lled before the expiration date thereof, the issuing com- pany will endeavor to mail U_ .:3ys -it e I notice tc ne below named certificate holder, but failure to mail such notice shall impose no ob I ;3tic - c li I , it/ of z ny kir d Upon the company. NAME AND ADDRESS OF CERTIFICATE HOLDER CITY OF SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO GATE` 32400 Paseo Adelanto Can Juan Capistrano, California 93675 ;00 X nobh� ACORD 25 if 79) REPCEWNIArVE • � J -L K#�n'� 32400 PASHO AOELANTO' SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO, CALIFORNIA 92675 PHONE; 493+1 1 71 July 20, 1983 Newport Harbor Construction 3439 B Via Lido Newport Beach, California 92663 Re: Contract Change Order No. 9C, San Juan Capistrano Library Gentlemen: At their meeting of July 19, 1983, the City Council took action to approve Contract Change Order No. 9C, in the amount of $8,830.03 and a 16 day time extension in conjunction with the San Juan Capistrano Library. If you need additional information, please let us know. Very truly yours, MARY ANN HANOVER, CMC City Clerk MAH/cj cc: City Manager r a ; 4600 PiVEC'i�s$Ar�s '. SAN JV PtSTRM*0e CA1.LFdF641jk 92675 PHONE4'493.117Y May 18, 1983 Newport Harbor Construction 3439 B Via Lido Newport Beach, Calfiornia 92660 Re: Change Order 11 (San Juan Capistrano Library) Gentlemen: At their meeting of May 17, 1983, the City Council approved Change Order No. 11, an extension of time to June 27, 1983, and compensation for various work. If we can be of any further assistance, please let us know. Very truly yours, MARY ANN HANOVER, CMC City Clerk MAH/cj cc: City Manager i .4 32'400 PA$EO'ADSAj Ap T(X SAN JUAICCAPtSTRAiMO. CA LLFQRNIA 92675 pHbNE 49lA 171' April 20, 1983 Newport Harbor Construction 3439 B Via Lido Newport Beach,_ California 92663 Re: Contract Change Orders - San Juan Capistrano Library Gentlemen: At their meeting of April 19, 1983, the City Council took action to approve Contract Change Order No. 8, in the amount of $4,766.86 and Contract Change Order No. 9, in the amount of $14,373.16, as well as an additional 15-1/2 day time extension to May 21, 1983. If we can be of any further assistance, please let us know. Very truly yours, MARY ANN HANOVER, C14C City Clerk MAH/cj cc: City Manager CALIFORNIA PRELIMINARf NOTICE YOUR ATTENTION IS DIRECTED TO SECTIONS 3 98 AND 3111, CALIFORNIA CIVIL CODE V IN FLA-- FOR LABOR, SERVICES, EQUIPMENT OR MLS FURNISHED, OR TO BE FURNISHED, THE SUBJECT TO MECHANICSLIENS' . (THIS STATEMEN APPLICABLE TO PRIVATE WORK ONLY.: THIS IS NOTA LIEN. THIS IS NOTA REFLECTION ON THE INTEGRITY OF ANY CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR. YOU ARE HEREBY NOTIFIED: THAT THE UNDERSIGNED HAS FURNISHED OR WILL FURNISH LABOR, SERVICES, EQUIPMENT OR MATERIAL OF THE STARR PAINTING 10583 Magnolia Ave. INDIVIDUAL Riverside, CA 92505 OR FIRM (cern (STATE)izl P, BV. (S1GNATUREI THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE PERSON WHO CONTRACTED FOR THE PURCHASE OF SUCH LABOR, SERVICE, EQUIPMENT OR MATERIAL I$ Newport Harbor Construction 3439 Via Lido Newport Beach, CA TO: OR PUBLIC AGENCY SAME AS ABOVE (NEWPORT HARBOR) TO: ORIGINAL CONTRACTOR OR REPUTED CONTRACTOR TO: CONSTRUOION LENDER OR DATE X NONE LISTED •PERTY (WHICH —� 'HAT IF BILLS ARE NOT P >CRIBED HEREONi MAY 410EINEO - 8 2 PAINT( ,DESCRIPTION OF MATER �IJ: 4EN7 5309 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO PUBLIC LIBRARY (ADDRESS OF BUILDING, STRUCTURE, WORK OF IMPROVEMENT( ICITYI ISTATD IZIP, NOTICE TO PROPERTY OWNER If bills are not paid in full for the labor, services, equipment, or mWw- ash furnished or to be furnished, Is mechanics Tien leading to the lou, through court foreclosure proceedings, of all or pan of your property Ging Its improved may G placed against the property even though you have paid your contractor in full. You may wish to protect yourself against this con- sequence by (1) requiring your contractor to furnish a signed release by the person or firm giving you this notice before making payment to your con- tra[for or 12) any other method or device which is appropriate under the [inumitan[es. TRUST FUNDS TO WHICH SUPPLEMENTAL FRINGE BENEFITS ARE PAYABLE NAME ADDRESS NAME ADDRESS NAME ADDRESS MATERIAL MEN NOT REQUIRED TO FURNISH THE ABOVE( NOTICE TO CONSTRUCTION LENDER ONLY ESTIMATED TOTAL PRICE OF THE LABOR, SERVICES, EQUIPMENT OR MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREON. ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF RECEIPT OF PRELIMINARY 20 -DAY NOTICE THIS ACKNOWLEDGES RECEIPT A COPY OF THIS PRELIMINARY 20DAYNOTICE SIGNATURE OF PERSON ACKNOWLEDGING RECEIPT, WITH TITLE, IF ACKNOWLEDGMENT 15 MADE ON BEHALF OF ANOTHER PERSON 5309 DESCRIPTION OF JOB SITE SAN JUAN rpplsh.__ A, 1_ id. .Au LIBRARY PREONFORIM a 45449 POLY PAK (50 SETS) 4P449 w RR c1coroBINDER TO THE CONDITION4, NAME AND ADDRESS OF AGENCY DAN GII *w insa tl m AGEK!r P.O. BCx 3659 Misaian VieJo, CA. 92690 NAME AND MAILING ADDRESS OF INSURED City of $ice JUM '(. istrwo 32400 Pasm Adelanto San Jum CaOStr=D, CA. 92675 Type and Location of Property P R Anil Idws Riad: for 311br'aty Bldg @ D E1 Casino i ACjaebma P E -- - - \ R T t Y F -r-01 COMPANY .sr. PAM Effective 12:01an July 35 1982 Expires$ 12:01 am ❑ Noon 6" 1, 1982 ❑ This binder is issued to extend coverage in the abc company per expiring policy # Coverage/Perils/Forms Amt of Imurarom j Ded. 480,000 L X c Type W,Fnsurance FF;A Coverage/Forms FxhOeeumnca SchedCAed F�m "' ❑Comprehensive Form Premisesfaperatwns � Pro�(u'ctstLompteted Operations 9 Bodily Injury Property Damage $ $ $ $ L I YO tOC actbal O Other (speol below) M ed. Pay. PePe,rson $ AccidentPef O Personal Injury D A, ❑ B ❑ C Bodily Injury & Property Damage Co50,000 Personal Injury 504 �li $ 5W, ow A U ❑ Liability ❑ Non -owned ❑ Hired Limits of Liability Bodily Injury (Each Person) $ T ❑ Comprehensive -Deductible $ Bodily Injury (Each Accident) $ 0 M 0 El ❑ Collision -Deductible $ ❑ Medical Payments $ O Uninsured Motorist $ Property Damage $ Bodily Injury & Property Damage I ❑ No Fault (specify): L ❑Other (specify): Combined $ E ❑ WORKERS' COMPENSATION — Statutory Limits (specify states below) ❑ EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY — Limit $ SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OTHER COVERAGES NAME AND ADDRESS OF ❑ MORTGAGEE ❑ NaT=t Hub= 3439 Viet Lido Nnipcift Bmdh, Ch. Xrm: CBCII, i4iM ACORD 75 (11-77) LOSS PAYEE X)W AWL INSURED LOAN NUMBER of Authorized Representative r-7 ri rill Dan Gorman Insurance Agency This Firm is Independently Owned and Operated 27001 La Paz Road, Suite 254 P.O. Box 3659 Mission Viejo, CA 92690-1659 (714) 7684181 (714) 830-6200 (714) 495-5343 July 19, 1982 Phil Hale City of San Juan Capistrano 32400 Paseo Adelant� San Juan Capistrano, CA. 92675 Dear Phil, Enclosed please find our binder insuring the construction for the new library building. A copy has been sent to the contractor. Please give me a call if you need anything further. Cl/LK Sincerely, TSU/DN GORW INSURANCE hI,Kauker Insurance Svstems Unlimited Our Knowledge Is You: Best Insurance C44L MEMORANDUM TO: All Bidders FROM: Mary Ann Hanover, City Clerk DATE: July 6, 1982 SUBJECT: Award of Contract - Public Library On June 22, 1982, the City Council awarded the contract for construction of the San Juan Capistrano Public Library to Newport Harbor Construction Company at a total cost of $1,479,084. We appreciate your interest in this project and your efforts in compiling the bid information. Very truly yours, MARY ANNO�C City Clerk MAH/na .i 2_ V N tJ N f' n 1 O Jf n q V H LI P N � y �^ •ry O U U� ^ •� N O 6 N L» I O h L^ OV � N ^ I• �. VV N N N d C> N O p P n W o ui� I 6 ti O QR q O a t9 1 r P 1 P P O g q O O^ N s d00 1 3$400 PASEO�ADELA NTO 1 SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO, CALIFORNIA 92675 � PHON E_C 93•117J June 30, 1982 Newport Harbor Construction 3439-B Via Lido Newport Beach, California 92663 Re: "Award of Contract - Public Library Gentlemen: At their meeting of June 22, 1982, the City Council awarded the contract for the construction of the San Juan Capistrano Public Library to your company at $1479,084. Enclosed are two copies of the contract. Please sign and date both contracts and return the "City Copy" to this office along with all required bonds and insurance. The contract documents.are to be executed by your company within 15 days of this notice. I.am enclosing copies of the bond documents that need to be completed by your bonding company and returned. Also enclosed are pages of the bid documents which cite the City's requirements for bond and insurance amounts. These requirements must be met as stated before the contract is effective. If I can be of any help to you, please do not hesitate to call. Thank you for your cooperation. Very truly yours, 6i i (l'C.Ct -1 MARY ANN HANOVER, CMC City Clerk MAH/na Enclosures cc: Director of Community Planning and Development PLANS $ SPECIFICATIONS O F- k 4o rZc 1&(- ,A DATE PLAN NAME ADDRESS PHONE RETURNED # `►�ormad to,IQeics P.O. faux 9 6 S 5-.P5-7,2 5 'h/ e. a. Toxs-tubo SO r— q avl yqt.-8956 rtis, y c 40 1 Pwc I IP.a frnc,-F-nIZLaNO '701 L-Aumo- &ao�'q'1651 VH- HA16 ?cc 5 , 20) a�7-97x1 (c -3- Cay., -ate) C'bti' )Tee(-itonl �11ONi-ANO �4n► �a710CANTiL Sf. 493-5776 �urclsbgd ga,00 � (� aK - 1 t�, r) l r it �r �c yy \NN.ti- c4e NAME RETURNED 1. San Juan Capistrano Library Plan $ S pecifications: ADDRFSS IMral110 DATE PLAN RFTUT?MFn & i Ga 4 �d lam �-sa w��LSj ��J J 4e,74 a 9 �a �Ci1 7111V 2 . California 32136 Miguelite Rd Landscape P.O. Box 1075 661-0611 1 $60 SJC, CA 92693 Montano Plumbing 6710 Cantil St 493-5776 1 $60 Carlsbag, CA 92008 Chadco Dev Co. 2917 W. Warner 557-4830 4 $180 Santa Ana Ca 92704 Lyle Parks Jr. 1091 E Lambert Rd P.O. Box 3147 990-1501 2 $120 La Harbra, CA 90631 Birtcher Pacific 27611 La Paz Rd. 831-8031 8 $300 Contr. Laguna Niguel, Ca PLANS & SPECIFICATIONS • RETURNED NAME ADDRESS PHONE NO. NO. OF PLANS Total & SPEC NOMAD BUILDER P.O. Box 965 496-8956 1 $60 SJC, CA 92693 McFarland Contr. 701 Griffith P1 494-1446 1 $60 Laguna Beach, CA 92651 J. H. Hedrick & Co 22 900 S San Gabriel �W;721 2 $120 San Gabriel 91776 Newport Harbor 3439-B Via Lido 675-2080 6 $240 Contr. Newport Beach, CA 92663 Frank Manwarren 2021 Business 752-8913 1 $60 Contr. Center Dr. Suite 215 Irvine Ca 92715 California 32136 Miguelite Rd Landscape P.O. Box 1075 661-0611 1 $60 SJC, CA 92693 Montano Plumbing 6710 Cantil St 493-5776 1 $60 Carlsbag, CA 92008 Chadco Dev Co. 2917 W. Warner 557-4830 4 $180 Santa Ana Ca 92704 Lyle Parks Jr. 1091 E Lambert Rd P.O. Box 3147 990-1501 2 $120 La Harbra, CA 90631 Birtcher Pacific 27611 La Paz Rd. 831-8031 8 $300 Contr. Laguna Niguel, Ca SAN JLA� at$T7!� 92675 �7 RECEIVED —� SETS OF PLANS AND 4— SETS OF SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO LIBRARY PROJECT FROM i Company Address DATE:--G-- 0 SAN .1pS9 RECEIVED I SETS OF PLANS AND _1_ SETS OF SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO LIBRARY PROJECT FROM _ Company Address4 DATE: I �f r- SAN RECEIVED 1/. SETS OF PLANS AND / SETS OF / '"' , /S (-,, "I. SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO LIBRARY PROJECT FROM Cgmpany Address DATE: I, . ) r ' , i e# SAh AM RECEIVED % SETS OF PLANS AND / SETS OF SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO LIBRARY PROJECT FROM Company Address DATE: /' _ i e# SAn AL RECEIVED +2 SETS OF PLANS AND Cr SETS OF SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO LIBRARY PROJECT FROMQYYr��C\r�s� Company( Ad ress DATE:'% d X� PLA*'APl�SPECIFICATWNS Ft - Tentative Contract Award Date: =H"�O r ` A wed , 71 �a r 1 Q- F() 1r1 r-� A 1' •I J R N G 'lam O i N'F' g,, aJ� � ol`� ( (ti 1 1 UE= Caw _5 fz- 1 Cti rrrrCp Kr -1 E+ New eIP�- �3o�r� 7�6h3 19v1_�r�sa Lran_-,���F►2� ./_7 w. L4 Rr �, Voi Iv'� f r c Vr, f q(14 -!fit 1 6: 71 4-_ V/S i - f -- �'e-i"- ��a.2.E_ �_.. �':F.S UC.�. �'�k.. .'YU f4 __._ _ .---•.- _ _r_— fi :.� f7c 3,-'�-� , cillo fD lIr4- 1prld (x,!z,ty c� PLA Tentative Contract '7 AND SPECIFICATIONS I'M Date: MPRES7 PSE N S17 3 l Hv a- 7CS 3 a - '1 % -� l �_�v�,.�1Ecv-,--T+ar.� �-_[lam kE►�..�� I.1 _.E:�.�'� 7' q 91- S�5 3b 3 �rY, v� �r - v e - Y r✓� U G L� GG Ll 46 Zq3 1,210 6N41 Clee T cL1�� �pc►�ic.__ �.W__f�ez__���_.__. ^%� `fig<_�_. .Z=Zt��i ._7+`��__.__~J_ -tj Son-(9h��e� z�3.=�Si7-_4_2a.I — Ccj rrP I a[37(, l a 3o f�l�e. Gym, s , bio -ygoo 5z 1 C1��,e- �aI Corp CA P- L Sb h NS o-n� i� 6710 C� -77(,o __ yoo - A9b. 00 PLA Tr,ntiti.ve r-- tract Award D HO SPECIFICATIONS f J,,ne- 1q, 19Va Aot 3 NAME 4-761 A2rzow 4wi ONE Seri Ko. 6Ab —A44 S St2irn5 Nc, ry%1°n`FCl4iie. cll?(03eapsso�AddNoIsa,+6/: ty-) s _� f a� F 7 rlun,, — 1v�nu -iP.,a Na. k— SettM-S eA-15&kesl40 bA- I At - .~et 'f 113 CouPJ�alrt 0 COVENANT MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY BID BOND Approved by The Afneriean Institute of Architects, A.I.A. Document No. A•310 1 Feb. 1970 Edition) M KNOWALL MEN BYTHESE PRESENTS, That we,_Cecil B. Mays dba: Newport Harbor Construction as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and the COVENANT MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY, of Hartford, Connecticut, a corporation duly or- ganized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of San Juan Capistrano as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Two hundred thousand & no/100--------------------------- Dollars ($200.000.00 ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for Community Library Bldg. PROVIDED HOWEVER that Covenant Mutual Insurance Company will not execute Performance an Payment bones naming "AD - o be desi Hated" as sti ulated in Supplementary Instruction to Bidders, Article 9, Section 9.4 being vague an unc ear wi respec o the trustee bank and the funding by certificates of participation to finance the work) NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this I Lth day Witness Ounless and until are fulfilled in our underwriting conditions _ all respects.] i ,19 82 Cecil B. Mays dba: Newport Harbor Construction (seal) Principal MIT (/� Title COVENANT MLIJAL INSURANCE�OMPANY �,. Rv�- Arthur J. Clement JR Attorney -in --Fact State of California County of Los Angeles ss. On this 11 th day of June 1982, before me personally came Arthur I Clement, Jr. to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he is Attorney(s)-in-Fact of Covenant Mutual Insurance Company, the Corporation described in and which executed the foregoing instrument; that he know(s) the seal of said Corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by authority granted to him in accordance with the By-Laws of the slidorporation, and that he signed his name OFFICIAL SEAL HARRIET ENTNER 1/OTAkY FUELiC-CALIFORNIA „' ` '; PRINCIPAL OFFICE JN a(Notary Public) LOS ANdELES COUNTY My Commission Expires Apr. 27, 1984 COVENT MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPA# Hartford, Connecticut POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That COVENANT MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation of the State of Connecticut, does hereby make, constitute and appoint Arthur I Clement, Jr. its true and lawful Attorney (s) -in -Fact, with full power and authority, for and on behalf of the Company as surety, to execute and deliver and affix the seal of the Company thereto, if a seal is required, bonds, undertakings, recog- nizances, consents of surety or other written obligations in the nature thereof, as follows: Any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, consents of surety or other written obligations in the nature thereof in an unlimited amount. and to bind COVENANTMUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY thereby, and all of the acts of said Attorney(s) -in-Fact, pursuant to these presents, are hereby ratified and confirmed. This appointment is made under and by authority of the following provisions of section 12 of the by-laws of the Company, which are now in full force and effect: From time to time the board may impose such additional duties and confer such further authority upon any or all of the officers as it may in its discretion determine including, without limitation or characterization, authority to execute by facsimile signature or facsimile signatures, and deliver or cause or authorize any duly appointed agent to deliver in the name and behalf of the corporation any policy, contract, bond, undertaking, consent of surety, recognizance, general or special power of attorney, certification, attestation, or other instru- ment, all with or without the seal of the corporation, but if under seal to evidence such seal by physical im- pression or by facsimile or by any other appropriate method. This power of attorney is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Directors of COVENANT MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY at a meeting duly called and held on March 12, 1973: RESOLVED: That any bond, undertaking, recognizance, consent of surety or written obligation in the nature thereof shall be valid and binding upon the Company when signed by the President or any Senior Vice President or Vice President and duly attested and sealed, if a seal is required, by any Secretary or Assistant Secretary or when signed by the President or any Senior Vice President or Vice President and countersigned and sealed, if a seal is required, by a duly authorized attorney-in-fact or agent; and any such bond, undertaking, recognizance, consent of surety or written obligation in the nature thereof shall be valid and binding upon the Company when duly executed and sealed, if a seal is required, by one or more attorneys -in -fact or agents pursuant to and within the limits of the authority granted by his or their power or powers of attorney. FURTHER RESOLVED: That the signature of any officer authorized by the by-laws and the Company seal may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either given for the execution of any bond, undertaking, recognizance or other written obligation in the nature there- of; such signature and seal, when so used being hereby adopted by the Company as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, COVENANT MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its proper officer and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed this 22nd day of March, 1973. Attest: - Assistant Secretary STATE CF CONNECTICUT u: COUNTY OF HARTFORD COVENANT MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY BY 41 ea _ Vice Presid t 1!t • 7 J .. It- .1641 - o .1J +,! On this 22nd day of March in the year 1973 before me personally came Francis W. Palfrey, Jr., and James E. Witkinsto me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say; that they reside in the State of Connecticut: that may are respectively Vice President and Assistant Secretary of COVENANT MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that they know the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by authority of their office under the by-laws of said corporation, and that they signed theirnamesthereto by like authority. ......... ,. ( 1 t L4- l 7. � liiYtG C !GJ i +:' f ?Y;'MOTA♦} L': Notary Paolle My commission expires March 31, 1979 it•'paLt�•'� e• ••.......• ��etCit�14� CERTIFICATION 1, Vera C. SPitko, Assistant Secretary of COVENANT MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY certify that the foregoing power of attorney, the above -quoted provis;ons of Section 12 of the by-laws and the resolutions of the Board of Directors of March 12, 1973 have not been abridged or revoked and are now in full force and effect. Signed and wale -o at Hartford, Connecticut, this 11 th day of June 19 82 G I, His is YOU K D fl I E., Fl ATJQN,CARDj KE9p DETACH AT PEIRFORAT10 AND F �6 GTATE.bF,'dAUj;ORN-jA,-0 IENTO,�';QNS ER, 0 ' -CPNTR'CT . E RECEIPT NO T Itt KPIRES ON 1,o it k III W "'A Z VJ L iI t�: 4,— 6 Y— It It Z 13L-22 (,REV 4-7q'17 �At FI I) ,Wyou SETS OF PLANS AND 13 _SETS OF SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO LIBRARY PROJECT FROM ii� WPO9t �jpZL�orZ C ,(4. {3C'-13 'U,A L',0o Company Address DATE: %6 k� — YzAdll j � •-+(tITY OF SAN JUAN CAbSTRANO 32401 PASEO AOELAN SAN JUAN CAPI3TRANO CA 92875 4-042808S155 08/44/82 ICS IPMRNCZ CSP $NAB 7144931171 MGM TORN SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO CA 47 �h_A4 r^;1Sp E,$T FRANK MANWARREN CONSTRUCTION CO 2021 BUSINESS CENTER DR SUITE 215 IRVINE CA 92715 ADDENDUM 04 . SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO LIBRARY M1• BID OPENING DATE HAS BEEN EXTENDED TO SolloAP AT PPH. M2, ALL CITY AND WATER FEES WILL BE PAID BY OWNtI,. CITY OF SAN JUAN CAPISTRANO 14115 EST 1 MGMCOMP J, TO REPLY BY MAILGRAM. SEE REVERSE SIDE FOR WESTERN UNION'S TOLL - fR ADDENDUM #4 - San Juan Capistrano Library 1. Bid opening date has been extended to 6-11-82 at 2:00 P.M. 2. All City and water fees will be paid by owner. NEWPORT HARBOR CONSTRUCTION 3439-B Via Lido • Newport Beach, California 92663 714-675-2080 November 8, 1982 Stephen B. Julian, City Manager City of San Juan Capistrano 32400 Paseo Adelanto San Juan Capistrano, California 92675 RE: RELEASE,INDEMNITY AND HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT SALES TAX FOR ORANGE COUNTY PUBLIC LIBRARY PROJECT Gentlemen: Enclosed is a copy of the above release duly executed by Mr. Mays as per your letter request of October 29, 1982. Sincerely, NEWPORT HARBOR CONSTRUCTION By: J y Wi liams :jw Enclosure .•n 0 NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID STATE OF CALIFORNIA ) County of ORANGE ) ss. Cecil Mays d.b.a.Newport Harbor Construcltion , being first duly sworn deposes and says that he is the sole owner of Newport Harbor Construction the party making the foregoing bid; that such bid is not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that such bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or any- one else to put in a sham bid, or that any one shall refrain from bidding.; that said bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication or conference with any one to fix the bid price of said bidder or of any other bid- der, or to fix the bid price of or cost element of such bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of any one inter- ested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in such bid are true; and further, that said bidder has not directly or indirectly, submitted his bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid and will not pay any fee in connection there- with, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof, or to any other individual except to any person or persons as have a partnership or other financial interest with said bidder in this general business. 0 0 ON June 11 . 7987 before me, the undersigned, a Notary Public in and for said State, personally appeared (ecilMavc to be the person whose name ;G subscribed to the within Instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed the same. WITNESS my hand and official seal. Notary Public and for said State. OFFICIAL SFAI LYNN A. ,!AXON NOTARY PUELIC . rALIFORNIA PRINCIPAL OFFICE ;N ORANGE COUNTY My Cammmion Expirn Oct. 22, 1952 PROOF OF PUB*TION (2015.6 C.C.P.) STATE OF CALIFORNIA, County of Orange City of San Clemente I am a citizen of the United States and a resident of the County aforesaid; I am over the age of eighteen years, and not a party to or interested in the above -entitled matter. I am the principal clerk of the printer of the San Clemente Sun -Post st a newspaper of general circulation printed and published---------- ............. .... DAILY to -...................................... sq ------- ....... .... .._..._...... ._ in the City of San Clemente County of Orange, and which newspaper has been 1 adjudged a newspaper of general circulation by the Superior Court of the County of Orange, State of California under the date of March 11, 1460, Case Number A9140; that the notice, of which the annexed is a printed copy (set in type not smaller than nonpareil), has been published in each regular and entire issue of said newspaper and not in any supplement thereof on the following dates, to-wit:..............I..............-.. May?&14 ' ---------------- -.........................- --- all in the year 19...82 I certify (or declare) under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Dated at San Clemente, California, 14thdav of SAN CLEMENTE PUBLISHING CORP. 1542 North El Camino Real - P.O. Box 367 San Clemente, Calif. 92672 - Phone 714-492-5121 This spa o the County Clerk's F ilina Sumo �WyEl) Na d C 14 fW I$? CITY OR SAN JUAN CAPr, -- „C Proof of Publication of INVITATION TO BID ---